Fourth edition
A Practical
English
Grammar
A. J. Thomson
A. V. Martinet
Oxford University Press
A Practical English Grammar
1
Oxford University Press Walton Street, Oxford 0X2 6DP
Oxford New York Toronto
Delhi
Bombay
Calcutta
Madras
Petaling
Jaya
Singapore
Hong Kong
Nairobi
Dar es Salaam
Cape Town
Melbourne
Auckland
Karachi
Tokyo
and associated companies in
Beirut
Berlin
Ibadan
Nicosia
Oxford is a trade mark of Oxford University Press.
ISBN 0 19 431342 5 (paperback)
ISBN 0 19 431347 6 (hardback)
© Oxford University Press 1960, 1969, 1980, 1986
First published 1960 (reprinted seven times)
Second edition 1969 (reprinted ten times)
Third edition 1980 (reprinted eight times)
Fourth edition 1986
Second impression 1986
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, without the prior permission of Oxford University Press.
This book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by way of trade or otherwise, be lent, resold, hired or otherwise circulated without the publisher’s prior consent in any font of binding or cover
other than that in which it is published and without a similar condition including this condition being
imposed on the subsequent purchaser.
Printed in Hong Kong
A Practical English Grammar
2
Preface to the fourth edition
A Practical English Grammar is intended for intermediate and post-intermediate students. We hope
that more advanced learners and teachers will also find it useful.
The book is a comprehensive survey of structures and forms, written in clear modem English and
illustrated with numerous examples. Areas of particular difficulty have been given special attention.
Differences between conversational usage and strict grammatical forms are shown but the emphasis
is on conversational forms.
In the fourth edition the main changes are as follows:
1
Explanations and examples have been brought up to date.
2
There is now more information on countable and uncountable nouns, attributive and predicative
adjectives, adverbs of place, sentence adverbs, cleft sentences, prepositions, conjunctions,
modal verbs, perfect tenses, infinitive constructions, the passive purpose clauses and noun
clauses.
3
Some material has been rearranged to make comparisons easier. For example, parts of
chapters on can, may, must etc. are now grouped by function; verbs of liking and preference
have a chapter to themselves; suggestions and invitations have joined the chapter on
commands, requests and advice.
4
The contents list new summarises every section heading, and there is a new index containing
many more entries and references.
In this edition the sign ‘∼’ is frequently used to denote a change of speaker in examples of dialogue.
Note also that although the sign ‘=‘ sometimes connects two words or expressions with the same
meaning, it is often used more freely, e.g. to indicate a transformation from active to passive or direct
to indirect speech.
We wish to thank all at Oxford University Press who have assisted in the preparation of the fourth
edition. We would also like to thank Professor Egawa of Nihon University, Japan, Professor René
Dirven of Duisburg University, West Germany and other colleagues for their friendly and helpful
suggestions.
London, November 1985
A Practical English Grammar
A.J.T., A.VM.
3
Contents
References are to sections, unless otherwise stated.
1 Articles and one, a little/ a few, this, that page 9
a/an (the indefinite article) 1
Use of a/an 2
Omission of a/an 3
a/an and one 4
a little/a few and little/few 5
the (the definite article) 6
Omission of the 7
Omission of the before home etc. 8
This/these, that/those 9
2 Nouns page 16
Kinds and function 10
Gender 10
Plurals 12
Uncountable nouns 13
Form of possessive case 14
Use of possessive case etc. 15
Compound nouns 16
3 Adjectives page 23
Kinds of adjectives 17
Position of adjectives 18
Order of adjectives of quality 19
Comparison 20
Constructions with comparisons 21
than/as + pronoun + auxiliary 22
the + adjective 23
Adjectives + one/ones etc. 24
many and much 25
Adjectives + infinitives 26
Adjectives + various constructions 27
4 Adverbs page 47
Kinds of adverbs 28
Form and use
Formation of adverbs with Iy 29
Adverbs and adjectives with
the same form 30
Comparative and superlative 31
far, farther/farthest etc. 32
much, more, most 33
Constructions with comparisons 34
Position
Adverbs of manner 35
Adverbs of place 36
Adverbs of time 37
Adverbs of frequency 38
Order of adverbs 39
Sentence adverbs 40
Adverbs of degree 41
A Practical English Grammar
fairly, rather, quite, hardly etc.
fairly and rather 42
quite 43
hardly, scarcely, barely 44
Inversion of the verb
Inversion after certain adverbs 45
5 all, each, every, both, neither, either, some, any,
no, none page 64
all, each, every, everyone etc. 46
both 47
all/both/each + of etc. 48
neither, either 49
some, any, no and none 50
someone, anyone, no one etc. 51
else after someone/anybody etc. 52
another, other etc. with one, some 53
6 Interrogatives: wh-? words and how? page 71
Interrogative adjectives and pronouns 54
Affirmative verb after who etc. 55
who, whom, whose, which, what 56
who, whom, which and what as objects of
prepositions 57
Uses of what 58
which compared with who, what 59
Interrogative adverbs:
why, when, where, how 60
ever after who, what etc. 61
7 Possessive, personal and reflexive pronouns: my,
mine, I, myself etc. page 75
Possessive adjectives and pronouns 62
Agreement and use of possessive adjectives 63
Possessive pronouns replacing possessive
adjectives + nouns 64
Personal pronouns 65
Position of pronoun objects 66
Use of it 67
Indefinite pronouns 68
Use of they/them/their with, neither/either, someone
etc. 69
Reflexive pronouns 70
Emphasizing pronouns 71
8 Relative pronouns and clauses page 81
Defining relative clauses 72
Relative pronouns used in defining clauses 73
Defining clauses: persons 74
Defining clauses: things 75
Cleft sentences 76
Relative clause replaced by infinitive or participle 77
Non-defining relative clauses 78
Non-defining clauses: persons 79
all, both, few, most, several etc. + of whom/which 80
Non-defining clauses: things 81
Connective relative clauses 82
4
Contents
what (relative pronoun) and which (connective
relative) 83
Commas in relative clauses 84
whoever, whichever etc. 85
9 Prepositions page 91
Introduction 86
Alternative position 87
Omission of to and for before indirect objects 88
Use and omission of to with verbs of communication
89
Time and date: at, on, by etc. 90
Time: from, since, for etc. 91
Time: to, till/until, after, afterwards (adverb) 92
Travel and movement: from, to, at, in, by, on, into etc.
93
at in; in, into; on, onto 94
above, over, under etc. 95
Prepositions used with adjectives and participles 96
Verbs and prepositions 97
Gerunds after prepositions 98
Prepositions/adverbs 99
10 introduction to verbs page 105
Classes of verbs 100
Ordinary verbs
Principal parts 101
Active tenses 102
Negatives of tenses 103
Interrogative for questions and requests 104
Negative interrogative 105
Auxiliary verbs
Auxiliaries and modals 106
Forms and patterns 107
Use of auxiliaries in short answers, agreements etc.
In short answers 108
Agreements and disagreements 109
Question tags 110
Comment tags 111
Additions to remarks 112
11 be, have, do page 116
be as an auxiliary verb
Form and use 113
be + infinitive 114
be as an ordinary verb
be to denote existence, be + adjective 115
There is/are/was/were etc. 116
it is and there is compared 117
A Practical English Grammar
Have as an auxiliary verb
Form, and use 118
have + object + past participle 119
had better + bare infinitive 120
have. object + present participle 121
have as an ordinary verb
have meaning ‘possess’ 122
have meaning ‘take’, ‘give’ 123
do
Form 124
do used as an auxiliary 125
do used as an ordinary verb 126
12 may and can for permission and possibility page
128
Permission
may for permission: forms 127
can for permission: forms 128
may and can used for permission in the present or
future 129
could or was/were allowed to for permission in the
past 130
Requests for permission 131
Possibility
May/might for possibility 132
May/might + perfect infinitive 133
could or may/might 134
can for possibility 135
13 can and be able for ability page 134
can and be able: forms 136
Can/am able, could/was able 137
could + perfect infinitive 138
14 ought, should, must, have to, need for obligation
page 137
ought: forms 139
should: forms 140
ought/should compared to must and have to 141
ought/should with the continuous infinitive 142
ought/should with the perfect infinitive 143
must and have to: forms 144
must and have to: difference 145
need not and must not in the present and future 146
need not, must not and must in the present and
future 147
need: forms 148
Absence of obligation 149
need not and other forms 150
must, have to and need in the interrogative 151
needn’t + perfect infinitive 152
Needn’t have (done) and didn’t have/need (to do)
153
needn’t, could and should + perfect infinitive 154
to need meaning ‘require’ 155
5
Contents
15 must, have, will and should for deduction and
assumption page 147
must for deduction 156
must compared to may/might 157
have/had for deduction 158
can't and couldn't used for negative deduction 159
will and should: assumption 160
16 The auxiliaries dare and used page 150
dare 161
used 162
to be/become/get used to 163
17 The present tenses page 153
The present continuous
Form 164
Present participle: spelling 165
Uses 166
Other possible uses 167
Verbs not normally used 168
feel, look, smell and taste 169
see and hear 170
think, assume and expect 171
The simple present tense
Form 172
Used for habitual action 173
Other uses 174
18 The past and perfect tenses page 161
The simple past tense Form 175
Irregular verbs: form 176
Use for past events 177
The past continuous tense
Form 178
Main uses 179
Other uses 180
Past continuous or simple past 181
The present perfect tense
Form and use 182
Use with just 183
Past actions: indefinite time 184
Actions in an incomplete period 185
Actions lasting throughout an incomplete period 186
Use with for and since 187
it is + period + since + past or perfect tense 188
Present perfect and simple past 189
The present perfect continuous tense
Form 190
Use 191
Comparison of the present perfect
simple and continuous 192
Some more examples 193
The past perfect tense
Form and use 194
A Practical English Grammar
In time clauses 195
In indirect speech 196
The past perfect continuous tense Form and use
197
19 The future page 180
Future forms 198
The simple present 199
Future with intention 200
will + infinitive 201
The present continuous 202
The be going to form 203
be going to used for intention 204
be going to and will + infinitive to express intention
205
be going to used for prediction 206
The future simple 207
First person will and shall 208
Uses of the future simple 209
will contrasted with want/wish/would tike 210
The future continuous tense 211
The future continuous used as an ordinary
continuous tense 212
The future continuous used to express future without
intention 213
The future continuous and will + infinitive compared
214
Various future forms 215
The future perfect and the future perfect continuous
216
20 The sequence of tenses page 195
Subordinate clauses 217
The sequence of tenses 218
21 The conditional page 196
The conditional tenses
The present conditional tense 219
The perfect conditional tense 220
Conditional sentences
Conditional sentences type 1 221
Conditional sentences type 2 222
Conditional sentences type 3 223
will/would and should 224
if + were and inversion 225
if, even if, whether, unless, but for, otherwise etc.
226
if and in case 227
if only 228
In indirect speech 229
22 Other uses of will/would, shall/should page 206
Habits expressed by will, would 230
should/would think + that-clause or so/not 231
would for past intention 232
shall I/we? 233
shall: second and third persons 234
that...should 235
it is/was + adjective + that... should 236
Other uses of should 237
6
Contents
23 The infinitive page 212
Form 238
Uses of the infinitive 239
The infinitive as subject 240
As object or complement 241
Verb + how/what etc. + infinitive 242
Infinitive after verb or verb + object 243
Infinitive after verb +• object 244
Infinitive after verbs of knowing and thinking etc. 245
The bare infinitive 246
Infinitive represented by to 247
Split infinitives 248
Infinitive as connective link 249
Infinitive used to replace a relative clause 250
Infinitive after certain nouns 251
After too, enough, so... as 252
Infinitive phrases 253
The continuous infinitive 254
The perfect infinitive 255
Perfect infinitive continuous 256
24 The gerund page 228
Form and use 257
The gerund as subject 258
Gerunds after prepositions 259
The word to 260
Verbs followed by the gerund 261
Verbs + possessive adjective/pronoun object +
gerund 262
The verb mind 263
The perfect gerund 264
The passive gerund 265
25 Infinitive and gerund constructions page 234
Verbs + infinitive or gerund 266
Verbs + infinitive or gerund without change of
meaning 267
regret, remember, forget 268
agree/agree to, mean. propose 269
go on, stop, try. used (to) 270
be afraid (of), be sorry (for) be ashamed (of) 271
26 The participles page 239
Present (or active) participle 272
After verbs of sensation 273
catch, find, leave + object + present participle 274
go, come, spend, waste etc. 275
A present participle phrase replacing a main clause
276
A present participle phrase replacing a subordinate
clause 277
Perfect participle (active) 278
Part participle (passive) and perfect participle
(passive) 279
Misrelated participles 280
A Practical English Grammar
27 Commands, requests, invitations, advice,
suggestions page 245
The imperative for commands 281
Other ways of expressing commands 282
Requests with can/could/may/might I/we 283
Requests with could/will/would you etc. 284
Requests with might 285
Invitations 286
Advice forms 287
Advice with may/might as well + infinitive 288
Suggestions 289
28 The subjunctive page 253
Form 290
Use of the present subjunctive 291
as if etc. + past subjunctive 292
it is time + past subjunctive 293
29 care, like, love, hate, prefer, wish page 255
care and like 294
care, like, love, hate, prefer 295
would like and want 296
would rather/sooner and prefer/would prefer 297
More examples of preference 298
wish, want and would like 299
wish + subject + unreal past 300
wish (that) + subject + would 301
30 The passive voice page 263
Form 302
Active and passive equivalents 303
Uses of the passive 304
Prepositions with passive verbs 305
Infinitive constructions after passive verbs 306
31 Indirect speech page 269
Direct and indirect speech 307
Statements in indirect speech:
tense changes necessary 308
Past tenses 309
Unreal past tenses 310
might, ought to, should, would, used to in indirect
statements 311
could in indirect statements 312
Pronoun and adjective 313
Expressions of time and place 314
Infinitive and gerund 315
say, tell, etc, 316
Questions in indirect speech 317
Questions beginning shall I/we? 318
Questions beginning will you/would you/could
you? 319
Commands, requests, advice 320
Other ways of expressing indirect commands 321
let's, let us, let him/them 322
Exclamations and yes and no 323
Indirect speech: mixed types 324
7
Contents
must and needn't 325
32 Conjunctions page 288
Co-ordinating conjunctions 326
besides, so, still, yet etc. 327
Subordinating conjunctions 328
though/although, in spite of, despite 329
for and because 330
when, while, as to express time 331
as meaning when/while or because/since 332
as, when, while used to mean although, but,
seeing that 333
33 Purpose page 294
Purpose expressed by infinitive 334
Infinitives after go and come 335
Clauses of purpose 336
in case and lest 337
34 Clauses of reason, result, concession,
comparison, time page 298
Reason and result/cause 338
Result with such/so ... that 339
Clauses of concession 340
Clauses of comparison 341
Time clauses 342
35 Noun clauses page 303
Noun clauses as subject 343
that-clauses after certain adjectives/participles 344
that-clauses after nouns 345
Noun clauses as objects 346
so and not representing athat-clause 347
36 Numerals, dates, and weights and measures page
307
Cardinal numbers 348
Points about cardinal numbers 349
Ordinal numbers 350
Points about ordinal numbers 351
Dates 352
Weights, length, liquids 353
37 Spelling rules page 311
Introduction 354
Doubling the consonant 355
Omission of a final e 356
Words ending in ce and ge 357
The suffix ful 358
Words ending in y 359
ie and ei 360
Hyphens 361
38 Phrasal verbs page 315
Introduction 362
Verb + preposition/adverb 363
39 List of irregular verbs page 353
Irregular verbs 364 Index page 359
A Practical English Grammar
8
1
Articles and one, a little/a few, this, that
1
a/an (the indefinite article)
The form a is used before a word beginning with a consonant, or a vowel with a consonant sound:
a man
a had
a university
a European
a one-way street
The form an is used before words beginning with a vowel (a, e, i, o, u) or words beginning with a
mute h:
an apple
an island
an uncle
an egg
an onion
an hour
or individual letters spoken with a vowel sound:
an L-plate
an MP
an SOS
an ‘x’
a/an is the same for all genders:
a man
a woman
an actor
an actress
a table
2
Use of a/an
a/an is used:
A
Before a singular noun which is countable (i.e. of which there is more than one) when it is
mentioned for the first time and represents no particular person or thing:
I need a visa.
They live in a flat.
He bought an ice-cream.
B
Before a singular countable noun which is used as an example of a class of things:
A car must be insured
All cars/Any car must be insured.
A child needs love
All children need/Any child needs love.
C
With a noun complement. This includes names of professions:
It was an earthquake.
She’ll be a dancer.
He is an actor.
D
In certain expressions of quantity:
a lot of
a couple
a great many
a dozen (but one dozen is also possible)
a great deal of
E
With certain numbers:
a hundred a thousand (See 349.)
Before half when half follows a whole number;
1 ½ kilos = one and a half kilos or a kilo and a half
But ½ kg = half a kilo (no a before half), though a + half + noun is sometimes possible:
a half-holiday a half-portion a half-share
With 1/3, ¼, 1/5 etc. a is usual: a third, a quarter etc., but one is also possible. (See 350.)
F
In expressions of price, speed, ratio, etc.:
5p a kilo
£1 a metre
10 p a dozen
four times a day
(Here a/an = per)
G
H
sixty kilometres an hour
In exclamations before singular, countable nouns:
Such a long queue!
What a pretty girl!
Such long queues!
What pretty girls!
(Plural nouns, so no article. See 3.)
a can be placed before Mr/Mrs/Miss + surname:
a Mr Smith a Mrs Smith
a Miss Smith
A Practical English Grammar
But
a Mr Smith
9
means 'a man called Smith' and implies that he is a stranger to the speaker. Mr Smith, without
a, implies that the speaker knows Mr Smith or knows of his existence.
(For the difference between a/an and one, see 4. For a few and a little, see 5.)
3
A
B
C
4
Omission of a/an
a/an is omitted;
Before plural nouns.
a/an has no plural form. So the plural of a dog is dogs, and of an egg is eggs.
Before uncountable nouns (see 13).
Before names of meals, except when these are preceded by an adjective:
We have breakfast at eight.
He gave us a good breakfast.
The article is also used when it is a special meal given to celebrate something or in someone's
honour:
I was invited to dinner (at their house, in the ordinary way) but
I was invited to a dinner given to welcome the new ambassador.
a/an and one
A a/an and one (adjective)
1 When counting or measuring time, distance, weight etc. we can use either a/an or one for the
singular:
£1 = a/one pound £1,000,000 = a/one million pounds (See chapter 36.)
But note that in The rent is £100 a week the a before week is not replaceable by one (see 2 F).
In other types of statement a/an and one are not normally interchangeable, because one + noun
normally means 'one only/not more than one' and a/an does not mean this:
A shotgun is no good. (It is the wrong sort of thing.)
One shotgun is no good. (I need two or three.)
2 Special uses of one
(a) one (adjective/pronoun) used with another/others:
One (boy) wanted to read, another /others wanted to watch TV.
(See 53.)
One day he wanted his lunch early, another day he wanted it late.
(b) one can be used before day/week/month/year/summer/winter etc. or before the name of the
day or month to denote a particular time when something happened:
One night there was a terrible storm.
One winter the snow fell early.
One day a telegram arrived.
(c) one day can also be used to mean 'at some future date':
One day you'll be sorry you treated him so badly.
(Some day would also be possible.)
(For one and you, see 68.)
B a/an and one (pronoun)
one is the .pronoun equivalent of a/an:
Did you get a ticket? ~ Yes, I managed to get one.
The plural of one used in this way is some:
Did you get tickets? ~ Yes, I managed to get some.
5
a little/a few and little/few
A
a little/little (adjectives) are used before uncountable nouns:
a little salt/little salt
a few/few (adjectives) are used before plural nouns:
a few people/few people
All four forms can also be used as pronouns, either alone or with of:
Sugar? ~ A little, please.
Only a few of these are any good.
A Practical English Grammar
10
B
a little, a few (adjectives and pronouns)
a little is a small amount, or what the speaker considers a small amount, a few is a small
number, or what the speaker considers a small number.
only placed before a little/a few emphasises that the number or amount really is small in the
speaker's opinion:
Only a few of our customers have accounts.
But quite placed before a few increases the number considerably:
I have quite a few books on art. (quite a lot of books)
C
little and few (adjectives and pronouns)
little and few denote scarcity or lack and have almost the force of a negative:
There was little time for consultation.
Little is known about the side-effects of this drug.
Few towns have such splendid trees.
This use of little and few is mainly confined to written English (probably because in
conversation little and few might easily be mistaken for a little/a few). In conversation,
therefore, little and few are normally replaced by hardly any. A negative verb + much/many
is also possible:
We saw little = We saw hardly anything/We didn't see much.
Tourists come here but few stay overnight =
Tourists come here but hardly any stay overnight.
But little and few can be used more freely when they are qualified by so, very, too.
extremely, comparatively, relatively etc. fewer (comparative) can also be used more freely.
I'm unwilling to try a drug I know so little about.
They have too many technicians, we have too few.
There are fewer butterflies every year.
D
1
a little/little (adverbs)
a little can be used:
(a) with verbs: It rained a little during the night.
They grumbled a little about having to wait.
(b) with 'unfavourable' adjectives and adverbs:
a little anxious
a little unwillingly
a little annoyed
a little impatiently
(c) with comparative adjectives or adverbs:
The paper should be a little thicker.
Can't you walk a little faster?
rather could replace a little in (b) and can also be used before comparatives (see 42),
though a little is more usual. In colloquial English a bit could be used instead of a little in all
the above examples.
little is used chiefly with better or more in fairly formal style:
His second suggestion was little (= not much) better than his first.
He was little (= not much) more than a child when his father died.
It can also, in formal English, be placed before certain verbs, for example expect, know.
suspect, think:
He little expected to find himself in prison.
He little thought that one day . . .
Note also the adjectives little-known and little-used:
a little-known painter a little-used footpath
2
6
the (the definite article)
A
Form
the is the same for singular and plural and for all genders:
the boy
the girl
the day
the boys the girls the days
Use
The definite article is used:
When the object or group of objects is unique or considered to be unique:
the earth the sea the sky the equator the stars
B
1
A Practical English Grammar
11
2
3
4
5
Before a noun which has become definite as a result of being mentioned a second time:
His car struck a tree; you can still see the mark on the tree.
Before a noun made definite by the addition of a phrase or clause:
the girl in blue
the man with the banner
the boy that I met
the place where I met him
Before a noun which by reason of locality can represent only one particular thing:
Ann is in the garden, (the garden of this house)
Please pass the wine, (the wine on the table)
Similarly: the postman (the one who comes to us), the car (our car), the newspaper (the one
we read).
Before superlatives and first, second etc. used as adjectives or pronouns, and only:
the first (week) the best day the only way
C
the + singular noun can represent a class of animals or things:
The whale is in danger of becoming extinct.
The deep-freeze has made life easier for housewives.
But man, used to represent the human race, has no article:
If oil supplies run out, man may have to fall back on the horse.
the can be used before a member of a certain group of people:
The small shopkeeper is finding life increasingly difficult.
the + singular noun as used above takes a singular verb. The pronoun is he, she or it:
The first-class traveller pays more so he expects some comfort.
D
the + adjective represents a class of persons:
the old = old people in general (see 23)
E
the is used before certain proper names of seas, rivers, groups of islands, chains of
mountains, plural names of countries, deserts, regions:
the Atlantic
the Netherlands
the Thames
the Sahara
the Azores
the Crimea
the Alps
the Riviera
and before certain other names:
the City
the Mall
the Sudan
the Hague
the Strand
the Yemen
the is also used before names consisting of noun + of + noun:
the Bay of Biscay
the Gulf of Mexico
the Cape of Good Hope the United States of America
the is used before names consisting of adjective + noun (provided the adjective is not east,
west etc.):
the Arabian Gulf the New Forest the High Street
the is used before the adjectives east/west etc. + noun in certain names:
the East/West End the East/West Indies
the North/South Pole
but is normally omitted:
South Africa North America West Germany
the, however, is used before east/west etc. when these are nouns:
the north of Spain the West (geographical)
the Middle East
the West (political)
Compare Go north (adverb: in a northerly direction) with He lives in the north (noun: an area
in the north).
F
the is used before other proper names consisting of adjective + noun or noun + of + noun:
the National Gallery the Tower of London
It is also used before names of choirs, orchestras, pop groups etc.:
the Bach Choir the Philadelphia Orchestra the Beatles
and before names of newspapers (The Times) and ships (the Great Britain).
A Practical English Grammar
12
G
the with names of people has a very limited use. the + plural surname can be used to mean
'the . . . family':
the Smiths = Mr and Mrs Smith (and children)
the + singular name + clause/phrase can be used to distinguish one person from another of
the same name:
We have two Mr Smiths. Which do you want? ~ I want the Mr Smith who signed this
letter.
the is used before titles containing of (the Duke of York) but it is not used before other titles
or ranks (Lord Olivier, Captain Cook), though if someone is referred to by title/rank alone the
is used:
The earl expected . . . The captain ordered . . .
Letters written to two or more unmarried sisters jointly may be addressed The Misses +
surname: The Misses Smith.
7
Omission of the
A
The definite article is not used:
1 Before names of places except as shown above, or before names of people.
2 Before abstract nouns except when they are used in a particular sense;
Men fear death but The death a/the Prime Minister left his party without a leader.
3 After a noun in the possessive case, or a possessive adjective:
the boy's uncle = the uncle of the boy It is my (blue) book = The (blue) book is mine.
4 Before names of meals (but see 3 C):
The Scots have porridge/or breakfast but The wedding breakfast was held in
her/other's house.
5 Before names of games: He plays golf.
6 Before parts of the body and articles of clothing, as these normally prefer a possessive
adjective:
Raise your right hand. fie took off his coat.
But notice that sentences of the type:
She seized the child's collar.
I patted his shoulder.
The brick hit John's face.
could be expressed:
She seized the child by the collar.
I patted him on the shoulder.
The brick hit John in the face.
Similarly in the passive:
He was hit on the head. He was cut in the hand.
B
Note that in some European languages the definite article is used before indefinite plural
nouns but that in English the is never used in this way:
Women are expected to like babies, (i.e. women in general)
Big hotels all over the world are very much the same.
If we put the before women in the first example, it would mean that we were referring to a
particular group of women.
C
nature, where it means the spirit creating and motivating the world of plants and animals etc.,
is used without the:
If you interfere with nature you will suffer for it.
8
Omission of the before home, before church, hospital, prison, school etc. and before
work, sea and town
A
home
When home is used alone, i.e. is not preceded or followed by a descriptive word or phrase,
the is omitted:
He is at home.
home used alone can be placed directly after a verb of motion, i.e. it can be treated as an
adverb:
A Practical English Grammar
13
He went home. I arrived home after dark.
But when home is preceded or followed by a descriptive word or phrase it is treated like any
other noun:
They went to their new home.
We arrived at the bride's home.
For some years this was the home of your queen.
A mud hut was the only home he had ever known.
B
bed, church, court, hospital, prison, school/college/university
the is not used before the nouns listed above when these places are
visited or used for their primary purpose. We go:
to bed to sleep or as invalids
to hospital as patients
to church to pray
to prison as prisoners
to court as litigants etc.
to school/college/university to study
Similarly we can be:
in bed, sleeping or resting
in hospital as patients
at church as worshippers
at school etc. as students
in court as witnesses etc.
We can be/get back (or be/get home) from school/college/university.
We can leave school, leave hospital, be released from prison.
When these places are visited or used for other reasons the is necessary:
I went to the church to see the stained glass.
He goes to the prison sometimes to give lectures.
C
sea
We go to sea as sailors. To be at sea = to be on a voyage (as passengers or crew).
But to go to or be at the sea = to go to or be at the seaside. We can also live by/near the sea.
D
work and office
work (= place of work) is used without the:
He's on his way to work. He is at work.
He isn't back from work yet.
Note that at work can also mean 'working'; hard at work = working hard:
He's hard at work on a new picture.
office (= place of work) needs the: He is at/in the office.
To be in office (without the) means to hold an official (usually political) position. To be out of
office = to be no longer in power.
E
town
the can be omitted when speaking of the subject's or speaker's own town:
We go to town sometimes to buy clothes.
We were in town last Monday.
9
this/these, that/those (demonstrative adjectives and pronouns)
A
Used as adjectives, they agree with their nouns in number. They are the only adjectives to do
this.
This beach was quite empty last year.
This exhibition will be open until the end of May.
These people come from that hotel over there.
What does that notice say?
That exhibition closed a month ago.
He was dismissed on the 13th. That night the factory went on fire.
Do you see those birds at the top of the tree?
this/these/that/those + noun + of + yours/hers etc. or Ann's etc. is sometimes, for
emphasis, used instead of your/her etc. + noun:
This diet of mine/My diet isn't having much effect.
That car of Ann 's/Ann's car is always breaking down.
Remarks made with these phrases are usually, though not necessarily always, unfavourable,
B
this/these, that/those used as pronouns:
This is my umbrella. That's yours.
A Practical English Grammar
14
These are the old classrooms. Those are the new ones.
Who's that (man over there)? ~ That's Tom Jones.
After a radio programme:
That was the concerto in C minor by Vivaldi.
this is is possible in introductions:
ANN (to TOM): This is my brother Hugh.
ANN (to HUGH): Hugh, this is Tom Jones.
TELEPHONE CALLER: Good morning. This is/I am Tom Jones . . .
I am is slightly more formal than This is and is more likely to be used when the caller is a
stranger to the other person. The caller's name + here (Tom here) is more informal than This
is. those can be followed by a defining relative clause:
Those who couldn't walk were carried on stretchers.
this/that can represent a previously mentioned noun, phrase or clause:
They're digging up my mad. They do this every summer.
He said I wasn 't a good wife. Wasn 't that a horrible thing to say?
C
this/these, that/those used with one/ones
When there is some idea of comparison or selection, the pronoun one/ones is often placed
after these demonstratives, but it is not essential except when this etc. is followed by an
adjective:
This chair is too low. I'll sit in that (one).
I like this (one) best.
I like this blue one/these blue ones.
A Practical English Grammar
15
2
Nouns
10
Kinds and function
A
There are four kinds of noun in English:
Common nouns: dog. man, table
Proper nouns: France, Madrid, Mrs Smith, Tom
Abstract nouns: beauty, chanty, courage, fear. joy
Collective nouns: crowd, flock, group, swarm, team
B
A noun can function as:
The subject of a verb: Tom arrived.
The complement of the verbs be, become, seem: Tom is an actor.
The object of a verb: I saw Tom.
The object of a preposition: / spoke to Tom.
A noun can also be in the possessive case: Tom's books.
11
Gender
A
Masculine: men, boys and male animals (pronoun he/they).
Feminine: women, girls and female animals (pronoun she/they).
Neuter: inanimate things, animals whose sex we don't know and sometimes babies whose
sex we don't know (pronoun it/they).
Exceptions: ships and sometimes cars and other vehicles when regarded with affection or
respect are considered feminine. Countries when referred to by name are also normally
considered feminine.
The ship struck an iceberg, which tore a huge hole in her side.
Scotland lost many of her bravest men in two great rebellions.
B
1
Masculine/feminine nouns denoting people
Different forms;
(a) boy, girl
gentleman, lady
bachelor, spinster husband, wife
bridegroom, bride man, woman
father, mother
nephew, niece
Main exceptions:
baby
infant
child
parent
cousin
relation
(b) duke, duchess
king, queen
earl, countess
lord, lady
son, daughter
uncle, aunt
widower, widow
relative
spouse
teenager
prince, princess
2
The majority of nouns indicating occupation have the same form:
artist
cook
driver
guide
assistant
dancer
doctor
etc.
Main exceptions:
actor, actress
host, hostess
conductor, conductress manager, manageress
heir, Heiress
steward, stewardess
hero, heroine
waiter, waitress
Also salesman, saleswoman etc., but sometimes -person is used instead of -man, -woman:
salesperson, spokesperson.
C
Domestic animals and many of the larger wild animals have different forms:
bull, cow
duck, drake
ram, ewe
stallion, mare
cock, hen
gander, goose
stag, doe
tiger, tigress
dog, bitch
lion, lioness
Others have the same form.
A Practical English Grammar
16
12
Plurals
A
The plural of a noun is usually made by adding s to the singular:
day, days dog, dogs house, houses
s is pronounced /s/ after a p, k or f sound. Otherwise it is pronounced /z/.
When s is placed after ce, ge, se or ze an extra syllable (/iz/) is added to the spoken word.
Other plural forms
B
Nouns ending in o or ch, sh. ss or x form their plural by adding es:
tomato, tomatoes brush, brushes
box, boxes
church, churches kiss, kisses
But words of foreign origin or abbreviated words ending in o add s only:
dynamo, dynamos kimono, kimonos piano, pianos
kilo, kilos
photo, photos
soprano, sopranos
When es is placed after ch, sh, ss or x an extra syllable (/iz/) is added to the spoken word.
C
Nouns ending in y following a consonant form their plural by dropping the y and adding ies:
baby, babies country, countries fly, flies lady, ladies
Nouns ending in y following a vowel form their plural by adding s:
boy, boys day. days donkey, donkeys guy, guys
D
Twelve nouns ending in f or fe drop the f or fe and add ves. These nouns are calf. half, knife,
leaf. life, loaf, self. sheaf, shelf, thief, wife, wolf:
loaf, loaves wife, wives wolf. wolves etc.
The nouns hoof, scar/and wharf take either s or ves in the plural:
hoofs or hooves scarfs or scarves wharfs or wharves
Other words ending in f or fe add s in the ordinary way:
cliff, cliffs handkerchief, handkerchiefs safe, safes
E
A few nouns form their plural by a vowel change:
foot. feet
louse, lice mouse, mice woman, women
goose, geese man, men tooth, teeth
The plurals of child and ox are children, oxen.
F
Names of certain creatures do not change in the plural.
fish is normally unchanged, fishes exists but is uncommon. Some types of fish do not
normally change in the plural:
carp
pike salmon trout
cod
plaice squid turbot
mackerel
but if used in a plural sense they would take a plural verb. Others add s:
crabs herrings sardines
eels
lobsters sharks
deer and sheep do not change: one sheep, two sheep.
Sportsmen who shoot duck, partridge, pheasant etc. use the same form for singular and
plural. But other people normally add s for the plural: ducks, partridges, pheasants.
The word game. used by sportsmen to mean an animal/animals hunted, is always in the
singular, and takes a singular verb.
G
A few other words don't change:
aircraft, craft (boat/boats) quid (slang for £1}
counsel (barristers working in court)
Some measurements and numbers do not change (see chapter 36).
For uncountable nouns, see 13.
H
Collective nouns, crew, family, team etc.. can take a singular or plurai verb; singular if we
consider the word to mean a single group or unit:
Our team is the best
or plural if we take it to mean a number of individuals:
Our team are wearing their new jerseys.
When a possessive adjective is necessary, a plural verb with their is more usual than a
singular verb with its, though sometimes both are possible:
The Jury is considering its verdict.
A Practical English Grammar
17
The jury are considering their verdict.
I
Certain words are always plural and take a plural verb:
Clothes
police
garments consisting of two parts:
breeches
pants
pyjama
trousers
and tools and instruments consisting of two parts:
binoculars
pliers
scissors
spectacles
glasses
scales
shears
etc.
Also certain other words including:
arms (weapons)
particulars
damages (compensation)
premises/quarters
earnings
riches
goods/wares
savings
greens (vegetables)
spirits (alcohol)
grounds
stairs
outskirts
surroundings
pains (trouble/effort)
valuables
etc.
J
A number words ending in ics, acoustics, athletics, ethics, hysterics. mathematics, physics,
politics etc., which are plural in form, normally take a plural verb:
His mathematics are weak.
But names of sciences can sometimes be considered singular:
Mathematics is an exact science.
K
Words plural in form but singular in meaning include news:
The news is good
certain diseases:
mumps rickets shingles
and certain games:
billiards darts draughts bowls
dominoes
L
Some words which retain their original Greek or Latin forms make their plurals according to
the rules of Greek and Latin:
crisis, crises
phenomenon, phenomena
erratum, errata
radius, radii
memorandum, memoranda
terminus, termini
oasis, oases
But some follow the English rules:
dogma, dogmas
gymnasium, gymnasiums
formula, formulas (though formulae is used by scientists)
Sometimes there are two plural forms with different meanings:
appendix, appendixes or appendices (medical terms)
appendix, appendices (addition/s to a book)
index, indexes (in books), indices (in mathematics)
Musicians usually prefer Italian plural forms for Italian musical terms:
libretto, libretti
tempo, tempi
But s is also possible: librettos, tempos.
Compound nouns
Normally the last word is made plural:
boy-friends break-ins travel agents
But where man and woman is prefixed both parts are made plural:
men drivers women drivers
M
1
2
3
The first word is made plural with compounds formed of verb + er nouns + adverbs:
hangers-on
lookers-on
runners-up
and with compounds composed of noun + preposition + noun:
ladies-in-waiting sisters-in-law wards of court
Initials can be made plural:
MPs (Members of Parliament)
VIPs (very important persons)
OAPs (old age pensioners)
UFOs (unidentified flying objects)
A Practical English Grammar
18
13
Uncountable nouns (also known as non-count nouns or mass nouns)
A1
Names of substances considered generally:
bread
cream
gold
paper
tea
beer
dust
ice
sand
wafer
cloth
gin
jam
soap
wine
coffee
glass
oil
stone
wood
Abstract nouns:
advice
experience
horror
pity
beauty fear
information
relief
courage help
knowledge
suspicion
death
hope
mercy
work
Also considered uncountable in English:
baggage damage luggage shopping
camping furniture parking weather
These, with hair, information, knowledge, news, rubbish, are sometimes countable in other
languages.
2
3
B
Uncountable nouns are always singular and are not used with a/an:
I don't want (any) advice or help. I want (some) information.
He has had no experience in this sort of work.
These nouns are often preceded by some, any, no, a little etc. or by nouns such as bit.
piece, slice etc. + of:
a bit of news
a grain of sand
a pot of jam
a cake of soap
a pane of glass
a sheet of paper
a drop of oil
a piece of advice
C
Many of the nouns in the above groups can be used in a particular sense and are then
countable and can take a/an in the singular. Some examples are given below.
hair (all the hair on one's head) is considered uncountable, but if we consider each hair
separately we say one hair, two hairs etc.:
Her hair is black. Whenever she finds a grey hair she pulls it out.
We drink beer, coffee, gin, but we can ask for a (cup of) coffee, a gin, two gins etc. We drink
out of glasses. We can walk in woods.
experience meaning 'something which happened to someone' is countable:
He had an exciting experience/some exciting experiences
(= adventure/s) last week.
work meaning 'occupation/employment/a job/jobs' is singular:
He is looking/or work/for a job. I do homework.
She does housework.
But roadworks means 'repair of roads'.
works (plural only) can mean 'factory' or 'moving parts of a machine'.
works (usually plural) can be used of literary or musical compositions:
Shakespeare's complete works.
D
E
Some abstract nouns can be used in a particular sense with a/an, but in the singular only:
a help:
My children are a great help to me. A good map would be a help.
a relief:
It was a relief to sit down.
a knowledge + of:
He had a good knowledge of mathematics.
a dislike/dread/hatred/horror/love + of is also possible:
a love of music a hatred of violence
a mercy/pity/shame/wonder can be used with that-clauses introduced by it:
It's a pity you weren't here. It's a shame he wasn't paid.
a fear/fears, a hope/hopes, a suspicion/suspicions
These can be used with that-clauses introduced by there:
There is a fear/There are fears that he has been murdered.
We can also have a suspicion that. . .
A Practical English Grammar
19
Something can arouse a fear/fears, a hope/hopes, a suspicion/suspicions.
14
A
The form of the possessive/genitive case
's is used with singular nouns and plural nouns not ending in s:
a man's job
the people's choice
men's work
the crew's quarters
a woman's intuition
the horse's mouth
the butcher's (shop)
the bull's horns
a child's voice
women's clothes
the children's room
Russia's exports
B
A simple apostrophe (') is used with plural nouns ending in s:
a girls' school
the students' hostel
the eagles' nest
the Smiths' car
Classical names ending in s usually add only the apostrophe:
Pythagoras' Theorem
Archimedes' Law
Sophocles' plays
Other names ending in s can take 's or the apostrophe alone;
Mr Jones's (w Mr Jones' house) Yeats's (or Yeats') poems
With compounds, the last word takes the 's:
my brother-in-law's guitar
Names consisting of several words are treated similarly:
Henry the Eighth's wives the Prince of Wales's helicopter
's can also be used after initials:
the PM's secretary the MP's briefcase the VIP's escort
Note that when the possessive case is used, the article before the person or thing
'possessed' disappears:
the daughter of the politician = the politician's daughter
the intervention of America = America's intervention
the plays of Shakespeare = Shakespeare's plays
C
D
E
15
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
Use of the possessive/genitive case and of + noun
The possessive case is chiefly used of people, countries or animals as shown above- It can
also be used:
Of ships and boats: the ship's bell. the yacht's mast
Of planes, trains, cars and other vehicles, though here the of construction is safer:
a glider's wings or the wings of a glider the train's heating system or the heating system of the
train
In time expressions:
a week's holiday
today's paper
tomorrow's weather
in two years' time ten minutes' break
two hours' delay
a ten-minute break, a two-hour delay are also possible:
We have ten minutes' break/a ten-minute break.
In expressions of money + worth:
£1 's worth of stamps
ten dollars' worth of ice-cream
With for + noun + sake: for heaven's sake, for goodness' sake
In a few expressions such as:
a stone's throw
Journey's end
the water's edge
We can say either a winter's day or a winter day and a summer's day or a summer day, but
we cannot make spring or autumn possessive, except when they are personified: Autumn's
return.
Sometimes certain nouns can be used in the possessive case without the second noun. a/the
baker's/butcher's/chemist's/florist's etc. can mean 'a/the baker's/butcher's etc. shop'. Similarly,
a/the house agent's/travel agent's etc. (office) and the dentist 's/doctor 's/vet 's (surgery):
You can buy it at the chemist's. He's going to the dentist's.
Names of the owners of some businesses can be used similarly:
Sotheby's, Claridge's
Some very well-known shops etc. call themselves by the possessive form and some drop the
apostrophe: Foyles, Harrods.
Names of people can sometimes be used similarly to mean ‘.. . 's house':
We had lunch at Bill's. We met at Ann's.
of + noun is used for possession:
A Practical English Grammar
20
1
2
16
A
1
2
3
B
1
2
3
When the possessor noun is followed by a phrase or clause:
The boys ran about, obeying the directions of a man with a whistle.
I took the advice of a couple I met (in the train and hired a car.
With inanimate 'possessors', except those listed in A above:
the walls of the town the roof of the church the keys of the car
However, it is often possible to replace noun X + of + noun Y by
noun Y + noun X in that order:
the town walls the church roof the car keys
The first noun becomes a sort of adjective and is not made plural:
the roofs of the churches = the church roofs (see 16)
Unfortunately noun + of + noun combinations cannot always be replaced in this way and the
student is advised to use of when in doubt.
Compound nouns
Examples of these:
Noun + noun:
London Transport
Fleet Street
Tower bridge
hall door
traffic warden
petrol tank
hitch-hiker
sky-jacker
river bank
kitchen table
winter clothes
Noun + gerund:
fruit picking
lorry driving
coal-mining
weight-lifting
bird-watching
surf-riding
Gerund + noun:
waiting list
diving-board
driving licence
landing card
dining-room
swimming pool
Some ways in which these combinations can be used:
When the second noun belongs to or is part of the first:
shop window
picture frame
college library
church bell
garden gate
gear lever
But words denoting quantity: lump, part, piece, slice etc. cannot be used in this way:
a piece of cake
a slice of bread
The first noun can indicate the place of the second:
city street
comer shop
country lane
street market
The first noun can indicate the time of the second:
summer holiday
Sunday paper
November fogs
spring flowers
dawn chorus
4
The first noun can state the material of which the second is made:
steel door
rope ladder
gold medal
stone wall
silk shirt
wool and wood are not used here as they have adjective forms: woollen and wooden, gold
has an adjective form golden, but this is used only figuratively;
a golden handshake a golden opportunity
golden hair
The first noun can also state the power/fuel used to operate the second:
Gas fire
petrol engine
oil stow
5
The first word can indicate the purpose of the second:
coffee cup
escape hatch
chess board
reading lamp
skating rink
tin opener
golf club
notice board
football ground
Work areas, such as factory, farm, mine etc., can be preceded by the name of the article
produced:
fish-farm
gold-mine
oil-rig
or the type of work done:
inspection pit
assembly plant
decompression chamber
These combinations are often used of occupations, sports, hobbies and the people who
practise them:
sheep farming
sheep farmer pop singer
wind surfing
water skier
disc jockey
and for competitions:
6
7
A Practical English Grammar
21
8
9
C
1
2
3
football match
tennis tournament
beauty contest car rally
The first noun can show what the second is about or concerned with.
A work of fiction may be a 'detective/murder/mystery/ghost/terror/spy story. We buy
bus/train/plane tickets. We pay fuel/laundry/ milk/telephone bills, entry fees, income tax, car
insurance, water rates, parking fines.
Similarly with committees, departments, talks, conferences etc.:
housing committee,
education department, peace talks
These categories all overlap to some extent. They are not meant to be mutually exclusive, but
aim to give the student some general idea of the uses of these combinations and help with
the stress.
As will be seen from the stress-marks above:
The first word is stressed in noun + gerund and gerund + noun combinations, when there is
an idea of purpose as in B5 above, and in combinations of type B7 and B8 above.
Both words are usually stressed in combinations of types Al. Bl-3 above, but inevitably there
are exceptions.
In place-name combinations both words usually have equal stress:
King's Road
Waterloo Bridge
Leicester Square
But there is one important exception. In combinations where the last word is Street, the word
Street is unstressed:
Bond Street
Oxford Street
3
Adjectives
17
A
Kinds of adjectives
The main kinds are:
(a) Demonstrative: this, that, these, those (see 9)
(b) Distributive: each, every (46); either, neither (49)
(c) Quantitative: some, any, no (50); little/few (5); many, much (25); one, twenty (349)
(d) Interrogative: which, what, whose (54)
(e) Possessive: my, your, his, her, its, our, your, their (62)
(f) Of quality: clever, dry, fat, golden, good, heavy, square (19)
Participles used as adjectives
Both present participles (ing) and past participles (ed) can be used as adjectives. Care must
be taken not to confuse them. Present participle adjectives, amusing, boring, tiring etc., are
active and mean ‘having this effect’. Past participle adjectives, amused, horrified, tired etc.,
are passive and mean 'affected in this way'.
The play was boring. (The audience was bored.)
The work was tiring. (The workers were soon tired.)
The scene was horrifying. (The spectators were horrified.)
an infuriating woman (She made us furious.)
an infuriated woman (Something had made her furious.)
B
C
D
18
A
B
Agreement
Adjectives in English have the same form for singular and plural, masculine and feminine
nouns:
a good boy, good boys
a good girl, good girls
The only exceptions are the demonstrative adjectives this and that, which change to these
and those before plural nouns:
this cat, these cats
that man, those men
Many adjectives/participles can be followed by prepositions: good at, tired of (see 96).
Position of adjectives: attributive and predicative use
Adjectives in groups (a) - (e) above come before their nouns:
this book which boy my dog
Adjectives in this position are called attributive adjectives.
Adjectives of quality, however, can come either before their nouns:
a rich man a happy girl
or after a verb such as (a) be, become, seem:
Tom became rich. Ann seems happy.
or (b) appear, feel, get/grow (= become), keep, look (= appear), make, smelt, sound, taste,
turn:
A Practical English Grammar
22
Tom felt cold. He got/grew impatient.
He made her happy. The idea sounds interesting.
Adjectives in this position are called predicative adjectives. Verbs used in this way are called link
verbs or copulas.
C
Note on link verbs (see also 169)
A problem with verbs in B(b) above is that when they are not used as link verbs they can be modified
by adverbs in the usual way. This confuses the student, who often tries to use adverbs instead
of adjectives after link verbs. Some examples with adjectives and adverbs may help to show
the different uses:
He looked calm (adjective) = He had a calm expression.
He looked calmly (adverb) at the angry crowd, (looked here is a deliberate action.)
She turned pale (adjective) = She became pale.
He turned angrily (adverb) to the man behind him. (turned here is a deliberate action.)
The soup tasted horrible (adjective). (It had a horrible taste.)
He tasted the soup suspiciously (adverb), (tested here is a deliberate action.)
D Some adjectives can be used only attributively or only predicatively, and some change their
meaning when moved from one position to the other.
bad/good, big/small, heavy/light and old, used in such expressions as bad sailor, good
swimmer, big eater, small farmer, heavy drinker, light sleeper, old boy/friend/soldier etc.,
cannot be used predicatively without changing the meaning: a small farmer is a man who has
a small farm, but The farmer is small means that he is a small man physically. Used
otherwise, the above adjectives can be in either position.
(For little, old, young, see also 19 B.) chief, main, principal, sheer, utter come before their
nouns.
frightened may be in either position, but afraid and upset must follow the verb and so must
adrift, afloat, alike (see 21 G), alive, alone, ashamed, asleep.
The meaning of early and late may depend on their position:
an early/a late train means a train scheduled to run early or late in the day. The train is
early/late means that it is before/after its proper time-poor meaning 'without enough money'
can precede the noun or follow the verb.
poor meaning 'unfortunate' must precede the noun.
poor meaning 'weak/inadequate' precedes nouns such as student, worker etc. but when used
with inanimate nouns can be in either position:
He has poor sight. His sight is poor.
E
Use of and
With attributive adjectives and is used chiefly when there are two or more adjectives of colour.
It is then placed before the last of these:
a green and brown carpet a red, white and blue/lag
With predicative adjectives and is placed between the last two:
The day was cold, wet and windy.
19
A
Order of adjectives of quality
Several variations are possible but a fairly usual order is: adjectives of
(a) size (except little; but see C below)
(b) general description (excluding adjectives of personality, emotion etc.)
(c) age, and the adjective little (see B)
(d) shape
(e) colour
(f) material
(g) origin
(h) purpose (these are really gerunds used to form compound nouns: walking stick,
riding boots).
a long sharp knife
a small round bath
new hexagonal coins
blue velvet curtains
an old plastic bucket
an elegant French dock
Adjectives of personality/emotion come after adjectives of physical description, including
dark, fair, pale, but before colours:
a small suspicious official
a long patient queue
a pale anxious girl
a kindly black doctor
an inquisitive brown dog
A Practical English Grammar
23
B
C
D
little, old and young are often used, not to give information, but as part of an adjective-noun
combination. They are then placed next to their nouns:
Your nephew is a nice little boy. That young man drives too fast.
little + old + noun is possible: a little old lady. But little + young is not.
When used to give information, old and young occupy position (c) above:
a young coloured man an old Welsh harp
Adjectives of personality/emotion can precede or follow young/old:
a young ambitious man an ambitious young man
young in the first example carries a stronger stress than young in the second, so the first
order is better if we wish to emphasise the age.
little can be used similarly in position (c):
a handy little calculator an expensive little hotel
a little sandy beach
a little grey foal
But small is usually better than little if we want to emphasise the size. (For little meaning 'a
small amount', see 5.)
fine, lovely, nice, and sometimes beautiful, adjectives of size (except little), shape and
temperature usually express approval of the size etc. If we say a beautiful big room, a lowly
warm house, nice/fine thick steaks we imply that we like big rooms, warm houses and thick
steaks.
fine, lovely and nice can be used similarly with a number of other adjectives:
fine strong coffee a lovely quiet beach a nice dry day
When used predicatively, such pairs are separated by and:
The coffee was fine and strong.
The day was nice and dry.
beautiful is not much used in this sense as a predicative adjective.
pretty followed by another adjective with no comma between them is an adverb of degree
meaning very/quite: She's a pretty tall girl means She is quite/very tall. But a pretty, tall girl or,
more usually, a tall, pretty girl means a girl who is both tall and pretty.
20
Comparison A There are three degrees of comparison:
Positive
Comparative
Superlative
Dark
darker
darkest
Tall
taller
tallest
Useful
more useful
most useful
B
One-syllable adjectives form their comparative and superlative by adding er and est to the
positive form:
bright brighter brightest
Adjectives ending in e add r and st:
brave braver bravest
C
Adjectives of three or more syllables form their comparative and superlative by putting more
and most before the positive:
interested
more interested
most interested
frightening more frightening most frightening
D
Adjectives of two syllables follow one or other of the above rules. Those ending in ful or re
usually take more and most:
doubtful more doubtful most doubtful
obscure more obscure most obscure
Those ending in er, y or ly usually add er, eat:
clever cleverer cleverest
pretty prettier prettiest (note that the y becomes i)
silly
sillier
silliest
E
Irregular comparisons:
bad
worse
worst
far
farther farthest (of distance only)
further furthest (used more widely; see F, G)
good
better
best
little
less
least
many/much more
most
old
eider
eldest (of people only)
older
oldest (of people and things)
A Practical English Grammar
24
F
farther/farthest and further/furthest
Both forms can be used of distances:
York is farther/further than Lincoln or Selby.
York is the farthest/furthest town or
York is the farthest/furthest of' the three.
(In the last sentence farthest./furthest are pronouns. See 24 B.)
further can also be used, mainly with abstract nouns, to mean 'additional/extra':
Further supplies will soon be available.
Further discussion/debate would be pointless.
Similarly: further enquiries/delays/demands/information/instructions etc. furthest can be used
similarly, with abstract nouns;
This was the furthest point they reached in their discussion.
This was the furthest concession he would make. (For adverb use, see 32.)
G
far (used for distance) and near
In the comparative and superlative both can be used quite freely:
the farthest/furthest mountain the nearest river
But in the positive form they have a limited use, far and near are used chiefly with bank, end,
side, wall etc.:
the far bank (the bank on the other side)
the near bank (the bank on this side of the river)
near can also be used with east, and far with north, south, east and west.
With other nouns far is usually replaced by distant/remote and near by nearby/neighbouring:
a remote island, the neighbouring village. For far (adverb), see 32; for near (adverb or
preposition), see 30 C.
H
elder, eldest; older, oldest
elder, eldest imply seniority rather than age. They are chiefly used for comparisons within a
family: my elder brother, her eldest boy/girl;
but elder is not used with than, so older is necessary here:
He is older than I am. (elder would not be possible.)
In colloquial English eldest, oldest and youngest are often used of only two
boys/girls/children etc.:
His eldest boy's at school; the other is still at home.
This is particularly common when eldest, oldest are used as pronouns:
Tom is the eldest (of the two) (See 24 B.)
21
A
B
C
Constructions with comparisons (see also 341)
With the positive form of the adjective, we use as ... as in the affirmative and not as/not so ...
as in the negative:
A boy of sixteen is often as tall as his/other.
He was as white as a sheet.
Manslaughter is not as/so bad as murder.
Your coffee is not as/so good as the coffee my mother makes.
With the comparative we use than:
The new tower blocks are much higher than the old buildings.
He makes/ewer mistakes than you (do).
He is stronger than I expected = I didn't expect him to be so strong.
If was more expensive than I thought = I didn't think it would be so expensive.
When than ... is omitted, it is very common in colloquial English to use a superlative instead
of a comparative: This is the best way could be said when there are only two ways. (See
comparatives, superlatives used as pronouns, 24 B.)
Comparison of three or more people/things is expressed by the superlative with the . . . in/of:
This is the oldest theatre in London.
The youngest of the family was the most successful.
A relative clause is useful especially with a perfect tense:
It/This is the best beer (that) I have ever drunk.
It/This was the worst film (that) he had ever seen.
He is the kindest man (that) I have ever met.
It was the most worrying day (that) he had ever spent.
Note that ever is used here, not never. We can, however, express the same idea with never
and a comparative:
A Practical English Grammar
25
I have never drunk better beer. I have never met a kinder man.
He had never spent a more worrying day.
Note that most + adjective, without the, means very:
You are most kind means You are very kind.
most meaning very is used mainly with adjectives of two or more syllables: annoying,
apologetic, disobedient, encouraging, exciting, helpful, important, misleading etc.
D
Parallel increase is expressed by the + comparative … the + comparative:
HOUSE AGENT: Do you want a big house?
ANN: Yes, the bigger the better.
TOM: But the smaller it is, the less it will cost us to heat.
E
Gradual increase or decrease is expressed by two comparatives joined by and:
The weather is getting colder and colder.
He became less and less interested.
F
Comparison of actions with gerunds or infinitives:
Riding a horse is not as easy as riding a motor cycle. It is nicer/more fun to go with someone
than to go alone. (See 341.)
G
Comparisons with like (preposition) and alike:
Tom is very like Bill. Bill and Tom are very alike.
He keeps the central heating full on. It's like living in the tropics.
H
Comparisons with like and as (both adverb and adjective expressions are shown here)
In theory like (preposition) is used only with noun, pronoun or gerund:
He swims like a fish. You look like a ghost.
Be like Peter/him: go jogging.
The windows were all barred. It was like being in prison.
J
and as (conjunction) is used when there is a finite verb:
Do as Peter does: go jogging.
Why don't you cycle to work as we do?
But in colloquial English like is often used here instead of as:
Cycle to work like we do.
I
like + noun and as + noun:
He worked like a slave, (very hard indeed)
He worked as a slave. (He was a slave.)
She used her umbrella as a weapon. (She struck him with it.)
22
A
B
C
23
A
than/as + pronoun + auxiliary
When the same verb is required before and after than/as we can use an auxiliary for the
second verb:
I earn less than he does. (less than he earns)
The same tense need not be used in both clauses:
He knows more than I did at his age.
When the second clause consists only of than/as + I/we/you + verb, , and there is no change
of tense, it is usually possible to omit the verb:
I'm not as old as you (are). He has more lime than I/we (have).
In formal English we keep I/we, as the pronoun is still considered to be the subject of the verb
even though the verb has been omitted. In informal English, however, me/us is more usual:
He has more time than me. They are richer than us.
When than/as is followed by he/she/it + verb, we normally keep the verb:
You are stronger than he is.
But we can drop the verb and use he/she/they in very formal English or him/her/them in
very colloquial English.
These rules apply also to comparisons made with adverbs:
I swim better than he does/better than him.
They work harder than we do/harder than us.
You can't type as fast as I can/as fast as me.
the + adjective with a plural meaning
blind, deaf, disabled, healthy/sick, living/dead, rich/poor, unemployed and certain other
adjectives describing the human character or condition can be preceded by the and used to
represent a class of persons. These expressions have a plural meaning; they take a plural
verb and the pronoun is they:
A Practical English Grammar
26
B
C
The poor get poorer: the rich get richer.
the can be used in the same way with national adjectives ending in ch or sh:
the Dutch the Spanish the Welsh
and can be used similarly with national adjectives ending in se or ss:
the Burmese the Chinese the Japanese the Swiss
though it is just possible for these to have a singular meaning.
Note that the + adjective here refers to a group of people considered in a general sense only.
If we wish to refer to a particular group, we must add a noun:
These seats are for the disabled.
The disabled members of our party were let in free.
The French like to eat well.
The French tourists complained about the food.
Some colours can be used in the plural to represent people but these take s like nouns: the
blacks, the whites.
the + adjective can occasionally have a singular meaning:
the accused (person) the unexpected (thing)
24
A
Adjectives + one/ones and adjectives used as pronouns
Most adjectives can be used with the pronouns one/ones, when one/ones represents a
previously mentioned noun:
Don't buy the expensive apples; get the cheaper ones.
Hard beds are healthier than soft ones.
I lost my old camera; this is a new one.
Similarly with a number + adjective:
If you haven't got a big plate, two small ones will do.
B
Adjectives used as pronouns
first/second etc. can be used with or without one/ones; i.e. they can be used as adjectives or
pronouns:
Which train did you catch? ~ I caught the first (one).
the + superlative can be used similarly:
Tom is the best (runner). The eldest was only ten.
and sometimes the + comparative:
Which (of these two) is the stronger?
But this use of the comparative is considered rather literary, and in informal English a
superlative is often used here instead:
Which (of these two) is the strongest?
Adjectives of colour can sometimes be used as pronouns:
I like the blue (one) best.
Colours of horses, especially bay, chestnut, grey are often used as pronouns and take s in
the plural:
Everyone expected the chestnut to win.
The coach was drawn by four greys.
25
A
B
many and much (adjectives and pronouns)
many and much
many (adjective) is used before countable nouns.
much (adjective) is used before uncountable nouns:
He didn't make many mistakes. We haven't much coffee.
They have the same comparative and superlative forms more and most:
more mistakes/coffee most men/damage
many, much, more, most can be used as pronouns:
He gets a lot of letters but she doesn't get many.
You have a lot of free time but I haven't much.
more and most can be used quite freely, and so can many and much, with negative verbs (see
above examples). But many and much with affirmative or interrogative verbs have a restricted
use.
many and much with affirmative verbs
many is possible when preceded (i.e. modified) by a good/a great. Both are possible when
modified by so/as/too.
A Practical English Grammar
27
I made a good many friends there.
He has had so many jobs that. . .
She read as much as she could.
They drink too much (gin).
When not modified, many, as object or part of the object, is usually replaced by a lot/lots of
(+ noun) or by a lot or lots (pronouns).
much, as object or part of the object, is usually replaced by a great/good deal of (+ noun) or
a great/good deal (pronouns):
I saw a lot/lots of seabirds. I expect you saw a lot too.
He spends a lot/lots of/a great deal of money on his house.
As subject or part of the subject, either many or a lot (of) etc. can be used, but much here is
normally replaced by one of the other forms.
much, however, is possible in formal English:
Much will depend on what the minister says.
Compare negative and affirmative sentences:
He hasn't won many races.
You've icon a lot/lots of races or
You've won a lot or
You've won a great many (races).
He didn't eat much fruit.
She ate a lot/lots of fruit/a great deal of fruit or
She ate a lot/a great deal.
C
many and much with interrogative verbs
Both can be used with how: How many times? How much?
In questions where how is not used, many is possible, but a lot (of) etc- is better when an
affirmative answer is expected:
Did you take a lot of photos? I expect you did.
much without how is possible but the other forms are a little more usual:
Did you have a lot of snow/much snow last year? (For much as an adverb, see 33.)
26
A
Adjectives + infinitives
Some of the most useful of these adjectives are given below, grouped roughly according to
meaning or type. Some adjectives with several meanings may appear in more than one
group, (For adjectives + prepositions, see 96.)
Starred adjectives can also be used with that-clauses. Sometimes that … should is more
usual, (See 236.).
In sections B-E, with the exception of B2, the constructions are introduced by it. (For
introductory it, see 67.) If it + be … is preceded by find/think/believe etc. that it is sometimes
possible to omit that and the verb be:
He found that it was impossible to study at home =
He found if impossible to study at home.
B1
it + be + adjective (+ of + object) + infinitive is used chiefly with adjectives concerning:
(a) character: brave, careless, cowardly, cruel, generous, good/ nice (= kind), mean, rude,
selfish, wicked, wrong (morally) etc., and fair*/just*/right* with negative or interrogative
verbs, or
(b) sense: clever, foolish, idiotic*, intelligent, sensible, silly, stupid, absurd*,
ludicrous*, ridiculous* and unreasonable* are sometimes also possible.
It was kind of you to help him. (You helped him. This was kind.)
It was stupid (of them) to lease their bicycles outside.
of + object can be omitted after group (b) adjectives, and sometimes after group (a) adjectives,
except good and nice. (Omission of of + object would change the meaning of good and nice.
See E.)
2
Pronoun + be + adjective + noun + infinitive is also possible with the above adjectives and
with a number of others, including:
astonishing*, curious*, extraordinary*, funny* (=. strange*), odd*, queer*, surprising*
etc. and pointless, useful, useless
It was a sensible precaution to take.
That was a wicked thing to say.
Comments of this type can sometimes be expressed as exclamations:
What a funny way to park a car! What an odd time to choose!
A Practical English Grammar
28
The adjective is sometimes omitted in expressions of disapproval:
What a (silly) way to bring up a child!
What a time to choose!
Example with a that-clause:
It is strange/odd/surprising that he hasn't answered.
C
it + be + adjective + infinitive is possible with advisable*, inadvisable*, better*, best,
desirable*, essential*, good (= advisable), important*, necessary*, unnecessary*, vital*
and with only + fair*/just*/right*;
Wouldn't it be better to waif? ~ No, it's essential to book in advance.
for + object can be added except after good (where it would change the meaning; see E
below) and after just:
It won't be necessary for him to report to the police.
It is only fair for him to have a chance. inessential and unimportant are not normally used, but
not essential is possible.
D
it + be + adjective (+ for + object) + infinitive is possible with convenient*, dangerous,
difficult, easy, hard*, possible*, impossible, safe, unsafe. (For possible that, see 27 E.)
Would it be convenient (for you) to see Mr X now?
It was dangerous (for women) to go out alone after dark.
We found it almost impossible to buy petrol. (See A above.)
The above adjectives, with the exception of possible, can also be used in the noun + be +
adjective + infinitive construction:
This cake is easy to make.
The instructions were hard to follow.
This car isn't safe to drive.
E
it + be + adjective/participle + infinitive is also possible with adjectives and participles which
show the feelings or reactions of the person '^: concerned:
Agreeable
dreadful*
lovely*
terrible*
Awful*
good "/nice*
marvellous*
wonderful *
delightful*
(= pleasant)
splendid*
etc.
disagreeable
horrible*
strange*
and with the present participles of:
alarm*
bewilder
discourage*
excite*
surprise*
amaze*
bore
disgust*
frighten
terrify
amuse*
depress*
embarrass
horrify*
upset
annoy*
disappoint*
encourage*
interest*
etc.
astonish*
fun (.= an exciting experience) and a relief can be used similarly.
It's awful to be alone in such a place.
It's boring to do the same thing every day.
It was depressing to find the house empty.
It would be fun/exciting/interesting to canoe down the river.
It was a relief to take off our wet boots.
for + object is quite common after lovely, interesting, marvellous, nice, wonderful and
possible after the other adjectives:
It's interesting (for children) to see a house being built.
It was marvellous (for the boys) to have a garden to play in.
Note that for + object placed after good restricts the meaning of good to healthy/beneficial: It's
good for you to take regular exercise.
(good + infinitive can have this meaning but can also mean pleasant/kind/advisable. See B,
C above.)
it + be + adjective + noun + infinitive is also possible with the above adjectives/participles:
It was an exciting ceremony to watch.
It was a horrible place to lice (in).
F
Somewhat similar meanings can be expressed by subject + adjective + infinitive with angry*,
delighted*, dismayed*, glad*, happy*, pleased*, relieved*, sad*, sorry* and the past
participles of the verbs in E above: I'm delighted to see you.
The most useful infinitives here are to find/learn/hear/see, but glad/happy/sad/sorry are also
often followed by to say/tell/inform and sometimes by other infinitives:
He was glad to leave school.
She was dismayed to find the door locked.
A Practical English Grammar
29
G
Subject + be + adjective/participle + infinitive with: able/unable; apt, inclined, liable, prone;
prepared, not prepared (= ready/willing/unwilling), reluctant; prompt, quick, slow:
We are all apt to make mistakes when we try to hurry.
I am inclined to believe him. I am prepared/ready to help him.
He was most reluctant to lend us the money.
He was slow to realise that times had changed =
He realised only slowly that times had changed.
27
A
Adjectives + infinitive/that-clause/preposition constructions
due, due to, owing to, certain, sure, bound, confident
due, used of time, can take an infinitive:
The race is due to start in ten minutes.
But it can also be used alone:
The plane was due (in) at six. It is an hour overdue.
due to (preposition) means 'a result of:
The accident was due to carelessness.
owing to means 'because of’:
Owing to his carelessness we had an accident.
due to should be preceded by subject + verb, but English people are careless about this and
often begin a sentence with due to instead of with owing to.
certain and sure take infinitives to express the speaker's opinion.
bound is also possible here;
Tom is certain/sure/bound to win. (The speaker is confident of this.)
But subject + certain/sure + that-clause expresses the subject's opinion:
Tom is sure that he will win. (Tom is confident of victory.)
confident that could replace certain/sure that above, but confident cannot be followed by
an infinitive.
sure, certain, confident can be followed by of + noun/pronoun or gerund:
Unless you're early you can't be sure of getting a seat.
bound can take an infinitive, as shown above, but not a that-clause.
bound + infinitive can also mean 'under an obligation":
According to the contract we are bound to supply the materials.
B
afraid (of), ashamed (of), sorry (for or about)
afraid of, ashamed of, sorry for/about + noun/pronoun or gerund:
She is afraid of heights/of falling.
He was ashamed of himself (for behaving so badly)/ashamed of behaving so badly.
I'm sorry for breaking your window, (apology)
I'm sorry about your window, (apology/regret)
I'm sorry for Peter, (pity)
afraid, ashamed, sorry can be followed by an infinitive:
She was afraid to speak. (She didn't speak.)
!'d be ashamed to take his money. (I don't/won't take it.)
I'm sorry to say that we have no news.
or by a that-clause:
I'm ashamed that I've nothing better to offer you.
She's afraid (that) he won't believe her. (fear)
I'm afraid (that) we have no news. (regret)
I'm sorry (that) you can't come.
(For the difference in meaning between these three constructions, see 271. For I'm afraid
not/so, see 347.)
C
anxious (about), anxious + infinitive, anxious that
anxious (+ about + noun/pronoun) means worried:
I'm anxious (about Tom). His plane is overdue.
be anxious (+ for + noun/pronoun) + infinitive = 'to desire/to wish':
I'm very anxious (for him) to see the Carnival.
anxious + that - . . + should is possible in very formal English:
The committee is anxious that this matter should be kept secret.
D
fortunate and lucky can take either a that-clause or an infinitive, but there is usually a
difference of meaning. It is fortunate/lucky that usually means 'It's a good thing that':
It's lucky that Tom has a car.
A Practical English Grammar
30
It's lucky that he passed his test. (Now he can drive himself to the station/take the
children to the seaside etc.)
It's lucky for us that he has a car. (He can give us a lift etc.)
E
F
Subject + be + fortunate/lucky + infinitive, however, emphasizes the subject's good fortune:
He's lucky to have a car. (Many people haven't got one.)
He was lucky to pass his test. (He wasn't really up to the standard.)
is/are + fortunate/lucky + present infinitive is used mainly with static verbs. With was/were
or the continuous or perfect infinitive there is a wider choice:
You were fortunate to escape unharmed.
You are lucky to be going by air.
He is lucky to have sold his house before they decided to build the new airport.
It is lucky/unlucky can, however, be followed by the infinitive of any verb:
It is unlucky to break a mirror. (It brings misfortune.)
fortunate and unfortunate are not used here but can be used in the other constructions.
They are chiefly found in more formal English.
These adjectives can also be used alone or with a noun:
I wasn't lucky,
He's fortunate.
Thirteen's my lucky number.
He's a fortunate man.
possible, probable and likely can take a that-clause introduced by it, likely can also be
used with subject + infinitive
(a) It's possible that he'll come today =
(b) Perhaps he 'II come/He may come today.
(a) It's probable that he'll come today =
(b) He’II probably come today.
In each case the (b) form is more usual than the (a) but the that-clause is convenient when
we want to modify the adjectives:
It's just/quite possible that. . .
It's not very probable that. . .
With likely both forms are equally useful:
It's quite likely that he'll come today =
He's quite likely to come today.
is/are + subject + likely + infinitive is very useful as it supplies an interrogative form for may
(= be possible):
Is he likely to ring today?
possible, probable, likely can be used without a that-clause when it is quite clear what this
would be:
Do you think he 'II sell his house? ~ It's quite possible/probable/likely (that he'll sell it).
aware and conscious take a that-clause or of + noun/pronoun or gerund;
It'll be dangerous. ~ I'm aware that it'll be dangerous/I'm aware of that.
I was conscious of being watched =
I felt that someone was watching me.
conscious used by itself has a physical meaning:
I had only a local anaesthetic. I was conscious the whole time.
A Practical English Grammar
31
4
Adverbs
28
Kinds of adverbs
Manner: bravely, fast, happily, hard, quickly, well (see 35)
Place: by, down, here, near, there, up (36)
Time: now, soon. still, then, today, yet (37)
Frequency: always, never, occasionally, often, twice (38)
Sentence: certainly, definitely, luckily, surely (40)
Degree: fairly, hardly, rather, quite, too, very (41)
Interrogative: when? where? why? (60)
Relative: when, where, why (75 E)
Form and use
29
The formation of adverbs with ly
A
Many adverbs of manner and some adverbs of degree are formed by adding ly to the
corresponding adjectives:
grave, gravely immediate, immediately slow, slowly
Spelling notes
(a) A final y changes to i: happy, happily.
(b) A final e is retained: extreme, extremely.
Exceptions: true, due, whole become truly, duly, wholly.
(c) Adjectives ending in able/ible drop the final e and add y:
capable, capably
sensible, sensibly
(d) Adjectives ending in a vowel + l follow the usual rule:
beautiful, beautifully
final, finally
Exceptions
The adverb of good is well.
kindly can be adjective or adverb, but other adjectives ending in ly, e.g. friendly, likely,
lonely etc., cannot be used as adverbs and have no adverb form. To supply this deficiency
we use a similar adverb or adverb phrase:
likely (adjective)
friendly (adjective)
probably (adverb)
in a friendly way (adverb
phrase)
Some adverbs have a narrower meaning than their corresponding adjectives or differ from
them. coldly, coolly, hotly, warmly are used mainly of feelings:
We received them coldly, (in an unfriendly way)
They denied the accusation hotly, (indignantly)
She welcomed us warmly, (in a friendly way)
But warmly dressed = wearing warm clothes.
coolly = calmly/courageously or calmly/impudently;
He behaved very coolly in this dangerous situation.
presently = soon: He'll be here presently. (See also 30 B. For barely, scarcely, see 44. For
surely, see 40 A.)
B
C
30
Adverbs and adjectives with the same form
A
back
deep*
direct*
early
enough
far
fast
*See B below.
hard*
high*
ill
just*
kindly
late*
left
A Practical English Grammar
little
long
low
much/more/most*
near*
pretty*
right*
short*
still
straight
well
wrong*
32
Used as adverbs:
Used as adjectives:
Come back soon.
the back door
You can dial Rome direct.
the most direct route.
The train went fast.
a fast train
They worked hard. (energetically) The work is hard
an ill-made road
You look ill/well
Turn right here.
the right answer
She went straight home.
a straight line
He led us wrung.
This is the wrong way.
B
Starred words above also have ly forms. Note the meanings.
deeply is used chiefly of feelings:
He was deeply offended.
directly can be used of time or connection:
He'll be here directly, (very soon)
The new regulations will affect us directly/indirectly. (For hardly, see 44.)
highly is used only in an abstract sense:
He was a highly paid official. They spoke very highly of him.
justly corresponds to the adjective just (fair, right, lawful), but just can also be an adverb of
degree. (See 41.)
lately = recently: Have you seen him lately?
mostly = chiefly
nearly = almost: I'm nearly ready.
prettily corresponds to the adjective pretty (attractive):
Her little girls are always prettily dressed.
But pretty can also be an adverb of degree meaning very:
The exam was pretty difficult.
rightly can be used with a past participle to mean justly or correctly:
He was rightly/justly punished.
I was rightly/correctly informed.
But in each case the second adverb would be more usual.
shortly = soon, briefly or curtly.
wrongly can be used with a past participle:
You were wrongly (incorrectly) informed.
But He acted wrongly could mean that his action was either incorrect or morally wrong.
C
long and near (adverbs) have a restricted use.
1
long
longer, longest can be used without restriction:
It took longer than I expected.
But long is used mainly in the negative or interrogative:
How long will it take to get there? ~ It won't take long.
In the affirmative too/so + long or long + enough is possible. Alternatively a long time can
be used:
I would take too long.
It would take a long time.
In conversation (for) a long time is often replaced by (for) ages:
I waited for ages.
It took us ages to get there.
2
near
nearer, nearest can be used without restriction:
Don't come any nearer.
But near in the positive form is usually qualified by very/quite/so/too or enough:
They live quite near. Don't come too near.
You're near enough.
The preposition near with noun, pronoun or adverb is more generally useful:
Don't go near the edge.
The ship sank near here.
D
far and much also have a restricted use. See 32 and 33.
A Practical English Grammar
33
31
A
Comparative and superlative adverb forms
With adverbs of two or more syllables we form the comparative and superlative by putting more
and most before the positive form:
Positive
Comparative
Superlative
quickly
more quickly
most quickly
fortunately
more fortunately
must fortunately
Single-syllable adverbs, however, and early, add er, est:
hard
harder
hardest
early
earlier
earliest (note the y becomes i)
B
Irregular comparisons:
well
better
badly
worse
little
less
much
more
far
farther
further
best
worst
least
most
farthest (of distance only)
furthest (used more widely; see 32 A)
32
far, farther/farthest and further/furthest
A
further, furthest
These, like farther/farthest, can be used as adverbs of place/distance:
It isn't safe to go any further/farther in this fog.
But they can also be used in an abstract sense:
Mr A said that these toy pistols should not be on sale.
Mr B went further and said that no toy pistols should be sold.
Mr C went furthest of all and said that no guns of any kind should be sold.
far: restrictions on use
far in the comparative and superlative can be used quite freely:
He travelled further than we expected.
far in the positive form is used chiefly in the negative and interrogative:
How far can you see? ~ I can't see far.
In the affirmative a long way is more usual than far, and a long way away is more usual
than far away:
They sailed a long way.
He lives a long way away.
But very far away is possible, and so is so/quite/too + far and far + enough:
They walked so far that…
They walked too far.
We've gone far enough.
far can be used with an abstract meaning;
The new law doesn't go far enough.
You've gone too far! (You've been too insulting/overbearing/insolent etc.)
far, adverb of degree, is used with comparatives or with too/so + positive forms:
She swims far better than I do.
He drinks far too much.
B
33
much, more, most
A
more and most can be used fairly freely:
You should ride more. I use this room most.
But much, in the positive form, has a restricted use.
much meaning a lot can modify negative verbs:
He doesn't ride much nowadays.
In the interrogative much is chiefly used with how. In questions without how, much is
possible but a lot is more usual:
How much has he ridden? Has he ridden a lot/much?
In the affirmative as/so/too + much is possible. Otherwise a lot/ a good deal/a great deal is
B
A Practical English Grammar
34
C
D
E
34
A
B
C
D
preferable:
He shouts so much that... I talk too much.
But He rides a lot/a great deal.
very much meaning greatly can be used more widely in the affirmative. We can use it with
blame, praise, thank and with a number of verbs concerned with feelings: admire, amuse,
approve, dislike, distress, enjoy, impress, like, object, shock, surprise etc.:
Thank you very much.
They admired him very much.
She objects very much to the noise they make.
much (= greatly), with or without very, can be used with the participles admired, amused,
disliked, distressed, impressed, liked, shocked, struck, upset:
He was (very) much admired.
She was (very) much impressed by their good manners.
much meaning a lot can modify comparative or superlative adjectives and adverbs:
much better
much the best
much more quickly
much too can be used with positive forms:
He spoke much too fast.
most placed before an adjective or adverb can mean very. It is mainly used here with
adjectives/adverbs of two or more syllables:
He was most apologetic. She behaved most generously. (See 21 C.)
Constructions with comparisons (see also 341)
When the same verb is required in both clauses we normally use an auxiliary for the second
verb (see 22).
With the positive form we use as ... as with an affirmative verb, and as/so ... as with a
negative verb:
He worked as slowly as he dared.
He doesn't snore as/so loudly as you do.
It didn't take as/so long as I expected.
With the comparative form we use than:
He eats more quickly than I do/than me.
He played better than he had ever played.
They arrived earlier than I expected.
the + comparative . . . the + comparative is also possible:
The earlier you start the sooner you'll be back.
With the superlative it is possible to use of + noun:
He went (the) furthest of the explorers.
But this construction is not very common and such a sentence would normally be expressed
by a comparative, as shown above. A superlative (without the) + of all is quite common, but
all here often refers to other actions by the same subject:
He likes swimming best of all. (better than he likes anything else) of all can then be
omitted.
For comparisons with like and as, see 21 H, I.
Position
35
Adverbs of manner
A
Adverbs of manner come after the verb:
She danced beautifully
B
or after the object when there is one:
He gave her the money reluctantly. They speak English well.
Do not put an adverb between verb and object.
When we have verb + preposition + object, the adverb can be either before the preposition or
after the object:
He looked at me suspiciously or He looked suspiciously at me.
But if the object contains a number of words we put the adverb before the preposition:
A Practical English Grammar
35
He looked suspiciously at everyone who got off the plane.
Similarly with verb + object sentences the length of the object affects the position of the
adverb. If the object is short, we have verb + object + adverb, as shown in B above. But if the
object is long we usually put the adverb before the verb:
She carefully picked up all the bits of broken glass.
He angrily denied that he had stolen the documents.
They secretly decided to leave the town.
D
Note that if an adverb is placed after a clause or a phrase, it is normally considered to modify
the verb in that clause/phrase. If, therefore, we move secretly to the end of the last example
above, we change the meaning:
They secretly decided . . . (The decision was secret.)
They decided to leave the town secretly. (The departure was to be secret.)
E
Adverbs concerned with character and intelligence, foolishly, generously, kindly, stupidly
etc., when placed before a verb, indicate that the action was foolish/kind/generous etc.:
I foolishly forgot my passport.
He generously paid for us all.
He kindly waited for me.
Would you kindly wait?
Note that we could also express such ideas by:
It was foolish of me to forget.
It was kind of him to wait.
Would you be kind enough to wait? (See 252.)
The adverb can come after the verb or after verb + object, but the meaning then changes:
He spoke kindly = His voice and words were kind
Is not the same as It was kind of him to speak to us.
He paid us generously = He Raid more than the usual rate
is not the same as It was generous of him to pay us. Note the difference between:
He answered the questions foolishly (His answers were foolish) and
He foolishly answered the questions. (Answering was foolish./It was
foolish of him to answer at all.)
F
badly and well can be used as adverbs of manner or degree. As adverbs of manner they
come after an active verb, after the object or before the past participle in a passive verb:
He behaved badly.
He read well.
He paid her badly.
She speaks French well.
She was badly paid.
The trip was well organised.
badly as an adverb of degree usually comes after the object or before, the verb or past participle:
The door needs a coat of paint badly/The door badly needs a coat of paint.
He was badly injured in the last match.
well (degree) and well (manner) have the same position rules;
I'd like the steak well done.
He knows the town well.
Shake the bottle well.
The children were well wrapped up.
The meaning of well may depend on its position.
Note the difference between:
You know well that I can't drive (There can be no doubt in your ... mind about this) and
You know that I can't drive well. (I'm not a good driver.)
well can be placed after may/might and could to emphasise the probability of an action:
He may well refuse = It is quite likely that he will refuse. (For may/might as well, see
288.)
G
somehow, anyhow
somehow {= in some way or other) can be placed in the front position or after a verb without
object or after the object:
Somehow they managed.
They managed somehow.
They raised the money somehow.
anyhow as an adverb of manner is not common. But it is often used to mean ‘in any
case/anyway'. (See 327.)
C
36
Adverbs of place
A
away, everywhere, here, nowhere, somewhere, there etc.
If there is no object, these adverbs are usually placed after the verb:
A Practical English Grammar
36
She went away.
He lives abroad.
Bill is upstairs.
But they come after verb + object or verb + preposition + object:
She sent him away.
I looked for it everywhere.
(But see chapter 38 for verb + adverb combinations such as pick up, put down etc.)
Adverb phrases, formed of preposition + noun/pronoun/adverb, follow the above position
rules:
The parrot sat on a perch.
He stood in the doorway.
He lives near me.
But see also E below.
B
somewhere, anywhere follow the same basic rules as some and any:
I've seen that man somewhere.
Can you see my key anywhere? ~ No. I can't see it anywhere.
Are you going anywhere? (ordinary question) but
Are you going somewhere? (I assume that you are.)
nowhere, however, is not normally used in this position except in the expression to get
nowhere (= to achieve nothing/to make no progress):
Threatening people will get you nowhere. (You'll gain no advantage by threatening
people.)
But it can be used in short answers:
Where are you going? ~ Nowhere. (I'm not going anywhere.)
It can also, in formal English, be placed at the beginning of a sentence and is then followed
by an inverted verb:
Nowhere will you find better roses than these. (See 45.)
C
here, there can be followed by be/come/go + noun subject:
Here's Tom. There's Ann. Here comes the train.
There goes our bus.
here and there used as above carry more stress than here/there placed after the verb.
There is also usually a difference in meaning. Tom is here means he is in this
room/building/town etc. But Here's Tom implies that he has just appeared or that we have just
found him. Tom comes here means that it is his habit to come to this place, but Here comes
Tom implies that he is just arriving/has just arrived.
If the subject is a personal pronoun, it precedes the verb in the usual way:
There he is. Here I am. Here it comes.
But someone and something follow the verb:
There's someone who can help you.
Note that the same sentence, spoken without stress on There, would mean that a potential helper
exists. (See 117.)
D
Someone phoning a friend may introduce himself/herself by name + here:
ANN (on phone): Is that you, Tom? Ann here or This is Ann.
She must not say Ann is here or Here is Ann.
E
The adverbs away (= off), down, in, off, out, over, round, up etc. can be followed by a verb
of motion + a noun subject:
Away went the runners.
Down fell a dozen apples.
Out sprang the cuckoo.
Round and round flew the plane.
But if the subject is a pronoun it is placed before the verb:
Away they went. Round and round it flew.
There is more drama in this order than in subject + verb + adverb but no difference in
meaning.
F
In written English adverb phrases introduced by prepositions (down, from. in, on, over, out of,
round, up etc.) can be followed by verbs indicating position (crouch, hang. He, sit, stand etc.),
by verbs of motion, by be born, die, live and sometimes other verbs:
From the rafters hung strings of onions.
In the doorway stood a man with a gun.
On a perch beside him sat a blue parrot.
Over the wall came a shower of stones.
The first three of these examples could also be expressed by a participle and the verb be:
Hanging from the rafters were strings of onions.
Standing in the doorway was a man with a gun.
Sitting on a perch beside him was a blue parrot.
A Practical English Grammar
37
But a participle could not be used with the last example unless the shower of stones lasted for some
time.
37
Adverbs of time
A
afterwards, eventually, lately, now, recently, soon, then, today, tomorrow etc. and
adverb phrases of time: at once, since then, till (6.00 etc.)
These are usually placed at the very beginning or at the very end of the clause, i.e. in front
position or end position. End position is usual with imperatives and phrases with till:
Eventually he came/He came eventually.
Then we went home/We went home then.
Write today. I'll wait till tomorrow.
(For lately, recently, see also 185.)
With compound tenses, afterwards, eventually, lately, now, recently, soon can come after
the auxiliary:
We 'II soon be there.
B
before, early, immediately and late come at the end of the clause:
He came late. I'll go immediately.
But before and immediately, used as conjunctions, are placed at the beginning of the
clause:
Immediately the rain stops we'll set out.
C
since and ever since are used with perfect tenses (see 187 D).
since can come after the auxiliary or in end position after a negative or interrogative verb;
ever since (adverb) in end position. Phrases and clauses with since and ever since are
usually in end position, though front position is possible:
He's been in bed since his accident/since he broke his leg.
D
yet and still (adverbs of time)
yet is normally placed after verb or after verb + object:
He hasn't finished (his breakfast) yet.
But if the object consists of a large number of words, yet can be placed before the verb:
He hasn't yet applied for the job we told him about.
still is placed after the verb be but before other verbs:
She is still in bed.
yet means 'up to the time of speaking'. It is chiefly used with the negative or interrogative,
still emphasizes that the action continues. It is chiefly used with the affirmative or
interrogative, but can be used with the negative to emphasize the continuance of a negative
action:
He still doesn't understand. (The negative action of 'not understanding' continues.)
He doesn't understand yet. (The positive action of 'understanding' hasn't yet started.)
When stressed, still and yet express surprise, irritation or impatience. Both words can also
be conjunctions (see 327).
E
just, as an adverb of time, is used with compound tenses:
I'm just coming. (See also 183.)
(For Just as an adverb of degree, see 41,)
38
A
1
2
3
Adverbs of frequency
(a) always, continually, frequently, occasionally, often, once, twice, periodically,
repeatedly, sometimes, usually etc.
(b) ever, hardly ever, never, rarely, scarcely ever, seldom
Adverbs in both the above groups are normally placed:
After the simple tenses of to be:
He is always in time for meals.
Before the simple tenses of all other verbs:
They sometimes stay up all night.
With compound tenses, they are placed after the first auxiliary, or, with interrogative verbs,
after auxiliary + subject:
He can never understand.
You have often been told not to do that. Have you ever ridden a camel? Exceptions
A Practical English Grammar
38
(a) used to and have to prefer the adverb in front of them:
You hardly ever have to remind him; he always remembers.
(b) Frequency adverbs are often placed before auxiliaries when these c are used alone, in
additions to remarks or in answers to questions:
Can you park your car near the shops? - Yes, I usually can.
I know I should take exercise, but I never do.
and when, in a compound verb, the auxiliary is stressed:
I never 'can remember. She hardly ever 'has met him.
Similarly when do is added for emphasis:
I always do arrive in time!
But emphasis can also be given by stressing the frequency adverb and leaving it in its usual
position after the auxiliary:
You should 'always check your oil before starling.
B
Adverbs in group (a) above can also be put at the beginning or end of a sentence or clause,
Exceptions
always is rarely found at the beginning of a sentence/clause except with imperatives.
often, if put at the end, normally requires very or quite:
Often he walked. He walked quite often.
C
Adverbs in group (b) above, hardly ever, never, rarely etc. (but not ever alone), can also be
put at the beginning of a sentence, but inversion of the following main verb then becomes
necessary:
Hardly/Scarcely ever did they manage to meet unobserved. (For hardly, barely, scarcely,
see 44,) hardly/scarcely ever, never, rarely and seldom are not used with negative verbs.
D
never, ever
never is chiefly used with an affirmative verb, never with a negative. It normally means 'at no
time':
He never saw her again. I've never eaten snails. They never eat meat. (habit) I've never
had a better/light. (For never + comparative, see 21 C.) never + affirmative can sometimes
replace an ordinary negative:
I waited but he never fumed up. (He didn't turn up.)
never + interrogative can be used to express the speaker's surprise at the non-performance
of an action:
Has he never been to Japan? I'm surprised, because his wife is Japanese.
ever means 'at any time' and is chiefly used in the interrogative:
Has he ever marched in a demonstration? ~ No, he never has.
ever can be used with a negative verb and, especially with compound tenses, can often
replace never + affirmative:
I haven't ever eaten snails.
This use of ever is less common with simple tenses.
ever + affirmative is possible in comparisons (see 21 C) and with suppositions and
expressions of doubt:
/ don't suppose he ever writes to his mother. (For hardly/scarcely + ever, see A-C
above. For ever after how etc., seed, 85.)
39
Order of adverbs and adverb phrases of manner, place and time when they occur in the
same sentence
Expressions of manner usually precede expressions of place:
He climbed awkwardly out of the window.
He'd study happily anywhere.
But away, back, down, forward, home, in, off, on, out, round and up usually precede adverbs
of manner:
He walked away sadly. She looked back anxiously.
They went home quietly. They rode on confidently. (See also 36 E.)
here and there do the same except with the adverbs hard, well, badly: He stood there silently
but They work harder here. Time expressions can follow expressions of manner and place:
They worked hard in the garden today.
He lived there happily for a year. But they can also be in front position:
Every day he queued patiently at the bus stop.
40 Sentence adverbs
A Practical English Grammar
39
These modify the whole sentence/clause and normally express the speaker's/narrator's
opinion.
A Adverbs expressing degrees of certainty
(a) actually (= in fact/really), apparently, certainly, clearly, evidently, obviously, presumably,
probably, undoubtedly
(b) definitely
(c) perhaps, possibly, surely Adverbs in group (a) above can be placed after be:
He is obviously intelligent. before simple tenses of other verbs:
They certainly work hard. He actually lives next door. after the first auxiliary in a compound
verb:
They have presumably sold their house.
at the beginning or at the end of a sentence or clause:
Apparently he knew the town well.
He knew the town well apparently.
definitely can be used in the above positions but is less usual at the beginning of a sentence.
perhaps and possibly are chiefly used in front position, though the end position is possible.
surely is normally placed at the beginning or end, though it can also be , next to the verb. It is
used chiefly in questions:
Surely you could pay £1 ? You could pay £1, surely? Note that though the adjectives sure
and certain mean more or less the same, the adverbs differ in meaning. certainly - definitely:
He was certainly there; there is no doubt about it. But surely indicates that the speaker is not
quite sure that the statement which follows is true. He thinks it is, but wants reassurance.
Surely he was there? (I fee! almost sure that he was.)
B Other sentence adverbs
admittedly, (unfortunately, frankly, honestly*, (un)luckily, naturally*, officially* etc- are usually
in the front position though the end position is possible. They are normally separated from the
rest of the sentence by a comma. Starred adverbs can also be adverbs of manner.
Honestly, Tom didn't geS the money. (Sentence adverb, honestly
here means 'truthfully'. The speaker is assuring us that Tom didn't get the money.)
Tom didn't get the money honestly (adverb of manner) = Tom got
the money dishonestly.
41 Adverbs of degree
absolutely, almost, barely, completely, enough, entirely, ->« extremely, fairly, far, hardly, just,
much, nearly, only, quite,
rather, really, scarcely, so, too, very etc.
For (a) little, see 5 D; for fairly and rather, see 42; for hardly, scarcely, barely, see 44; for
quite, see 43.)
An adverb of degree modifies an adjective or another adverb, it is placed before the adjective
or adverb:
You are absolutely right. I'm almost ready. :y But enough follows its adjective or adverb:
The box isn't big enough. He didn't work quickly enough. (See also 252 B.)
far requires a comparative, or too + positive:
If is far better to say nothing. He drives far too fast.
could replace far here. It can also be used with a superlative:
solution is much the best.
E
C The following adverbs of degree can also modify verbs:
almost, barely, enough, hardly, just, (a) little, much, nearly, quite, rather, really and scarcelyAll except much are then placed before the main verb, like adverbs of frequency (see 38).
He almost/nearly fell. I am Just going.
Tom didn't like it much but I realty enjoyed it. (For much, see 33. For (a) little, see 5 D.)
D only can also modify verbs. In theory it is placed next to the word to which it applies,
preceding verbs, adjectives and adverbs and preceding or following nouns and pronouns:
(a) He had only six apples, (not more than six)
(b) He only lent the car. (He didn't give it.)
(c) He lent the car to me only. (not to anyone else)
(d) I believe only half of what he said. But in spoken English people usually put it before the
verb, obtaining the required meaning by stressing the word to which the only applies:
He only had 'six apples is the same as (a) above. He only lent the car to '•me is the same as
(c) above. / only believe 'hat/etc, is the same as (d) abovejust, like only, should precede the word it qualifies:
I'll buy just one. I had just enough money. It can also be placed immediately before the
A Practical English Grammar
40
verb:
I'll just buy one. I just had enough money. But sometimes this change of order would
change the meaning:
Just sign here means This is all you have to do. Sign just here means Sign in this particular
spot.
fairly, rather, quite, hardly etc.
42
fairly and rather
A
Both can mean 'moderately', but fairly is chiefly used with 'favourable adjectives and adverbs
(.bravely, good, nice, well etc.}, while rather is chiefly used in this sense before 'unfavourable'
adjectives and adverbs (bad, stupidly, ugly etc.):
Tom is fairly clever, but Peter is rather stupid.
I walk fairly fast but Ann walks rather slowly. Both can be used similarly with participles:
He was fairly relaxed; she was rather tense.
a fairly interesting film a rather boring book The indefinite article, if required, precedes fairly
but can come before or after rather:
a fairly light box a rather heavy box/rather a heavy box With adjectives/adverbs such as fast,
slow, thin, thick, hot, cold etc., which are not in themselves either 'favourable' or
'unfavourable', the speaker can express approval by using fairly and disapproval by using
rather: This soup is fairly hot implies that the speaker likes hot soup, while This soup is rather
hot implies that it is a little too hot for him.
it rather can be used before alike, like, similar, different etc. and before comparatives. It then
means 'a little' or 'slightly':
Siamese cats are rather like dogs in some ways.
The weather was raiher worse than I had expected. rather a is possible with certain nouns:
disappointment, disadvantage, nuisance, pity, shame and sometimes joke:
It's rather a nuisance (= a little inconvenient) that we can't
park here.
It's rather a shame (= a little unfair) that he has to work on
Sundays. fairly cannot be used in these ways.
C rather can be used before certain 'favourable' adjectives/adverbs such as amusing, clever,
good, pretty, well but its meaning then changes; it becomes nearly equivalent to very, and the
idea of disapproval vanishes: She is rather clever is nearly the same as She is very clever.
rather used in this way is obviously much more complimentary than fairly. For example the
expression If is a fairly good play would, if anything, discourage others from going to see it.
But It is rather a good play is definitely a recommendation. Occasionally rather used in this
way conveys the idea of surprise:
/ suppose the house was filthy. - No, as a matter a/fact it was
rather dean.
D rather can also be used before enjoy, like and sometimes before dislike, object and some
similar verbs:
/ rather like the smell of petrol. He rather enjoys queueing. rather can be used in short
answers to questions with the above verbs:
Do you like him? - Yes I do, rather.
rather + like/enjoy is often used to express a liking which is a surprise to others or to the
speaker himself- But it can also be used to strengthen the verb: / rather like Tom implies more
interest than .'. I like Tom.
(For would rather, see 297, 298.)
<t3 quite '„'•; This is a confusing word because it has two meanings.
;„» It means 'completely' when it is used with a word or phrase which can ,',,' express the idea
of completeness (all right, certain, determined, empty.
/gin finished, full, ready, right, sure, wrong etc.) and when it is used 1'1'H ..i,^1" a very strong
adjective/adverb such as amazing, extraordinary, •'.^' horrible, perfect:
The pottle was quite empty. You're quite wrong. It's quite extraordinary; I can't understand it
at all.
When used with other adjectives/adverbs, quite has a slightly weakening effect, so that quite
good is normally less complimentary than good. quite used in this way has approximately the
same meaning as fairly but its strength can vary very much according to the way it is
stressed:
B
A Practical English Grammar
41
quite 'good (weak quite, strong good) is very little less than 'good'. 'quite ^good (equal stress)
means 'moderately good'. 'quite good (strong quite, weak good) is much less than 'good'. The
less quite is stressed the stronger the following adjective/adverb becomes. The more quite is
stressed the weaker its adjective/ adverb becomes. Note the position of a/an:
quite a long walk quite an old castle
44
hardly, scarcely, barely
hardly, scarcely and barely are almost negative in meaning. hardly is chiefly used with any,
ever, at all or the verb can:
He has hardly any money, (very little money)
I hardly ever go out. (I very seldom go out.)
It hardly rained at ail last summer.
Her case is so heavy that she can hardly lift if. But it can also be used with other verbs:
/ hardly know him. (I know him only very slightly.) Be careful not to confuse the adverbs hard
and hardly:
He looked hard at it. (He stared at it.)
He hardly looked at it. (He gave it only a brief glance.) scarcely can mean 'almost not' and
could replace hardly as used above: scarcely any/scarcely ever etc. But scarcely is chiefly
used to mean 'not quite':
There were scarcely twenty people there, (probably fewer) (For hardly/scarcely with inversion,
see 45 and 342 E.) barely means 'not more than/only just':
There were barely twenty people there, (only just twenty)
I can barely see if. (I can only just see it.)
Inversion of the verb
45
Inversion of the verb after certain adverbs
Certain adverbs and adverb phrases, mostly with a restrictive or negative sense, can for
emphasis be placed first in a sentence or clause and are then followed by the inverted (i.e.
interrogative) form of the verb. The most important of these are shown below. The numbers
indicate paragraphs where an example will be found.
hardly ever (see 38 A, C)
on no account
hardly . . . when (342 E)
only by
in no circumstances
only in this way
neither/nor (112 D)
only then/when
never
scarcely ever
no sooner . . . than (342 E)
scarcely … when
not only
seldom
not till
so (112 A)
nowhere (36 B)
I haven't got a ticket. ~ Neither/Nor have I.
I had never before been asked to accept a bribe.
Never before had I been asked to accept a bribe.
They not only rob you, they smash everything too.
Not only do they rob you, they smash everything too.
'He didn't realize that he had lost it till he got home.
Not till he got home did he realize that he had lost it.
This switch must not be touched on any account.
On no account must this switch be touched.
He was able to make himself heard only by shouting.
Only by shouting was he able to make himself heard.
He became so suspicious that …
So suspicious did he become that …
Note also that a second negative verb in a sentence can sometimes be expressed by nor with
inversion:
He had no money and didn't know anyone he could borrow from.
He had no money, nor did he know anyone he could borrow from.
(neither would be less usual here.)
(For adverbs and adverb phrases followed by inversion of verb and noun subject, e.g. Up
A Practical English Grammar
42
went the rocket; By the door stood an armed guard, see36C, E, F.)
A Practical English Grammar
43
5
all, each, every, both, neither, either, some, any, no, none
46
all, each, every, everyone, everybody, everything (for all and each, see also 48)
A
all compared to every
Technically, all means a number of people or things considered as a group while every means a
number of people or things considered individually. But in practice every and its compounds
are often used when we are thinking of a group.
B
each (adjective and pronoun) and every (adjective)
each means a number of persons or things considered individually. every can have this
meaning but with every there is less emphasis on the individual.
Every man had a weapon means 'All the men had weapons', and implies that the speaker counted
the men and the weapons and found that he had the same number of each. Each man had a
weapon implies that the speaker went to each man in turn and checked that he had a weapon.
each is a pronoun and adjective: Each (man) knows what to do.
every is an adjective only: Every man knows . . .
each can be used of two or more persons or things, and is normally used of small numbers,
every is not normally used of very small numbers.
Both take a singular verb. The possessive adjective is his/her/its.
(For the reciprocal pronoun each other, see 53 C, 70 B.)
C
everyone/everybody and everything (pronouns)
everyone/everybody + singular verb is normally preferred to all (the) people + plural verb,
i.e. we say Everyone is ready instead of All the people are ready. There is no difference
between everyone and everybody.
everything is similarly preferred to all (the) things, i.e. we say Everything has been wasted
instead of All the things have been wasted. The expressions all (the) people, all (the) things
are possible when followed by a phrase or clause:
All the people in the room clapped.
I got all the things you asked/or. Otherwise they are rarely used.
(For pronouns and possessive adjectives with everyone/everybody, see 51 C, 69.)
47
both
both means 'one and the other'. It takes a plural verb.
both can be used alone or followed by a noun:
Both (doors) were open
or by (of) + the/these/those or possessives:
both (of) the wheels both (of) your wheels
or by of + us/you/them:
Both of us knew him.
A personal pronoun + both is also possible:
We both knew him. (See 48.)
both . . . and . . . can be used to emphasize a combination of two adjectives, nouns, verbs
etc.:
It was both cold and wet.
He is both an actor and a director.
He both acts and directs.
48
all/both/each + of and alternative constructions
A
all (pronoun) can be followed by of + the/this/these/that/those/ possessives and proper
nouns.
both (pronoun) + of can be used similarly but with plural forms only. The of here is often
omitted especially with all + a singular noun/pronoun all the town
all (oft Tom's boys
all his life
both (of) the towns
all (of) these
both (of) his parents
B
With all/both + of + personal pronoun the of cannot be omitted:
A Practical English Grammar
44
all of it
both of them
But there is an alternative construction, personal pronoun + all/both:
all of it is replaceable by it all.
all of us = we all (subject), us all (object).
all of you is replaceable by you all.
all of them = they all (subject), them all (object).
Similarly:
both of us = we both or us both
both of you = you both
both of them = they both or them both
All of them were broken = They were all broken.
All/Both of us went = We all/both went.
We ate all/both the cakes.
We ate all/both of them.
We ate them all/both.
C
When one of these pronoun + all/both combinations is the subject of a compound tense the
auxiliary verb usually precedes all/both:
We are all waiting. You must both help me.
be is also placed before all/both except when it is used in short answers etc.:
We are all/both ready but
Who is ready? ~ We at! are/We both are. Other auxiliaries used alone and simple tenses of
ordinary verbs follow
all/both:
You all have maps. They both knew where to go.
D
each, like both, can be followed by of + these/those etc. (plural forms only). The of here
cannot be omitted:
each of the boys each of these each of us/you/them can, however, be replaced by pronoun
+ each;
each of you = you each
each of us = we each (subject), us each (indirect object)
each of them •= they each (subject), them each (indirect object)
We each sent in a report.
They gave us each a form to fill in. Note that each of us/you/them is singular:
Each of us has a map. But we/you/they each is plural:
We each have a map.
Verbs used with we/you/they each follow the patterns given in C above for all and both:
They have each been questioned.
49
A
B
neither, either
1 neither means 'not one and not the other'. It takes an affirmative
singular verb. It can be used by itself or followed by a noun or by of -+•
the/these/those/possessives or personal pronouns:
(a) I fried both keys but neither (of them) worked.
(b) Neither of them knew the way/Neither boy knew . . .
(c) I've read neither of these (books).
2 either means 'any one of two'. It takes a singular verb and, like
neither, can be used by itself or followed by a noun/pronoun or by of + the/these/those etc.
3 either + negative verb can replace neither + affirmative except when neither is the subject
of a verb. So either could not be used in (a) or (b) above but could in (c):
I haven't read either of these (books). Though either cannot be the subject of a negative verb,
it can be subject or object of an affirmative or interrogative verb:
Either (of these) would do.
Would you like either of these?
4 Pronouns and possessive adjectives with neither/either used of people should technically be
he/him, she/her and his/her, but in
colloquial English the plural forms are generally used:
Neither of them knows the way, do they? Neither of them had brought their passports.
neither . . . nor, either ... or
neither . . . nor + affirmative verb is an emphatic way of combining two negatives:
A Practical English Grammar
45
(a) Neither threats nor arguments had any affect on him.
(b) They said the room was large and bright but it was neither large nor bright.
(c) He neither wrote nor phoned.
either ... or + negative verb can replace neither . . . nor except when neither . . nor is the
subject of a verb, as in (a) above. So:
(b) . . . but it wasn 't either large or bright and
(c) He didn 't either write or phone.
either ... or cannot be the subject of a negative verb but can be the subject or object of
affirmative or interrogative verbs and is used in this way to express alternatives emphatically:
You can have either soup or fruit juice, (not both)
You fnusi either go at once or wait fill tomorrow.
It's urgent, so could, you either phone or telex?
(For either used in additions to remarks, see 112. For neither/nor followed by inversion, see
45,112.)
50
some, any, no and none (adjectives and pronouns)
A1
some and any mean ‘a certain number or amount'. They are used with :;^' or instead of plural
or uncountable nouns. (For some/any with singular nouns, see C below.)
some is a possible plural form of a/an and one:
Have a biscuit/some biscuits.
I ate a date/some dates.
some, any and none can be used with of + the/this/these/those/ possessives/personal
pronouns:
Some of the staff can speak Japanese.
Did any of your photos come out well?
2
some is used:
With affirmative verbs:
They bought some honey.
In questions where the answer 'yes' is expected:
Did some of you sleep on the floor? (I expect so.)
In offers and requests:
Would you like some wine?
Could you do some typing for me?
(See also C.)
any is used:
With negative verbs:
haven't any matches.
With hardly, barely, scarcely (which are almost negatives):
/ have hardly any spare time. With without when without any . . . = with no . . . :
He crossed the/rentier without any difficulty/with no difficulty. With questions except the types
noted above:
Have you got any money?
Did he catch any fish? After if/whether and in expressions of doubt:
I/you need any more money, please let me know.
! don't think there is any petrol in the tank. (See also C.)
B
no (adjective) and none (pronoun)
no and none can be used with affirmative verbs to express a negative:
/ have no apples. I had some last year but I have none this year. no + noun can be the
subject of a sentence:
No work was done.
No letterfs) arrived. none as the subject is possible but not very usual:
We expected letters, but none came. none + of, however, is quite usual as subject:
None of the tourists wanted to climb the mountain.
C
some or any used with singular, countable nouns
some here usually means 'an unspecified or unknown':
Some idiol parked his car outside my garage. or other can be added to emphasize that the
speaker isn't very
interested:
He doesn't believe in conventional medicine; he has some remedy or
other of his own. any can mean 'practically every', 'no particular (one)':
A Practical English Grammar
46
Any book about riding will tell you how to saadle a horse. Any dictionary will give you the
meaning of these words.
51
someone, somebody, something, anyone, anybody, anything, no one, nobody, nothing
A
Compounds with some, any and no follow the above rules:
Someone wants to speak So you on the phone. Someone/Somebody gave me a ticket/or the
pop concert. ~ No one/Nobody has ever given me a free ticket for anything. Do you want
anything from the chemist? Would anyone/anybody like a drink? Note also:
/ drink anything = / don't mind what I drink. Anyone will tell you where the house is. (See 50
C.)
someone, somebody, anyone, anybody, no one, nobody can be
possessive:
Someone's passport has been stolen. Is this somebody's/anybody's seat? I don't want to
waste anyone's time.
C Pronouns and possessive adjectives with someone, somebody, ",. anyonei anybody, no
one, nobody, everyone, everybody
These expressions have a singular meaning and take a singular verb so personal pronouns
and possessive adjectives should logically be he/she, him/her, his/her. However in colloquial
English plural forms are more common:
Has anyone left their luggage on the train?
No one saw Tom go out, did they? ,^i But with something, anything, nothing we still use it:
Something went wrong, didn't it?
else placed after someone/anybody/nothing etc.
. someone/somebody/something, anyone/anybody/anything, \",:, no one/nobody/nothing,
everyone/everybody/everything and ;„, the adverbs somewhere, anywhere, nowhere,
everywhere can
Al' be followed by else:
some one else/somebody else = some other person
anyone else/anybody else = any other person
no one else/nobody else = no other person
everyone else/everybody else = every other person
something else = some other thing
I'm afraid I can't help you. You'll have to ask someone else. ~
There isn 't anyone else/There's no one else to ask.
else used with adverbs:
somewhere else = in/at/to some other place
anywhere else = in/at/to any other place
nowhere else = in/at/to no other place
Are you going anywhere else?
someone/somebody, anyone/anybody, no one/nobody + else can
be possessive:
took someone else's coat.
Was anyone else's luggage opened?
No one else's luggage was opened.
53
another, other, others with one and some
A
another, other, others
Singular
Plural
Adjective
another
other
Pronoun
another
others
Have you met Bill's sisters? ~ I've met one. I didn't know he had another (sister). ~ Oh,
he has two others/two other sisters.
A Practical English Grammar
47
B
C
one . . . another/other(s), some . . . other(s)
One student suggested a play, another (student/other students/others wanted a
concert.
Some tourists/Some of the tourists went on the beach; others explored the town.
one another and each other
Tom and Ann looked at each other = Tom looked at Ann and Ann looked at Tom.
Both one another and each other can be used of two or more. but each other is frequently
preferred when there are more than two.
6 Interrogatives:
wh-? words and how?
54
Interrogative adjectives and pronouns
For persons:
who (pronoun)
whom, who (pronoun)
Possessive
whose (pronoun and adjective)
For things:
subject/object what (pronoun and adjective)
For persons or things when the choice is restricted:
subject/object
which (pronoun and adjective)
The same form is used for singular and plural.
what can also be used for persons (see 58 D).
55
subject
Object
Affirmative verb after who, whose etc. used as subjects
who, whose, which, what when used as subjects are normally followed by an affirmative,
not an interrogative, verb:
Who pays the bills? (affirmative verb)
Whose/Which horse won? (affirmative verb)
What happened?/What went wrong? (affirmative verb; possible answers: We missed the
train/had an accident.)
But with who, whose etc. + be + noun or personal/distributive pronoun, an interrogative verb
is used:
Who are you? Whose is this? What is that noise?
With who, whose etc. used as objects of a verb or preposition an interrogative verb is, of
course, necessary.
56
Examples of the use of who, whom, whose, which and what
A
who, whom, whose
who as subject:
Who keeps the keys? (affirmative verb)
Who took my gun? (affirmative verb)
Who are these boys? (interrogative verb)
who, whom as objects of a verb:
Normal English: Who did you see?
Very formal English: Whom did the committee appoint?
whose as subject:
Whose car broke down? (affirmative verb)
Whose (books) are these? (interrogative verb)
whose as object of a verb:
Whose umbrella did you borrow?
which
which as subject:
Which pigeon arrived first? (affirmative verb)
Which of them is the eldest? (affirmative verb) which as object of a verb:
Which hand do you use? Which of these dates would you prefer?
what
B
C
A Practical English Grammar
48
what as subject:
What caused the explosion? (affirmative verb)
What kind of tree is that? (interrogative verb)
what as object of a verb:
What paper do you read? What did they eat?
57
who, whom, which and what as objects of prepositions
A
B
who, whom
In formal English we use preposition + whom:
With whom did you go? To whom were you speaking?
But in ordinary English we usually move the preposition to the end of the sentence. The
whom then normally changes to who:
Who did you go with? Who were you speaking to?
which, what
In formal English we use preposition + which/what:
To which address did you send it?
On what do you base your theory?
In informal English we move the preposition to the end of the sentence:
Which address did you send it to?
What do you base your theory on?
58
Uses of what
A
what is a general interrogative used for things:
What bird is that? What makes that noise?
What country do you come from? What did he say?
B
what. . . for? means 'why?':
What did you da that for? = Why did you do that?
C
what + be ... like? is a request for a description and can be used for things or people:
What was the exam like? ~ It was very difficult.
What was the weather like? - If was very windy.
What's the food like in your hostel? - It's quite good.
Used of people it may concern either appearance or character:
He's short and fat and wears glasses.
He's a very talkative, friendly man.
what does he/she/it look like? concerns appearance only, and can also mean 'What does
he/she/it resemble?':
What does she look like? - She is tall and glamorous. She looks like a film star.
What does if look like? ~ It's black and shiny. It looks like coal.
D
what is he? means 'What is his profession?':
What is his/other? ~ He is a tailor.
what (adjective) used for persons is not common: What students are you talking about? is
possible, but Which students … ? would be much more usual.
E
what and how in questions about measurements
We can use what + age/depth/height/length/width but in conversation it would be more usual to say
how old/deep/high/tall/long/wide?
what size/weight? is usual when an exact answer is required, though how big/heavy? is also
possible.
What age are you?/What is your age/How old are you?
What height is he?/What is his height?/How tall is he?
What is the weight of the parcel?/How heavy is it?
What size do you take in shoes?
59
which compared with who and what
A
Examples of which and what used for things:
A Practical English Grammar
49
What will you have to drink?
There's gin, whisky and sherry: which will you have?
What does it cost to get to Scotland? — It depends on how you go. ~ Which (way) is
the cheapest or Which is the cheapest (way)?
I've seen the play and the film. ~ What did you think of them?
Which (of them) did you like best?
Examples of which and who used for people;
Who do you want to speak to? ~ I want to speak to Mr Smith. ~
We have two Smiths here. Which (a/them) do you want?
Which (pronoun) of people is not used alone as subject of a verb:
Which of you knows the formula? ('of you' is essential.)
Who knows the formula? would also be possible.
which (adjective) can be used of people when there is only a very slight idea of restriction:
Which poet (of all the poets) do you like best?
what would be possible here and would be more logical, but what (adjective) for people is
normally avoided.
60
A
2
Interrogative adverbs: why, when, where, how
why? means 'for what reason?':
Why was he late? ~ He missed the bus.
B when? means 'at what time?':
When do you get up? ~ 7 a.m.
C where? means 'in what place?':
Where do you live? ~ In London.
D how? means 'in what way?':
How did you come? ~ I came by plane.
How do you start the engine? ~ You press this button.
how can also be used:
1 With adjectives (see 25 C):
How strong are you? How important is this letter? (For how + old/high etc., see 58 E.)
With much and many:
How much (money) do you want? How many (pictures) did you buy?
3
With adverbs;
How fast does he drive?
How badly was he hurt?
How often do you go abroad?
How soon can you come?
Note that How is she? is an enquiry about her health, but What is she like? is a request for a
description. (See 58 C.)
Do not confuse How are you? with How do you do? When two people are introduced each
says How do you do? This is a greeting rather than a question. (See 126.)
61 ever placed after who, what, where, why, when, how
Where ever have you been? I've been looking for you everywhere!
Who ever told you I'd lend you the money? I've no money at all!
ever here is not necessary in the sentence but is added to emphasise the speaker's
surprise/astonishment/anger/irritation/dismay. It has the same meaning as on earth/in the
world.
Such sentences are always spoken emphatically and the intonation will convey the speaker's
emotion:
Why ever did you wash it in boiling water? (dismay)
Who ever are you? (The other person is presumably an intruder.)
Who ever left the door open? (What stupid person left it open?)
Where ever have you put my briefcase? (I can't find it anywhere.)
What ever are you doing in my car? (astonishment/annoyance)
When ever did you leave home? (You must have left very early.)
A Practical English Grammar
50
How ever did he escape unhurt? (The car was a complete wreck.)
Note also why ever not? and what ever for?:
You mustn't wear anything green. — Why ever not? (I can't understand the reason for this
prohibition.)
Bring a knife to class tomorrow. ~ What ever for? (I can't understand what I need a
knife for.)
(For whoever, whatever etc. written as one word, see 85.)
A Practical English Grammar
51
7
Possessives, personal and reflexive pronouns:
my, mine, I, myself etc.
62
Possessive adjectives and pronouns
Possessive adjectives
my
your
his/her/its
our
your
their
Possessive pronouns
mine
yours
his/hers
ours
yours
theirs
Note that no apostrophes are used here. Students should guard against the common mistake
of writing the possessive its with an apostrophe.
it's (with an apostrophe) means it is.
The old form of the second person singular can be found in some bibles and pre-twentieth
century poetry:
Thy
thine
one's is the possessive adjective of the pronoun one.
63
Agreement and use of possessive adjectives
A
Possessive adjectives in English refer to the possessor and not to the thing possessed.
Everything that a man or boy possesses is his thing;
everything that a woman or girl possesses is her thing:
Tom's father is his father but
Mary's father is her father.
Everything that an animal or thing possesses is its thing:
A tree drops its leaves in autumn.
A happy dog wags its tail.
But if the sex of the animal is known, his/her would often be used.
If there is more than one possessor, their is used:
The girls are with their brother.
Trees drop their leaves in autumn.
Note that the possessive adjective remains the same whether the thing possessed is singular
or plural:
my glove, my gloves his foot, his feet
Possessive adjectives are used with clothes and parts of the body:
She changed her shoes. He injured his back. (But see also 7 A6.)
To add emphasis, own can be placed after my, your, his etc. and after one's;
my own room her own idea
own can be an adjective, as above, or a pronoun:
a room of one's own
Note the expression:
I'm on my own = I'm alone.
B
C
64
Possessive pronouns replacing possessive adjectives + nouns
A
65
This is our room or This (room) is ours.
This is their car. That car is theirs too.
You've got my pen.
You're using mine. Where's your's?
The expression of mine etc. means 'one of my' etc.:
a friend of mine = one of my friends
a sister of hers = one of her sisters
Personal pronouns
A
Form
B
A Practical English Grammar
52
Singular:
Plural:
B
1
2
first person
second person
third person
first person
second person
third person
Subject
I
you
he/she/it
we
you
they
Object
me
you
him/her/it
us
you
them
The old form of the second person singular is:
thou (subject) thee (object)
Use of subject and object forms
you and it present no difficulty as they have the same form for subject and object:
Did you see the snake? - Yes, I saw it and it saw me. ~ Did if frighten you?
First and third person forms (other than it)
(a) I, he, she. we, they can be subjects of a verb:
I see it. He knows you. They live here.
or complements of the verb to be: It is I.
Normally, however, we use the object forms here:
Who is it? ~ It's me.
Where's Tom? ~ That's him over there.
But if the pronoun is followed by a clause, we use the subject forms:
Blame Bill! It was he who chose this colour.
b) me. him, her, us, them can be direct objects of a verb:
I saw her.
Tom likes them.
or indirect objects:
Bill found me a job.
Ann gave him a book. (See 66.)
or objects of a preposition:
with him
for her
without them
to us
66
The position of pronoun objects
A
An indirect object comes before a direct object:
I made Ann/her a cake. I sent Bill the photos.
However, if the direct object is a personal pronoun it is more usual to place it directly after the
verb and use to or for:
I made it for her.
I sent them to him. (See 88.)
The position rule does not apply to one, some, any, none etc.:
He bought one for Ann or He bought Ann one.
He gave something to Jack or He gave Jack something.
Pronoun objects of phrasal verbs
With many phrasal verbs a noun object can be either in the middle or at the end:
Hand your papers in/Hand in your papers.
Hang your coat up/Hang up your coat.
Take your shoes off/Take off your shoes.
A pronoun object, however, roust be placed in the middle:
hand them in hang it up take them off
(See chapter 38.)
B
67
Uses of it
A it is normally used of a thing or an animal whose sex we don't know, and sometimes
of a baby or small child:
Where's my map? I left it on the table.
Look at that bird. It always comes to my window.
Her new baby is tiny. It only weighs 2 kilos.
B
it can be used of people in sentences such as:
ANN (on phone): Who is that/Who is it?
BILL: It's me.
A Practical English Grammar
53
Is that Tom over there? ~ No, it's Peter.
C
D
1
2
it is used in expressions of time, distance, weather, temperature, tide:
What time is it? ~ It is six.
What's the date? ~ It's the third of March.
How far is it to York? ~ It is 400 kilometres.
How long does it take to get there? ~ It depends on how you go.
It is raining/snowing/freezing. It's frosty. It's a fine night.
It's full moon tonight. In winter it's/it is dark at six o'clock.
It is hot/cold/quiet/noisy in this room.
It's high tide/low tide.
Note also:
It's/It is three years since I saw him = I haven't seen him for three years. (See 188.)
(For it is time + subject + past tense, see also 293.)
Introductory it
it can introduce sentences of the following type ('cleft sentences'):
It was Peter who lent us the money, (not Paul)
It's 'today that he's going, (not tomorrow)
it is used even with a plural noun:
It's 'pilots that we need, wit ground staff. (See also 76.)
When an infinitive is subject of a sentence, we usually begin the sentence with it and put the
infinitive later; i.e. we say:
It is easy to criticise instead of
To criticise is easy.
It is better to be early instead of
To be early is better.
It seems a pity to give up now instead of
To give up now seems a pity.
If it + be is preceded by find/think (that), the be and the that can often by omitted:
He thought (that) it (would be) better to say nothing.
We found it impossible to get visas.
3
it can be used similarly when the subject of a sentence is a clause. It would be possible to
say:
That he hasn't phoned is odd.
That prices will go up is certain.
But it would be much more usual to say:
It's odd that he hasn't phoned.
It's certain that prices will go up.
Other examples:
It never occurred to me that perhaps he was lying.
It struck me that everyone was unusually silent.
E
it/this can represent a previously mentioned phrase, clause or verb:
He smokes in bed, though I don't like it. (it = his smoking in bed)
He suggested flying, but I thought it would cost too much. (it = flying)
F
it also acts as a subject for impersonal verbs:
it seems it appears it looks it happens
68
you, one and they as indefinite pronouns
A
you and one
As subjects, either can be used:
Can you/one camp in the forest?
As objects, you is the normal pronoun;
They/ins you for parking offences.
you is more common in ordinary conversation. It is a more 'friendly' pronoun and implies that
the speaker can imagine himself in such a position.
one is more impersonal and less often used, though the possessive one's is quite common:
It's easy to lose one's/your way in Venice.
The correct possessive form must be used:
A Practical English Grammar
54
One has to show one's pass at the door.
You have to show your pass at the door.
If instead of one or you we use a singular noun, the possessive adjective will obviously be
his or her:
One must do one's best.
A traveller has to guard his possessions.
B
they
they is used as subject only. they can mean 'people':
they say = people say, it is said
They say if is going to be a cold winter.
they can also mean 'the authority concerned', i.e. the government/ the local council/one's
employers/the police etc.;
They want to make this a one-way street.
69
Use of they/them/their with neither/either, someone/everyone/no one etc.
These expressions are singular and take a singular verb. Their personal pronouns therefore
should be he/she and the possessive adjectives should be his/her (he/his for males and
mixed sexes; she/her for females). But many native speakers find this troublesome and often
use they/their, even when only one sex is involved:
Neither of them remembered their instructions.
Would someone lend me their binoculars?
Everyone has read the notice, haven't they?
No one objected, did they? (See also 51 C.)
70
Reflexive pronouns
A These are: myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself, ourselves, yourselves,
themselves. Note the difference between the second person singular yourself, and
the second person plural yourselves. The indefinite reflexive/emphasising pronoun is
oneself.
B
myself, yourself etc. are used as objects of a verb when the action of the verb returns to the
doer, i.e. when subject and object are the same person:
I cut myself.
He can't shave himself.
It is not always easy to amuse oneself on holiday.
Tom and Ann blamed themselves for the accident.
This refrigerator defrosts itself.
Note the change of meaning if we replace the reflexive pronoun by the reciprocal pronoun each other:
Tom and Ann blamed each other. (Tom blamed Ann and Ann blamed Tom, See 53 C.)
C
myself, yourself etc. are used similarly after a verb + preposition:
He spoke to himself.
Did she pay for herself?
Look after yourself.
Take care of yourselves.
I'm annoyed with myself.
He sat by himself, (alone)
She addressed the envelope to herself.
But if the preposition indicates locality, we use the ordinary, not the reflexive, pronouns:
Did you take your dog with you?
They put the child between them.
Had he/Did he have any money on him?
A Practical English Grammar
55
71
myself, himself, herself etc. used as emphasising pronouns
myself etc. can also be used to emphasise a noun or pronoun:
The King himself gave her the medal.
self is then stressed in speech.
When used in this way the pronoun is never essential and can be omitted without changing the
sense. It usually emphasises the subject of the sentence and is placed after it:
Ann herself opened the door. Tom himself went.
Alternatively it can be placed after the object if there is one:
Ann opened the door herself
or after an intransitive verb:
Tom went himself.
If the intransitive verb is followed by a preposition + noun, the emphasising pronoun can be
placed after this noun:
Tom went to London himself or Tom himself went to London.
When it emphasises another noun it is placed immediately after it:
I saw Tom himself. I spoke to the President himself.
She liked the diamond itself but not the setting.
Note the difference between:
I did it myself (It was done by me and not by someone else) and
I did it by myself (I did it without help).
A Practical English Grammar
56
8
Relative pronouns and clauses
There are three kinds of relative clauses: defining (see 72-7), non-defining (78-81) and connective
(82).
71
Defining relative clauses
These describe the preceding noun in such a way as to distinguish it from other nouns of the
same class. A clause of this kind is essential to .the dear understanding of the noun. In the
sentence:
The man who told me this refused to give me his name
'who told me this' is the relative clause. If we omit this, it is not clear what man we are talking
about. Notice that there is no comma between a noun and a defining relative clause.
Defining relative clauses usually follow the + noun, but they can also be used with a/an +
noun, plural nouns without the and the pronouns all, none, anybody, somebody etc. and
those. Clauses following a/an + noun, plural nouns without the and somebody
/someone/something sometimes define their noun/pronoun only indirectly. The noun/pronoun
in these cases is usually the object of a verb or preposition:
I met someone who said he knew you.
The book is about a girl who falls in love with …
Sometimes these clauses are separated from their noun/pronoun by a "word or phrase:
'", There's a man here who wants . . .
I saw something in the paper which would interest you. But normally relative clauses should
be placed directly after their noun or pronoun:
The noise that he made woke everybody up.
She was annoyed by something that I had said.
72
Relative pronouns used in defining relative clauses
The forms are as follows:
For persons
That
for things
that
74
A
B
C
Subject
who
that
which
that
Object
whom/who
Possessive
whose
which
whose/of which
Defining relative clauses: persons
Subject: who or that
who is normally used:
The man who robbed you has been arrested.
The girls who serve in the shop are the owner's daughters.
Only those who had booked in advance were allowed in.
Would anyone who saw the accident please get in touch with the police?
But that is a possible alternative after all, everyone, everybody, no one, nobody and those:
Everyone who/that knew him liked him.
Nobody who/that watched the match will ever forget it.
Object of a verb: whom or who or that
The object form is whom, but this is considered very formal. In spoken English we normally
use who or that that being more usual than who), and it is still more common to omit the
object pronoun altogether:
The man whom I saw told me to come back today or
The man who I saw ... or The man that I saw …, or
The man I saw … (relative pronoun omitted)
The girls whom he employs are always complaining about their pay or
The girls who he employs ... or The girls that he employs ... or
The girls he employs. . .
With a preposition: whom or that
In formal English the preposition is placed before the relative pronoun, which must then be
A Practical English Grammar
57
put into the form whom:
the man to whom I spoke
In informal speech, however, it is more usual to move the preposition to the end of the clause,
whom then is often replaced by that, but it is still more common to omit the relative
altogether:
the man who/whom I spoke to or
the man that I spoke to or the man I spoke to
Similarly:
The man from whom I bought it told me to oil it or
D
75
The man who/that I bought it from … or
The man I bought it from…
The friend with whom I was travelling spoke French or
The friend who/that I was travelling with ... or
The friend I was travelling with…
Possessive
whose is the only possible form:
People whose rents have been raised can appeal.
The film is about a spy whose wife betrays him.
Defining relative clauses: things
A
Subject
Either which or that. which is the more formal:
This is the picture which/that caused such a sensation.
The stairs which/that lead to the cellar are rather slippery.
(See also B below.)
B
Object of a verb which or that. or no relative at all:
The car which/that I hired broke down or The car I hired …
C
which is hardly ever used after all, everything, little, much, none, no and compounds of
no, or after superlatives. Instead we use that, or omit the relative altogether, if it is the object
of a verb:
All the apples that fall are eaten by the pigs.
This is the best hotel (that) I know.
Object of a preposition
The formal construction is preposition + which, but it is more usual to move the preposition to
the end of the clause, using which or that or omitting the relative altogether:
The ladder on which I was standing began to slip or
The ladder which/that I was standing on began to slip or
The ladder I was standing on began to slip.
D
Possessive
whose + a clause is possible but with + a phrase is more usual:
a house whose walls were made of glass a house with glass walls
E
Relative adverbs: when, where, why
Note that when can replace in/on which (used of time):
the year when (= in which) he was born
the day when (= on which) they arrived
where can replace in/at which (used of place):
the hotel where (= in/at which) they were staying .
why can replace for which: The reason why he refused is …
when, where and why used in this way are called relative adverbs.
76
Cleft sentences: it + be + noun/pronoun + defining relative clause
It was Tom who helped us. (not Bill or Jack)
It was Ann that I saw. (not Mary)
When the object is a proper noun, as above, that is more usual than who. With all other
objects, that is the correct form:
A Practical English Grammar
58
It's the manager that we want to see.
It was wine that we ordered, (not beer)
that is usual for non-personal subjects:
It's speed that causes accidents, not bad roads.
77 A relative clause replaced by an infinitive or a participle
A
4
78
Infinitives can be used:
1 After the first/second etc. and after the last/only and sometimes after superlatives:
the last man to leave the ship = the last man who left/leaves the ship
the only one to understand = the only one who understood/understands
Notice that the infinitive here replaces a subject pronoun + verb. It could not be used to
replace an object pronoun + verb. For example the clause in the first man that we saw could
not be replaced by an infinitive, for the first man to see would have a completely different
meaning. If, however, that is the subject of a passive verb, e.g. the first man that was seen,
we can replace the clause by a passive infinitive: the first man to be seen.
2 When there is an idea of purpose or permission:
He has a lot of books to read. (books that he can/must read)
She had something to do. (something that she could do/had to do)
They need a garden to play in. (a garden they can play in)
Note that here the infinitive replaces a verb + relative pronoun as object.
It might be thought that these two uses of the infinitive would lead to confusion but in practice
this is very rare as the meaning of the infinitive is made clear by the rest of the sentence.
By itself the phrase the first man to see could mean either the first man that we must see
(man is the object) or the first man who saw (man is the subject), but when it is part of a
sentence we can see at once which meaning is intended:
The first man to see is Tom = The first man that we must see is Tow, while
The first man to see me was Tom = The first man who saw me was Tom.
B Present participles can be used:
1 When the verb in the clause is in the continuous tense:
People who are/were waiting/or the bus often shelter/sheltered in my doorway = People
waiting/or the bus often shelter/sheltered . . .
2 When the verb in the clause expresses a habitual or continuous action:
Passengers who travel/travelled on this bus buy/bought their tickets in books =
Passengers travelling …
Boys who attend/attended this school have/had to wear uniform = Boys attending …
a law which forbids/forbade the import = a law forbidding the import
a notice which warns/warned people = a notice warning people
an advertisement which urges/urged = an advertisement urging
Similarly:
a petition asking a letter ordering/demanding/telling
a placard protesting
placards protesting
3 When a verb in the clause expresses a wish, i.e. when the verb in the clause is wish,
desire, want, hope (but not like):
people who wish/wished to go on the tour = people wishing to go on the Sour
fans who hope/hoped for a glimpse of the star = fans hoping for a glimpse of the star
A non-defining clause (see 78 below) containing one of the above verbs, or any verb of
knowing or thinking, e.g. know, think, believe, expect, can be similarly replaced by a present
participle:
Peter, who thought the journey would take two days, said … = Peter, thinking the
journey would take two days, said…
Tom, who expected to be paid the following week, offered … = Tom, expecting to be
paid the following week, offered…
Bill, who wanted to make an impression on Ann. took her to … = Bill, wanting to make
an impression on Ann, took her to …
Non-defining relative clauses
A Practical English Grammar
59
A Non-defining relative clauses are placed after nouns, which are definite already. They
do not therefore define the noun, but merely add something to it by giving some more
information about it. Unlike defining relative clauses, they are not essential in the
sentence and can be omitted without causing confusion. Also unlike defining relatives,
they are separated from their noun by commas. The pronoun can never 'be omitted in a
non-defining relative clause. The construction is fairly formal and more common in
written than in spoken English.
B Relative pronouns used in non-defining relative clauses:
Subject
Object
Possessive
For persons
For things
79
who
which
whom/who
which
whose
whose/of which
Non-defining relative clauses: persons
A
Subject: who
No other pronoun is possible. Note the commas:
My neighbour, who is very pessimistic, says there will be no apples this year.
Peter, who had been driving all day, suggested stopping at the next town.
Clauses such as these, which come immediately after the subject of the main verb, are found mainly
in written English. In spoken English we would be more likely to say:
My neighbour is very pessimistic and says . . .
Peter had been driving all day, so/and he suggested . . .
But clauses placed later in the sentence, i.e. clauses coming after the object of the main verb,
are quite common in conversation:
I've invited Ann, who lives in the next flat.
Clauses following a preposition + noun are also common:
I passed the letter to Peter, who was sitting beside me.
B
Object: whom, who
The pronoun cannot be omitted, whom is the correct form, though who is sometimes used in
conversation:
Peter, whom everyone suspected, turned out to be innocent.
As noted above, a non-defining clause in this position is unusual in spoken English. We
would be more likely to say:
Everyone suspected Peter, but he turned out to be innocent.
But non-defining clauses coming later in the sentence, i.e. after the object of the main verb or
after a preposition + noun, are common in conversation:
She wanted Tom, whom she liked, as a partner; but she got Jack.
whom she didn't like. She introduced me to her husband, whom I hadn 't met before.
C
Object of a preposition: whom
The pronoun cannot be omitted. The preposition is normally placed before whom:
Mr. Jones, for whom I was working, was very generous about overtime payments.
It is however possible to move the preposition to the end of the clause. This is commonly
done in conversation, and who then usually takes the place of whom:
Mr. Jones, who I was working/or, . . .
If the clause contains an expression of time or place, this will remain at the end:
Peter, with whom I played tennis on Sundays, was fitter than me.
could become
Peter, who/whom I played tennis with on Sundays, was fitter than me.
D
Possessive: whose
Ann, whose children are at school all day, is trying to get a job.
This is George, whose class you will be taking.
In conversation we would probably say:
Ann's children are at school all day, so she . . .
This is George. You will be taking his class.
80
all, both, few, most, several, some etc. + of + whom/which
This form can be used for both people and things. See examples below. For each a more
A Practical English Grammar
60
informal equivalent is given in brackets:
Her sons, both of whom work abroad, ring her up every week.(Both her sons work
abroad, but they ring her up every week.)
He went with a group a/people, few of whom were correctly equipped for such a climb.
(He went with a group of people; few of them . . .)
The buses, most of which were already full, were surrounded by an angry crowd. (Most
of the buses were full, and/but they were surrounded by an angry crowd.)
I met the fruit-pickers, several of whom were university students. (I met the fruit-pickers;
several of them were . . .)
I picked up the apples, some of which were badly bruised. (I picked up the apples;
some of them . . .)
The house was full of boys, ten of whom were his own grandchildren. (The house was
full of boys; ten of them . . .)
81
Non-defining relative clauses: things
A
Subject: which
that is not used here:
That block, which cost £5 million to build, has been empty for years. The 8.15 train, which is
usually very punctual, was late today.
In speech we would be more likely to say:
That block cost £5 million to build and has been empty for years. The 8.15 train is usually
punctual; but it was late today.
Object: which
that is not used here, and the which can never be omitted:
She gave me this jumper, which she had knitted herself or
She gave me this jumper; she had knitted if herself.
These books, which you can get at any bookshop, will give you alt the information you
need or
These books will give you all the information you need. You can get them at any
bookshop.
Object of a preposition
The preposition comes before which, or (more informally) at the end of the clause:
Ashdown Forest, through which we 'II be driving, isn 't a forest any longer or
Ashdown Forest, which we 'II be driving through, isn 'I a forest any longer.
His house, for which he paid £10,000, is now worth £50,000 or
His house, which he paid £10.000 for, is now . . .
B
C
D
E
82
which with phrasal verbs
Combinations such as look after, took forward to, put up with (see chapter 38) should be
treated as a unit, i.e. the preposition/adverb should not be separated from the verb:
This machine, which I have locked after/or twenty years, is still working perfectly.
Your inefficiency, which we have Rut up with far too long, is beginning to annoy our
customers.
Possessive: whose or of which
whose is generally used both for animals and things. of which is possible for things, but is
unusual except in very formal English.
His house, whose windows were all broken, was a depressing sight.
The car, whose handbrake wasn't very reliable, began to slide backwards.
Connective relative clauses
The pronouns are who, whom, whose, which. Commas are used as with non-defining
clauses. Connective clauses do not describe their nouns but continue the story. They are
usually placed after the object of the main verb:
I told Peter, who said it wasn't his business
or after the preposition + noun:
I threw the ball to Tom, who threw it to Ann.
A Practical English Grammar
61
They can be replaced by and/but + he/she etc.:
I threw the ball to Tom and he threw it . . .
I fold Peter, but he said . . .
Sometimes it may be difficult to say whether a clause in this position is non-defining or connective,
but there is no need for students to make this distinction, as the two forms are the same. More
examples of connective clauses:
He drank beer, which made him fat = He drank beer and it made him fat.
We went with Peter, whose car broke down before we were halfway there =
We went with Peter but his car broke down before we were halfway there.
We can use one/two etc., few/several/some etc. + of + whom/which as shown in 80:
I bought a dozen eggs, six of which broke when I dropped the box.
He introduced me to his boys, one of whom offered to go with me.
The lorry crashed into a queue of people, several of whom had to hare hospital
treatment.
which can also stand for a whole clause:
The clock struck thirteen, which made everyone laugh.
He refused to do his share of the chores, which annoyed the others.
(His refusal annoyed them.)
The rain rattled on the roof alt night, which kept us awake.
She was much kinder to her youngest child than she was to the others, which made the
others jealous.
83
what (relative pronoun) and which (connective relative)
what = the thing that/the things that:
What we saw astonished us = The things that we saw astonished us.
When she sees what you have done she will be furious = When she sees the damage
that you have done she will be furious.
Be careful not to confuse the relative what with the connective relative which. Remember that
which must refer to a word or group of words in the preceding sentence, while what does not
refer back to anything. The relative what is also usually the object of a verb, while the
connective which is usually the subject:
He said he had no money, which was not true.
Some of the roads were flooded, which made our journey more difficult. (See also 82.)
84
The importance of commas in relative clauses
Remember that a defining relative clause is written without commas. Note how the meaning
changes when commas are inserted:
(a) The travellers who knew about the floods took another road.
(b) The travellers, who knew about the floods, took another road.
In (a) we have a defining relative clause, which defines or limits the noun travellers. This sentence
therefore tells us that only the travellers; who knew about the floods took the other road, and
implies that there where other travellers who did not know and who took the flooded road.
In (b) we have a non-defining clause, which does not define or limit the noun it follows. This sentence
therefore implies that all the travellers ^ blew about the floods and took the other road.
(c) The boys who wanted to play football were disappointed when it rained.
(d) The boys, who wanted to play football, were disappointed . . .
Sentence (c) implies that only some of the boys wanted to play football. There were presumably
others who didn't mind whether it rained or not. Sentence (d) implies that all the boys wanted to
play and all were disappointed,
(e) The wine which was in the cellar was ruined.
(f) The wine, which was in the cellar, was ruined.
Sentence (e) implies that only some of the wine was ruined. Presumably some was kept elsewhere
and escaped damage. Sentence (f) states that all the wine was in the cellar and ruined.
85
whoever, whichever, whatever, whenever, wherever, however
A Practical English Grammar
62
A
B
C
D
These have a variety of meanings and can introduce relative and other clauses. The other
clauses do not technically belong to this chapter but it seems best to group these -ever forms
together.
whoever (pronoun) and whichever (pronoun and adjective) can mean 'the one who', 'he
who', 'she who':
Whoever gains the most points wins the competition.
Whichever of them gains the most/mints wins.
Whichever team gains the most points wins.
Whoever gets home first starts cooking the supper.
Whichever of us gets home first starts cooking.
Whoever cleans your windows doesn 't make a good Job of it.
whatever (pronoun and adjective), whenever, wherever:
You can eat what/whatever you like. (anything you like)
When you are older you can watch whatever programme you like.
My roof leaks when/whenever it rains, (every time it rains)
You will see this product advertised everywhere/wherever you go.
Go anywhere/wherever you like.
whoever, whichever, whatever, whenever, wherever, however can mean 'no matter who'
etc.:
If I say 'heads, I win; tails you lose', I will win whatever happens or whichever way the
coin falls.
Whatever happens don't forget to write.
I'll find him, wherever he has gone. (no matter where he has gone)
whatever you do is often placed before or after a request/command to emphasize its
importance:
Whatever you do, don't mention my name.
however is an adverb of degree and is used with an adjective or another adverb:
I'd rather have a room of my own, however small (it is), than share a room.
However hard I worked, she was never satisfied.
whatever, wherever can indicate the speaker's ignorance or indifference:
He lives in Wick, wherever that is. (I don't know where it is, and
I'm not very interested.)
He says he's a phrenologist, whatever that is. (I don't know what it is and I'm not very
interested.)
who ever? when ever? what ever? etc. may be written as separate words, but the meaning
then changes (see 61):
I lost seven kilos in a month. ~ How ever did you lose so much in such a short time?
BILL (suspiciously): / know all about you.
TOM (indignantly): What ever do you mean?
Where ever did you buy your wonderful carpets?
A Practical English Grammar
63
9 Prepositions
86
Introduction
Prepositions are words normally placed before nouns or pronouns (but see 87 about possible
alternative positions). Prepositions can also be followed by verbs but, except after but and
except, the verb must be in the gerund form:
He is talking of emigrating.
They succeeded in escaping.
The student has two main problems with prepositions. He has to know (a) whether in any construction
a preposition is required or not, and (b) which preposition to use when one is required.
The first problem can be especially troublesome to a European student, who may find that a
certain construction in his own language requires a preposition, whereas a similar one in
English does not, and vice versa: e.g. in most European languages purpose is expressed by
a preposition + infinitive; in English it is expressed by the infinitive only:
I came here to study.
The student should note also that many words used mainly as prepositions can also be used
as conjunctions and adverbs. Where this is the case it will be pointed out in the following
paragraphs.
87
Alternative position of prepositions
A Prepositions normally precede nouns or pronouns. In two constructions, however, it is
possible in informal English to move the preposition to the end of the sentence:
In questions beginning with a preposition + whom/which/what/whose/where:
To whom were you talking? (formal)
Who were you talking to? (informal)
In which drawer does he keep it? (formal)
Which drawer does he keep it in? (informal)
It used to be thought ungrammatical to end a sentence with a preposition, but it is now
accepted as a colloquial form. Similarly in relative clauses, a preposition placed before
whom/which (can be moved to the end of the clause. The relative pronoun is then often
omitted:
the people with whom I was travelling (formal)
the people I was travelling with (informal)
the company from which I hire my TV set (formal)
the company I hire my TV set from (informal)
B
But in phrasal verbs the preposition/adverb remains after its verb, so the formal type of
construction is not possible, the children I was looking after could not be rewritten with after +
whom and Which bridge did they blow up? could not be rewritten with up + which.
88
Omission of to and for before indirect objects
A1
B
A sentence such as I gave the book to Tom could also be expressed
I gave Tom the book, i.e. the indirect object can be placed first and the preposition to omitted.
We can use this construction with the following verbs: bring, give, hand, lease (in a will), lend,
offer, pass (= hand), pay, play (an instrument/piece of music), promise, sell, send, show, sing,
take, tell (= narrate, inform):
I showed the map to Bill = I showed Bill the map.
They sent £5 to Mr Smith = They sent Mr Smith £5.
2 Similarly I'll find a job for Ann could be expressed I'll find Ann a job (putting the
indirect object first and omitting for). This construction is possible after book, build, buy,
cook, (bake, boil, fry etc.). fetch, find, get, keep, knit, leave, make, order, reserve:
I'll get a drink for you = I'II get you a drink.
I bought a book for James = I bought James a book.
Normally either construction can be used. But:
1 The construction without preposition is preferred when the direct object is a phrase or
a clause:
Tell her the whole story.
A Practical English Grammar
64
C
89
Show me what you've got in your hand.
2 The construction with preposition is preferred:
(a) When the indirect object is a phrase or a clause:
We kept seats for everyone on our list/for everyone who had paid.
I had to show my pass to the man at the door.
(b) When the direct object is it or them. Sentences such as They kept it for Mary, She made
them for Bill, We sent it to George cannot be
expressed by a verb + noun + pronoun construction.
If the indirect object is also a pronoun (I sent it to him) it is sometimes possible to reverse the
pronouns and omit to (I sent him if), but this cannot be done with for constructions and is
better avoided.
This restriction does not apply to other pronoun objects:
He gave Bill some.
He didn't give me any.
He bought Mary one.
I'll show you something.
promise, show, tell can be used with indirect objects only, without to:
promise us
show him
tell him
read, write can be used similarly, but require to:
read to me
write to them
play, sing can be used with to or for:
play to us
play for us
sing to us
sing for us
Use and omission of to with verbs of communication
Verbs of command, request, invitation and advice, e.g. advise, ask, beg, command, encourage,
implore, invite, order, recommend, remind, request, tell, urge, warn, can be followed directly
by the person addressed (without to) + infinitive:
They advised him to wait.
I urged her to try again. (See 244.)
The person addressed (without to) can be used after advise, remind, tell, warn with other
constructions also:
He reminded them that there were no trains after midnight.
They warned him that the ice was thin/warned him about the ice
But note that recommend (= advise) when used with other constructions needs to before the
person addressed:
He recommended me to buy it but He recommended it to me.
He recommended me (for the post) would mean 'He said I was suitable'.
When ask is used with other constructions the person addressed is often optional. The
preposition to is never used here:
He asked (me) a question.
He asked (me) if I wanted to apply.
She asked (her employer) for a day off.
call (= shout), complain, describe, explain, grumble, murmur, mutter, say, shout, speak,
suggest, talk, whisper need to before the person addressed, though it is not essential to
mention this person:
Peter complained (to her) about the food.
She said nothing (to her parents).
He spoke English (to them).
shout at can be used when the subject is angry with the other person:
He shouted at me to get out of his way.
compare with He shouted to me which means he raised his voice because I was at a distance.
90 Time and date: at, on, by, before, in
A at, on
at a time:
at dawn at six at midnight
at 4.30 .
at an age:
at sixteen/at the age of sixteen
She got married at seventeen.
on a day/date:
A Practical English Grammar
65
on Monday
on 4 June
on Christmas Day
Exceptions
at night
at Christmas, at Easter (the period, not the day only)
on the morning/afternoon/evening/night of a certain date:
We arrived on the morning of the sixth.
It is also, of course, possible to say:
this/next Monday etc., any Monday, one Monday
B
by, before
by a time/date/period = at that time or before/not later than that date. It often implies 'before
that time/date':
The train starts at 6.10, so you had better be at the station by 6.00.
by + a time expression is often used with a perfect tense, particularly the future perfect (see
216):
By the end a/July I'll have read all those books.
before can be preposition, conjunction or adverb:
Before signing this . . . (preposition)
Before you sign this . . . (conjunction)
I've seen him somewhere before. (adverb) (See 195 B, 342.)
C
on time, in time, in good time
on time = at the time arranged, not before, not after:
The 8.15 train started on time. (It started at 8.15.)
in time/in time for + noun = not late; in good time (for) = with a comfortable margin:
Passengers should be in time for their train.
I arrived at the concert hall in good time (for the concert). (Perhaps the concert began
at 7:30 and I arrived at 7:15.)
D
on arrival, on arriving, on reaching, on getting to
on arrival/on arriving, he . . . = when he arrives/arrived, he ...
on can also be used similarly with the gerund of certain other verbs (chiefly verbs of
information):
On checking, she found that some of the party didn't know the way.
On hearing/Hearing that the plane had been diverted, they left the airport.
The on in the last sentence could be omitted. (See 277.)
E
at the beginning/end, in the beginning/end, at first/at last
at the beginning (of)/at the end (of) = literally at the beginning/end:
At the beginning of a book there is often a table of contents.
At the end there may be an index.
in the beginning/at first = in the early stages. It implies that later on there was a change:
In the beginning/At first we used hand tools. Later we had machines.
in the end/at last = eventually/after some time:
At first he opposed the marriage, but in the end he gave his consent.
91
Time: from, since, for, during
from, since and for
from is normally used with to or till/until:
Most people work from nine to five
from can also be used of place:
Where do you come from?
since is used for time, never for place, and means 'from that time to the time referred to'. It is
often used with a present perfect or past perfect tense (see 185-8,194).
He has been here since Monday, (from Monday till now)
He wondered where Ann was. He had wit seen her since their quarrel.
since can also be an adverb (see 37, 185-8):
He left school in 1983. I haven't seen him since.
since can also be a conjunction of time:
He has worked for us ever since he left school.
It is two years since I last saw Tom = last saw Tom two years ago/I haven't seen Tom
for two years.
A Practical English Grammar
66
(For since with other types of clause, see 338.)
for is used of a period of time: for six years, for two months,
for ever:
Bake it/or two hours.
He traveled in the desert for six months.
For + a period of time can be used with a present perfect tense or past perfect tense for an
action which extends up to the time of speaking:
He has worked here for a year. (He began working here a year ago and still works here.)
for used in this way is replaceable by since with the point in time when the action began:
He has worked here since this time last year.
during and for
during is used with known periods of time, i.e. periods known by name, such as Christmas,
Easter or periods which have been already refilled:
during the Middle Ages during 1941
during the summer (of that year)
during his childhood
during my holidays
The action can either last the whole period or occur at some time within period:
It rained all Monday but stopped raining during the night. (at some point of time)
He was ill for a week, and during that week he ate nothing.
for (indicating purpose) may be used before known periods:
I went there/I hired a car/I rented a house for my holidays/for the summer.
;
for has various other uses:
He asked for £5.
I Raid £1 for it.
I bought one for Tom. (See 88.)
for can also be a conjunction and introduce a clause (see 330).
92
A
93
Time: to, till/until, after, afterwards (adverb)
to and till/until
to can be used of time and place; till/until of time only.
We can use from ... to or from . . . till/until:
They worked from five to ten/from five till ten. (at five to ten would mean 'at 9:55'.)
But if we have no from we use till/until, not to:
Let's start now and work till dark. (to would not be possible here.)
till/until is often used with a negative verb to emphasize lateness:
We didn't get home till 2 a.m.
He usually pays me cm Friday but last week he didn't pay me till the following Monday.
till/until is very often used as a conjunction of time:
We 'II stay here fill it stops raining.
Go on till you come to the level crossing.
But note that if 'you come to' is omitted, the till must be replaced by to:
Go on to the level crossing.
B after and afterwards (adverb)
after (preposition) must be followed by a noun, pronoun or gerund:
Don't bathe immediately after a meal/after eating.
Don't have a meal and bathe immediately after it.
If we do not wish to use a noun/pronoun or gerund, we cannot use after, but must use
afterwards (= after that) or then:
Don't have a meal and bathe immediately afterwards.
They bathed and afterwards played games/played games afterwards or
They bathed and then played games.
afterwards can be used at either end of the clause and can be modified by soon,
immediately, not long etc.:
Soon afterwards we got a letter.
We got a letter not long afterwards.
after can also be used as a conjunction:
After he had tuned the piano it sounded quite different.
Travel and movement: from, to, at, in, by, on, into, onto, off, out, out of
A Practical English Grammar
67
A
B
We travel from our starting place to our destination:
They flew/drove/cycled/walked from Paris to Rome.
When are you coming back to England?
We also send/post letters etc. to people and places. (But see note on home below.)
arrive at/in, get to, reach (without preposition)
We arrive in a town or country, at or in a village, at any other destination:
They arrived in Spain/in Madrid.
I arrived at the hotel/at the airport/at the bridge/at the crossroads.
get to can be used with any destination, and so can reach:
He got to the station just in time for his train.
I want to get to Berlin be fore dark.
They reached the top of the mountain before sunrise.
get in (in = adverb) can mean 'arrive at a destination'. It is chiefly used of trains:
What time does the train gel in? (reach the terminus/our station)
Note also get there/back (there, back are adverbs).
home
We can use a verb of motion etc. + home without a preposition:
I took us an hour to get home.
They went home by bus.
But if home is immediately preceded by a word or phrase a preposition is necessary:
She returned to her parents' home.
We can be/live/stay/work etc. at home, at + . . . + home or in + . . . + home. But in cannot
be followed directly by home:
You can do this sort of work at home or at/in your own home.
Transport: by, on, get in/into/on/onto/off/out of
We can travel by car (but in the/my/Tom's car), by bus/train/plane/helicopter/hovercraft etc.
and by sea/air. We can also travel by a certain route, or by a certain place (though via is
more usual):
We went by the M4.
We went via Reading.
We can walk or go on foot. We can cycle or go on a bicycle or by bicycle. We can ride or go
on horseback.
We get into a public or private vehicle, or get in (adverb).
We get on/onto a public vehicle, or get on (adverb).
But we go on board a boat (= embark).
We get on/onto a horse/camel/bicycle.
We get out of a public or private vehicle, or get out (adverb).
We get off a public vehicle, a horse, bicycle, etc., or get off (adverb).
get in/into/out/out of can also be used of buildings, institutions and countries instead of
go/come/return etc. when there is some difficulty in entering or leaving, in and out here are
used as adverbs.
I've lost my keys! How are we going to get into the flat/to get in? (adverb)
The house is on fire! We had better get out! (adverb)
It's difficult to get into a university nowadays.
F Giving directions: at, into, to etc. (prepositions), along, on (prepositions and
adverbs) and till (conjunction):
Go along the Strand till you see the Savoy on your right.
The bus stop is just round the comer.
Turn right/left at the Post Office/at the second traffic lights.
Go on (adverb) past the post office.
Turn right/left into Fleet Street.
Take the first/second etc. turning on/to the right or on/to your right.
Go on (adverb) to the end of the road. (till could not be used here.)
You will find the bank on your left halfway down the street.
When you come out of the station you will find the bank opposite you/in front of you.
Get out (of the bus) at the tube station and walk on (adverb) till you come to a pub.
Get off (the bus! and walk back (adverb) till you come to some traffic lights.
Be careful not to confuse to and till (see 92 A).
A Practical English Grammar
68
94
at, in; in, into; on, onto
A
at and in
(For arrive at/in, see 93 B.)
at
We can be at home, at work, at the office, at school, at university, at an address, at a certain
point e.g. at the bridge, at the crossroads, at the bus-stop.
in
We can be in a country, a town, a village, a square, a street, a room, a forest, a wood, a field,
a desert or any place which has boundaries or is enclosed.
But a small area such as a square, a street, a room, a field might be used with at when we mean 'at
this point' rather than 'inside'.
We can be in or at a building, in means inside only; at could mean inside or in the grounds or
just outside. If someone is 'at the station' he could be in the street outside, or in the ticket
office/waiting room/restaurant or on the platform.
We can be in or at the sea, a river, lake, swimming pool etc.
in here means actually in the water:
The children are swimming in the river.
at the sea/river/lake etc. means 'near/beside the sea'. But at sea means 'on a ship'.
B
in and into
in as shown above normally indicates position.
into indicates movement, entrance:
They climbed into the lorry.
I poured the beer info a tankard.
Thieves broke info my house/My house was broken into.
With the verb put, however, either in or into can be used:
He put his hands in/into his pockets.
in can also be an adverb:
Come in = Enter. Get in (into the car).
C
on and onto
on can be used for both position and movement:
He was sitting on his case.
Snow fell on the hills.
His name is on the door.
He went on board ship.
onto can be used (chiefly of people and animals) when there is movement involving a
change of level:
People climbed onto their roofs. We lifted him onto the table.
The cat jumped onto the mantelpiece.
on can also be an adverb:
Go on. Come on.
95
above, over, under, below, beneath etc.
A
above and over
above (preposition and adverb) and over (preposition) can both mean 'higher than' and sometimes
either can be used:
The helicopter hovered above/over us.
Flags waved above/over our heads.
But over can also mean 'covering', 'on the other side of’, 'across' and ‘from one side to the
other':
We put a rug over him.
He lives over the mountains.
There is a bridge over the river.
all over + noun/pronoun can mean 'in every part of:
He has friends all over the world.
above can have none of these meanings.
over can mean 'more than' or 'higher than'.
above can mean 'higher than' only.
Both can mean 'higher in rank'. But He is over me would normally mean ‘He is my immediate
superior', 'He supervises my work', above would
Bot necessarily have this meaning.
A Practical English Grammar
69
we have a bridge over a river, above the bridge means 'upstream'.
over can be used with meals/food/drink:
They had a chat over a cup of tea. (while drinking tea)
in the combination take + a time expression + over + noun/pronoun,
over can mean 'to do/finish' etc.:
He doesn't fake long over lunch/to eat his lunch.
He took ages over the job. (He took ages to finish it.)
above can also be an adjective or adverb meaning 'earlier' (in a book, article etc.):
the above address (the previously mentioned address)
see B above (the previously mentioned section B)
B
C
D
below and under
below (preposition and adverb) and under (preposition) can both mean 'lower than' and
sometimes either can be used. But under can indicate contact:
She put the letter under her pillow.
The ice crackled under his feet.
With below there is usually a space between the two surfaces:
They live below us. (We live on the fourth floor and they live on the third.)
Similarly: We live above them. (See A above.)
below and under can mean 'junior in rank'. But He is under me implies that I am his
immediate superior, below does not necessarily have this meaning.
(Both over and under can be used as adverbs, but with a change of meaning,)
beneath can sometimes be used instead of under, but it is safer to keep it for abstract
meanings:
He would think it beneath him to tell a lie. (unworthy of him)
She married beneath her. (into a lower social class)
beside, between, behind, in front of, opposite
Imagine a theatre with rows of seats: A, B, C etc.. Row A being nearest the stage.
Row A
Row B
Tom
Mary
Stage
Ann
Bob
Bill
Jane
This means that:
Tom is beside Ann; Mary is beside Bob etc.
Ann is between Tom and Bill; Bob is between Mary and Jane.
Mary is behind Tom; Tom is in front of Mary.
But if Tom and Mary are having a meal and Tom is sitting at one side of the table and Mary at
the other, we do not use in front of, but say:
Tom is sitting opposite Mary or Tom is facing Mary.
But He stood in front of me could mean either 'He stood with his back to me' or 'He faced me'.
People living on one side of a street will talk of the houses on the other side as the houses
opposite (us) rather than the houses in front of us. With other things, however, these
restrictions do not apply:
She put the plate on the table in front of him.
She sat with a book in front of her.
Where's the bank? - There it is, just in front of you!
There's a car-park in front of/at the back of the hotel.
E Don't confuse beside with besides.
beside = at the side of:
We camped beside a lake.
besides (preposition) = in addition to/as well as:
I do all the cooking and besides that I help Tom.
Besides doing the cooking I help Tom.
besides (adverb) means (a) 'in addition to that/as well as that':
I do the cooking and help Tom besides
F
and (b) 'in any case/anyway':
We can't afford oysters. Besides, Tom doesn't like them. (See 327.)
between and among
between normally relates a person/thing to two other people/things,
A Practical English Grammar
70
but it can be used of more when we have a definite number in mind;
Luxembourg lies between Belgium, Germany and France.
among relates a person/thing to more than two others; normally we have no definite number
in mind:
He was happy to be among friends again.
a village among She hills
with could also be used instead of among in the last sentence above.
Also, of course, with a singular object:
He was with a friend.
Examples of other uses:
He cut it with a knife.
Don't touch it with bare hands.
The mountains were covered with snow.
I have no money with me/on me.
He fought/quarreled with everyone.
In descriptions:
the girl with red hair
the boy with his hands in his pockets
the man with his back to the camera/with his feet on his desk
but and except (prepositions)
These have the same meaning and are interchangeable.
but is more usual when the preposition + object is placed immediately rafter
nobody/none/nothing/nowhere etc;
Nobody but Tom knew the way.
Nothing but the best is sold in our shops.
except is more usual when the preposition phrase comes later in the sentence:
Nobody knew the way except Tom
and after all/everybody/everyone/everything/everywhere etc.
but is more emphatic than except after anybody/anything/anywhere etc.:
You can park anywhere but/except here. (You can't park here.)
but and except take the bare infinitive (see 98).
For but for in conditional sentences, see 226. For but as a conjunction, see 326.)
96 Prepositions used with adjectives and participles
Certain adjectives and past participles used as adjectives can be followed by a preposition +
noun/gerund. (For verbs + prepositions, see 97.)
Usually particular adjectives and participles require particular prepositions. Some of these are
given below; others can be found by consulting a good dictionary, which after any adjective
will give the prepositions that can be used with it.
about, at, for, in, of, on, to, with used with certain adjectives and participles:
absorbed in
involved in
according to
keen on
accustomed to (see 163)
liable for/to
afraid of (27 B, 271)
nervous of
anxious for/about (27 C)
owing to (27 A)
ashamed of
pleased with
aware of (27 P)
prepared for
bad at/for
proud of
capable of
ready for
confident of
responsible for/to
due to/for (27 A)
scared of
exposed to
sorry for/about (27 B)
fit for
successful in
fond of
suspicions of
frightened of/at
terrified of
good at/for
tired of
interested in
used to (163)
A Practical English Grammar
71
He was absorbed in his book.
She is afraid/frightened/scared of the dark.
According to Tom it's 2.30. (Tom says it's 2:30.)
He is bad/good at chess, (a bad/good player)
Running is bad/good for you. (unhealthy/healthy)
They are very keen on golf.
Drivers exceeding the speed limit are liable to a fine.
The management is not responsible for articles left in customers' cars.
I'm sorry for your husband. (I pity him.)
I'm sorry for forgetting the tickets.
I'm sorry about the tickets.
(For good/kind etc. + of, It was kind of you to wait, see 26 B.)
97 Verbs and prepositions
A large number of verb + preposition combinations are dealt with in chapter 38. But there are
a great many other verbs which can be followed by prepositions and some of these are listed
below. More can be found in any good dictionary.
accuse sb of
insist on
apologize (to sb) for
live on (food/money)
apply to sb/for sth
long for
ask for/about
object to
attend to
occur to
beg for
persist in
believe in
prefer sb/sth to sb/sth
beware of
prepare for
blame sb for
punish sb for
charge sb with (an offence)
quarrel with sb about
compare sth with
refer to
comply with
rely on
conform to
remind sb of
consist of
resort to
deal in
succeed in
depend on
suspect sb of
dream of
think of/about
fight with sb for
wait for
fine sb for
warn sb of/about
hope/or
wish for
Do you believe in ghosts?
They were charged with receiving stolen goods.
You haven't complied with the regulations.
For a week she lived on bananas and milk.
It never occurred to me to insure the house.
They persisted in defying the Saw.
When arguments failed he resorted to threats.
Notice also feel like + noun/pronoun = feel inclined to have something:
Do you feel like a drink/a meal/a rest?
feel like + gerund = feet inclined to do something:
I don't feel like walking there.
(For like used in comparisons, see 21 G-I,)
Passive verbs can of course be followed by by + agent; but they can also be followed by
other prepositions:
The referee was booed by the crowd.
The referee was booed for his decision/for awarding a penalty.
98 Gerunds after prepositions
A Practical English Grammar
72
A
It has already been stated in 86 that verbs placed immediately after prepositions must be in
the gerund form:
He left without paying his bill.
I apologize/or not writing before.
She insisted on paying/or herself.
Before signing the contract, read the small print.
(See also 259.)
A few noun + preposition + gerund combinations may also be noted:
There's no point in taking your car if you can't park.
What's the point of taking your car if you can't park?
Is there any chance/likelihood of his changing his mind?
Have you any objection to changing your working hours?
I am in favour of giving everyone a day off.
B
The only exceptions to the gerund rule are except and but (preposition), which take the bare
infinitive:
I could do nothing except agree.
He did nothing but complain.
However, if but is used as a conjunction, it can be followed directly by either full infinitive or
gerund:
Being idle sometimes is agreeable, but being idle all the time might become
monotonous.
To be idle sometimes is agreeable, but to be idle all the time etc.
99 Prepositions/adverbs
Many words can be used as either prepositions or adverbs:
He got off the bus at the comer. (preposition)
He got off at the comer. (adverb)
The most important of these are above, about, across, along, before, behind, below,
besides, by, down, in, near, off, on, over, past, round, since, through, under, up:
They were here before six. (preposition)
He has done this sort of work before. (adverb)
Peter is behind us. (preposition)
He's a long way behind. (adverb)
She climbed over the wall. (preposition)
You 'II have to climb over too. (adverb)
When the meeting was over the delegates went home. (adverb; here over = finished)
The shop is just round the comer. (preposition)
Come round (to my house) any evening. (adverb)
He ran up the stairs. (preposition)
He went up in the lift. (adverb)
Many of these words are used to form phrasal verbs (see chapter 38):
The plane took off. (left the ground)
He came round. (recovered consciousness)
10
Introduction to verbs
100 Classes of verbs
A
B
There are two classes of verbs in English:
The auxiliary verbs (auxiliaries): to be, to have, to do; can, could, may, might, must,
ought, shall, should, will, would; to need, to dare and used.
All other verbs, which we may call ordinary verbs:
to work to sing to pray
be, have, do, need and dare have infinitives and participles like ordinary verbs, but can,
could, may, might, must, ought, shall, should, will and would have neither infinitives nor
participles and therefore have only a restricted number of forms. (For used, see 162 A.)
A Practical English Grammar
73
Before studying auxiliaries it may be helpful to consider ordinary verbs, most of whose tenses are
formed with auxiliaries.
Ordinary verbs
101
Principal parts of the active verb
Affirmative
to work
Present infinitive
Negative
not to work
Present continuous infinitive to be working
not to be working
Perfect infinitive
Perfect continuous infinitive
to have worked
to have been working
not to have worked
not to have been working
Present participle and gerund working
working
Perfect participle and gerund
Past participle
having worked
worked
not
not having worked
In regular verbs the simple past and the past participle are both formed by adding d or ed to
the infinitive. Sometimes the final consonant of the infinitive has to be doubled, e.g. slip,
slipped (see spelling rules, 355). For irregular verbs, see 364.
The present participle and gerund are always regular and are formed by adding ing to the
infinitive. The rule concerning the doubling of the final consonant of the infinitive before
adding ing applies here also (see spelling rules, 355).
102
Active tenses
A
Form
Present
Past
Future
Present
Perfect
A Practical English Grammar
simple
continuous
perfect
perfect continuous
simple
Continuous
perfect
perfect continuous
simple
continuous
perfect
perfect continuous
conditional
conditional continuous
conditional
conditional continuous
he works (see 172)
he is working (164)
he has worked (182)
he has been working (190)
he worked (175)
he was working (178)
he had worked (194)
he had been working (197)
he will work (207)
he will be working (211)
he will have worked (216)
he will have been working (216)
he would work (219)
he would be working (219)
he would have worked (220)
he would have been working
74
B
Affirmative contractions
The auxiliaries be, have, will, would are contracted as follows:
am
'm
have 've
will
'II
is
's
has
's
would 'd
are
're
had
'd
Note that 's can be is or has and 'd can be had or would:
He's going = He is going.
He's gone = He has gone.
He'd paid = He had paid.
He'd like a drink = He would like a drink.
These contractions are used after pronouns, here, there, some question words (see 104),
and short nouns:
Here's your pen. The twins've arrived.
The car'd broken down.
Affirmative contractions are not used at the end of sentences:
You aren't in a hurry but I am. (I'm would not be possible here.)
shall/should, was and were are not written in a contracted form but are often contracted in
speech to /∫l, ∫ĕd, wĕz/ and /wĕ(r)/.
C
Stress
Auxiliaries used to form tenses are normally unstressed. The stress falls on the main verb.
103
Negatives of tenses
A The simple present tense: third person singular does not/doesn't + infinitive; other persons do
not/don't + infinitive.
The simple past tense negative for all persons is did not/didn't + infinitive.
Contractions are usual in speech:
He does not/doesn't answer letters.
They do not/don't live here.
I did not/didn't phone her.
She did not/didn't wait/or me.
The negative of all other tenses is formed by putting not after the auxiliary.
Contractions are usual in speech:
He has not/hasn't finished.
He would not/wouldn't come.
B
Negative contractions
The auxiliaries be, have, will, would, shall, should, do are contracted
as follows:
am not
'm not
is not
isn’t or 's not
are not
aren't or 're not
I'm not going and Tom isn't going/Tom's not going.
We aren't going/We're not going.
have not and has not contract to haven't and hasn't, but in perfect tenses 've not and 's
not are also possible:
We haven't seen him/We've not seen him.
He hasn't/He 's not come yet.
will not contracts to won't, though 'll not is also possible, shall not contracts to shan't:
I won't go/I'll not go till I hear and I shan't hear till tomorrow.
Other verb forms are contracted in the usual way by adding n't.
Negative contractions can come at the end of a sentence:
I saw it but he didn't.
C In English a negative sentence can have only one negative expression in it. Two negative
expressions give the sentence an affirmative meaning:
Nobody did nothing means that everyone did something.
So never, no (adjective), none, nobody, no one, nothing, hardly, hardly ever etc. are used
with an affirmative verb. We can say:
A Practical English Grammar
75
He didn't eat anything or He ate nothing.
He doesn't ever complain or He never complains.
We haven't seen anyone or We have seen no one.
They didn't speak much or They hardly spoke at all/They hardly ever spoke.
104
Interrogative for questions and requests
A
Simple present tense interrogative: does he/she/it + infinitive;
do I/you/we/they + infinitive.
Simple past tense interrogative: did + subject •+• infinitive.
Does Peter enjoy parties?
Did he enjoy Ann's party?
In all other tenses the interrogative is formed by putting the subject after the auxiliary:
Have you finished?
Are you coming?
B
Contractions of be, have, will, would, shall, should and do in
the interrogative
After how, what, who, where, why, the above auxiliaries can be contracted as shown in 102:
How will/How 'II he get there?
What has/What's happened?
After when, is and will can be contracted:
When is/When's he coming?
C
1
2
3
D
After which, will can be contracted:
Which will/Which 'II you have?
When the verb comes first as in A above, it is not written in contracted form except in
negative interrogative forms- But in speech it is usually contracted.
The interrogative form is used for questions, but it is not used:
When the question is about the identity of the subject:
Who told you? What happened?
In indirect speech:
He said, ‘Where does she live?' = He asked where she lived.
If we place before the question a prefix such as Do you know. Can you tell me, I want to
know, I'd like to know, I wonder/was wondering, Hare you any idea, Do you think:
What time does it start? but Have you any idea what time if starts?
Where does Peter live? but I wonder where Peter lives.
Will I have to pay duty on this? but Do you think I'll have/Do you know if I'll have to pay
duty?
Requests are usually expressed by the interrogative:
Can/Could you help me? Will/Would you pay at the desk?
Would you like to come this way?
Would you mind moving your car?
But here again, if before the request we put a phrase such as I wonder/was wondering or Do
you think, the verb in the request changes from interrogative to affirmative:
Could you give me a hand with this? but
I wonder/was wondering/wondered if you could give me a hand or
Do you think you could give me a hand?
F
In indirect speech the problem does not arise, as indirect requests are expressed by a verb
such as ask with object + infinitive:
He asked me to give him a hand.
E The interrogative is used in question tags after a negative verb:
You didn't see him, did you? (See 110.)
When, for emphasis, words/phrases such as never, rarely, seldom, only when, only by, not
only, not till are placed first in a sentence the following main verb is put into the inverted (=
interrogative) form:
Only when we landed did we see how badly the plane had been damaged. (See 45.)
A Practical English Grammar
76
105
Negative interrogative
A
This is formed by putting not after the ordinary interrogative:
Did you not see her?
coming?
Is he not
But this form is almost always contracted:
Didn't you see her?
Isn't he coming?
Note that not is now before the subject.
am I not? has an irregular contraction: aren't I?
The negative interrogative is used when the speaker expects or hopes for an affirmative
answer:
Haven't you finished yet?
Don't you like my new dress?
CHILD : Can't I stay up till the end of the programme?
I could wait ten minutes. ~ Couldn't you wait a little longer?
The negative interrogative is also used in question tags after an affirmative sentence:
You paid him, didn't you?
She would like to come, wouldn't she? (See 110.)
Auxiliary verbs
106 Auxiliaries and modal auxiliaries
Principal auxiliaries
to be
to have
to do
ought
shall
will
Modal auxiliaries
can
could
may
might
must
had to
Semi-modals
to need
to dare
used
should
would
Auxiliaries help to form a tense or an expression, hence the name.
They combine with present or past participles or with infinitives to form the tenses of ordinary
verbs:
I am coming.
He has finished.
I didn't see them.
They combine with infinitives to indicate permission, possibility, obligation, deduction etc. as will be
shown in the following chapters:
He can speak French.
You may go.
We must hurry.
107
Auxiliaries: forms and patterns
A
be, have and do (the principal auxiliaries)
Infinitive Present tense Past tense Past
participle
to be
to have
to do
1
am. is, are
have, has
do, does
was
had
did
been
had
done
In the negative and interrogative, be and do follow the auxiliary pattern:
Negative, verb + not:
He isn't coming. It did not matter.
Interrogative, subject + verb:
Was he waiting? Does she see us?
A Practical English Grammar
77
2
have normally follows the auxiliary pattern:
Has he (got) to go?
but sometimes uses do/did forms:
Does he have to go?
3
4
5
be takes the full infinitive:
They are to wait for us at the station.
have takes the full infinitive except in two constructions (see 119 A. 120).
do takes the bare infinitive: Did he write?
be, have and do, when used as auxiliaries, require a participle or infinitive, though in
answers, comments etc. this is often understood but not mentioned:
Have you seen it? ~ Yes, I have (seen it).
be (see 115), have and do can also be used as ordinary verbs with independent meanings;
i.e. have can mean 'possess' (see 122), do can mean 'perform/occupy oneself’ etc. (see
126).
be or have or do can then be the only verb in a sentence:
He is lazy. He has no job. He does nothing.
do is then conjugated with do/did:
What do you do in the evenings?
and have can be conjugated in either way:
Have you (got) time?/Do you have time?
B
can, could, may, might, must, ought, will, would, shall and should (the modal auxiliaries)
Modal verbs have no final 9 in the third person singular:
I must, he must
I can, he can
They always form their negative and interrogative according to the auxiliary pattern:
will not
ought not. . .
will he . . . ?
ought he . . . ?
They have no proper past tenses; four past forms exist, could, might should, would, but
they have only a restricted use. Modal verbs have no infinitives or participles and therefore
cannot be used in the continuous tenses. All modal verbs except ought are followed by the
bare infinitive:
You should pay but You ought to pay. A modal verb always requires an infinitive, though
sometimes this is understood but not mentioned:
Can you understand? — Yes, lean (understand).
', need, dare and used (the semi-modals)
. When used as auxiliaries, need and dare can conform to the modal
' pattern. They then take the bare infinitive:
He need not wait.
But they can also use the do/did forms, and then take the full infinitive with to:
He doesn't dare to interrupt. They didn't need to wait. (See 149.)
need and dare can also be used as ordinary verbs, and are then inflected and have the usual
participles:
He needs help. They dared me to jump.
', used, sometimes referred to as used to. is used only in the past. For its negative and
interrogative it usually follows the auxiliary pattern:
/ used not/usedn't to go.
But though technically used has no infinitive, the forms didn't use to and did he/she etc. use
to? are quite often heard.
Use of auxiliaries in short answers, agreements etc.
Auxiliaries are extremely important in conversation because in short answers, agreements,
disagreements with remarks, additions to remarks etc. we use auxiliaries instead of repeating
the original verb.
108 Auxiliaries in short answers
Questions requiring the answer yes or no, i.e. questions such as Do you smoke? or Can you
ride a bicycle?, should be answered by yes or no and the auxiliary only. The original subject,
if a noun, is replaced by a pronoun. Pronoun subjects may change as shown:
A Practical English Grammar
78
Do you smoke? ~ Yes, I do (not Yes, I smoke). Is that Ann? - Yes, it is/No it isn't. Did the
twins go? ~ Yes, they did/No, they didn't. Will there be an exam? — Yes, there will/No, there
won't. If there is more than one auxiliary in the question, the first should be used in the
answer:
Should he have gone? ~ Yes, he should. Questions with must I/he etc. or need I/he etc. are
answered Yes, you/he etc. must or No, you/he etc. needn't:
Must I/Need I take all these pills? ~ Yes, you must/No, you
needn't. (See 147.) An answer with yes or no without the auxiliary would be less polite.
109
Agreements and disagreements with remarks
A
Agreements with affirmative remarks are made with yes/so/of course + + affirmative auxiliary.
If there is an auxiliary in the first verb this is repeated. If there is no auxiliary do, does or did is
used:
He works too hard. ~ Yes, he does.
There may be a strike. ~ Yes, there may.
Living in London will be expensive. - (Yes.) of course it will.
That's Ann! ~ Oh, so it is.
B Disagreements with negative remarks are made with yes/oh yes +• affirmative auxiliary. The
auxiliary is stressed here-/ won't have to Ray. ~ Oh yes, you 'will! My alarm didn 't ring', ~ Oh
yes, it 'did! There isn't any salt in this. — Yes, there 'is. Bread won't make me fat. — Oh yes. it
'will.
C
Agreements with negative remarks are made with no + negative auxiliary:
It wouldn't take long to get there. ~ No, it wouldn't. I haven't paid you yet. ~ No, you haven't. The boys
mustn't be late. ~ No, theymustn't. The door can't have been locked. ~ No, it can't.
D
Disagreements with affirmative remarks are expressed by no/oh no + negative auxiliary:
Ann'll lend it to you. ~ Oh no, she won't.
Peter gets up too late. ~ No, he doesn't.
There is plenty of time. ~ No, there isn't.
Prices are coming down. ~ Oh no, they aren't.
but can be used when disagreeing with an assumption. The assumption may be expressed
by a question:
Why did you travel first class? ~ But I didn't!
110 Question tags
These are short additions to sentences, asking for agreement or confirmation.
After negative statements we use the ordinary interrogative:
You didn't see him, did you?
Ann can't swim, can she?
That isn't Tom. is it?
After affirmative statements we use the negative interrogative:
Peter helped you, didn't he?
Mary was there, wasn't she?
Negative verbs in the tags are usually contracted.
Irregular: I'm late, aren't I?
Note that let's has the tag shall: Let's go, shall we?
The subject of the tag is always a pronoun.
Examples of question tags after negative statements:
Peter doesn't smoke, does he?
Ann isn't studying music, is she?
Bill didn't want to go, did he?
James wasn't driving the car, was he?
You haven't ridden a horse for a long time, have you?
The twins hadn't seen a hovercraft be/we, had they?
They couldn't understand him, could they?
There wasn't enough time, was there?
A Practical English Grammar
79
People shouldn't drop litter an pavements, should they?
Ann hasn't got colour TV, has she?
Note that statements containing words such as neither, no (adjective), none, no one, nobody,
nothing, scarcely, barely, hardly, hardly ever, seldom are treated as negative statements and
followed by an ordinary interrogative tag:
No salt is allowed, is it?
Nothing was said, was it?
Peter hardly ever goes to parties, does he?
When the subject of the sentence is anyone, anybody, no one, nobody, neither we use the
pronoun they as subject of the tag:
I don't suppose anyone will volunteer, will they?
No one would object, would they?
Neither of them complained, did they?
Question tags after affirmative statements
With the simple present tense we use don't/doesn't? in the tag. With the simple past tense we use
didn't?
Edward lives here, doesn't he?
You found your passport, didn't you?
After all other tenses we just put the auxiliary verb into the negative interrogative:
Mary's coming tomorrow, isn't she?
Peter's heard the news, hasn't he?
Remember that 's = is or has, and 'd = had or would:
Peter'd written before you phoned, hadn't he?
Mary 'd come if you asked her, wouldn't she?
You'd better change your wet shoes, hadn't you?
The boys'd rather go by air, wouldn't they?
With everybody, everyone, somebody, someone we use the pronoun they:
Everyone warned you, didn't they?
Someone had recognized him, hadn't they?
Negative interrogative tags without contractions are possible but the word order is different:
You saw him, did you not?
This is a much less usual form.
D
Intonation
When question tags are used the speaker doesn't normally need information but merely
expects agreement. These tags are therefore usually said with a falling intonation, as in
statements. Sometimes, however, the speaker does want information. He is not quite sure
that the statement is true. and wants to be reassured. In this case the question tag is said
with a rising intonation and the important word in the first sentence is stressed, usually with a
rise of pitch. (See Structure Drills 1, 11-13.)
111
Comment tags
A These are formed with auxiliary verbs, just like question tags, but after an affirmative
statement we use ah ordinary interrogative tag; after a negative statement we use a negative
interrogative tag. A comment tag can be added to an affirmative statement. It then indicates that
the speaker notes the fact.
You saw him, did you? = Oh, so you saw him.
You've found a job, have you? = Oh, so you've found a job.
Comment tags can also be spoken in answer to an affirmative or negative statement:
I'm living in London now. ~ Are you?
I didn't pay Paul. ~ Didn't you?
When used in this way the tag is roughly equivalent to Really! or Indeed!
B The chief use of these tags is to express the speaker's reaction to a statement. By the tone of
his voice he can indicate that he is interested, not interested, surprised, pleased, delighted,
angry, suspicious, disbelieving etc.
The speaker's feelings can be expressed more forcibly by adding an auxiliary:
I borrowed your car. ~ Oh, you did, did you?
I didn't think you'd need it. ~ Oh, you didn't, didn't you?
A Practical English Grammar
80
i.e. before an ordinary interrogative we use an affirmative auxiliary verb, before a negative
interrogative we use a negative verb.
Again, the meaning depends on the tone of voice used. The speaker may be very angry,
even truculent; but the form could also express admiration or amusement.
112
Additions to remarks
Affirmative additions to affirmative remarks can be made by subject + auxiliary + too/also or
by so + auxiliary + subject, in that order. If there is an auxiliary in the first remark, it is
repeated in the addition:
Bill would enjoy a game and Tom would too/so would Tom.
If there is no auxiliary, do/does/did is used in the addition; i.e. instead of saying Bill likes golf
and Tom likes golf (too) we can say Bill likes golf and Tom does too/so does Tom.
The additions can, of course, be spoken by another person:
The boys cheated! ~ The girls did too!/So did the girls!
I'm having a tooth out tomorrow. ~ So'm I!
When both remarks are made by the same person, both subjects are usually stressed. When they are
made by different people the second subject is stressed more strongly than the first.
Affirmative additions to negative remarks are made with but + subject + auxiliary:
Bill hasn't got a license. ~- But Donald has.
She doesn't eat meat but her husband does.
The horse wasn't hurt but the rider was.
Negative additions to affirmative remarks are made with but + subject + negative auxiliary:
He likes pop music but I don't.
You can go but I can't.
Peter passed the test but Bill didn't.
Negative additions to negative remarks are made with neither/nor + auxiliary + subject:
Tom never goes to concerts, neither does his wife.
Ann hasn't any spare time. ~ Neither/Nor have I.
I didn't get much sleep last night. ~ Neither/Nor did I.
These additions can also be made with subject + negative auxiliary + either:
He didn't like the book; I didn't either.
They don't mind the noise; we don't either.
Alternatively, we can use the whole verb + object, if there is one, + either:
I didn't like it either. We don't mind it either.
A Practical English Grammar
81
11
be, have, do
be as an auxiliary verb
113
Form and use in the formation of tenses
A Form
Principal parts: be, was, been Gerund/present participle: being
Present tense:
Affirmative
Negative
Interrogative
lam/I'm
I am nut/I'm not
am!? you are/you're
you are not/you're m! are you?
he is/he's
he is not/he's not
is he? she is/she's
she is not/she's not
is
she? it is/il's
it is not/it's nut
is if? we are/we're
we are not/we're not
are
we? you are/you're
ynu are not/you're not are you? they are/they're they are
not/they're not are they?
Alternative negative contractions: you aren't, he isn't etc. Negative interrogative: am I
not/aren't f? we you not/aren't you? is he not/isn't he? etc.
Past tense:
Affirmative
Negative
Interrogative
/ was
I was not/wasn't
was I? you were
ym were not/weren't
were you?
he/she/it was
he/she/it was not/wasn't was he/she/it? we were
me were
not/weren't
were we? you were
you were not/weren't
were you? they were
they were not/weren 'i were they?
Negative interrogative: was I not/wasn't I? were you not/weren't you? was he not/wasn't he?
etc.
The forms are the same when be is used as an ordinary verb. Other tenses follow the
rules for ordinary verbs. But be is not normally used in the continuous form except in
the passive and as shown in 115 B.
114 Use to form tenses
• fae is used in continuous active forms: He is working/will be working etc., and in all passive
forms: He was followed/is being/allowed.
Note that be can be used in the continuous forms in the passive:
• Active: They are carrying him. Passive: He is being carried.
'(For be used in the continuous with adjectives, see 115 B.)
^te + infinitive
The be + infinitive construction, e-g, / am to go, is extremely important and can be used in the
following ways:
To convey orders or instructions:
No one is to leave this building without the permission of the police.
(no one must leave)
, He is to stay here till we return, (he must stay) '. This is a rather impersonal way of giving
instructions and is chiefly used
•..With the third person. When used with you it often implies that the , speaker is passing on
instructions issued by someone else. The ,'' difference between (a) Stay here, Tom and fb)
You are to stay here, Tom ;„ is that in (a) the speaker himself is ordering Tom to stay, while in
(b) he
' may be merely conveying to Tom the wishes of another person. ^'.This distinction
disappears of course in indirect speech, and the be +
infinitive construction is an extremely useful way of expressing > indirect commands,
particularly when the introductory verb is in ;' the present tense:
'.:.'. He says, 'Wait fill I come.' = i He says that we are to wait till he comes.
, or when there is a clause in front of the imperative:
; He said, 'If I fall asleep at the wheel wake me up.' =
~. He said that if he fell asleep at the wheel she was to wake him up.
;'' It is also used in reporting requests for instructions:
,'. •. 'Where shall I put it, sir?' he asked =
.',., , He asked where he was to put it. (See also 318 B.)
A Practical English Grammar
82
;' To convey a plan:
'•',, She is to be married next month.
;'.- The expedition is to start in a week's time.
^ilis construction is very much used in newspapers:
'^•^ The Prime Minister is to make a statement tomorrow. ^,;"1 headlines the verb be is often
omitted to save space:
?'•'' Prime Minister to make statement tomorrow. ^Sast forms:
ij,^!' He was to go. (present infinitive) ^ He was to have gone. (perfect infinitive)
The first of these doesn't tell us whether the plan was carried out or not. The second is used
for an unfulfilled plan, i.e. one which was not
carried out:
The Lord Mayor was to have laid the foundation stone but he was
taker, ill last night so the Lady Mayoress is doing it instead.
B was/were + infinitive can express an idea of destiny:
He received a blow on the head. It didn't worry him at the time hut it was to be very troublesome
later, (turned out to be/proved
troublesome) They said goodbye, little knowing that they were never to meet again.
(were destined never to meet)
C be about + infinitive expresses the immediate future:
They are about to start. (They are just going to start/They are on
the point of starting.) just can be added to make the future even more immediate:
They are just about to leave.
Similarly in the past:
He was just about to dive when he saw the shark. be on the point of + gerund has the same meaning
as be about + infinitive, but is a shade more immediate.
be as an ordinary verb
Form: as for be used as an auxiliary (see 113 A).
115
be to denote existence, be + adjective
A be is the verb normally used to denote the existence of, or to give information about, a person
or thing:
Tom is a carpenter.
The dog is in the garden.
Malta is an island.
The roads were rough and narrow.
Gold is a metal.
Peter was tall and fair.
B be is used to express physical or mental condition:
/ am hot/cold. He was excited/calm. They will be happy/unhapfy.
With certain adjectives, e.g. quiet/noisy, good/bad, wise/foolish, it is possible to use the continuous
form of be, e.g. Tom is being foolish, lo imply that the subject is showing this quality at this
time. Compare ToW is being foolish, which means Tom is talking or acting foolishly now, with
Tom is foolish, which means that Tom always acts or talks foolishly. Similarly, The children are
being quiet means they are playing quietly now, but The children are quiet might mean that
they usually play quietly.
Other adjectives include:
annoying
generous/mean cautious/rash
helpful/unhelpful ': clever/stupid
irritating difficult
mysterious economical/extravagant optimistic/pessimistic
formal
polite funny
selfish/unselfish
... With some of these, e.g. stupid, difficult, funny, polite, the continuous " form may imply that
the subject is deliberately acting in this way:
You are being stupid may mean You are noi trying to understand.
He is being difficult usually means He is raising unnecessary 'objections.
He is being funny usually means He is only joking. Don't ' believe him.
She is just being polite probably means She is only pretending to '(C admire your car/ciothes/house
etc.
beis used for age:
How old are you? ~ I'm ten/I am ten years old. (not I'm ten years}
How old is the tower? ~ It is 400 years old. (years old must be used
A Practical English Grammar
83
when giving the age of things.)
Size and weight are expressed by be:
tier How tall are you?/What is your height? ~ I am 1'65 metres. \ How high are we flow? We're about 20,000 feet. ;'; What is your weight? or What do you weigh/How much do you
weigh? ~ I am 65 kilos or / weigh 65 kilos.
be is used for prices:
How much is this melon? or What does this melon cost? -~ It's £1. ^ The best seats are (=
cost) £25.
I. Ignore is/are, there was/were etc.
When a noun representing an indefinite person or thing is the subject of l.'tfie verb be we
normally use a there + be + noun construction. We |;can say A policeman is at the door but
There is a policeman at the door
Juld be more usual.
te that, though there appears to be the subject, the real subject is ' noun that follows the verb,
and if this noun is plural the verb must plural too:
There are two policemen at the door.
the above sentences both constructions (noun + be and there + J|yfc + noun) are possible.
But when be is used to mean exist/happen/ ^•rtt place the there construction is necessary:
There is a mistake/There are mistakes in this translation.
ese sentences could not be rewritten A mistake is/Mistakes are etc.
In the following examples (R) is placed after the example when the there construction is
replaceable by noun/pronoun + verb:
There have been several break-ins this year.
There will be plenty of room for everyone.
There were hundreds of people on the beach. (R)
B there can be used similarly with someone/anyone/no one/iSmnething etc.:
There's someone on the phone for you. (R)
C there + be + something/nothing/anything + adjective is also
possible:
/s there anything wrong (with your car)? (R) ~
No, there's nothing wrong with it. (R) There's something odd/strange about this letter.
D A noun or someone/something etc. could be followed by a relative clause:
There's a film I want to see. There's something I must say.
or by an infinitive:
There's nothing to do. (nothing that we can do/must do; see 250)
E The there construction can be used with another auxiliary + be:
There must be no doubt about this. There may be a letter for me. or with seem •+• be,
appear •+• be:
There seems to be something wrong here.
F there used as above is always unstressed.
Be careful not to confuse there used in this way with there, stressed,
used as an adverb:
^There's a man I want to see. (He is standing by the door.)
Compare with:
There's a man I want to see. (This man exists.)
117
1
it is and there is compared
For uses of it is, see 67. Some examples may help to prevent confusion between the two
forms:
it is + adjective; there is + noun:
It is foggy or There is a fog.
It was very wet or There was a lot of rain.
It won't be very sunny or There won't be much sun.
2 it is, there is of distance and time:
It is a long way to York.
A Practical English Grammar
84
There is a long way still to go. (We have many miles still to go.) It is time to go home. (We
always start home at six and it is six, now -i There is time for us to go home and come back
here again before the film starts. (That amount of time exists.)
3 it is, used for identity, and there is + noun/pronoun:
There is someone at the door. I think ii's the man to read the mete ft' There's a key here. Is it
the key of the safe?
• it is, used in cleft sentences (see 67 D). and there is:
It is the grandmother who makes the decisions, (the grandmother, not any other member of the
family)
... and there's the grandmother, who lives in the granny-flat. ', , (the grandmother exists)
have as an auxiliary verb
A
Form and use in the formation of tenses
Form
Principal parts; have, had, had
Gerund/present participle: having
Present tense:
Affirmative
Negative
Interrogative
have/I've
I have not/haven't
haw I?
you have/you 've
you have not/haven't
haveyw? fe^ he has/he's
he has
nnt/hasn 't
has he?
has/she's
she has not/hasn't
has she? I 'f.it has/it's
it has not/hasn't
has it? ta'- we have/we've
we have not/haven't
have we?
you have/you 're
you have nut/haven't
have you?
they have/they've
they have not/haven't have they?
Alternative negative contractions (chiefly used in perfect tenses): I've not, \ you've not, he's not
etc.
Negative interrogative; have I not/haven't I? have you not/haven't you? I 'has he not/hasn 't
he? etc.
Past tense:
Affirmative: had/'d for all persons
Negative: had not/hadn't for all persons
'interrogative: had I? etc.
Negative interrogative: had I not/hadn't I? etc.
pther tenses follow the rules for ordinary verbs.
Uae to form tenses K'httve is used with the past participle to form the following tenses:
Present perfect: / have worked.
Past perfect: / had worked.
Future perfect: / will/shall have worked.
Perfect conditional: I would/should have worked.
119
have + object + past participle
A This construction can be used to express more neatly sentences of the type 'I employed
someone to do something for me'; i.e. instead of saying / employed someone to clean my car
we can say / had my car cleaned, and instead of I got a man to sweep my chimneys ('got' here
= paid/persuaded etc.), we can say / had my chimneys swept. Note that this order of words, i.e.
have •+• object + past participle, must be observed as otherwise the meaning will be changed:
He had his hair cut means he employed someone to do it, but He had cut his hair means that
he cut it himself some time before the time of speaking (past perfect tense).
When have is used in this way the negative and interrogative of its present and past tenses
are formed with do:
Do you have your windows cleaned every month? ~ I don't have them cleaned; I clean them
myself.
He was talking about having central heating put in. Did he have it put in in the end? It can
A Practical English Grammar
85
also be used in continuous tenses:
I can't ask you to dinner this week as I am having my house painted at the moment.
While I was having my hair done the police towed away my car.
The house is too small and he is having a room built on. get can be used in the same way as
have above but is more colloquial. get is also used when we mention the person who
performs the action:
She got him to dig away the snow. (She paid/persuaded him
to dig etc.)
(have with a bare infinitive can be used in the same way, e.g. She had him dig away the
snow, but the get construction is much more usual in British English.)
B The have + object + past participle construction can also be used colloquially to replace a
passive verb, usually one concerning some accident or misfortune:
His fruit was stolen before he had a chance to pick it can be replaced by
He had his fruit stolen before he had a chance to pick it, and
Two of his teeth were knocked out in the fight can be replaced by
He had two of his teeth knocked out. It will be seen that, whereas in A above the subject is
the person who orders the thing to be done, here the subject is the person who suffers as a
result of the action. The subject could be a thing:
The houses had their roofs ripped off by the gale. get can also replace have here:
The cat got her tail singed through sifting too near the fire. (The
cat's tail was singed etc.)
had better + bare infinitive
had here is an unreal past: the meaning is present or future:
I had/I'd better ring him at once/tomorrow. (This would be a good
thing to do/the best thing to do.) ,*' The negative is formed with not after better:
You had belter not miss the last bus. (It would be unwise to miss it, .:H or I advise/warn you
not to miss it.) '';; had here is usually contracted after pronouns and in speech is •i sometimes
so unstressed as to be almost inaudible. l^had better is not normally used in the ordinary
interrogative, but is ^.sometimes used in the negative interrogative as an advice form:
Hadn 't you better ask him first? =
Wouldn 't it be a good thing to ask him first?
you had better is a very useful advice form:
You had better fly. (It would be best for you to fly, or I advise t1 you to fly.)
In indirect speech had better with the first or third person remains I^Bnchanged; had better with the
second person can remain unchanged fi. Or be reported by advise + object + infinitive:
He said, 'I'd better hurry' = He said (that) he 'd better hurry. ^ He said, 'Ann had better hurry'
= I?" He said (that) Ann had better hurry. He said, 'You'd better hurry' = He said (that) I'd
better hurry or }, He advised me to hurry.
feave + object + present participle
expression is often used with a period of future time:
I'll have you driving in three days. (As a result of my efforts, you
be driving in three days.)
can also be used in the past or present:
He had them all dancing. (He taught/persuaded them all to dance.) II'1- / have them all
talking to each other. (I encourage/persuade them all !• to talk to each other.) H.ltcan be
used in the interrogative:
Will you really have her driving in three days? often used in the negative.
If you give all-night parties you 'II have the neighbours complaining.
(The neighbours will complain/will be complaining.)
If film-stars put their numbers in telephone books they'd have
everyone ringing them up. (Everyone would ring/would be ringing
P... ^themup.)
'II have in the first example conveys the idea 'this will happen to
Similarly they'd have in the second example conveys the idea 'this
ld happen to them'.
If you don't put a fence round your garden you'll have people walking
in and stealing your fruit. (People will walk in and steal/will be
walking in and stealing it, i.e. this will happen to you.) The construction can be used in the
interrogative and negative:
A Practical English Grammar
86
When they move that bus stop, you won't have people sitting on yow
steps waiting/or the bus any more.
This structure is chiefly used for actions which would be displeasing to the subject of have, as in the
above example, but it can be used for an action which is not displeasing:
When he became famous, he had people stopping him in the street and
asking/or his autograph =
When he became famous, people stopped him in the street and asked
for his autograph.
But I won't have + object + present participle normally means '1 won't/don't allow this':
/ won't have him sitting down to dinner in his overalls. I make him
change them. (1 won't/don't allow him to sit down etc.) This use is restricted to the first person. (For
have used for obligation, see chapter 14.)
have as an ordinary verb
122
A
B
C
have meaning 'possess'
This is the basic meaning of have:
He has a black beard.
I have had this car for ten years.
She will have £4,000 a year when she retires.
Form
Affirmative Negative
Interrogative
Present have (got) or haven't Igot) or have I (got)? etc. or
have
don't haw
do you have? etc. Past
had
hadn 't (got) or had you
(got)? etc. or didn 't have
did yew have? etc.
Note that the negative and interrogative can be formed in two ways.
have is conjugated with do for habitual actions:
Do you have earthquakes in your country? - Yes, but we dan't have them very often.
When there is not this idea of habit, the have not (got)/have you (got) forms are more usual in
Britain, whereas other English-speaking countries (notably America) use the do forms here
also. An American might say:
Can you help me now? Do you have time?
where an Englishman would probably say:
Can you help me now? Have you got time?
do forms can therefore be used safely throughout, but students living in , Britain should
practise the other forms as well.
".got can be added to have/have not/have you etc. as shown above. It t^makes no difference
to the sense so it is entirely optional, but it is quite SB common addition- got, however, is not
added in short answers or i question tags:
'„ Have you gut an ice-axe? ~ Yes, I have.
^ She's got a nice voice, hasn 't she?
|" have (affirmative) followed by got is usually contracted:
S'i I've got my ticket. He's got a flat in Pimiico. t-'The stress falls on got- The 've or 's is
often barely audible. i^ihave (affirmative) without got is often not contracted. The have or I'has
must then be audible.
^P
l^have meaning 'take' (a meal), 'give' (a party) etc,
pave can also be used to mean:
Intake' (a meal/food or drink, a bath/a lesson etc.)
I'give' (a party), 'entertain' (guests)
|*ite(icounter' (difficulties/trouble)
llWperience', 'enjoy', usually with an adjective, e.g. good.
^,," We have lunch at one.
I'', They are having a party tomorrow.
1^',' Did you have trouble with Customs?
El hope you 'II have a good holiday.
e when used as above obeys the rules for ordinary verbs:
never followed by got.
legative and interrogative are made with do/did.
A Practical English Grammar
87
in be used in the continuous tenses.
We are hawing breakfast early tomorrow, (near future)
She is having twenty people to dinner next Monday, (near future)
I can't answer the telephone; I am having a bath. (present)
How many English lessons do you have a week? ~ I have six.
You have coffee at eleven, don't you? (habit)
Ann has breakfast in bed. but Mary doesn 't. (habit)
Will you have some tea/coffee etc.? (This is an invitation. We can
also omit Will you and say Have some tea etc.)
Did you have a good time at the theatre? (Did you enjoy yourself?)
Have a good time! (Enjoy yourself!)
/ am having a wonderful holiday.
I didn 't have a very good journey.
Do
124
Form
Principal parts: do, did, done Gerund/present participle: doing
Present tense:
Affirmative Negative
Interrogative
I do
I do nol/don'(
do I? you do
you do not/don't
doyou? he does
he dws not/doesn't
does he? she does
she does not/doesn't
does she? it does
it does not/doesn 't
does it? we do
we do wit/don't
do we? you do
you do
not/don't
doyou? they do
they do not/don't
do they?
Negative interrogative: do I not/dan't I? du yuu not/don't you? does he not/doesn't he? etc.
do as an ordinary verb has the affirmative shown above. But for negative and interrogative we add the
infinitive do to the above forms:
What does/did she do? (See 126.)
Past tense:
Affirmative: did for all persons
Negative: did not/didn't for all persons
Interrogative: did he? etc.
Negative interrogative: did he not/didn't he? etc.
do is followed by the bare infinitive:
J don't know. Did you see it? He doesn 'I like me.
125
do used as an auxiliary
A do is used to form the negative and interrogative of the present simple and past simple
tenses of ordinary verbs (see 103-5):
He doesn't work. He didn't work. Does he work? Did he work?
B It is possible to use do/did + infinitive in the affirmative also when we wish to add special
emphasis- It is chiefly used when another speaker
has expressed doubt about the action referred to:
You didn't see him. ~ I'didseehim. (The Ad is strongly stressed
in speech. This is more emphatic than the normal / saw him.) I know that you didn 't expect
me to go. but I 'did go.
C do is used to avoid repetition of a previous ordinary verb:
short agreements and disagreements (see 109):
' Tom talks too much. - Yes, he does/No, he doesn't.
Hedidn'tgo. - No, he didn't/Oh yes, hedid. In additions (see 112):
He likes concerts and so do we. (Note inversion.) , He lives here but I don't. He doesn't
drive but I do.
'• In question tags (see also 110):
He lives here, daesn 't he? He didn 't see you, did he?
do is used in short answers to avoid repetition of the main verb:
Do you smoke? ~ Yes, I do (not Yes, I smoke)/No, I don't. ;; Did you see him? ~ Yes, I
did/No, I didn't. (See 108.)
A Practical English Grammar
88
Similarly in comparisons (see 22): He drives faster than I do.
do + imperative makes a request or invitation more persuasive:
Do come with us. (more persuasive than Come with us.) 1: Do work a little harder. Do
help rue, please.
can similarly be used as an approving or encouraging affirmative ^'iinswer to someone asking for
approval of, or permission to do, some Inaction: Shall I write to him? ~ Yes, do or Do alone.
126
do used as an ordinary verb
do, like have, can be used as an ordinary verb. It then forms its It-negative and interrogative
in the simple present and past with do/did:
do not do
do you do? don't you do? H':.' he does not do does he do? doesn 't he do? ||i I
did not do
did he do? didn't he do? etc. |||t-.can be used in the continuous forms, or
simple forms:
What are you doing (now)? ~ I'm doing my homework. HI. What's he doing tomorrow? (near
future) |H; What does he do in the evenings? (habit) (; Why did you do it? ~ I did it because
I was angry. l||ow do you do? is said by both parties after an introduction:
HOSTESS: Mr Day, may I introduce Mr Dams? Mr Daws, Mr Day. Both men say How do you
do? Originally this was an enquiry about the |Hher person's health. Now it is merely a formal
greeting. pme examples of other uses of do:
He doesn't do what he's told. (doesn't obey orders)
S What do you do for a living? ~ I'm an artist.
How's the new boy doing? (getting on)
I haven't got a torch. Will a candle do? (= be suitable/adequate) ~
A candle won't do. I'm looking for a gas leak. (A candle would be
unsuitable.)
Would £10 do? (= be adequate) ~ No, it wouldn't. I need £20.
do with (in the infinitive only) can mean 'concern'. It is chiefly used
the construction it is/was something/nothing to do with + noun/
onoun/gerund:ft's nothingtodo withyou = It doesn't concern you.
A Practical English Grammar
89
12
may and can for permission and possibility
Permission
127
may used for permission: forms
may for all persons in the present and future.
might in the conditional and after verbs in a past tense.
Negative: may not/mayn't, might not/mightn't
Interrogative: may I? might I? etc.
Negative interrogative: may I not/mayn't I? might I not/mightn't I? etc,
Other forms are supplied by allow, be allowed.
may is followed by the bare infinitive.
128
can used for permission: forms
can for all persons in the present and future.
could for past and conditional.
Negative: cannot/can't, could not/couldn't
Interrogative: can I? could I? etc.
Negative interrogative: can I not/can't I? could ! not/couldn't I? etc.
Other forms are supplied by allow, be allowed.
can is followed by the bare infinitive.
129
may and can used for permission in the present or future
A
First person
I/we can is the most usual form:
I can take a day off whenever I want. I/we may meaning 'I/we have permission to . . .' is
possible:
I may leave the office as soon as I haw finished. But this is not a very common construction
and it would be much more usual to say:
I can leave/I'm allowed to leave . . . I/we may/might is a little more usual in indirect speech:
'You may leave when you 've finished,' he says/said =
He says we may leave/He said we might leave . . . But in colloquial speech we would use
can/could:
He says we can lease/He said we could leave.
B
C
Second person
Here may is chiefly used when the speaker is giving permission. You may park here means 'I
give you permission to park'. It does not normally mean 'The police etc. allow you to park' or
'You have a right to park'.
can can be used as an informal alternative to may here. But it can also be used to express
the idea of having permission. You can park here can mean 'I allow it/The police allow it/You
have aright to park here'.
Similarly You can take two books home with you can mean 'I allow it/The library allows it' and
You can't eat sandwiches in the library can mean 'I don't allow it/The librarian doesn't allow it'
or 'It isn't the proper thing to do'.
could can be used when there is an idea of condition:
Why don't you ring him? You can/could use my phone.
could is also used in indirect speech introduced by a verb in a past tense:
He said I could use his phone.
Third person ;': may can be used as in B above when the speaker is giving permission:
He may fake my car. (I give him permission to take it.)
They may phone the office and reverse the charges. (I give them permission.)
But it is chiefly used in impersonal statements concerning authority and <!•' permission:
In certain circumstances a police officer may (•= has the right to) ask WK"' a driver to take a
breath test.
A Practical English Grammar
90
If convicted, an accused person may (= has the right to) appeal. y , SCRABBLE RULES: No letter
may be moved after it has been played.
informal English can/can't would be used:
He can take the car.
They can phone the office.
A police officer can ask a driver . . .
An accused person can appeal.
No letter can be moved . . .
130
could or was/were allowed to for permission in the past
could can also express general permission in the past:
On Sundays we could (.= were allowed to) stay up late.
When a particular action was permitted and performed we use
was/were allowed instead of could:
I had a visa so I was allowed to cross the frontier.
Wuldn't however can be used a little more widely than could:
We couldn 't bring our dog into the restaurant. ll'The opposite of this would be:
We were allowed to bring etc.
For perfect tenses and passives allowed must be used:
Since his accident he hasn't been allowed to drive. As a child he had been allowed to do exactly
what he liked.
(For might/could in indirect speech, see 129 A.)
131
Requests for permission (see also 283)
A can I?, could I?, may I?, might I? are all possible and can be used for the present or future,
can I? is the most informal. could I? is the most generally useful of the four, as it can express
both formal and informal requests.
may I? is a little more forma) than could I? but can also be used for both types of requests.
might I? is more diffident than may I? and hdicates greater uncertainty about the answer.
B The negative interrogative forms can't I? and couldn't I? are used ta show that the speaker
hopes for an affirmative answer:
Can't I stay up till the end of the programme? Couldn't I pay by cheque? may and might are not
used in this way,
C Answers to can I/could I requests will normally be:
Yes, you can. Yes, of course (you can). No, you can't. Affirmative answers to may I/might
I requests are normally:
Yes, you may. Yes. of course (you may). For a negative answer No, you may not is
possible but it would normally be replaced by a milder expression:
I'd rather you didn't. I'm afraid not.
D Questions about permission are expressed by can or am/is/are
allowed to in the present and by could or was/were allowed to in
the past:
Can Tom use the car whenever he likes?
Is Tom allowed to use the car . . . ?
Could students choose what they wanted to study?
Were students allowed to choose . . . ?
Possibility
132
may/might for possibility
A
Form
may/might for present and future.
might in the conditional and after verbs in the past tense.
Negative: may not/mayn't, might not/mightn't
Interrogative: see E below
Infinitive: to be + likely
A Practical English Grammar
91
nay/might + present infinitive can express possibility in the present . or future:
He may/might tell his wife. (Perhaps he tells/will tell his wife.)
He may/might emigrate. (Perhaps he will emigrate.)
Ann may/might know Tom's address. (Perhaps Ann knows etc.) Similarly with the continuous
infinitive:
He may/might be waiting at the station. (Perhaps he is waiting at
the station.)
He may/might be waiting at the station when we arrive. (Perhaps he will be waiting etc.)
may or might for present or future possibility Normally either can be used. might slightly
increases the doubt.
Note that in speech we can also indicate increased doubt by stressing ^nay/might. Tom 'may
lend you the money (with a strong stress on may) implies that this is not very likely. Tom
might Send you the money (with a strong stress on might) implies 'I don't think this is at all
likely/
I think it is unlikely'might must be used in the conditional and when the expression is introduced by a verb in the
past tense:
If you invited him he might come. I knew we might have to wait at the frontier. He said he
might hire a car. (indirect speech)
may/might in the negative and interrogative
The negative presents no problems:
He may/might not believe your story. (Perhaps he won't/doesn't believe your story.)
The interrogative is normally expressed by do you think? or a construction with be + likely:
Do you think he's alone?
Do you think he believes your story? ,:, Is it likely thai the plane will be late?
Is the plane likely to be late?
may? for possibility very seldom introduces a sentence. It may be placed later on:
When may we expect you? What may be the result of the new tax? But a construction with be
+ likely or think is more usual:
When are you likely to arrive?
What do you think the result will be?
might? is just possible;
Might they be waiting outside the station?
But Could they be waiting? or Do you think they are waiting? would be more usual (see 134).
may/might in the affirmative, however, can form part of a question:
Do you think he may/might not be able to pay? (See 104 for this type of question.)
133
may/might + perfect infinitive
A
This is used in speculations about past actions:
He may/might have gone = It is possible that he went/has gone or
Perhaps he went/has gone. might must be used, as shown in 132 D, when the main verb is in
a
past tense:
He said/thought that she might have missed the plane. might, not may, must be used when
the uncertainty no longer exists:
He cane home alone. You shouldn't have let him do that; he might
have got lost. (But he didn't get lost.)
So in the sentence:
You shouldn't have drunk the wine: it may/might have been drugged
the words it may have been drugged would indicate that we are still uncertain whether it was
drugged or not. it might have been drugged could have the same meaning but could also
mean that we know it
wasn't drugged. might, not may, is also used when the matter was never put to the
test, as in:
Perhaps we should have taken the other road. It might have been
quicker. It's a good thing you didn't lend him the money. You might never
have got it back. Sentences of this kind are very similar to the third type of conditional
sentence:
// we had taken the other road we might have arrived earlier.
A Practical English Grammar
92
B
may/might can be used in conditional sentences instead of will/would to indicate a possible
instead of a certain result:
If he sees you he will stop. (certain) If he sees you he may stop. (possible)
Similarly:
I/you poured hot water into it, it might crack and If you had left it there someone might have
stolen it.
(See 223 B.)
134
could as an alternative to may/might
A
could be can be used instead of may/might be:
I wonder where Tom is. ~ He may/might/could be in the library. (Perhaps he is in the library.)
Similarly when be is part of the continuous infinitive:
I wonder why Bill isn't here? ~ He may/might/cauld still be waiting for a bus. (Perhaps he is
still waiting for a bus.)
And when be is part of a passive infinitive:
Do you think the plane will be on time? ~ I don't know. It may/ might/could be delayed by fog.
(Perhaps it will be delayed by fog.)
In the interrogative we can use either could or might:
Might/Could he be waiting/or us at the station? (Do you think he is waiting . . , ?)
In the negative, though, there is a difference of meaning between could and may/might:
He may/might not be driving the car himself. (Perhaps he isn't
driving the car himself.)
But He couldn't be driving the car himself espressos a negative '. deduction. It means 'This is
impossible- He can't drive'.
could + the perfect infinitive of any verb can be used instead of .: .^Slay/might + perfect
infinitive (possibility):
£„ / wonder how Tom knew about Ann's engagement. ~
He may/might/could have heard it from Jack. (Perhaps he heard it from Jack.)
As in A above, in the interrogative we can use might or could:
Could/Might the bank have made a mistake? (Do you think it is I' possible that the bank
(has) made a mistake?)
But in the negative the meanings differ:
Ann might not have seen Tom yesterday (perhaps she didn't see him) but
Ann couldn't have seen Tom yesterday, (negative deduction: perhaps Ann and Tom
were in different towns)
135
can used to express possibility
General possibility
Subject + can can mean 'it is possible', i.e. circumstances permit (this is quite different from
the kind of possibility expressed by may):
You can ski on the hills. (There is enough snow.)
We can't bathe here on account of the sharks. (It isn't safe.)
Can you get to the top of the mountain in one day? (Is it possible?)
can also express occasional possibility:
Measles can be quite dangerous. (Sometimes it is possible for them to be quite
dangerous/Sometimes they are quite dangerous.)
The Straits of Dover can be very rough. (It is possible for the Straits ^^a.i,, to be rough;
this sometimes happens.)
could is used in the past:
He could be very unreasonable. (Sometimes he was unreasonable; this was a
possibility.)
can is used in this way in the present or past tense only, and chiefly in the affirmative.
A Practical English Grammar
93
13
136
can and be able for ability
can and be able: forms
can is used here in conjunction with be •+- the adjective able, which supplies the missing
parts of can and provides an alternative form for the present and past tense. We have
therefore the following forms:
Infinitive: to be able Past participle: been able
Affirmative
Negative
Interrogative
Future
will/shall
will/shall noi
shall/will I be able? be able
be able
will
he be able? etc.
Present can or
cannot or
can I? or
am able
am no! able
am I able? etc.
Past
could or
could not or
could I? or
was able
was ml able
was I able? etc.
There is only one future form, for can is not used in the future except • to express permission.
In the conditional, however, we have two forms:
could and would be able.
''
All other tenses are formed with be able according to the rules fur ordinary verbs:
Present perfect: have been able
Past perfect: had been able
•[ Negative interrogative: cciutdyou
not/couldn't you? were you not/weref1 [ you able? will you not/won't you be able? etc.
;
can/be/win/shall not and have can be contracted in the usual way: | I wasn't able, he won't be
able. I've been able. can is followed by the bare infinitive. be able is followed by the full
infinitive.
137
can/am able, could/was able
A
1
can and be able
shall/will be able is the only future form:
Our baby will be able to walk in a few weeks.
Either can or am able may be used in the present, can is the more usual:
Can you/Are you able to type?
I can't pay you today. Can you wait fill tomorrow? or
Could you wait? (request; see B2 below)
For the present perfect, however, we must use the be able form:
Since his accident he hasn't been able to leave the house.
could
could can be used with a present meaning when there is an idea of condition:
Could you run the business by yourself? (if this was necessary)
Could he get another job? (if he left this one)
I could get you a copy. (if you want one)
In the first two examples could is replaceable by would be able.
could you? is a very good way of introducing a request. It is an alternative to would you? and
a little more polite:
Could you show me the way/lend me £5/wait half an hour?
Could you please send me an application form?
couldn't you? is also useful:
HOUSEHOLDER: Could you come and mend a leak in a pipe?
PLUMBER: Would sometime next month suit you?
HOUSEHOLDER: Couldn't you came a little earlier?
Could and was able used for past ability
For ability only, either can be used:
When I was young I could/was able to climb any tree in the forest.
For ability + particular action, use was able:
B
A Practical English Grammar
94
Although the pilot was badly hurt he was able to explain what had
happened. (He could and did explain.)
The boat capsized quite near the bank so the children were able to swim to safety.
(They could and did swim.)
This rule, however, is relaxed in the negative when the action did not take place, and with
verbs of the senses:
He read the message but he couldn't/wasn't able to understand it.
I could/was able to see him through the window.
had been able is the past perfect form:
He said he had lost his passport and hadn 't been able to leave the country.
(For could in reported speech, see 312.)
138
A
could + perfect infinitive
This form is used for past ability when the action was not performed:
I could have lent you the money. Why didn't you ask me? (see also 154)
or when we don't know whether it was performed or not:
The money has disappeared! Who could have taken it?
Tom could have (taken it); he was here alone yesterday.
Compare:
He was able to send a message. (He sent it,)
He could have sent a message. (He didn't send it or we don't know whether he sent it
or not. See also 135.)
B could + perfect infinitive can also express irritation at or reproach for the non-performance of
an action:
You could have told me = I am annoyed/disappointed that you didn't tell me. You
should have
told me.
There would be a strong stress on the word the speaker wishes to emphasize. (For might
used in the same way, see 285.)
A Practical English Grammar
95
14
ought, should, must, have to, need for obligation
139
ought: forms
ought is a modal verb (see 107 B),
The same form can be used for present and future and for the past ;;' when preceded by a
verb in a past tense or followed by a perfect ' infinitive:
" / ought to write to him today/tomorrow. ''• I knew I ought to write to him. She said I ought to
write. I know/knew that I ought to have written. "'.Negative; ought not/oughtn't
Interrogative: ought I? etc.
Negative interrogative: ought I not/oughtn't I? etc.
ought takes the full infinitive, and to remind students of this, it is ' sometimes referred to as
ought to.
^ ''Questions or remarks with ought may be answered by should and " 'vice versa:
'' You ought to put in central heating. ~ Yes, I suppose I should.
140
should: forms
should is also a modal verb.
Like ought, the same form can be used for present and future and
for the past when preceded by a verb in a past tense, should could
replace ought to in the above examples. :'. Negative: should not/shouldn't
Interrogative: should !? etc. . Negative interrogative: should I not/shouldn 't I? etc.
should is followed by the bare infinitive.
should and ought, used for obligation, normally have the same
meaning but should is the more usual form.
In conversation should/ought to can often be used alone, the infinitive
being understood but not mentioned:
You should paint/ought to paint your door. ~ Yes, I know ! should/ I know I ought to.
13
136
can and be able for ability
can and be able: forms
can is used here in conjunction with be + the adjective able, which supplies the missing parts
of can and provides an alternative form for the present and past tense. We have therefore the
following forms:
Infinitive: to be able
Past participle: been able
Future
be able
Present
am able
Past
was able
Affirmative
will/shall
he able
can or
am not able
could or
was not able
Negative
Interrogative
will/shall not
shall/will I be able?
will he be able? etc.
cannot or
can I? or
am I able? etc.
could not or
could I? or
was I able? etc.
There is only one future form, for can is not used in the future except to express permission.
In the conditional, however, we have two forms:
could and would be able.
All other tenses are formed with be able according to the rules for ordinary verbs:
Present perfect: have been able
Past perfect: had been able
Negative interrogative: could you not/couldn't you? were you not/weren't you able? will you
not/won't you be able? etc.
can/be/will/shall not and have can be contracted in the usual way:
I wasn't able, he won't be able, I've been able.
can is followed by the bare infinitive.
A Practical English Grammar
96
be able is followed by the full infinitive.
137
can/am able, could/was able
A
1
can and be able
shall/will be able is the only future form:
Our baby will be able to walk in a few weeks.
Either can or am able may be used in the present, can is the more usual:
Can you/Are you able to type?
I can't pay you today. Can you wait fill tomorrow? or
Could you wait? (request: see B2 below)
For the present perfect, however, we must use the be able form:
Since his accident he hasn't been able to leave the house.
could
could can be used with a present meaning when there is an idea of condition:
Could you run the business by yourself? (if this was necessary)
Could he get another job? (if he left this one)
I could get you a copy. (if you want one)
In the first two examples could is replaceable by would be able.
could you? is a very good way of introducing a request. It is an alternative to would you?
and a little more polite:
Could you show me the way/lend me £5/wait half an hour?
Could you please send me an application form?
couldn't you? is also useful:
HOUSEHOLDER: Could you come and mend a leak in a pipe?
PLUMBER: Would sometime next month suit you?
HOUSEHOLDER: Couldn't you came a little earlier?
Could and was able used for past ability
For ability only, either can be used:
When I was young I could/was able to climb any tree in the forest.
For ability + particular action, use was able:
Although the pilot was badly hurt he was able to explain what had happened. (He could
and did explain.)
The boat capsized quite near the bank so the children were able to swim to safety.
(They could and did swim.)
This rule, however, is relaxed in the negative when the action did not take place, and with
verbs of the senses:
He read the message but he couldn't/wasn't able to understand it.
I could/was able to see him through the window.
had been able is the past perfect form:
He said he had lost his passport and hadn't been able to leave the country.
(For could in reported speech, see 312.)
2
3
B
1
2
138
could + perfect infinitive
A
This form is used for past ability when the action was not performed:
I could have lent you the money. Why didn't you ask me? (see also 154)
or when we don't know whether it was performed or not:
The money has disappeared! Who could have taken it?
Tom could have (taken it); he was here alone yesterday.
Compare:
He was able to send a message. (He sent it.)
He could have sent a message. (He didn't send it or we don't know whether he sent it
or not. See also 135.)
could + perfect infinitive can also express irritation at or reproach for the non-performance of
an action:
You could have told me = I am annoyed/disappointed that you didn't tell me. You
should have told me.
B
A Practical English Grammar
97
There would be a strong stress on the word the speaker wishes to emphasize. (For might
used in the same way, see 285.)
A Practical English Grammar
98
14
ought, should, must, have to, need for obligation
139
ought: forms
ought is a modal verb (see 107 B).
The same form can be used for present and future and for the past when preceded by a verb
in a past tense or followed by a perfect infinitive:
I ought to write to him today/tomorrow.
I knew I ought to write to him.
She said I ought to write.
I know/knew that I ought to have written.
Negative; ought not/oughtn't
Interrogative: ought I? etc.
Negative interrogative: ought I not/oughtn't I? etc.
ought takes the full infinitive, and to remind students of this, it is sometimes referred to as
ought to.
Questions or remarks with ought may be answered by should and vice versa:
You ought to put in central heating. ~ Yes, I suppose I should.
140
should: forms
should is also a modal verb.
Like ought, the same form can be used for present and future and for the past when
preceded by a verb in a past tense, should could replace ought to in the above examples.
Negative: should not/shouldn't
Interrogative: should I? etc.
Negative interrogative: should I not/shouldn't I? etc.
should is followed by the bare infinitive.
should and ought, used for obligation, normally have the same meaning but should is the
more usual form.
In conversation should/ought to can often be used alone, the infinitive being understood but
not mentioned:
You should paint/ought to paint your door. ~ Yes, I know I should/ I know I ought to.
141
ought/should compared to must and have to
A
1
Differences in use
ought/should is used to express the subject's obligation or duty:
You should send in accurate income tax returns
2
or to indicate a correct or sensible action:
They shouldn't allow parking here; the street is too narrow.
This word is spelt wrongly. There should be another 's'.
Here there is neither the speaker's authority, as with must, or external authority, as with have
to (see 145). It is more a matter of conscience or good sense:
PIANIST TO PUPIL: You must practise at least an hour a day.
PUPIL TO MUSICAL FRIEND: I have to practise an hour a day!
MUSICAL FRIEND: You ought to/should practise for more than an hour.
Another difference between ought/should and must and have to is that with must and have
to we normally have the impression that the obligation is being or will be fulfilled. This is
particularly the case with the first person but quite often applies to the other persons too. With
ought/should we do not necessarily feel that the obligation is being or will be fulfilled. Quite
often, especially in the first person, the reverse is the case.
If a driver says I ought to/should go slowly here; it's a built-up area he usually implies that he
isn't going to go slowly. If he really intended to go slowly he would say, I must go/I have to go/I
will have to go slowly here.
Similarly, if someone says We must have a party to celebrate your engagement, his friends
are reasonably confident that there will be a party. But if he says We should have a party ... it
is not so certain that the party will take place. His tone or expression might indicate that it will
not be possible.
A Practical English Grammar
99
B
1
2
Similarities in use
should (but not ought) can be used in formal notices and on information sheets etc.:
Candidates should be prepared to answer questions on . . .
Intending travellers should be in possession of the following documents . . .
On hearing the alarm bell, hotel guests should leave their rooms . . .
must could be used here without change of meaning, but should expresses the obligation
more gently.
ought and should can express advice:
You ought to/should read this. It's very good.
But for more emphatic advice must is better:
You must read this. It's marvellous!
142
ought/should with the continuous infinitive
ought/should with the continuous infinitive expresses the idea that the subject is not fulfilling
his obligations or that he is acting foolishly, rashly etc- or not acting sensibly, prudently etc.:
He ought to be studying for his exam. He shouldn't be spending all his time on the
beach.
We should be wearing seat belts. (But we are not wearing them.)
I shouldn't be telling you this. It's supposed to be a secret.
143
ought/should with the perfect infinitive
This construction is used to express an unfulfilled obligation or a sensible action that was
neglected. In the negative it expresses a wrong or foolish action in the past,
You ought to have told him that the paint on that seat was wet.
You should have turned his omelette; he likes it turned.
They ought to have stopped at the traffic lights.
She shouldn't have opened the letter; it wasn't addressed to her.
The Emergency Exit doors shouldn't have been blocked.
144
A
must and have to: forms
must
must is a modal verb (see 107 B). It is used in the present or future.
Negative: must not/mustn't
Interrogative: must I? etc.
Negative interrogative: must I not/mustn't I? etc.
The past tense is supplied by had to.
must takes the bare infinitive.
It can express obligation and emphatic advice:
FATHER: You must get up earlier in the morning. (obligation)
You must take more exercise. Join a squash club. (advice)
A Practical English Grammar
100
B
have to
Obligation
Speaker's
External
Authority
authority
Future
Present
must
must
Past
had to
No obligation
shall/will have to
have to*
have (got) to*
had to
shan't/won't have to
don't/doesn't have to*
haven't (got) to*
didn't have to
hadn't (got) to
*See C below.
C Difference between the starred have to forms
have to (without got) and its negative don't/doesn't have to are the correct forms for
habitual actions but can be used for single actions also, and are common in American
English.
have (got) to and haven't (got) to are for single actions only:
TOM: / have to go to work every day except Sunday. But I don't have to work a full day
on Saturday.
But on Sunday he could say:
I'm glad I haven't (got) to go to work today or
I'm glad I don't have to go to work today.
In the past didn't have to can be used for both habitual and single actions in the past.
hadn't (got) to is used more for single actions.
didn't have to is the more generally used form.
have to in the affirmative expresses obligation.
have to in the negative expresses absence of obligation. This can also be expressed by
need not, don't need etc. (see 149).
145
B
1
2
C
Difference between must and have to in the affirmative
A must expresses obligation imposed by the speaker:
MOTHER: You must wipe your feet when you come in.
have to expresses external obligation:
SMALL BOY: I have to wipe my feet every time I come in.
Second person examples
Speaker's authority
MOTHER: You must wear a dress tonight. You can't go to the opera in those dreadful
jeans.
EMPLOYER: You must use a dictionary. I'm tired of correcting your spelling mistakes.
DOCTOR: You must cut down on your smoking.
External authority
You have to wear uniform on duty, don't you?
You have to train very hard/or these big matches, I suppose.
You’ll have to get up earlier when you start work, won't you?
You'll have to cross the line by the footbridge.
Third person examples
Here must is chiefly used in written orders or instructions:
RAILWAY COMPANY: Passengers must cross the line by the footbridge.
OFFICE MANAGER: Staff must be at their desks by 9.00.
REGULATION: A trailer must have two rear lamps.
When we are merely stating or commenting on another person's obligations we use have to:
In this office even the senior staff have to be at their desks by 9.00.
She has to make her children's clothes. She can't afford to buy them.
They'll have to send a diver dawn to examine the hull.
A Practical English Grammar
101
D
If we used must instead of have to above it might imply that the speaker had authority to
order these actions. But must may be used when the speaker approves of an obligation:
A driver who has knocked someone down must stop. (The speaker thinks it is the
driver's duty to stop.)
Or when the speaker feels strongly:
Something must be done to stop these accidents.
First person examples
In the first person the difference between must and have to is less n' important and very
often either form is possible:
TYPIST: / must/will have to buy a dictionary.
PATIENT: / must/have to/will have to cut down on my smoking.
But have to is better for habits:
I have to take two of these pills a day
and must is better when the obligations are urgent or seem important to the speaker:
I must tell you about a dream I had last night.
Before we do anything I must find my cheque book.
Some other examples (all persons)
You must come and see us some time. (This is quite a usual way of expressing a
casual invitation.)
The children have to play in the street till their parents come home.
This sort of thing must stop! (The speaker either has authority or feels very strongly
about it.)
You must write to your uncle and thank him for his nice present.
If there are no taxis we'll have to walk.
If your father was a poor man you 'd have to work.
We have to walk our dog twice a day.
NOTICE IN SHOP WINDOW: Closing down sale! Everything must go!
Affirmative obligations in the past: had to
Here the distinction between the speaker's authority and external authority cannot be
expressed and there is only one form, had to:
I ran out of money and had to borrow from Tom.
You had to Ray duty on that, I suppose?
There were no buses so he had to walk.
146
need not and must not in the present and future
need not can be used for present and future. It has the same form for all persons, (See 148.)
need not expresses absence of obligation. The speaker gives permission for an action not to
be performed or sometimes merely states that an action is not necessary:
EMPLOYER: You needn't make two copies. One will do.
Give them this cheque. They needn't send me a receipt.
You needn't change (your clothes). Just come as you are.
must not expresses a negative obligation imposed by the speaker or very emphatic advice:
You mustn't repeat this to anyone.
NOTICE IN SHOP: Staff must not smoke when serving customers.
You mustn't leave your car unlocked. This place is full of thieves.
147
need not, must not and must in the present and future
DOCTOR: You
needn't go on a diet; but you must eat sensibly and you
mustn't overeat.
ZOO NOTICE: Visitors must not feed the animals.
RAILWAY NOTICE: Passengers must not walk on the line.
You mustn't drive fast. There is a speed limit here.
You needn't drive fast. We've plenty of time.
You needn't strike a match. I can see well enough.
You mustn't strike a match. This room is full of gas.
SCHOOL NOTICE: The lifts must not be used during Fire Drill.
A Practical English Grammar
102
You mustn't wear that dress again. You look terrible in yellow.
TEACHER: You needn't read the whole book but you must read the first four chapters.
You must cut down that dead tree or it will fall on your house.
DOCTOR: You mustn't take more than two of these pills at once. Three might be fatal.
DOCTOR (to patient's wife): If the pain has gone he needn't take any more of these.
148
A
B
C
D
149
need: forms
need can be both an auxiliary and an ordinary verb. As an auxiliary it is a semi-modal, i.e. it
has both modal and 'ordinary verb' forms. As a modal, its forms are need or need not/needn't
for all persons in the present and future and in indirect speech. (See C below.)
Interrogative: need I? etc.
Negative interrogative: need I not/needn't I? etc.
need conjugated as above takes the bare infinitive.
need as an auxiliary is seldom used in the affirmative except when a negative or interrogative
sentence is preceded by an expression which changes the negative or interrogative verb into
an affirmative:
I needn't wear a coat or I don't suppose I need wear a coat.
Need I tell Tom? or Do you think I need fell Tom?
It is however sometimes used in fairly formal English with hardly/scarcely or only:
I need hardly say how pleased we are to welcome Mr X. (I needn't say . . .)
You need only touch one of the pictures for all the alarm bells to start ringing. (If you
even touch one of the pictures all the bells . . .)
needn't' in direct speech can be reported unchanged:
' You needn't pay till the 31st' he says/said = He says/said I needn't pay till the 31st.
(See also 325 C.)
need can also be conjugated as an ordinary verb with negative forms as shown in 149 below.
Corresponding have to forms are also shown. For interrogative forms, see 151.
need conjugated with will/shall, do/does/did etc. takes the full infinitive and is sometimes
referred to as need to.
Absence of obligation; forms
Future
Speaker's authority
need not
Present
need not
Past
(see 150 B)
didn't need to
didn't have to
hadn't got to
External authority
shan't/won't need to
shan't/won't have to
don't/doesn't need to
don 't/doesn't have to
haven 't/hasn't got to
But see 148 C above for needn't in indirect speech.
shan't/won't need to = shan't/won't have to
don't/doesn't need to = don't/doesn't have to
didn't need to = didn't have to (but didn't have to is the more usual form)
There are no exact need equivalents of haven't/hasn't got to and hadn't got to as can be seen
from the table.
A Practical English Grammar
103
150
2
3
B
151
Difference between need not and the other forms
As already stated, need not expresses the speaker's authority or advice:
You needn't write me another cheque, just change the date and initial it.
I'm in no hurry. He needn't send it by air. He can send it by sea.
You needn't do it by hand. I'll lend you my machine.
You needn't call me Mr Jones. We all use first names here.
COLLEGE LECTURER: You needn't type your essays but you must write legibly.
The other forms express external authority:
Tom doesn't have to wear uniform at school.
We don't have to type our essays but we have to write legibly.
When I'm an old age pensioner I won't have to pay any more bus fares.
Ann hasn't got to go/doesn't have to go to this lecture. Attendance is optional.
When I have a telephone of my own I won't have to waste time waiting outside these
wretched telephone boxes.
Ann doesn't have to cook for herself. She works at a hotel and gets all her meals there.
Sometimes, however, need not can be used for external authority also, as an alternative to
won't/don't need to or won't/don't have to forms. This is particularly common in the first
person:
I needn't type/I won't/don't have to type this report today. Mr Jones said that there was
no hurry about it.
Note, however, that though it is possible to use need not for a future habitual action:
I'm retiring. After Friday I need never go to the office again.
it is not possible to use it for a present habitual action:
I don't have to queue for my bus. I get on at the terminus. (need not could not be used
here.)
Past
Here the distinction between the speaker's authority and external authority disappears, and
we have a choice of three forms: didn't have to, didn't need to and hadn't got to. There is
no difference in meaning, but hadn't got to is not normally used for habitual actions.
didn't have to is the most usual form:
I didn't have to wait long. He was only a few minutes late.
When he was at university he didn't have to/need to pay anything for his keep, for he
stayed with his uncle.
must, have to and need in the interrogative
Future
Present
Asking the
authority
External authority
must I? etc.
need I? etc.
must I? etc.
need I? Etc.
shall I/we have to?
shall I/we need to?
will he etc. have to?
will he etc. need to?
do I etc. have to?
do I etc, need to?
does he etc. have to? does he etc. need to?
have I etc. (got) to?
has he etc. (got) to?
did he etc. have to?
did he etc. need to?
had he etc. gel to?
Past
Both need? and must? imply that the person addressed is the authority concerned. need?
also implies that the speaker is hoping for a negative answer: Must I go, mother? and Need I
go, mother? mean the same, but in the second question the speaker is hoping that his mother
will say No. The other interrogative form of need, do I need? etc., can be used similarly. Note
possible answers:
Shall I have to go? ~ Yes, you will/No, you won't.
Have I got to go? ~ Yes, you have/No, you haven't.
Does he have to go? ~ Yes, he does/No, he doesn't.
Need I go? ~ Yes, you must/No, you needn't.
A Practical English Grammar
104
Must I go? ~ Yes, you must/No, you needn't.
152
needn't + perfect infinitive
This structure is used to express an unnecessary action which was nevertheless performed:
I needn't have written to him because he phoned me shortly afterwards. (But I had
written, thus wasting my time.)
You needn't have brought your umbrella for we are going by car. (You brought your
umbrella unnecessarily.)
He needn't have left home at 6.00; the train doesn't start till 7.30. (So he will have an
hour to wait.)
153
needn't have (done) compared with didn't have/ need (to do)
needn't have done: no obligation but action performed (unnecessarily), i.e. time wasted:
You needn't have watered the flowers, for it is going to rain. (You wasted your time.)
You needn't have written such a long essay. The teacher only asked for 300 words,
and you have written 600.
He needn't have bought such a large house. His wife would have been quite happy in a
cottage. (waste of money)
You needn't have carried all these parcels yourself. The shop would have delivered
them if you had asked them.
didn't have/need to do: no obligation, and normally no action:
I didn't have to translate it for him for he understands Dutch.
I didn't have to cut the grass myself. My brother did it. (no obligation and no action)
Some people do use didn't have to/didn't need to for actions which were performed. The
have or need is then usually stressed: You didn't have to give him my name would then mean
“It wasn't necessary to give him my name, but you gave it to him”. But the student is
advised to use needn't have + past participle when an unnecessary action was performed:
You needn't have given him my name.
154
needn't, could and should + perfect infinitive
A
needn't + perfect infinitive is often combined with could + perfect infinitive. The use of this
combination is best shown by examples:
I wanted a copy of the letter, so I typed it twice. ~ You needn't have typed it twice. You
could have used a carbon.
I walked up six/lights of stairs. ~ You needn't have walked up; you could haw taken the lift.
She stood in a queue to get an Underground ticket. ~ But she needn't have stood in a
queue. She could have got a ticket from the machine.
needn't have and should have compared
should or ought to could be used instead of need or could in all the examples in A above:
She shouldn't have stood in a queue. She should have got tickets from the machine.
But there is a difference in meaning:
She shouldn't have stood in a queue. (It was wrong or foolish of her to stand in a
queue.)
She needn't have stood in a queue. (It was not necessary to do this, but she did it.)
shouldn't have (done) implies criticism.
needn't have (done) does not imply criticism.
B
A Practical English Grammar
105
155
to need as an ordinary verb, meaning 'require'
As shown in 149, need can be conjugated as an ordinary verb. It then has the normal regular
forms, but no continuous tense.
to need can be used with an infinitive or with a noun/pronoun object;
I need to know the exact size.
How much money do you need? I need £5.
to need can also be used with the passive infinitive or the gerund in such sentences as:
Your hair needs to be cut/needs cutting.
The windows need to be washed/need washing.
want + gerund can be used instead of need here:
Your hair wants cutting.
A Practical English Grammar
106
15
must, have, will and should for deduction and assumption
156
must used for deduction
A
Forms
Present
must + present infinitive: He must live here, or
must + continuous infinitive: He must be living here.
Past
must + perfect infinitive: He must have lived here, or
must + continuous perfect infinitive: He must have been living here.
Note the difference between the past forms of must used for deduction and the past
equivalent of must used for obligation: had to.
must is not used for negative deduction (see 159) and is not normally used in the
interrogative except when querying a deduction with must:
There's a lot of wise from upstairs. It must be Tom. ~ Why must it be Tom? Other people
use that flat.
Examples
He has a house in London and another in Paris, so he must be rich.
I've had no sleep for 48 hours. - You must be exhausted.
He develops his own films. That must save him a lot of money.
I keep meeting him on the bus. He must live/must be living near by.
The police are stopping all cars. They must be looking for the escaped prisoner.
What explosion? I didn't hear any. ~ You must have heard it! The whole town heard it!
He must have taken sleeping pills last night. He didn't wake up till lunch time.
I waited under the clock! - So did I, but I didn't see you! We must have been waiting under
different clocks.
It was a head-on collision, but the drivers weren't hurt. ~ They must have been wearing
their seat belts.
157
must (deduction) compared to may/might
The difference is best seen by examples:
(a) Imagine that we have three keys on a ring and we know that one of these keys opens the
cellar door. We might begin by picking one key and saying:
This may/might be the key. (Perhaps this is the key.)
But after trying two keys unsuccessfully, we wilt pick up the third key and say This must be
the key. No other choice remains.
(b) I wonder why Tom hasn't answered my letter. ~ He may/might be ill. (Perhaps he is ill. But
there are other possibilities also: he may be away or too busy to answer.)
But imagine that Bill never has any visitors. If an ambulance stops at his door the neighbours
will say Bill must be ill. This is the only possible explanation of the arrival of the ambulance.
(c) Similarly, when considering a past action:
He may have come by train. (Perhaps he came by train. But there are other
possibilities: he might have come by taxi or bus.)
But He must have come by taxi implies that he had no choice. There was no other way of
making this journey.
158
have/had used for deduction
This is an American usage which is sometimes heard in Britain.
have/had here is chiefly used with to be:
There's a tall grey bird fishing in the river. ~ It has to be/must be a heron.
had + to be can express the speaker's feeling of certainty in the past:
There was a knock on the door. It had to be Tom. (She was sure it was Tom.)
had + to be can also be an alternative to must + perfect infinitive:
I wonder who took the money. ~ It had to be Tom/It must have been Tom. He's the only
one who was there.
A Practical English Grammar
107
But, to avoid confusion, the student is advised to stick to the must forms,
159
A
B
160
A
B
can't and couldn't used for negative deduction
Negative deductions about a present event can be expressed by can't/couldn't with the present
infinitive of the verb be or with the continuous infinitive of any verb:
CHILD: Can I have some sweets? I'm hungry.
MOTHER: You can't/couldn't be hungry. You've just had dinner.
ANN (looking through binoculars): An aeroplane is pulling up people from the boat!
TOM: I can't/couldn't be an aeroplane. It must be a helicopter.
He says he's still reading 'The Turn of the Screw'. ~ He can't/couldn't still be reading it. I
lent it to him ages ago and it's quite a short book.
Negative deductions about a past event are expressed by can't/couldn't + the perfect infinitive
or continuous perfect infinitive of any verb:
A man answered the phone. I suppose it was her husband. ~ If can't/couldn't have
been her husband. He's been dead for ages.
I took a Circle Line train to St Paul's. ~ You can't/couldn't have taken the Circle Line. It
doesn't go through St Paul's. You must have been on the Central Line.
couldn't must be used when the deduction is made in the past or introduced by a verb in the
past tense:
She said I couldn't have come on the Circle Line.
He said it couldn't be an aeroplane.
Otherwise either can't or couldn't can be used.
will and should for assumption
will used for assumptions about present or past actions
will here can be used with the present infinitive (for non- deliberate actions only) or with the
continuous or perfect infinitive:
Ring his home number. He'll be at home now. (I'm sure he's at home.)
He'll be expecting a call from you. (I'm sure he's expecting a call.)
He'll have finished his supper. (I'm sure he has finished his supper.)
It's no use asking Tom: he won't know. (I'm sure he doesn't.)
Will Bill be at the club now, do you think? (Do you think he is?)
should used for assumptions about present or past actions
should here is used mainly with the present infinitive (for non-deliberate actions only) in the
affirmative or negative. It is sometimes also possible with the continuous and perfect
infinitives:
The plane should be landing now. (I expect it is landing.)
The letter should have arrived by now. (I expect it has arrived.)
Assumptions with should are less confident than assumptions with win:
Tom should know the address. (I expect Tom knows it.) But
Tom'll know the address. (I'm sure Tom knows it.)
He should have finished by now. (I expect he has finished.) But
He'll have finished by now. (I'm sure he has finished.)
should is not used for assumptions which displease the speaker:
Let's not go shopping now. The shops will be very crowded. (should would not be
used.)
But for the opposite (agreeable) assumption, either word could be used:
Let's go shopping now. The shops wilt be/should be fairly empty or
The shops won't be/shouldn't be too crowded.
will and should can also express assumptions about the future:
He should/will have plenty of time to get to the station.
They shouldn't/won't have any difficulty in finding the house.
will + present infinitive used for assumptions about the future is not restricted to nondeliberate actions. (See also 209.)
ought to can be used in the same way as should in B and C above:
The plane ought to be/should be taking of fin a minute.
But should is the more usual form.
A Practical English Grammar
108
16
The auxiliaries dare and used
161
dare
A
In the affirmative dare is conjugated like an ordinary verb, i.e.
dare/dares in the present, dared in the past. But in the negative and interrogative it can be
conjugated either like an ordinary verb or like an auxiliary, i.e. it is a semi-modal.
Negative:
Interrogative:
B
C
1
2
D
E
162
A
B
present
past
present
past
do/does not dare
did not dare
do you/does he dare?
did you/did he dare?
dare/dares not
dared not
dare you/he?
dared you/he?
The ordinary verb construction is more commonly used.
Infinitives after dare
Negatives and interrogative forms with do/did are in theory followed by the infinitive with to,
but in practice the to is often omitted:
He doesn't dare (to) say anything.
Did he dare (to) criticize my arrangements?
dare I/he/you? etc. and dare not forms take the infinitive without to;
Dare we interrupt? They dared not move.
When dare is preceded by nobody, anybody etc. the to is optional:
Nobody dared (to) speak.
dare is not much used in the affirmative except in the expression I daresay. I daresay (or I
dare say) has two idiomatic meanings:
'I suppose':
I daresay there'll be a restaurant car on the train.
I accept what you say (but it doesn't make any difference)':
ENGLISH TOURIST: But I drive on the left in England!
SWISS POLICEMAN: I daresay you do, but we drive on the right here.
TRAVELLER: But the watch was given to me; I didn't buy it.
CUSTOMS OFFICER: I daresay you, didn't, but you'll have to pay duty on it all the same.
daresay is used in this way with the first person singular only.
how dare(d) you? how dare(d) he/they? can express indignation:
How dare you open my letters? (I am angry with you for opening them.)
How dared he complain? (I am indignant because he complained.)
dare is also an ordinary transitive verb meaning 'challenge' (but only to deeds requiring
courage). It is followed by object + full infinitive:
MOTHER: Why did you throw that stone through the window?
SON: Another boy dared me (to throw it).
Used
Form
used is the past tense of a defective verb which has no present tense.
Affirmative: used for all persons
Negative: used not/usedn't for all persons
Interrogative: used you/he/they? etc.
Negative interrogative: used you not/usedn't you? etc.
Negative and interrogative can also be formed with did:
didn't use to did you use to? didn't you use to?
This is a more informal form, common in conversation.
used is followed by the full infinitive, and to remind students of this it is often referred to as
used to (just as have used for obligation is referred to as have to).
Use
used is used:
To express a discontinued habit or a past situation which contrasts with the present:
I used to smoke cigarettes; now I smoke a pipe.
He used to drink beer; now he drinks wine.
She usedn't to like Tom but she quite likes him now or
She used to dislike Tom but she quite likes him now.
A Practical English Grammar
109
used is not normally stressed, but it can be stressed if the speaker wishes to emphasise the
contrast between past and present.
To express a past routine or pattern. Here we are not making a contrast between past and
present: we are merely describing someone's routine during a certain period. Very often there
is a succession of actions, used to here is replaceable by would (but would cannot replace
used to for a discontinued habit etc. as in 1 above). used here is always unstressed.
Tom and Ann were a young married couple. Every morning Tom used to kiss Ann and
set off/or work. Ann used to stand at the window and wave goodbye. In the evening she
used to welcome him home and ask him to tell her about his day.
If we use would we have:
Every morning Tom would kiss Ann and set off/or work. Ann would stand at the window
and wave goodbye etc.
Remember that used has no present form. So for present habits or routines we must use the
simple present tense.
163
used as an adjective: to be/become/get used to
used can also be an adjective meaning 'accustomed'. It is then preceded by be, become or
get in any tense and followed by the preposition to + noun/pronoun or gerund:
I am used to noise.
I am used to working in a noisy room.
You will soon get used to the electric typewriters.
You will soon get used to typing on electric typewriters.
They soon got used to the traffic regulations.
They soon got used to driving on the left.
I am used to ... etc. is a psychological statement. I am used to working in a noisy room
means that I have worked in a noisy room, so the noise doesn't bother me: I don't mind it.
You'll soon get used to typing on electric typewriters means that after you have used them for
a while you will find them quite easy to use. Very often I'm used to it has the meaning 'I don't
mind it/It doesn't give me any trouble', as in the above examples. But it can work the other
way. Imagine our canteen serves only tea with its meals. A Frenchman, newly arrived from
France, might say:
I'm used to wine with my meals, so I find these lunches rather unsatisfying.
Do not confuse subject + be/become/get + used to with subject + used to (see 162}.
In the first, used is an adjective and to is a preposition. In the second, used is a verb and to
is part of the following infinitive. Do not confuse these forms with the regular verb to use /ju:z/
meaning 'employ'.
A Practical English Grammar
110
17
The present tenses
There are two present tenses in English:
The present continuous: I am working.
The simple present: I work.
The present continuous
164
Form
The present continuous tense is formed with the present tense of the auxiliary verb be
+ the present participle:
Affirmative
I am working
you are working
he/she/it is working
we are working
you are working
they are working
Negative
I am not working
you are ml working
he/she/it is not working
we are not working
you are not working
they are not working
Interrogative
am I working?
are you working?
is he/she/it working?
are we working?
are you working?
are they working?
Negative interrogative: am I not working? are you not working? is he not working? etc.
Contractions: the verb be can be contracted as shown in 102 B, so the present
continuous of any verb can be contracted:
Affirmative
interrogative
I’m working
you're working
he's working etc.
Negative
Negative
I'm not working
you're not/you aren't working
he's not/he isn't working etc.
aren't I working?
aren't you working?
isn't he working? etc.
Note the irregular contraction aren't I? for am I not?
Interrogative contractions: am, is, are may be contracted as shown |'in 104 B:
Why's he working? Where're you working?
165
A
B
The spelling of the present participle
When a verb ends in a single e, this e is dropped before ing:
argue, arguing
hate, haling
love, loving
except after age, dye and singe:
ageing
dyeing
singeing
and verbs ending in ee:
agree, agreeing
see, seeing
When a verb of one syllable has one vowel and ends in a single consonant, this consonant is
doubled before ing:
hit, hitting
run, running
stop, stopping
Verbs of two or more syllables whose last syllable contains only one vowel and ends in a
single consonant double this consonant if the stress falls on the last syllable:
admit, admitting
begin, beginning
prefer, preferring
but
A Practical English Grammar
111
C
166
A
B
167
A
B
budget, budgeting
enter, entering
(stress not on the last syllable).
A final 1 after a single vowel is, however, always doubled:
signal, signalling
travel, travelling
except in American English.
ing can be added to a verb ending in y without affecting the spelling of the verb:
carry, carrying
enjoy, enjoying
hurry, hurrying
Uses of the present continuous tense
For an action happening now:
It is raining.
I am mil wearing a coat as it isn't cold.
Why are you sitting at my desk?
What's the baby doing? ~ He's tearing up a £5 note.
For an action happening about this time but not necessarily at the moment of speaking:
I am reading a play by Shaw. (This may mean 'at the moment of speaking' but may also
mean 'now' in a more general sense.)
He is teaching French and learning Greek. (He may not be doing either at the moment
of speaking.)
When two continuous tenses having the same subject are joined by and, the auxiliary may be
dropped before the second verb, as in the above example. This applies to all pairs of
compound tenses:
She was knitting and listening to the radio.
For a definite arrangement in the near future (the most usual way of expressing one's
immediate plans):
I'm meeting Peter tonight. He is taking me to the theatre.
Are you doing anything tomorrow afternoon? ~ Yes, I'm playing tennis with Ann.
Note that the time of the action must always be mentioned, as otherwise there might be
confusion between present and future meanings, come and go, however, can be used in this
way without a time expression. (See 202 B.)
Other possible uses of the present continuous
With a point in time to indicate an action which begins before this point and probably continues
after it:
At six I am bathing the baby. (I start bathing him before six.)
Similarly with a verb in the simple present:
They are flying over the desert when one of the engines fails.
The present continuous is rarely used in this way except in descriptions of daily routine and in
dramatic narrative, but the past continuous is often combined with a point in time or a verb in
the simple past. (See 179 B, C.)
With always:
He is always losing his keys.
This form is used, chiefly in the affirmative:
For a frequently repeated action, usually when the frequency annoys the speaker or seems
unreasonable to him: Tom is always going away for weekends (present continuous) would
imply that he goes away very often, probably too often in the speaker's opinion. But it does
not necessarily mean that he goes away every weekend. It is not a literal statement.
Compare with always + simple present:
Tom always goes away at weekends = Tom goes away every weekend. (a literal
statement)
I/we + always + continuous tense is also possible here. The repeated action is then often
accidental:
I'm always making that mistake.
For an action which appears to be continuous:
He's always working = He works the whole time.
A Practical English Grammar
112
This sort of action quite often annoys the speaker but doesn't necessarily do so: He's always
reading could imply that he spends too much time reading, but could also be said in a tone of
approval.
The first person could be used here too. The action then, like the other actions here in 2, is
usually deliberate.
168
A
B
C
D
E
Verbs not normally used in the continuous tenses
The continuous tenses are chiefly used for deliberate actions. Some verbs are, therefore, not
normally used in the continuous and have only one present tense, the simple present. These
verbs can be grouped as follows:
Verbs of the senses (involuntary actions): feel, hear, see, smell; also notice and observe (=
notice), and feel, look, taste used as link verbs (see 18 B, C). For feel, look. smell, taste,
see also 169. For hear and see, see also 170.
Verbs such as gaze, listen, look (at), observe (= watch), stare and watch imply deliberate
use of the senses, and can, of course, be used in the continuous tenses:
Watch! ~ l am watching but I don't see anything unusual.
He is listening to a tape, but he's wearing earphones so nobody else hears it.
Verbs expressing feelings and emotions, e.g. admire (= respect), adore, appreciate (= value),
care for (= like), desire, detest, dislike, fear, hate, like, loathe, love, mind (= care), respect,
value, want, wish.
But the continuous can be used with admire meaning 'look at with admiration', appreciate
meaning 'increase in value', care for meaning 'look after', long for, mind meaning 'look
after/concern oneself with', value meaning 'estimate the financial worth of, enjoy and
sometimes like/love meaning 'enjoy', and hate meaning the opposite, though it is safer to use
the simple tenses with like, love and hate:
He's enjoying his holiday in the Arctic. He hates tourist places and he doesn't mind the
cold.
I'm minding my own business.
How are you liking/Do you like your new job? ~ I'm hating it/I hate it. I just don't like
work, you see.
Verbs of mental activity, e.g. agree, appreciate (= understand), assume, believe, expect (=
think), feel (= think), feel sure/certain, forget, know, mean, perceive, realize, recall,
recognize, recollect, remember, see (= understand), see through someone (= penetrate his
attempt to deceive), suppose, think (= have an opinion), trust (= believe/have confidence in),
understand. But the continuous can be used with appreciate meaning 'to increase in value'.
See also 171 for think, assume, expect.
Verbs of possession: belong, owe, own, possess:
How much do I owe you?
The auxiliaries, except be and have in certain uses. (See 113 B, 115 B. 123.)
appear (= seem), concern, consist, contain, hold (= contain) keep (= continue), matter,
seem, signify, sound (= seem/appear):
It concerns us all. This box contains explosives.
But appear meaning 'to come before the public' can be used in the continuous.
169
feel, look, smell and taste used in the continuous forms
A
feel
feel, when followed by an adjective indicating the subject's emotions or i physical or mental
condition, e.g. angry/pleased, happy/sad, hot/cold, tense/relaxed, nervous/confident, is
normally used in the simple tenses but can also be used in the continuous:
How do you feel/are you feeling? ~ I feel/am feeling better.
feel meaning 'touch' (usually in order to learn something) can be used in the continuous:
The doctor was feeling her pulse.
Similarly, feel for meaning 'try to find something by touching':
He was feeling for the keyhole in the dark.
But feel is not used in the continuous when it means 'sense':
Don't you feel the house shaking?
when it means 'think':
I feel you are wrong
A Practical English Grammar
113
and when it is used as a link verb:
The water feels cold.
B
look
The continuous is not used with look used as a link verb, e.g. That cake looks good, or with
look on (= consider), look up to (= respect) and look down on (= despise) (see chapter 38).
But look (at), look for/in/into/out and look on (== watch) are deliberate actions and can be
used in the continuous tenses:
He is looking for his glasses.
I'm looking out for a better job.
C
smell
The continuous is not used with smell meaning 'perceive a scent/an odour', e.g. I smell gas,
or with smell used as a link verb, but can be used with smell meaning 'sniff at':
Why are you smelling the milk? Does it smell sour?
D
taste
taste as a link verb is not used in the continuous:
This coffee tastes bitter. (has a bitter taste)
But taste meaning 'to test the flavour of can be used in the continuous:
She was tasting the pudding to see if it was sweet enough.
170
see and hear used in the continuous forms
A
B
see can be used in the continuous when it means 'meet by appointment' (usually for business),
'interview':
The director is seeing the applicants this morning.
I am seeing my solicitor tomorrow. (See 202.)
Also when it means 'visit' (usually as a tourist):
Tom is seeing the town/the sights.
It can also be used in the continuous in the following combinations:
see about = make arrangements or enquiries:
We are seeing about a work permit/or you. (trying to arrange this)
see to = arrange, put right, deal with:
The plumber is here. He is seeing to the leak in our tank.
see somebody out = escort him/her to the door.
see somebody home = escort him/her home.
see somebody to + place = escort him/her to + place:
ANN : Is Bill seeing you home after the party?
MARY: No, he's just seeing me to my bus.
see someone off = say goodbye to a departing traveller at the starting point of his journey
(usually the station, airport etc.):
We're leaving tomorrow. Bill is seeing us off at the airport.
hear can be used in the continuous when it means 'listen formally to' (complaints/evidence
etc.):
The court is hearing evidence this afternoon.
hear meaning 'receive news or letters' can also be used in the continuous form but only in the
present perfect and future:
I've been hearing ail about your accident.
You 'II be hearing about the new scheme at our next meeting.
A Practical English Grammar
114
171
A
B
C
think, assume and expect used in the continuous forms
think can be used in the continuous when no opinion is given or asked for:
What are you thinking about? ~ I'm thinking about the play we saw last night. But
What do you think of it? (opinion asked for) ~ I don't think much of it. (opinion given)
Tom is thinking of emigrating. What do you think of the idea? ~ I think it is a stupid idea.
He should stay where he is.
assume can be used in the continuous when it means 'accept as a starting point':
I'm assuming that you have time to do a lot of research.
assume power/control of a country or organisation can also be used in the continuous:
The new government is assuming power at once.
expect can be used in the continuous when it means 'await':
I'm expecting a letter. She's expecting a baby in May.
The simple present tense
172
Form
In the affirmative the simple present has the same form as the infinitive but adds an s for the
third person singular.
Affirmative
I work
you work
he/she/it
works
we work
you work
they work
Negative
I do not work
you do not work
he/she/it does.
not work
we do not work
you do not work
they do not work
Interrogative
do I work?
do you work?
does he/she/it
work?
do we work?
do you work?
do they work?
Negative interrogative
do I not work?
do you not work?
does he/she/it works
not work?
do we not work?
do you not work?
do they not work?
Irregular verbs form this tense in exactly the same way.
Contractions: the verb do is normally contracted in the negative and negative interrogative
(see 103 A): I don't work, he doesn't work, don't, I work? doesn't he work?
Spelling notes
Verbs ending in ss, sh, ch, x and o add es, instead of s alone, to form the third person
singular:
I kiss, he kisses
I box, he boxes
I rush, he rushes
I do, he does
I watch, he watches
I go, he goes
When y follows a consonant we change the y into i and add es:
I carry, he carries
I copy, he copies
I try, he tries
but verbs ending in y following a vowel obey the usual rule:
obey, he obeys
I say, he says
173
The simple present used to express habitual action
The main use of the simple present tense is to express habitual actions:
He smokes.
Dogs bark.
Cats drink milk.
This tense does not tell us whether or not the action is being performed at the moment of
speaking, and if we want to make this clear we must add a verb in the present continuous
tense:
He's working. He always works at night.
My dog barks a lot, but he isn't barking at the moment.
The simple present tense is often used with adverbs or adverb phrases such as: always,
never, occasionally, often, sometimes, usually, every week, on Mondays, twice a year etc.:
How often do you wash your hair?
A Practical English Grammar
115
I go to church on Sundays
It rains in winter.
or with time clauses expressing routine or habitual actions.
whenever and when (= whenever) are particularly useful:
Whenever it rains the roof teaks.
When you open the door a light goes on.
174
Other uses of the simple present tense
A
It is used, chiefly with the verb say, when we are asking about or quoting from books, notices
or very recently received letters:
What does that notice say? ~ It says, 'No parking.'
What does the book say? ~ It says, 'Cook very slowly.'
I see you've got a letter from Ann. What does she say? ~ She says she is coming to
London next week.
Shakespeare says, 'Neither a borrower nor a lender be.'
Other verbs of communication are also possible:
Shakespeare advises us not to borrow or lend.
A notice at the end of the road warns people not to go any further.
It can be used in newspaper headlines:
B
MASS MURDERER ESCAPES
C
D
E
F
G
PEACE TALKS FAIL
It can be used for dramatic narrative. This is particularly useful when describing the action of
a play, opera etc., and is often used by radio commentators at sports events, public functions
etc.:
When the curtain rises, Juliet is writing at her desk. Suddenly the window opens and a
masked man enters.
It can be used for a planned future action or series of actions, particularly when they refer to a
journey. Travel agents use it a good deal.
We leave London at 10.00 next Tuesday and arrive in Paris at 13.00. We spend two
hours in Paris and leave again at 15.00. We arrive in Rome at 19.30, spend four hours
in Rome etc.
It must be used instead of the present continuous with verbs which cannot be used in the
continuous form, e.g. love, see, believe etc., so that we can say I love you but not I am loving
you. (See 168.)
It is used in conditional sentences, type 1 (see 221):
If I see Ann I'll ask her.
Unless you take the brake off the car won't move.
It is used in time clauses
(a) when there is an idea of routine:
As soon as he earns any money he spends it.
She takes the boy to school before she goes to work.
(b) when the main verb is in a future form (see 342):
It will stop raining soon.
Then we'll go out. = When it stops raining we 'II go out.
A Practical English Grammar
116
18
The past and perfect tenses
The simple past tense
175
Form
The simple past tense in regular verbs is formed by adding ed to the infinitive:
Infinitive: to work Simple past: worked
Verbs ending in e add d only:
Infinitive: to love Simple past: loved
The same form is used for ail persons:
I worked you worked
he worked
etc.
The negative of regular and irregular verbs is formed with did not (didn't) and the infinitive:
I did not/didn't work
you did not/didn't work etc.
The interrogative of regular and irregular verbs is formed with did + subject + infinitive:
did I work?
did you work?
etc.
Negative interrogative: did you not/didn't you work? etc.
Spelling notes
The rules about doubling the final consonant when adding ing (see 165) apply also when
adding ed:
admit, admitted
stop, stopped
travel, travelled
Verbs ending in y following a consonant change the y into i before adding ed:
carry, carried
try, tried
but y following a vowel does not change: obey, obeyed.
176
Irregular verbs: form
These vary considerably in their simple past form:
Infinitive: to eat, to leave, to see, to speak
Simple past: ate, left, saw, spoke
The simple past form of each irregular verb must therefore be learnt, but once this is done there
is no other difficulty, as irregular verbs (like regular verbs) have no inflexions in the past tense.
A list of irregular verbs will be found in chapter 39.
177
A
1
2
Use for the relation of past events
It is used for actions completed in the past at a definite time. It is therefore used:
for a past action when the time is given:
I met him yesterday.
Pasteur died in 1895.
or when the time is asked about:
When did you meet him?
3
4
B
or when the action clearly took place at a definite time even though this time is not mentioned:
The train was ten minutes late. How did you get your present job? I bought this car in
Montreal.
Sometimes the time becomes definite as a result of a question and answer in the present
perfect:
Where have you been? ~ I've been to the opera. ~ Did you enjoy it?
(See 184 A for further examples.)
The simple past tense is used for an action whose time is not given but which (a) occupied a
period of time now terminated, or (b) occurred at a moment in a period of time now terminated.
These may be expressed diagrammatically. TS here stands for time of speaking in the present.
TS
(a) |———————————————|.........................●
X
TS
(b) [...........●...…………………….........I.........................●
A Practical English Grammar
117
C
D
Examples of type (a):
He worked in that bank for four years. (but he does not work there now)
She lived in Rome for a long time. (but she is not living there now)
Examples of type (b):
My grandmother once saw Queen Victoria.
Did you ever hear Maria Callas sing?
These will be clearer when compared with the present perfect (see 182-4).
The simple past tense is also used for a past habit:
He always carried an umbrella.
They never drank wine. (For used to indicating past habits, see 162.)
The simple past is used in conditional sentences, type 2 (see 222). (For use of the unreal
past after as if, as though, it is time, if only, wish, would sooner/rather, see chapters 28, 29.)
The past continuous tense
178
Form
The past continuous tense is formed by the past tense of the verb to be + the present
participle:
Affirmative
I was working
you were working
he/she/it was working
we were working
you were working
they were working
Negative
I was not working
you were not working
he/she/it was not working
we were not working
you were not working
they were not working
Interrogative
was I working?
Win you working?
was he/she/it working?
were we working?
were you working?
were they working
Negative contractions: I wasn't working, you weren't working etc.
Negative interrogative: was he not/wasn't he working? etc.
See 165 for spelling of the present participle. Remember that some verbs cannot be used in the
continuous tenses (see 168).
179
Main uses of the past continuous tense
The past continuous is chiefly used for past actions which continued for some time but whose
exact limits are not known and are not important. It might be expressed diagrammatically.
'……’ indicates uncertainty about times of starting or finishing:
. . . . ___________ . . . .
Used without a time expression it can indicate gradual development:
It was getting darker. The wind was rising.
Used with a point in time, it expresses an action which began before that time and probably
continued after it. At eight he was having breakfast implies that he was in the middle of
breakfast at eight, i.e. that he had started it before eight. He had breakfast at eight would
imply that started it at eight.
If we replace the time expression with a verb in the simple past tense:
When I arrived
X
. . . . . ___________●_________ . . . .
Tom was talking on the phone
A Practical English Grammar
118
E
180
A
B
C
181
We convey the idea that the action in the past continuous started before the action in the
simple past and probably continued after it. The diagram may help to show this relationship.
The action in the simple past is indicated by X. Compare this combination with a combination
of two simple past tenses, which normally indicates successive actions:
When he saw me he put the receiver down.
We use the continuous tense in descriptions. Note the combination of description (past
continuous) with narrative (simple past):
A wood fire was burning on the hearth, and a cat was sleeping in front of it. A girt was
playing She piano and (was) singing softly to herself. Suddenly there was a knock on
the door. The girl stopped playing. The cat woke up.
Other uses of the past continuous
This tense can be used as a past equivalent of the present continuous:
Direct speech: He said, 'I am living in London.'
Indirect speech: He said he was living in London.
Just as the present continuous can be used to express a definite future arrangement:
I'm leaving tonight. I've got my plane ticket.
so the past continuous can express this sort of future in the past:
He was busy packing, for he was leaving that night. (The decision to leave had been
made some time previously.)
The past continuous with always:
He was always ringing me up.
He was always working.
(See 167 B for present continuous with always.)
Past continuous as an alternative to the simple past
The past continuous can be used as an alternative to the simple past to indicate a more
casual, less deliberate action:
I was talking to Tom the other day.
The past continuous here gives the impression that the action was in no way unusual or
remarkable. It also tends to remove responsibility from the subject. In the above example it is
not clear who started the conversation, and it does not matter. Note the contrast with the
simple past tense, I talked to Tom, which indicates that I took the initiative.
Similarly:
From four to six Tom was washing the car.
This would indicate that this was a casual, possibly routine action. Compare with:
From four to six Tom washed the car. (implying a deliberate action by Tom)
Note that continuous tenses are used only for apparently continuous uninterrupted actions. If
we divide the action up, or say how many times it happened, we must use the simple past:
I talked to Tom several times.
Tom washed both cars.
But we may, of course, use the continuous for apparently parallel actions:
Between one and two I was doing the shopping and walking the dog.
This tense is normally used in this way with a time expression such as today, last night, in the
afternoon, which could either be regarded as points in time or as periods. Periods can also be
indicated by exact times as shown above.
In questions about how a period was spent, the continuous often appears more polite than
the simple past: What were you doing before you came here? sounds more polite than What
did you do before you came here?
On the other hand. What were you doing in my room? could indicate a feeling that I think you
had no right to be there, while What did you do in my room? could never give this impression.
The present perfect tense
182
Form and use
A
Form
The present perfect tense is formed with the present tense of have + the past participle:
I have worked etc.
A Practical English Grammar
119
The past participle in regular verbs has exactly the same form as the simple past, i.e. loved,
walked etc. (see spelling rules, chapter 37).
In irregular verbs, the past participles vary (see 364).
The negative is formed by adding not to the auxiliary.
The interrogative is formed by inverting the auxiliary and subject.
Affirmative
I have worked
you haw worked
he/she/it has worked
we have worked
you haw worked
they have worked
Negative
I have not worked
you have not worked
be/she/it has not marked
we have not worked
you have not worked
they have not worked
Interrogative
have I worked?
have you worked?
has he/she/it worked?
have we worked?
have you worked?
have they worked?
Negative interrogative: has he not worked? etc.
B
183
Contractions: have/has and have not/has not can be contracted thus (see 118): I've worked,
you haven't worked, hasn't he worked? etc. the contracted forms are often almost inaudible in
colloquial speech.
have and has may also be contracted as shown in 104 B:
Where 've you been? What's he done?
Use
This tense may be said to be a sort of mixture of present and past. It always implies a strong
connexion with the present and is chiefly used in conversations, letters, newspapers and
television and radio reports.
The present perfect used with just for a recently completed action
He has just gone out = He went out a few minutes ago.
This is a special use of this tense, just must be placed between the auxiliary and the main
verb. This combination is used chiefly in the affirmative, though the interrogative form is
possible:
Has he just gone out?
It is not normally used in the negative.
184
A
B
The present perfect used for past actions whose time is not definite
The present perfect is used for recent actions when the time is not mentioned:
I have read the instructions but I don't understand them.
Have you had breakfast? ~ No, I haven't had it yet.
Compare with:
I read the instructions last night. (time given, so simple past)
Did you have breakfast at the hotel? (i.e. before you left the hotel: simple past)
Note possible answers to questions in the present perfect:
Have you seen my stamps? ~ Yes, I have/No, I haven't or Yes, I saw them on your
desk a minute ago.
Have you had breakfast? ~ Yes, I have or No, I haven't had it yet or Yes. I had it at
seven o 'clock or Yes. I had it with Mary. (time implied)
Recent actions in the present perfect often have results in the present;
Tom has had a bad car crash. (He's probably still in hospital.)
The lift has broken down. (We have to use the stairs.)
I've washed the car. (it looks lovely.)
But actions expressed by the simple past without a time expression do not normally have
results in the present:
Tom had a bad crash. (but he's probably out of hospital now)
The lift broke down. (but it's probably working again now)
I washed the car. (but it may be dirty again now)
Actions expressed by the present perfect + yet usually have results in the present:
He hasn't come yet. (so we are still waiting for him)
A Practical English Grammar
120
It can also be used for actions which occur further back in the past, provided the connexion
with the present is still maintained, that is that the action could be repeated in the present:
I have seen wolves in that/west
implies that it is still possible to see them, and
John Smith has written a number of short stories
implies that John Smith is still alive and can write more. If, however, the wolves have been
killed off and John Smith is dead we would say:
I saw wolves in that forest once/several times or
I used to see wolves here and
John Smith wrote a number of short stories.
Note also that when we use the present perfect in this way we are not necessarily thinking of
any one particular action (the action may have occurred several times) or of the exact time
when the action was performed. If we are thinking of one particular action performed at a
particular time we are more likely to use the simple past.
185
The present perfect used for actions occurring in an incomplete period
This may be expressed by the following diagram:
X
●
X
●
TS
●
Each X represents an action. TS stands for 'time of speaking' in the present.
An incomplete period may be indicated by today or this
morning/afternoon/evening/week/month/year/century etc.
Note that the present perfect can be used with this morning only up to about one o'clock,
because after that this morning becomes a completed period and actions occurring in it must be
put into the simple past:
(at 11 a.m.) Tom has rung up three times this morning already.
(at 2 p.m.) Tom rang up three times this morning.
Similarly, this afternoon will end at about five o'clock:
(at 4 p.m.) I haven't seen Tom this afternoon.
(at 6 p.m.) I didn't see Tom this afternoon.
The present perfect used with an incomplete period of time implies that the action happened or
didn't happen at some undefined time during this period:
Have you seen him today? (at any time today) — Yes, I have/
Yes. I've seen him today. (at some time during the day)
But if we know that an action usually happens at a certain time or in a i certain part of our
incomplete period we use the simple past tense. If my alarm clock normally goes off at six, I
might say at breakfast:
My alarm clock didn't go off this morning.
Imagine that the postman normally comes between nine and ten. From nine till ten we
will say:
Has the postman come yet/this morning?
But after this nine to ten period we will say:
Did the postman come this morning?
We use the past tense here because we are thinking about a complete period of time
even though we do not mention it.
Has the postman come this morning?
8:00
A Practical English Grammar
9:00
12:00
Did the postman come this morning?
10:00
121
this morning
C
D
186
lately, recently used with the present perfect also indicate an incomplete period of
time.
In the sentences Has he been here lately/recently? and He hasn't been here
lately/recently, lately/recently means 'at any time during the last week/month etc. and
in He has been here recently, recently means ‘at some undefined time during the last
week/month etc.'
lately is less usual with the affirmative, except for actions covering periods of time:
There have been some changes lately/recently.
He's had a lot of bad luck lately/recently.
recently, used with a simple past tense, means 'a short time ago';
He left recently = He left a short time ago.
The present perfect can be used similarly with ever, never, always, occasionally, often,
several times etc. and since + a point in time, since + clause, or since, adverb:
1
ANN: Have you ever/alien off a horse?
TOM: Yes, !'ve fallen off quite often/occasionally.
But if Tom's riding days are over, we would have;
ANN: Did you ever/all off a horse? (past tense)
TOM: Yes. I did occasionally/frequently.
2
I haven't seen him since November.
Has he written since he left home?
We had a letter last week. We haven't heard since.
I've since changed my mind = I've changed my mind since then3
The present perfect can be used here for habitual actions:
They've always answered my letters.
I've never been late for work.
Sometimes these appear to be continual rather than repeated action:
Since my accident I have written with my left hand.
I've worn glasses since my childhood.
We can then use for + a period of time as an alternative to since + a point in time:
I've used my left hand/or a month now.
I've worn glasses for ten years. (See 186.)
Note also sentences of this type:
This is the best wine I have ever drunk.
This is the worst book I have ever read.
This is the easiest job I have ever had.
We can use this construction, without ever. with the first, the second etc. and the only:
It/This is the first time I have seen a mounted band.
It is only the second time he has been in a canoe.
This is the only book he has written.
The present perfect used for an action which lasts throughout an incomplete period
Time expressions include for, since (see 387), all day/night/week, all my etc. life, all the time,
always, lately, never, recently.
The action usually begins in the past and continues past the time of speaking in the present:
He has been in the army for two years. (He is still in the army.)
I have smoked since I left school. (I still smoke.)
We have waited all day. (We are still waiting.)
He has lived here all his life. (He still lives here.)
He has always worked for us. (He still works for us.)
This type of action might be expressed by a diagram thus:
TS
A Practical English Grammar
122
●
Compare the above sentences with:
He was in the army for two years. (He is not in the army now.)
I smoked for six months. (and then stopped smoking)
He lived here all his life. (Presumably he is now dead.)
In each of the last three examples we are dealing with a completed period of time:
TS
●
so the simple past tense is used (see 177 B).
Sometimes, however, the action finishes at the time of speaking:
ANN (on meeting someone): I haven't seen you for ages?
(but I see you now)
This room hasn't been cleaned for months, (but we are cleaning it now)
It has been very cold lately but it's just beginning to get warmer.
This type of action could be expressed by a diagram thus:
TS
●
C
D
Verbs of knowing, believing and understanding cannot be used in the present perfect except as
shown in A above:
I have known him for a Song time.
I have never believed their theories.
So recent actions, even when the time is not mentioned, must be expressed by the simple
past:
Did you know that he was going to be married? (Have you known would not be
possible) and
Hello! I didn't know you were in London. How long have you been here?
think and wonder however can be used as in 185 D:
I have sometimes thought that I should hare emigrated.
I have often wondered why he didn't marry her.
Note that questions/answers such as:
How long have you been here? — I've, been here six months
will normally be followed by general inquiries in the present perfect about actions occurring
within the period mentioned, which is regarded as an incomplete period of time:
TS
●
because the action of staying, being etc., is not yet finished:
Have you been to the zoo/the theatre/the museums/the casino?
Have you enrolled in a school/found a job/met many people?
The answers will be in the same tense if no time is mentioned, otherwise they will be in the
simple past tense:
Yes, I have (been to the zoo etc,) or Yes, 1 went there last week.
No, I haven't enrolled yet or Yes, I enrolled on Monday/this morning.
187
The present perfect used with for and since
A
for is used with a period of time: for six days, for a long time.
for used with the simple past tense denotes a terminated period of time:
We lived therefor ten years. (but we don't live there now)
for used with the present perfect denotes a period of time extending into the present:
We have lived in London for ten years. (and still live there)
for can sometimes be omitted, especially after be, live and wait'.
A Practical English Grammar
123
We're been here an hour/two days.
for (of time) is not used before expressions beginning with all:
They've worked all night.
since is used with a point in time and means 'from that point to the time of speaking'. It is
always used with a perfect tense, except as shown in 188 below.
She has been here since six o'clock. (and is still here)
We've been friends since our schooldays.
Note that there is a difference between last and the last. Compare:
(a) I have been here since last week (month, year etc.) and
(b) I have been here/or the last week last week.
in (a), means a point in time about seven days ago.
the last week, in (b), means the period of seven days just completed.
since + clause is also possible:
I've worked here since I left school
and ever since (adverb):
He had a bad/all last year and has been of/work ever since.
188
it is + period + since + past or perfect tense
We can say:
It is three years since I (last) saw Bill or It is three years since I have seen Bill.
I last saw Bill three years ago or I haven't seen Bill for three years.
It is two months since Tom (last) smoked a cigarette or It is two months since Tom has
smoked a cigarette.
He last smoked a cigarette two months ago or He hasn't smoked a cigarette for two
months.
We can use the it is ... since construction without the adverb last:
It is two years since he left the country.
This, however, is replaceable only by:
He left the country two years ago.
We could not use a negative present perfect here as in the sentence about Bill above. He
hasn't been (living) in this country/or the last two years is possible but isn't an exact
equivalent of He left two years ago.
This construction can be used in the past:
He invited me to go riding with him. But it was two years since I had ridden a horse. (I
hadn't ridden a horse for two years previous to the invitation so I wasn't sure that I
would enjoy it.)
188
A
B
C
Further examples of the use of the present perfect and Simple past
TOM (visiting Philip for the first time):
PHILIP: I've always lived in a houseboat.
I didn't know you lived in a houseboat.
I was born in one.
I thought you were still on holiday. When did you get back? ~ I came back last week.
Has your term started yet? ~ Yes, it started on Monday.
Note that a conversation about a past action often begins with a question and answer in the
present perfect, but normally continues in the simple past, even when no time is given. This is
because the action first mentioned has now become definite in the minds of the speakers-.
Where have you been? ~ I've been to the cinema.
What did you see?/What was the film? ~ (I saw) 'Amadeus'. ~ Did you like it?
HUSBAND: Where have you been?
WIFE: I've been at the sales.
HUSBAND: What have you bought?/What did you buy?
WIFE: I have bought/I bought you some yellow pyjamas.
HUSBAND: Why did you buy yellow? I hate yellow.
The present perfect is often used in newspapers and broadcasts to introduce an action which
will then be described in the simple past tense. The time of the action is very often given in
the second sentence:
A Practical English Grammar
124
D
Thirty thousand pounds' worth of jewellery has been stolen from Jonathan Wild and
Company, the jewellers. The thieves broke into the flat above some time during Sunday
night and entered the shop by cutting a hole in the ceiling.
But even if the time of the action is not given the past tense will normally be used in the second
sentence:
Two prisoners have escaped from Dartmoor. They used a ladder which had been left
behind by some workmen, climbed a twenty-foot wail and got away in a stolen car.
The present perfect is often used in Setters:
I am sorry I haven't written before but I've been very busy lately as Tom has been
away.
We have carefully considered the report which you sent us on 26 April, and have
decided to take the following action.
The present perfect continuous tense
190
Form
This tense is formed by the present perfect of the verb to be + the present participle:
Affirmative: I have been working, he has been working etc.
Negative: I have not/haven't been working etc.
Interrogative: have I been working? etc.
Negative interrogative: have I not/haven't I been working? etc.
191
Use
This tense is used for an action which began in the past and is still continuing:
TS
●
or has only just finished:
TS
●
I've been waiting for an hour and he still hasn't turned up.
I'm so sorry I'm late. Have you been waiting long?
Remember that a number of verbs are not normally used in the continuous form (see
168), but that some of these can be used in this form in certain cases (see 169-71). We
can therefore say:
Tom has been seeing about a work permit for you.
She has been having a tooth out.
I've been thinking it over.
I've been hearing all about his operation.
In addition, the verb want is often used in this tense, and wish is also possible:
Thank you so much for the binoculars. I've been wanting a pair for ages.
The present perfect continuous tense does not exist in the passive. The nearest passive
equivalent of a sentence such as They have been repairing the road would normally be The
road has been repaired lately (present perfect passive), which is not exactly the same thing.
192
Comparison of the present perfect simple and continuous
An action which began in the past and is still continuing or has only just finished can, with
certain verbs, be expressed by either the present perfect simple or the present perfect
continuous. Verbs which can be used in this way include expect, hope, learn, lie, live, look,
rain, sleep, sit, snow, stand, stay, study, teach, wait, want, work:
How long have you learnt English?
How long have you been learning English?
He has slept for ten hours.
A Practical English Grammar
125
A
B
C
193
He has been sleeping/or ten hours.
It has snowed/or a long time.
It has been snowing/or a long time.
This is not of course possible with verbs which are not used in the continuous forms (see 168),
i,e, the present perfect continuous could not replace the simple present perfect in the following
examples:
They've always had a big garden.
How long have you known that?
He's been in hospital since his accident.
Notice also that the present perfect continuous can be used with or without a time phrase. In
this way it differs from the simple present perfect, which can only express this type of action if
a time phrase is added such as for six days, since June, never. When used without a time
expression of this kind, the simple present perfect refers to a single completed action.
A repeated action in the simple present perfect can sometimes be expressed as a continuous
action by the present perfect continuous:
I've written six letters since breakfast.
I've been writing letters since breakfast.
I have knocked five times. I don't think anyone's in.
I've been knocking. I don't think anybody's in.
Note that the present perfect continuous expresses an action which is apparently
uninterrupted: we do not use it when we mention the number of times a thing has been done
or the number of things that have been done.
There is, however, a difference between a single action in the simple present perfect and an
action in the present perfect continuous:
(a) I've polished the car means that this job has been completed.
(b) I've been polishing the car means 'this is how I've spent the last hour'. It does not
necessarily mean that the job is completed.
Note also that a single action in the present perfect continuous continues up to the time of
speaking, or nearly up to this time:
He's been taking photos (he's probably still carrying his camera) but
He has taken photos. (This action may or may not be very recent.)
Some more examples of the present perfect and the present perfect continuous
I haven't seen your brother lately. Has he gone away?
Yes, he's/he has been sent to America.
A When did he go?
R He went last month.
A Have you had any letters from him?
B I haven't, but his wife has been hearing from him regularly.
A Does she intend to go out and join him?
B They've been thinking about it but haven't quite decided yet.
Unfortunately they've had a lot of expense lately and perhaps haven't got the money for
her fare.
TOM: What have you done with my knife? (Where have you put it?)
ANN: I put it back in your drawer.
TOM (taking it out): But what have you been doing with if? The blade's ail twisted! Have
you been using it to open tins?
A: Do you see those people on that little sandy island? They've been waving
handkerchiefs for the last half hour. I wonder why.
B: They need help. The tide's coming in and very soon that little island wilt be under
water. Have you been sitting here calmly and doing nothing to help them?
A: I've never been here before. I didn't know about the tides.
A
B
The past perfect tense
194
Form and use
A Practical English Grammar
126
A
B
Form This tense is formed with had and the past participle:
Affirmative: I had/I'd worked etc.
Negative: I had not/hadn't worked etc.
Interrogative: had I worked? etc.
Negative interrogative: had I not/hadn't I worked? etc.
Use
The past perfect is the past equivalent of the present perfect.
Present: Ann has just left. If you hurry you'll catch her. (See 183.)
Past: When I arrived Ann had just left.
Present: I've lost my case. (See 184.)
Past: He had lost his case and had to borrow Tom's pyjamas.
Unlike the present perfect the past perfect is not restricted to actions whose time is not
mentioned. We could therefore say:
He had left his case on the 4.40 train.
The present perfect can be used with since/for/always etc, for an action which began in the past
and is still continuing or has only just finished (see 186). The past perfect can be used
similarly for an action which began before the time of speaking in the past, and
(a) was still continuing at that time or
(b) stopped at that time or just before it.
But note that the past perfect can also be used:
(c) for an action which stopped some time before the time of speaking.
Examples of types (a), (b) and (c) are given below:
(a) Bill was in uniform when I met him. He had been a soldier for ten years/since he
was seventeen, and planned to stay in the army till he was thirty.
Ann had lived in a cottage for sixty years/ever since she was born, and had no wish to
move to a tower block. (The past perfect continuous tense had been living would also
be possible here.)
(b) The old oak tree, which had stood in the churchyard/or 300 years/since before the
church was built, suddenly crashed to the ground. (The past perfect continuous tense
had been standing would also be possible here.)
Peter, who had waited for an hour/since ten o'clock, was very angry with his sister
when she eventually turned up. (had been waiting would also be possible.)
(c) He had served in the army for ten years; then he retired and married. His children
were now at school.
Here we cannot use either since or the past perfect continuous. Note also that the past
perfect here has no present perfect equivalent. If we put the last verb in this sentence into the
present tense the other tenses will change to the simple past.
He served in the army for ten years: then retired and married. His children are now at
school.
These structures are shown below in diagram form, with the line AB for the action in the past
perfect, and TS for the time of speaking in the past:
(a)
A
B
(b)
TS
A
B
(c)
●TS
A
B
(See also 196 for the use of the past perfect in indirect speech.)
3
The past perfect is also the past equivalent of the simple past tense, and is used when the
narrator or subject looks back on earlier action from a certain point in the past:
Tom was 23 when our story begins. His father had died five years before and since
then Tom had lived alone. His father had advised him not to get married till he was 35,
and Tom intended to follow this advice.
A Practical English Grammar
127
I had just poured myself a glass of beer when the phone rang. When 1 came back from
answering it the glass was empty. Somebody had drunk the beer or thrown it away.
He met her in Paris in 1977. He had last seen her ten years before.
Her hair had been grey then: now it was white. Or He met her in 1967 and again ten
years later. Her hair, which had been grey at their first meeting, was now white.
But if we merely give the events in the order in which they occurred no past perfect tense is
necessary:
Tom's father died when Tom was eighteen. Before he died he advised Tom not to
marry till he was 35, and Tom at 23 still intended to follow this advice.
He met her first in 1967 when her hair was grey. He met her again in 1977/He didn't
meet her again till 1977. Her hair was now white.
There is no looking back in the above two examples so no reason for a past perfect.
Note the difference of meaning in the following examples:
She heard voices and realised that there were three people in the next room.
She saw empty glasses and cups and realised that three people had been in the room.
(They were no longer there,)
He arrived at 2.30 and was told to wait in the VIP lounge.
He arrived at 2.30. He had been told to wait in the VIP lounge.
In the third example he received his instructions after his arrival. In the fourth he received
them before arrival, possibly before the journey started.
A Practical English Grammar
128
195
A
B
C
D
E
Past and past perfect tenses in time clauses
Clauses with when
When one past action follows another. He called her a liar. She smacked his face, we can
combine them by using when and two simple past tenses provided that it is clear from the
sense that the second action followed the first and that they did not happen simultaneously:
When he called her a liar she smacked his face.
When two simple past tenses are used in this way there is usually the idea that the first action
led to the second and that the second followed the first very closely:
When he opened the window the bird flew out.
When the play ended the audience went home.
When he died he was given a state funeral.
The past perfect is used after when when we wish to emphasize that the first action was
completed before the second one started:
When he had shut the window we opened the door of the cage. (We waited for the
window to be quite shut before opening the cage.)
When she had sung her song she sat down. ('When she sang her song she sat down'
might give the impression that she sang seated.)
When he had seen all the pictures he said he was ready to leave. (When he had
finished looking at them . . .)
Compare with:
When he saw all the pictures he expressed amazement that one man should have
painted so many. (Immediately he saw them he said this.)
The past perfect can be used similarly with as soon as, the moment, immediately. (For as
as a time conjunction, see 332.)
The past perfect can be used with till/until and before to emphasize the completion or
expected completion of an action. But note that in till/until + past perfect + simple past
combinations the simple past action may precede the past perfect action; and in before +
past perfect + simple past combinations the simple past action will always precede the past
perfect action:
He refused to go till he had seen all the pictures.
He did wit wait till we had finished our meal.
Before we had finished our meal he ordered us hack to work.
Before we had walked ten miles he complained of sore feet.
Past perfect tenses in both time clause and main clause are also possible:
It was a very expensive town. Before we had been here a week we had spent all our
money.
after is normally followed by a perfect tense:
After the will had been read there were angry exclamations.
We have already stated (see 194) that actions viewed in retrospect from a point in the past are
expressed by the past perfect tense. If we have two such actions:
He had been to school but he had learnt nothing there, so was now illiterate.
and wish to combine them with a time conjunction, we can use when etc. with two past
perfect tenses:
When he had been at school he had learnt nothing, so he was now illiterate.
But it is more usual to put the verb in the time clause into the simple past:
When he was at school he had learnt nothing, . . .
Similarly:
He had stayed in his father's firm till his father died. Then he had started his own
business and was now a very successful man.
Verbs of knowing, understanding etc. are not normally used in the past perfect tense in time
clauses except when accompanied by an expression denoting a period of time:
When she had known me for a year she invited me to tea but
When I knew the work of one department thoroughly I was moved to the next
department or As soon as I knew etc.
Compare with:
When I had learnt the work of one department I was moved.
A Practical English Grammar
129
F
Time clauses containing past perfect tenses can be combined with a main verb in the
conditional tense, but this is chiefly found in indirect speech, and some examples will be
given in the next paragraph.
196
Use of the past perfect in indirect speech
A
B
Present perfect tenses in direct speech become past perfect tenses in indirect speech provided
the introductory verb is in the past tense:
He said, 'I've been in England for ten years' = He said that he had been in England for
fen years.
He said. 'When you've worked for a year you'll get arise' = He said that when I'd worked
for a year I'd get a rise.
She said, 'I'll lend you the book as soon as I have read it myself = She said she'd lend
me the book as soon as she'd read it herself.
Simple past tenses in direct speech usually change similarly:
He said, 'I knew her well' = He said that he had known her well.
But there are a number of cases where past tenses remain unchanged (see 309-10).
(For the past perfect after if (conditional), see 223; after wish and if only, see 300; after as if,
as though, see 292.)
A Practical English Grammar
130
The past perfect continuous tense
197
A
B
1
2
3
Form and use
Form
This tense is formed with had been + the present participle. It is therefore the same for all
persons:
I had/I'd been working
they had wit/hadn't been working
had you been working?
had you not/hadn't you been working?
It is not used with verbs, which are not used in the continuous forms, except with want and
sometimes wish:
The boy was delighted with his new knife. He had been wanting one for a long time.
Note that this tense has no passive form. The nearest passive equivalent of a sentence such
as They had been picking apples would be Apples had been picked, which is not the same
thing (see B3 below).
Use
The past perfect continuous bears the same relation to the past perfect as the present perfect
continuous bears to the present perfect (see 192)
When the action began before the time of speaking in the past, and continued up to that time,
or stopped just before it, we can often use either form (see 192 A):
It was now six and he was tired because he had worked since dawn = It was now six and
he was tired because he had been working since dawn.
A repeated action in the past perfect can sometimes be expressed as a continuous action by
the past perfect continuous (see 192 B):
He had tried five times to get her on the phone.
He had been trying to get her on the phone.
But there is a difference between a single action in the simple past perfect and an action in the
past perfect continuous (see 192 C):
By six o'clock he had repaired the engine. (This job had been completed.)
He had been repairing the engine tells us how he had spent the previous hour/half hour etc. It
does not tell us whether or not the job was completed.
Another difference is that an action in the present perfect continuous continues up to, or
beyond, the time of speaking in the past. An action in the past perfect may occur shortly
before the time of speaking, but there could be quite a long interval between them:
He had been painting the door. (The paint was probably still wet.)
But
He had painted the door. (Perhaps recently, perhaps some time ago.)
19
The future
198
Future forms
There are several ways of expressing the future in English. The forms are listed below and
will be dealt with in the order in which they are given. Students should study them in this
order, as otherwise the relationship between them will not be clear.
(a) The simple present (see 199)
(b) will + infinitive, used for intention (201)
(c) The present continuous (202)
(d) The be going to form (203-6)
(e) The 'future simple' will/shall + infinitive (207-10)
(f) The future continuous (211-14)
(g) The future perfect (216 A)
(h) The future perfect continuous (216 B)
For be + infinitive used to express future plans, see 114.
For be about + infinitive and be on the point of + gerund, see 144 C.
Note: Most of the auxiliary verbs are dealt with in chapters 11-16, but will + infinitive is an
essential part of the future, so we have placed it here- It may seem odd that it has been
A Practical English Grammar
131
separated from the future simple but logically it seems best to place it before the present
continuous and the be going to form.
199
The simple present used for the future
This tense can be used with a time expression for a definite future arrangement:
The boys start school on Monday.
I leave tonight.
instead of the more normal present continuous tense (see 202):
The boys are starting school on Monday.
I'm leaving tonight.
The difference between them is:
(a) The simple present is more impersonal than the continuous. I'm leaving tonight would
probably imply that I have decided to leave, but I leave tonight could mean that this is part of
a plan not necessarily made by me.
(b) The simple present can also sound more formal than the continuous. A big store planning
to open a new branch is more likely to say Our new branch opens next week than Our new
branch is opening next week.
(c) The simple present is sometimes used where the continuous would sound a bit clumsy,
e.g. when speaking of a series of proposed future actions, like plans for a journey; i.e. we
say:
We leave at six, arrive in Dublin at ten and take the plane on . . .
instead of:
We are leaving at six, arriving in Dublin at ten and taking the plane on . . .
Note, however, that in a sentence such as My train leaves at six we are using the simple
present for a habitual action. Here, therefore, the simple present is not replaceable by the
continuous.
200
A note on the meaning of future with intention
When we say that a form expresses future with intention we mean that it expresses a future
action which will be undertaken by the speaker in accordance with his wishes, will + infinitive
and the be going to form can be used in this way.
When we say that a form expresses future without intention we mean that it merely states that
a certain action will happen. We don't know whether it was arranged by the subject or by
some other person and we don't know what the subject thinks of it. The present tense and the
future continuous tense can be used in this way.
The present continuous tense in the second or third person conveys no idea of intention,
though there may be a hint of intention when the first person is used. The future simple (apart
from will used as in 201, 205) normally conveys no idea of intention; but see shall, 208 B,
234.
201
will + infinitive used to express intention at the moment of decision (see also 205 E2 and E3)
(a) The phone is ringing. ~ I'll answer it.
(b) BILL (to waiter): I'll have a steak, please. (would like is also possible. See 210 B.)
(c) ANN: I'd better order a taxi for tonight.
TOM: Don't bother. I'll drive you.
(d) MARY (looking at a pile of letters): I'll answer them tonight.
(e) PAUL (who is getting fat and tired of paying parking fines): I know what to do. I'll sell
my car and buy a bike.
(f) ALAN (on receiving a telegram saying his father is ill): I'll go home tonight/I'll leave
tonight.
For unpremeditated actions, as above, we must use will (normally contracted to 'll). But note
that if after his decision the speaker mentions the action again, he will not use will, but be
going to or the present continuous. (be going to is always possible; the present continuous
has a more restricted use. See 202.)
For example, imagine that to (b) above a friend, Tom, joins Bill before his food has arrived:
TOM: What are you having/going to have?
BILL: I'm having/going to have a steak.
Similarly, at a later time, in:
A Practical English Grammar
132
(c) Ann might say:
Tom is driving me /going to drive me to the airport tonight.
(d) Mary, however, could only say:
I'm going to answer these letters tonight. (She hasn't made an arrangement with
anybody.)
(e) Paul. similarly, could say:
I'm going to sell the car
though when he finds a buyer he can say:
I'm selling the car.
(f) Alan, however, could say:
I'm going home tonight
even though this is, as yet, only a decision, (See 202 B, D.)
(For will compared to be going to, see 2115.)
202
A
B
C
D
The present continuous as a future form
Note that the time must be mentioned, or have been mentioned, as otherwise there may be
confusion between present and future.
The present continuous can express a definite arrangement in the near future: I'm taking an
exam in October implies that I have entered for it;
and Bob and Bill are meeting tonight implies that Bob and Bill have arranged this. If there has
merely been an expression of intention, as in 201 (d) and (e) above, we use the be going to
form.
But with verbs of movement from one place to another, e.g. arrive, come, drive, fly, go, leave,
start, travel, verbs indicating position, e.g. stay, remain, and the verbs do and have (food or
drink), the present continuous can be used more widely. It can express a decision or plan
without any definite arrangement. Alan in 201 (f) can therefore say I'm going home tonight/I'm
leaving tonight even before he has arranged his journey.
Note also:
What are you doing next Saturday? (This is the usual way of asking people about their plans.)
Possible answers:
I'm going to the seaside.
The neighbours are coming in to watch television.
I'm not doing anything. I'm staying at home. I'm going to write letters. (I'm writing .. . would not
be possible.)
This method of expressing the future cannot be used with verbs which are not normally used
in the continuous tenses (see 168). These verbs should be put into the future simple
(will/shall):
I am meeting him tonight but I will/shall know tonight.
They are coming tomorrow but They will be here tomorrow.
We 'II think it over.
Note, however, that see, when it is used for a deliberate action (see to/about, see someone
out/off/home etc., see meaning 'meet by appointment'), can be used in the continuous
tenses (see 170):
I'm seeing hint tomorrow. (I have an appointment with him.)
to be can be used in the continuous tenses when it forms part of a passive verb:
He is being met at the station tonight.
Our new piano is being delivered this afternoon.
More examples of combinations of will + infinitive used at the moment of decision (see 201)
and the present continuous tense used as a future form:
TRAVEL AGENT: Now, how do you want to go to Rome, sir? By air or by train?
TRAVELLER (making up his mind): The trains are too slow. I'll fly.
But afterwards, talking about his plans, this traveller will say:
I'm flying to Rome next week.
ANN: I'll have to pay £150 rent at the end of this month and I don't know where to find the
money.
TOM: Don't worry. I'll lend you £150.
Later, but before Tom has actually tent the money, Ann will say:
Tom is lending me £150.
A Practical English Grammar
133
TOM:
Would you like to come to the opera tonight?
I'd love to. Shall I meet you there?
TOM: No, I'll call for you. About seven?
ANN: OK.
Later, Ann, telling a friend about this plan, will say:
Tom is taking me to the opera tonight. He's calling for me at seven.
(The be going to form could replace the continuous tense in the above examples.)
ANN:
203
A
B
The be going to form
Form , The present continuous tense of the verb to go + the full infinitive:
I'm going to buy a bicycle.
She is not going to be there.
Is he going to lecture in English?
This form is used:
(a) For intention (see 204).
(b) For prediction (see 206).
A Practical English Grammar
134
204
1
2
3
4
5
205
A
The be going to form used for intention
The be going to form expresses the subject's intention to perform a certain future action.
This intention is always premeditated and there is usually also the idea that some preparation
for the action has already been made. Actions expressed by the be going to form are
therefore usually considered very likely to be performed, though there is not the same idea of
definite future arrangement that we get from the present
continuous. The following points may be noted:
As already shown, be going to can be used for the near future with a time expression as an
alternative to the present continuous, i.e. we can say:
I'm/I am meeting Tom at the station at six.
I'm/I am going to meet Tom at the station at six.
But note that I'm meeting Tom implies an arrangement with Tom. I'm going to meet Tom does
not: Tom may get a surprise!
be going to can be used with time clauses when we wish to emphasize the subject's
intention:
He is going to be a dentist when he grows up.
What are you going to do when you get your degree?
Normally, however, the future simple (shall/will) is used with time clauses. (See 342.)
be going to can be used without a time expression;
I'm going to play you a Bach fugue.
He is going to lend me his bicycle.
It then usually refers to the immediate or near future.
As seen in (2) above, the he going to form can be used with the verb to be. It is also sometimes
found with other verbs not normally used in the continuous tenses:
I am going to think about it. I'm sure I'm going to like it. But on the whole it is safer to use the
future simple here.
Note that it is not very usual to put the verbs go and come into the be going to form. Instead we
generally use the present continuous tense:
i.e. instead of / am going to go we normally say 1 am going and instead of / am going to come
we very often say / am coming. Note that we can express intention by using will + infinitiveThis fori11 is compared with be going to in 202.
Comparison of the use of be going to and will + infinitive to express intention
Very often we can use either the be going to form or will + infinitive, but there are
differences between them, as a result of which there are occasions when only one of them is
possible.
The chief difference is:
The be going to form always implies a premeditated intention, and often an intention + plan.
will + infinitive implies intention alone, and this intention is usually, though not necessarily,
unpremeditated.
If, therefore, preparations for the action have been made, we must use be going to:
I have bought some bricks and I'm going to build a garage.
If the intention is dearly unpremeditated, we must use will:
There is somebody at the hall door. - I'll go and open it. (See examples in section E.)
When the intention is neither clearly premeditated nor clearly unpremeditated, either be
going to or will may be used:
I will/am going to climb that mountain one day.
I won't/am not going to tell you my age. But will is the best way of expressing determination:
I will help you. (with stress on will) This means 'I definitely intend to help you'.
Other differences:
As already noted, will + infinitive in the affirmative is used almost entirely for the first person.
Second and third person intentions are therefore normally expressed by be going to:
He is going to resign.
Are you going to leave without paying?
But in the negative won't can be used for all persons. So we can say:
He isn't going to resign or He won't resign. But note that won't used for a negative intention
normally means 'refuse':
A Practical English Grammar
135
2
3
4
206
A
B
1
2
He won't resign = He refuses to resign. He isn't going to res^n normally means 'He doesn't
intend to resign'.
be going to, as already stated, usually refers to the fairly immediate future, will can refer either
to the immediate or to the more remote future.
More examples of be going to and will
Examples of be going to used to express intention:
What are you doing with that spade? -lam going to plant some apple trees.
She has bought some wool; she is going to knit a jumper.
Why are you taking down all the pictures? ~ l am going to repaper the room.
Some workmen arrived today with a roller. I think they are going to repair our road.
Why is he carrying his guitar? - He is going to play it in the Underground.
Note that it would not be possible to substitute will for be going to in any of the above examples,
as in each of them there is clear evidence of premeditation.
Examples of will + infinitive (see 201):
This is a terribly heavy box. ~ I'll help you to carry it.
I've left my watch upstairs. ~ I'll go and get if for you.
Who will post this letter/or me? ~ I will.
Will you lend me £100? ~ No, I won't.
Some comparisons of be going to and will
In answer "to Tom's remark There aren't any matches in the house Ann might reply either I'm
going to get some today (premeditated decision) or I'll get some today (unpremeditated
decision). The first would imply that some time before this conversation she realized that
there were no matches and decided to buy some- The second would imply that she had not
previously decided to buy matches but took the decision now, immediately after Tom's
remark.
Similarly, if Ann says Where is the telephone book? and Tom says I’ll get it for you he is
expressing a decision made immediately after Ann's question. If he said I'm going to get it, it
would mean that he had decided to do this before Ann spoke (presumably because he had
anticipated that Ann would want it, or needed it for himself).
Note that will/won't does not have any meaning of intention when it is used as indicated in 209
A-E, i.e. when it is used as part of the future simple will/shall. So He won't resign can mean He
refuses to resign or / don't expect that he will resign; and in // he hurries he 'II catch up with her,
will doesn't express intention but merely states a fact.
The be going to form used for prediction
The be going to form can express the speaker's feeling of certainty. The time is usually not
mentioned, but the action is expected to happen in the near or immediate future:
Look at those clouds' It's going to rain.
Listen to the wind. We 're going to have a rough crossing.
It can be used in this way after such verbs as be sure/afraid, believe, think:
How pale that girl is! I am sure/I believe/I think she is going to faint.
Comparison of be going to (used for prediction) with will (used for probable future)
will is a common way of expressing what the speaker thinks, believes hopes, assumes, fears
etc. will happen (see 209 A):
It will probably be cold/I expect it will be cold.
Tomatoes will be expensive this year/I'm sure tomatoes will be expensive.
will and be going to are therefore rather similar and often either form can be used:
It will fake a long time to photocopy ail the documents = It is going to take a long time to
photocopy all the documents.
But there are two differences:
be going to implies that there are signs that something will happen, will implies that the
speaker thinks/believes that it will happen.
be going to is normally used about the immediate/fairly immediate future; will doesn't imply
any particular time and could refer to the remote future.
For example, The lift is going to break down implies that it is making strange noises or
behaving in a strange way; we had better get out on the next floor. The lift will break down
implies that this will happen some time in the future (perhaps because we always overload
our lifts, perhaps because it is an XYZ Company lift and they don't last). Similarly (of a sick
man), He is going to get better implies that there are signs of recovery. Perhaps his
A Practical English Grammar
136
temperature has gone down. He will get better implies confidence in his doctor or in the
course of treatment, but promises eventual rather than immediate recovery.
207
The future simple
Form
There is no future tense in modern English, but for convenience we often use the term 'future
simple' to describe the form will/shall + bare infinitive.
Affirmative
Negative
I will/I’ll work or
I shall work
you will/you'll work
he will/he'll work etc.
we will/we'll work or
we shall work
you will/you 'II work
they will/they'll work
I will not/won't work or
I shall not/shan't work
you will not/won't work
he will not/won't work etc.
we will not/won't work or
we shall not/shan't work
you will not/won't work
they will not/won't work
Interrogative
shall I work?
will you work?
will he work? etc.
shall we work?
will you work?
will they work?
For interrogative contractions, see 104.
Negative interrogative: will he not/won't he work? etc.
208
A
First person will and shall
Formerly will was kept for intention:
I will wait for you = I intend to wait for you
B
and shall was used when there was no intention, i.e. for actions where the subject's wishes
were not involved:
I shall be 25 next week.
We shall know the result next week. (It will be in the papers.)
Unless the taxi comes soon we shall miss our plane.
I'm sure I shan't lose my way.
I shall see Tom tomorrow. (Perhaps we go to work on the same train.)
shall, used as above, is still found in formal English, but is no longer common in
conversation. Instead we normally use will:
I will be 25 next week.
We 'II know the result tomorrow.
Unless the taxi comes soon we 'Il miss the plane.
I 'm sure I won't lose my way.
Sometimes, however, will might change the meaning of the sentence. If in I shall see Tom
tomorrow we replace shall by will, we have I will see Tom tomorrow, which could be an
expression of intention. To avoid ambiguities of this kind we use the future continuous tense:
I'll be seeing Tom tomorrow. (See 211-14.)
shall, however, is still used in the interrogative:
In question tags after let's: Let's go, shall me?
In suggestions: Shall we take a taxi?
In requests for orders or instructions: What shall I do with your mail?
In speculations: Where shall we be this time next year? (Here, though, will is also possible.)
shall for determination
We have already noted (see 201, 205) that determination is normally expressed by will. But
sometimes public speakers feel that to express determination they need a 'heavier' word, a
word not normally used much, and so they say shall:
(in a speech) We shall fight and we shall win.
We will fight and we shall win would be equally possible.
shall used in this way sometimes carries the idea of promise which we get in second person
shall:
You shall have a sweet = I promise you a sweet. (See 234 A.)
A Practical English Grammar
137
In we shall win the speaker is promising victory.
shall can be used in this way in ordinary conversation:
I shall be there, I promise you.
But will here is equally possible and less trouble for the student. When in doubt use will.
209
F
210
A
Uses of the future simple
To express the speaker's opinions, assumptions, speculations about the future. These may
be introduced by verbs such as assume, be afraid, be/feel sure, believe, daresay, doubt,
expect, hope, know, suppose, think, wonder or accompanied by adverbs such as perhaps,
possibly, probably, surely, but can be used without them:
(I'm sure) he 'II come back.
(I suppose) they 'II sell the house.
(Perhaps) we 'II find him at the hotel.
They'll (probably) wait for us.
The future simple can be used with or without a time expression be going to is sometimes
possible here also, but it makes the action appear more probable and (where there is no time
expression) more, immediate. He'll build a house merely means 'this is my opinion', and gives
no idea when the building will start. But He's going to build a house implies that he has
already made this decision and that he will probably start quite soon.
The future simple is used similarly for future habitual actions which we assume will take place:
Spring will come again.
Birds will build nests.
People will make plans.
Other men will climb these stairs and sit at my desk.
(will be coming/building/making/climbing/sitting would also be possible.)
The future simple is used in sentences containing clauses of condition, time and sometimes
purpose:
If I drop this glass if will break. (See 221.)
When it gets warmer the snow will start to melt. (See 342.)
I'm pulling this letter on top of the pile so that he'll read it first. (See 336.)
Note that in an if-clause or a time clause we don't use the future simple even when the
meaning is future:
He will probably be late but If he is late . . . and
It will get warmer soon but When if gets warmer . . .
Verbs not normally used in the continuous tenses, e.g. auxiliary verbs, verbs of the senses, of
emotion, thinking, possessing etc. (see 168), usually express the future by the future simple,
though be going to is sometimes possible:
He 'II be here at six.
You 'II have time for tea.
She'll wonder where you are.
They'll know tonight.
The future simple is used, chiefly in newspapers and news broadcasts, for formal
announcements of future plans and for weather forecasts. In conversations such statements
would normally be expressed by the present continuous or be going to form or, for plans
only, by the present continuous:
NEWSPAPER: The President wilt open the new heliport tomorrow.
The fog will persist in all areas.
But the average reader/listener will say:
The President is going to open/is opening . . .
The fog is going to persist/continue . . .
won't can be used with all persons to express negative intention. So He won't pay can mean
either He refuses to pay or I don't think he 'll pay.
I/we will can express affirmative intention (see 201), but he/you/they will do not normally
express intention. They may appear to do so sometimes in such sentences as My
son/brother/husband etc. will help you, but the intention may be the speaker's rather than the
subject's.
will contrasted with want/wish/would like
will must not be confused with want/wish/would like.
A Practical English Grammar
138
B
will expresses an intention + a decision to fulfil it:
I will buy it = I intend to buy it/I'm going to buy it.
want/wish/would like merely expresses a desire. They do not give any information about
intended actions. (See also 296, 299.)
Note, however, that I'd like is often a possible alternative to I'll have/take:
CUSTOMER (in a shop): I'd like/I'll have a pound of peas, please.
DINER (in a restaurant): I'd like/I'll have the soup, please.
Both can be used for invitations:
Would you like a drink? or Will you have a drink?
When accepting an invitation we can use either form:
I'd like/I'll have a sherry, please.
But the two forms are not interchangeable in the negative, so if we wish to refuse an invitation
we must say:
I won't have anything, thanks or I don't want anything, thanks.
wouldn't like means 'would dislike', so could not be used here.
211
The future continuous tense
A
Form
This tense is made up of the future simple of to be + the present participle. In the first person,
will is more usual than shall, except in the interrogative.
Affirmative
I/we will/shall be working
he/she/it/you/they mill be working
Negative
I/we will/shall not be working
he/she/it/you/they will not be working
Interrogative
shall/will I/we be working?
will he/she/it/you/they be working?
Contractions as shown in 207.
Negative interrogative: will he not/won't he be working? etc.
A Practical English Grammar
139
Use
This tense has two uses:
It can be used as an ordinary continuous tense.
It can express a future without intention.
212
The future continuous used as an ordinary continuous tense
Like other continuous tenses it is normally used with a point in time, and expresses an action
which starts before that time and probably continues after it. This use is best seen by
examples. Imagine a class of students at this moment -9.30 a.m. We might say:
Now they are sitting in their classroom. They are listening to a tape. This time tomorrow they
will be sitting in the cinema. They will be watching a film. On Saturday there is no class. So on
Saturday they will not be sitting in the classroom. They will be doing other things. Bill will be
playing tennis. Ann will be shopping. George will still be having breakfast.
A continuous tense can also be used with a verb in a simple tense:
Peter has been invited to dinner with Ann and Tom. He was asked to come at eight but tells
another friend that he intends to arrive at seven. The friend tries to dissuade him: 'When you
arrive they'll still be cooking the meal!'
213
The future continuous used to express future without intention
Example: I will be helping Mary tomorrow.
This does not imply that the speaker has arranged to help Mary or that he wishes to help her. It
merely states that this action will happen. The future continuous tense used in this way is
somewhat similar to the present continuous, but differs from it in the following points.
The present continuous tense implies a deliberate future action. The future continuous tense
usually implies an action which will occur in the normal course of events. It is therefore less
definite and more casual than the present continuous:
I am seeing Tom tomorrow.
I'll be seeing Tom tomorrow.
The first implies that Tom or the speaker has deliberately arranged the meeting, but the second
implies that Tom and the speaker will meet in the ordinary course of events (perhaps they work
together). This difference is not always very important, however, and very often either tense can
be used. We can say:
He'll be taking his exam next week or
He is taking his exam next week.
He won't be coming to the party or
He isn't coming to the party.
The present continuous can only be used with a definite time and for the near future, while the
future continuous can be used with or without a definite time and for the near or distant future.
We can say:
I am meeting him tomorrow but
I'll be meeting him tomorrow/next year/some time. (or without a time expression at all)
214
A
The future continuous and will + infinitive compared
There is approximately the same difference between will + infinitive and the future continuous
as between will + infinitive and the present continuous. will + infinitive expresses future with
intention. The future continuous expresses future without intention.
In this sentence:
I'll write to Mr Pitt and tell him about Tom's new house
the verb in bold type expresses intention. The speaker announces a deliberate future action in
accordance with his own wishes. But in the sentence:
I'll be writing to Mr Pitt and I'll tell him about Tom's new house
the verb in bold type expresses no intention. It is a mere statement of fact and implies that
this letter to Mr Pitt will be written either as a matter of routine or for reasons unconnected
with Tom's new house. Similarly, Tom won't cut the grass means Tom refuses to cut it, while
A Practical English Grammar
140
B
215
A
Tom won't be cutting the grass is a mere statement of fact, giving no information about Tom's
feelings. Perhaps Tom is away. or ill, or will be doing some other job.
will + infinitive can express invitation, request or command:
Will you have a cigarette? (See 210.)
Will you help me to lift the piano? (See 284.)
You will work in this room. (See 282.)
The future continuous can have none of the above meanings:
Will you please bring the piano in here? (request) ~ Yes sir/OK.
But
Will you be bringing the piano in here? (question only) ~Yes, I think I will or No, I think I'll put
it upstairs.
You will work in this office (command) but
You will be working here. (only a statement)
As before, the present continuous could be used here instead of the future continuous,
provided that a time expression was added.
Examples of various future forms
Imagine that we ask five people about their plans for the following Saturday. We say:
What are you doing/going to do on Saturday?
B
(a) Peter has arranged to play golf with George; so he will say:
I'm playing/going to play golf with George.
(b) Mary has decided to stay at home and make jam; so she will say:
I'm staying/going to stay at home. I'm going to make jam.
(c) Andrew's plans depend on the weather; so he may sav:
If it's fine I'll work/I'm going to work in the garden.
(d) Ann hasn't made any plans, but she may say:
Perhaps I'll take/I expect I'll take/I'll probably take/I suppose I'll take my children for a
walk.
(e) Bill always has to work on Saturdays; so he will say:
Oh, I'll be working as usual. (No other form would give this exact meaning.)
Questions about intentions
These are usually expressed by the present continuous, the be going to form or the future
continuous. This last tense is a particularly useful interrogative form as it is considered more
polite than the others. So if we are continuing to ask our five people questions we may say:
(a) Where are you playing/are you going to play/will you be playing golf?
(b) What kind of jam are you going to make/will you be making?
will you + infinitive is less usual than the other forms and is rarely found at the beginning of a
sentence. (This is to avoid confusion, because will you + infinitive at the beginning of a
sentence usually introduces a request.) It is however used in conditional sentences and
when the speaker is offering something or asking the other person to make a decision:
What will you do if he is not on the plane?
Will you have a drink?
Will you have your meal now or later?
More examples of questions based on the sentences in A above:
(c) If we are questioning Andrew we will probably say:
What are you going to do/What will you be doing in the garden? (though What will you
do? would be possible), and Are you going to cut/Will you be cutting the grass? (Will
you cut the grass? would sound more like a request.)
(d) To Ann we would probably say:
I/you take them, where will you go? (though where will you be going? is possible)
(e) To Bill we could say:
Will you be working all day?
This is the only possible form if we wish to convey the idea that Bill works on Saturday
because it is the routine, not from choice-Note that the future continuous must of course be
used in questions of the type What will you be doing this time next week? regardless of
whether the action is intentional or not (see 212).
216
The future perfect and the future perfect continuous
A Practical English Grammar
141
A
B
1
2
The future perfect
Form
will/shall + perfect infinitive for first persons, will + perfect infinitive for the other persons.
Use
It is normally used with a time expression beginning with by: by then, by that time, by the
24th:
By the end of next month he will have been here for ten years.
It is used for an action which at a given future time will be in the past, or will just have
finished. Imagine that it is 3 December and David is very worried about an exam that he is
taking on 13 December.
Someone planning a party might say:
We'd better wait fill 14 December. David will have had his exam by then, so he'll be able to
enjoy himself.
Note also:
I save £50 a month and I started in January. So by the end of the year I will/shall have saved
£600.
BILL (looking at Tom's cellar): You've got over 400 bottles. How long will that last you? Two
years?
TOM: Not a hope. I drink eight bottles a week. I'll have drunk all these by the end of this year.
The future perfect continuous
Form
will/shall have been + present participle for the first persons,
will have been + present participle for the other persons.
Use
Like the future perfect, it is normally used with a time expression beginning with by:
By the end of this year he'll have been acting for thirty years.
The future perfect continuous bears the same relationship to the future perfect as the present
perfect continuous bears to the present perfect, i.e. the future perfect continuous can be used
instead of the future perfect:
When the action is continuous:
By the end of the month he will have been living/working/studying here for ten years.
When the action is expressed as a continuous action:
By the end of the month he will have been training horses/climbing mountains for twenty years.
But if we mention the number of horses or mountains, or divide this action in any way, we must use the
future perfect;
By the end of the month he will have trained 600 horses/climbed 50 mountains.
A Practical English Grammar
142
20
The sequence of tenses
217
Subordinate clauses
A sentence can contain a main clause and one or more subordinate clauses. A subordinate
clause is a group of words containing a subject and verb and forming part of a sentence:
We knew that the bridge was unsafe.
He gave it to me because he trusted me.
He ran faster than we did.
This is the picture that I bought in Rome.
(In the examples above and in 218 the subordinate clauses are in bold type.)
For other examples see under conditional sentences, relative pronouns and clauses of
purpose, comparison, time, result and concession. It is not necessary for the student to make
a detailed study of clauses or even to be able to recognize the different kinds of clause, but it
is necessary for him to learn to know which is the main verb of a sentence because of the
important rule given below.
218
The sequence of tenses
When the main verb of a sentence is in a past tense, verbs in subordinate clauses are
normally in a past tense also. See the starred sentences below.
Tense of verb in main clause
Tense of verb in subordinate clause
Present
He thinks that it will rain.
Future simple
Past
He thought that it would rain.*
Conditional
Present
He sees that he has made a mistake.
Pres. perf.
Past
He saw that he had made a mistake.*
Past perf.
Present
I work so hard that I am always tired.
Present
Past
I worked so hard that I was always tired.* Past
Pres. perf.
He has done all that is necessary.
Present
Past perf.
He had done all that was necessary.*
Past
Present
He says that he is going to eat it.
Pres. continuous
Past
He said that he was going to eat it.*
Past continuous
Note that infinitive and gerunds are not affected by the above rule:
He wants to go to Lyons.
He wanted to go to Lyons.
He likes riding.
He liked riding.
The rule about sequence of tenses applies also to indirect speech when the introductory verb
is in a past tense. (See chapter 31.)
A Practical English Grammar
143
21
The conditional
The conditional tenses
219
The present conditional tense
A
This is formed with would/should + infinitive for the first person and would + infinitive
for the other persons.
Affirmative
I would/I'd work or / should work
you would/you'd work etc.
Negative
I would not/wouldn't work or
I should not/shouldn't work
you would not/wouldn't work etc.
Interrogative
would/should I work?
would you work? etc.
Negative interrogative
should I not/shouldn't I work?
would you wit/wouldn't you work? etc.
It is used:
(a) in conditional sentences (see 221-9).
(b) In special uses of would and should (see chapter 22).
(c) As a past equivalent of the future simple, would/should must be used instead of
will/shall when the main verb of the sentence is in the past tense:
I hope (that)I will/shall succeed.
I hoped (that) I would/should succeed.
I know (that) he will be in time.
I knew (that) he would be in time.
He thinks (that) they will give him a visa.
He thought (that) they would give him a visa.
I expect (that) the plane will be diverted.
I expected (that) the plane would be diverted.
(For will/shall, would/should in indirect speech, see chapter 31.)
B
220
A
B
The perfect conditional tense
This is formed with would/should and the perfect infinitive:
Affirmative
I would/should have worked
you would have worked etc.
Negative
I would not/should not have worked etc.
Interrogative
would/should I haw worked? etc.
Negative interrogative
should I not have/shouldn't I have worked'
would you not have/wouldn't you
have worked? etc.
Other contractions as in 219,
It is used:
(a) In conditional sentences (see 221-9).
(b) In special uses of would and should (see 230-7).
(c) As a past equivalent of the future perfect tense:
I hope he will have finished before we get back.
I hoped he would have finished before we got back.
A Practical English Grammar
144
Conditional sentences
Conditional sentences have two parts: the if-clause and the main clause. In the sentence If it
rains I shall stay at home 'If it rams' is the if-clause, and 'I shall stay at home' is the main
clause, There are three kinds of conditional sentences. Each kind contains a different pair of
tenses. With each type certain variations are possible but students who are studying the
conditional for the first time should ignore these and concentrate on the basic forms.
221
A
2
222
A
Conditional sentences type 1: probable
The verb in the if-clause is in the present tense; the verb in the main clause is in the future
simple. It doesn't matter which comes first.
If he runs he'll get there in time.
The cat will scratch you if you pull her fail.
This type of sentence implies that the action in the if-clause is quite probable.
Note that the meaning here is present or future, but the verb in the if-clause is in a present,
not a future tense, if + will/would is only possible with certain special meanings. (See 224.)
Possible variations of the basic form
Variations of the main clause
Instead of if + present + future, we may have:
(a) if + present + may/might (possibility)
If the fog gets thicker the plane may/might be diverted. (Perhaps the plane will be
diverted.)
(b) if + present + may (permission) or can (permission or ability)
If your documents are in order you may/can leave at once. (permission)
If it stops snowing we can go out. (permission or ability)
(c) if + present + must, should or any expression of command, request or advice
If you want to lose weight you must/should eat less bread.
If you want to lose weight you had better eat less bread.
If you want to lose weight eat less bread.
If you see Tom tomorrow could you ask him to ring me?
(d) if + present + another present tense
if + two present tenses is used to express automatic or habitual
results:
I/you heat ice it turns to water. (.will turn is also possible.)
I/there is a shortage of any product prices of that product go up.
(e) When if is used to mean as/since (see 338 A), a variety of tenses can be used in the main clause:
Ann hates London. ~ I/she hates it why does she live there?/she ought to move out. (If so could
replace If she hates it here.)
This is not, of course, a true conditional clause.
Variations of the if-clause
Instead of if + present tense, we can have:
(a) if + present continuous, to indicate a present action or a future arrangement
If you are waiting for a bus (present action) you'd better join the queue.
If you are looking for Peter (present action) you'll find him upstairs.
If you are staying for another night (future arrangement) I'll ask the manager to give you a
better room.
(b) if + present perfect
If you have finished dinner I'll ask the waiter for the bill.
If he has written the letter I'll post it.
I/they haven't seen the museum we'd better go there today.
Conditional sentences type 2
The verb in the if-clause is in the past tense; the verb in the main clause is in the conditional
tense:
If I had a map I would lend it to you. (But I haven't a map. The meaning here is present.)
If someone tried to blackmail me I would tell the police. (But I don't expect that anyone will try
to blackmail me. The meaning here is future.)
A Practical English Grammar
145
B
1
2
B
2
There is no difference in time between the first and second types of conditional sentence.
Type 2, like type 1, refers to the present or future, and the past tense in the if-clause is not a
true past but a subjunctive, which indicates unreality (as in the first example above) or
improbability (as in the second example above).
Type 2 is used:
When the supposition is contrary to known facts:
If I lived near my office I'd be in time for work. (But I don't live near my office.)
If I were you I'd plant some trees round the house. (But I am not you.)
When we don't expect the action in the if-clause to take place:
If a burglar came into my room at night I'd scream. (But I don't expect a burglar to come in.)
If I dyed my hair blue everyone would laugh at me. (But I don't intend to dye it.)
Some if-clauses can have either of the above meanings:
If he left his bicycle outside someone would steal it.
'If he left his bicycle' could imply 'but he doesn't' (present meaning, as in 1 above) or 'but he
doesn't intend to' (future meaning, as in 2). But the correct meaning is usually clear from the
text. Ambiguity of this kind can be avoided by using were/was + infinitive instead of the past
tense in type 2.
if he/she/it were can be used instead of if he/she/it was, and is considered the more correct
form:
If he were to resign . . . = If he resigned . . .
If I were to succeed . . . = If I succeeded . . .
This construction with were is chiefly found in fairly formal sentences.
if he/she/it was + infinitive is possible in colloquial English, but the past tense, as shown
above, is much more usual.
Sometimes, rather confusingly, type 2 can be used as an alternative to type 1 for perfectly
possible plans and suggestions:
Will Mary be in time if she gets the ten o'clock bus? ~ No, but she'd be in time if she got the
nine-thirty bus or No, but she'll be in time if she gets the nine-thirty bus.
We'll never save £100! ~ If we each saved £10 a week we'd do it in ten weeks or
If we each save £10 a week we'll do it in ten weeks.
A suggestion in type 2 is a little more polite than a suggestion in type 1, just as would you is
a more polite request form than will you. But the student needn't trouble too much over this
use of type 2.
Possible variations of the basic form
Variations of the main clause
(a) might or could may be used instead of would:
If you tried again you would succeed. (certain result)
If you tried again you might succeed. (possible result)
If I knew her number I could ring her up. (ability)
If he had a permit he could get a Job. (ability or permission)
(b) The continuous conditional form may be used instead of the simple conditional form:
Peter is on holiday; he is touring Italy. ~ If I were on holiday
I would/might be touring Italy too.
(c) if + past tense can be followed by another past tense when we wish to express automatic
or habitual reactions in the past: compare if + two present tenses, 221 B1(d). Note that the
past tenses here have a past meaning:
If anyone interrupted him he got angry, (whenever anyone interrupted him)
If there was a scarcity of anything prices of that thing went up.
(d) When if is used to mean 'as' or 'since', a variety of tenses is possible in the main clause, if + past
tense here has a past meaning. The sentence is not a true conditional,
The pills made him dizzy. Ail the same he bought/has bought/is buying some more. ~ If
they made him dizzy why did he buy/has he bought/is he buying more?
I knew she was short of money. ~ If you knew she was short of money you should have
lent her some./why didn't you lend her some?
Variations of the if-clause
Instead of if + simple past we can have:
(a) if + past continuous
(We're going by air and) I hate flying. If we were going by boat I'd feel much happier.
If my car was working I would/could drive you to the station.
(b) if + past perfect
If he had taken my advice he would be a rich man now.
A Practical English Grammar
146
(This is a mixture of types 2 and 3. For more examples, see 223,) (For if + would, see 224.)
223
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
224
A
Conditional sentences type 3
The verb in the if-clause is in the past perfect tense; the verb in the main clause is in the perfect
conditional. The time is past and the condition cannot be fulfilled because the action in the if-clause
didn't happen.
If I had known that you were coming I would have met you at the airport. (But I didn't
know, so I didn't come.)
If he had tried to leave the country he would have been stopped at the frontier. (But he
didn't try.)
Possible variations of the basic form
could or might may be used instead of would:
If we had found him earlier we could have saved his life. (ability)
If we had found him earlier we might have saved his life. (possibility)
If our documents had been in order we could have left at once. (ability or permission)
The continuous form of the perfect conditional may be used:
At the time of the accident I was sitting in the back of the car, because Tom's little boy
was sitting beside him in front. If Tom's boy had not been there I would have been
sitting in front.
We can use the past perfect continuous in the if-clause:
I was wearing a seat belt. If I hadn't been wearing one I'd have been seriously injured.
A combination of types 2 and 3 is possible:
The plane I intended to catch crashed and everyone was killed. If I had caught that
plane I would be dead now or I would have been killed. (type 3)
If I had worked harder at school I would be sitting in a comfortable office now; I wouldn't
be sweeping the streets. (But I didn't work hard at school and now I am sweeping the
streets.)
had can be placed first and the if omitted:
I/you had obeyed orders this disaster would not have happened = Had you obeyed
orders this disaster would not have happened.
Special uses of will/would and should in if-clauses
Normally these auxiliaries are not used after if in conditional sentences. There are, however, certain
exceptions.
if you will/would is often used m polite requests. would is the more polite form.
If you will/would wait a moment I'll see if Mr Jones is free.
(Please wait.)
I would be very grateful if you would make the arrangements for me.
if you would +• infinitive is often used aione when the request is one which would normally be made
in the circumstances. The speaker assumes that the other person will comply as a matter of course.
If you'd fill up this form.
(in a hotel) If you'd just sign the register.
(in a shop) If you'd put your address on the back of the cheque.
(in a classroom) If you 'd open your books.
if + will/would can be used with all persons to indicate willingness:
If he'll listen to me I'll be able to help him. (If he is willing to listen . . .)
If Tom would tell me what he wants for his dinner I'd cook it for him. (The speaker
implies that Tom is unwilling to tell her.) .
won't used in this way can mean 'refuse':
If he won't listen to me I can't help him. (if he is unwilling to listen/If he refuses to listen .
. .)
If they won't accept a cheque we'll have to Ray cash. (If they refuse to accept. . .)
will can be used to express obstinate insistence (230 B):
If you 'will play the drums all night no wonder the neighbours complain. (If you insist on
playing . . .)
if + would like/care can be used instead of if + want/wish and is more polite;
If you would like to come I'll get a ticket for you.
A Practical English Grammar
147
E
225
A
1
2
3
B
226
A
B
C
If you'd care to see the photographs I'll bring them round.
If he'd like to leave his car here he can.
But if we rearrange such sentences so that would like has no object, we can drop the would:
If you like I'll get a ticket for you but
If you'd like a ticket I'll get one for you.
If he likes he can leave his car here but
If he'd like to leave his car here he can or
He can learn it here if he'd like to.
if + should can be used in type 1 to indicate that the action, though possible, is not very
likely. It is usually combined with an imperative and is chiefly used in written instructions:
If you should have any difficulty in getting spare parts ring this number.
If these biscuits should arrive in a damaged condition please inform the factory at once.
should can be placed first and the if omitted:
Should these biscuits arrive . . . (See 225 B.)
if + were and inversion of subject and auxiliary
if + were instead of if + was
Usually either can be used, were being more likely in formal English:
I/she was/were offered the job she'd take it.
If Tom was/were here he 'd know what to do.
But were is a little more usual than was in the advice form If I were/ was you I would/should . . .
If I were you I would wait a bit,' he said. (See 287 C.)
were is also more usual in the infinitive construction:
If Peter were/was to apply for the post he'd get it. (See 222 B.)
were, not was, is used when the auxiliary is placed first:
Were I Tom I would refuse. (See B below.)
When if means 'since' (see 222 C) was cannot be replaced by were.
were can replace was after if only (see 228) and wish (see 300),
if + subject + auxiliary can be replaced in formal English by inversion of auxiliary and subject
with if omitted:
If I were in his shoes . . . = Were I in his shoes . . .
If you should require anything . . . =
Should you require anything . . .
If he had known . . . = Had he known . . .
if, even if, whether, unless, but for, otherwise, provided, suppose
even if = even though
Compare:
You must go tomorrow if you are ready and
You must go tomorrow even if you aren't ready.
whether ... or = if... or
You must go tomorrow whether you are ready or not.
unless + affirmative verb = if + negative
Unless you start at once you 'II be late = If you don't start at once you 'II be late.
Unless you had a permit you couldn't get a job = If you hadn't a permit you couldn't get
a job.
Note the difference between:
(a) Don't call 'me if you need help and
(b) Don't call me unless you need help.
In (a) he won't help her even if she needs help. In (b) he will help her if she needs help but
doesn't want non-urgent calls.
unless + he'd/you'd like/prefer etc. normally replaces if he/you wouldn't like etc.:
I'll ask Tom, unless you 'd prefer me to ask/unless you 'd rather
I asked Bill.
but for = 'if it were not for/if it hadn't been for'
My father Rays my fees. But for that! wouldn't be here. The car broke down. But for that we would
have been in time.
A Practical English Grammar
148
otherwise = 'if this doesn't happen/didn't happen/hadn't happened' We must be back before midnight;
otherwise we'll be locked out = I/we are not back by midnight we'll be locked out. Her father pays her
fees; otherwise she wouldn't be here = If her father didn't pay her fees she wouldn't be here. I used my
calculator; otherwise I'd have taken longer = If I hadn't used my calculator I'd have taken longer.
In colloquial English or (+ else) can often replace otherwise:
We must be early or (else) we won't get a seat.
provided (that) can replace if when there is a strong idea of limitation or restriction. It is chiefly
used with permission. You can camp here provided you leave no mess.
suppose/supposing . . . ? = what if. . . ?
Suppose the plane is late? = What if/What will happen if the plane is late? Suppose no one had been
there? = What if no one had been there? suppose can also introduce suggestions:
Suppose you ask him/Why don't you ask him?
227
if and in case
in case is followed by a present or past tense or by should (see 337). It appears similar to if
and is often confused with it. But the two are completely different.
An in case clause gives a reason for the action in the main clause:
Some cyclists carry repair outfits in case they have a puncture == Some cyclists cany repair outfits
because they may have/because if i;
possible they will have a puncture.
! always slept by the phone in case he rang during the night =
I always slept by the phone because (I knew) he might ring during
the night.
An in case clause can be dropped without changing the meaning of the main clause. In a
conditional sentence, however, the action in the main clause depends on the action in the ifclause, and if the if-clause is dropped the meaning of the main clause changes. Compare:
(a) BILL: I'll come tomorrow in case Ann wants me and
(b) TOM: I'll came tomorrow if Ann wants me. In (a) perhaps Ann will want Bill, perhaps she
won't. But Bill will come anyway. His action doesn't depend on Ann's, in case Ann wants me
could be omitted without changing the meaning of the main verb. In (b), a conditional
sentence, Tom will only come if Ann asks him. His action depends on hers. We cannot
remove if Ann wants me without changing the meaning of the main verb.
B An in case clause is normally placed after the main clause, not before it. Note, however,
that in case of + noun = if there is a/an + noun:
In case of accident phone 999 = If there is an accident phow 999, This may have led to the
confusion of if-clauses and in case clauses.
228
A
B
C
if only
only can be placed after if and indicates hope, a wish or regret, according to the tense used
with it.
if only + present tense/will expresses hope:
If only he conies in time = We hope he will come in time.
If only he will listen to her = We hope he will be willing to listen to her.
if only + past/past perfect expresses regret (see also wish + past/past perfect, 300):
If only he didn't smoke! = We wish he didn't smoke or We are sorry he smokes.
If only (= I/We wish) Tom were here!
If only you hadn't said, 'Liar'! = We wish you hadn't said, 'Liar'/We are sorry you said, 'Liar'.
if only + would can express regret about a present action as an alternative to if only 4- past
tense (it has the same meaning as wish + would):
If only he would drive more slowly! == We are sorry that he isn't willing to drive more slowly or a not
very hopeful wish concerning the future:
If only (= I/We wish) the rain would stop! (We don't really expect it
to stop.)
(See also wish, 300-1.)
if only clauses can stand alone as above or form part of a ful! conditional sentence.
A Practical English Grammar
149
229
Conditional sentences in indirect speech
Type 1, basic form. The tenses here change in the usual way:
He said, 'If I catch the plane fit be home by five' = He said that if he caught the plane he
would be home by five.
Type 2, basic form. No tense changes:
'If I had a permit I could gel a job,' he said = He said that if he had a permit he could get a job.
Type 3, basic form. No tense changes:
'If she had loved Tom.'he said, 'she wouldn't have left him' = He said that if she had loved
Tom she wouldn't have left him.
Examples of if-clauses + commands and requests in indirect speech (see also 320-1):
He said, 'if you have time wash the floor' or
He said. 'If you have time would you wash the floor?' =
He told/asked me to wash the floor if I had time (note change of
order) or
He said that if I had time I was to wash the floor.
'If you see Ann ask her to ring me,' he said =
He said that if I saw Ann I was to ask her to ring him.
(The infinitive construction here would be clumsy and less clear,)
PETER (on phone): If you miss the last bus get a taxi =
Peter says that if we miss the last bus we are to get a taxi. (The
infinitive construction would be much iess usual here.)
(For if you would . . . requests, see 284 F.)
if-clauses + expressions of advice in indirect speech:
'If you feel ill,' she said, 'why d/m 'I you go to bed?' or
'. . . you'd better go to bed' =
She advised me to go to bed if I felt ill or
She said that if I felt ill I'd better/I should go to bed.
'If I were you I'd stop taking pills.' she said =
She advised me to stop taking pills.
if-clauses + questions are usually reported with the if-clause last:
'If the baby is a girl what will they call her?' he wondered = He wondered what they would call
the baby if it was a girl, 'If the door is locked what shall I do?' she asked = She asked what
she would do if the door was locked.
A Practical English Grammar
150
22
Other uses of will/would, shall/should
For will/shall in commands, see 282.
For will/would in requests, see 284.
For will/would in invitations, see 286.
For would/should used with like, prefer, wish etc., see chapter 29.
230
A
B
C
231
Habits expressed by will, would
Habits in the present are normally expressed by the simple present tense; but will + infinitive
can be used instead when we wish to emphasize the characteristics of the performer rather
than the action performed. It is chiefly used in general statements:
An Englishman will usually show you the way in the street. (It is normal for an
Englishman to act in this way.)
This is not a very important use of will, but the past form, would, has a much wider use and can
replace used to when we are describing a past routine:
On Sundays he used to/would get up early and go fishing. He used to/would spend the
whole day by the river and in the evening used to/would come home with marvellous
stories of the fish he had nearly caught.
Note, however, that when used to expresses a discontinued habit, it cannot be replaced by
would. (See 162.)
Both will and would can be contracted when used as above.
will can also express obstinate insistence, usually habitual;
If you 'will keep your watch half an hour slow it is hardly surprising that you are late for your
appointments. would is used in the past:
We all tried to stop him smoking in bed but he 'would do it. will and would are not contracted
here and are strongly stressed,
would can express a characteristic action, usually one which annoys the speaker:
Bill objects/objected. — He 'would'./He 'would object! (He always objects.)
should/would think + that-clause or so/not
(See 347 for so/not used to replace clauses.)
Will it be expensive? - I should/would think so./I should think if would. (= probably 'Yes') or
I shouldn't think it would./I shouldn't/wouldn't think so./
I should/would think not. (= probably'No') By this sort of answer the speaker implies that he
doesn't really know but that this is his impression. I should/would think is therefore less
confident than / think.
so/not is not usually possible when should/would think introduces a comment. A that-clause
therefore has to be used:
He's an astrologer, looking for work. ~ I shouldn't/wouldn't think that he'd find it easy to get
work.
If we are commenting on a past action we use should/would have thought:
He actually got a job as an astrologer. ~ I shouldn 't/wouldn 't have thought that it was possible
to do that.
should/would have expected + an infinitive construction or a that-clause is also possible.
The impersonal pronoun you can sometimes replace I:
She has emigrated. ~ Has she? You'd/I'd have expected her to stay in this country.
232
would for past intention
As has already been noted would is the past equivalent of will when will is used for the
ordinary future:
He knows he will be late. He knew he would be late. would similarly is the past equivalent of
will used to express intention ' (see 201):
I said, 'I will help him' =
I said that I would help him.
He said, '! won't lend you a penny' =
A Practical English Grammar
151
He said that he wouldn 't lend me a penny. But notice that whereas would used for future or
intention is restricted to subordinate clauses as in the above examples, wouldn't used for
negative intention can stand aione:
He won't help me today. (He refuses to help.)
He wouldn't help me yesterday. (He refused to help.) would cannot be used in this way. So to
put a sentence such as / will help him today into the past, we have to replace will by another
verb:
I wanted/intended/offered to help him yesterday.
233
shall I/we? in requests for orders or advice, offers, suggestions
Requests for orders:
How shall I cook it? Where shall we put this? When the request is for advice only we
use either shall or should:
Which one shall I buy? or Which one should I buy?
Offers:
Shall I waif for you? Shall! help you to Rack?
Suggestions:
Shall we meet at the theatre? Let's meet at the- theatre, shall we?
(See 318 for shall I/we? in indirect speech.)
234
A
B
C
235
shall in the second and third persons
shall can express (A) the subject's intention to perform a certain action or to cause it to be
performed, and (B) a command. Both these uses are old-fashioned and formal and normally
avoided in modern spoken English.
Examples of shall used to express the speaker's intention:
You shall have a sweet = I'll give you a sweet or I'll see that you get a sweet. He shan't come
here = / won't let him come here. They shall not pass = We won't let them pass. In the past,
i.e. in indirect speech, it is usually necessary to change the
wording:
He said, 'You shall have a sweet' = He promised me a sweet.
Examples of shall used to express a command:
Yachts shall go round the course, passing the marks in the correct
order, (yacht-racing rules)
Members shall enter the names of their guests in the book provided.
(club rules)
This construction is chiefly used in regulations or legal documents. In less formal English
must or are to would be used instead of shall in the above sentences. (See also 282.)
shall you? is an old-fashioned form which is occasionally still found in some novels possibly
because it is shorter and neater than the future
continuous tense:
Shall you go? -= Will you be going?
that. . . should after certain verbs
Certain verbs can be followed by that + subject + should as an alternative to a gerund or
infinitive construction.
that. . . should is particularly useful in the passive and sometimes is the only possible
passive form.
that. . . should is more formal than a gerund or infinitive construction and usually implies less direct
contact between the advisers/organizers etc. and the people who are to carry out the action. Verbs
which can be used with that. . . should include the following:
advise, agree, arrange, ask, beg, command, decide, demand determine insist, order,
propose, recommend, request, stipulate, suggest, urge. Note also: be anxious, be
determined.
She advised that we should keep the gate Socked.
She advised that the gate should be kept locked.
She advised keeping the gate locked/advised us to keep it locked.
A Practical English Grammar
152
(See 267.)
recommend could be used above instead of advise and would sound more formal They agreed/decided that the roof should be repaired. They agreed/decided to repair the roof.
He arranged that I should go abroad.
He arranged/or me to go abroad.
They arranged that the minister should be met at the airport.
They arranged/or the minister to be met at the airport.
be anxious (= wish: see 27 C) takes the same construction as arrange:
He is anxious that classes should start/should he started at once. He is anxious/or classes to
start/to be started at once.
They asked/begged/urged that relief work should he given priority. They asked/begged/urged
the authorities to give relief work priority. (See 243.)
He commanded that the army should advance. (He was not
necessarily with the army.)
He commanded the army to advance. (He probably was with the
army.)
She determined/was determined that he should study music. She determined/was
determined to let him/make him study music. She insisted that he should study music/insisted
on his studying music. (See 262.)
He ordered that Ann should go. (He probably told someone else to
tell her.)
He ordered Ann to go. (He probably told her himself.) (See 320.)
He ordered that the goods should be sent by air.
He ordered the goods to be sent by air.
He proposed/suggested that we should try homeopathic remedies. (See 289.)
He proposed/suggested that homeopathic remedies should be tried. i, He
proposed/suggested (our) trying homeopathic remedies.
They stipulated that the best materials should be used. They stipulated/or the best materials
So be used.
should is sometimes omitted before be. (See 291 C.)
236 it is/was + adjective + that . . . should
A that. . . should can be used after if is/was advisable, better, desirable. essential, imperative,
important, natural, necessary; after fair (.= just), just, right (these are often preceded by only)
and after reasonable, as an alternative to a for+ infinitive construction:
It is advisable that everyone should have a map.
It is better for him to hear itfrwn you.
If is better that he should hear it/row you.
It is essential for him to be prepared for this.
ft is essential that he should be prepared for this.
!t is only right that she should have a share. should is sometimes omitted before be:
It is essential that he be prepared.
B that. . . should can be used after it is/was absurd, amazing, annoying, ludicrous, odd,
ridiculous, strange, surprising and similar adjectives as an alternative to that + present/past
tense:
It is ridiculous that we should be (= that we are) short of water in a
country where it is always raining. The perfect infinitive is sometimes used when referring to
past events:
It is amazing that she should have said (= that she said) nothing
about the murder.
237 Other uses of should
A After can't think why/don't know why/see no reason why etc. when the
speaker queries the reasonableness or justice of an assumption:
/ don't know why you should think that I did it. I see no reason why you should interfere in
their quarrel.
The perfect infinitive is usual when the assumption was in the past:
I can't think why he should have said that it was my fault.
B Idiomatically with what, where, who in dramatic expressions of surprise:
What should J find but an enormous spider' Quite often the surprise is embarrassing:
Who should come in but his first wife!
C After lest and sometimes after in case:
1 In literary English lest. . . should is sometimes placed after expressions of fear or anxiety;
A Practical English Grammar
153
He was terrified lest he should slip w the icy rocks. should •+• perfect infinitive is used when the
anxiety concerns a previous action:
She began to be worried lest he should have met with some accident.
lest can also be used in purpose clauses to mean 'for fear that':
He dared not spend the money lest someone should ask where
he had got it.
As above, this is a literary form.
in case, which is more usual than lest here, can be followed bv should or by an ordinary
present or past tense:
in case someone should ask/someone asked (See also 227, 337.)
should is sometimes used in purpose clauses as an alternative to would/could:
He wore a mask so that no one should recognize him. (See 336.)
In conditional sentences instead of the present tense:
If the pain should return fake another of these pills. (See 224.)
In indirect, rather formal, commands when the recipient of the command is not necessarily
addressed directly:
He ordered that Tom should leave the house. (See 321 B.) Compare with He ordered
Tom to leave which implies that he told Tom himself.
A Practical English Grammar
154
23
The infinitive
238
Form
A
Examples of infinitive forms
Present infinitive
to work, to do Present continuous infinitive to be working
to be doing Perfect infinitive
to have worked, to have
done Perfect continuous infinitive to have been working
to have been doing Present infinitive passive
to be done
Perfect infinitive passive
to have been done
B The full infinitive consists of two words, to + verb, as shown above. But after certain verbs and
expressions we use the form without to, i.e. the 'bare infinitive' (see 246);
You had better say nothing. (See 120.)
C It is not normally advisable to put any words between the to and the verb, but see 248,
split infinitives.
D To avoid repetition, an infinitive is sometimes represented by its to:
Do you smoke? ~ No, but I used to (smoke). (See 247.)
239 Uses of the infinitive
A The infinitive may be used alone. We began to walk, or as part of an infinitive phrase, We
began to walk down the road.
B The infinitive may be the subject of a sentence (see 240),
C The infinitive may be the complement of a verb:
His plan is to keep the affair secret.
D The infinitive may be the object or part of the object of a verb.
It can follow the verb directly: He wants to pay (see 241, 243) or follow verb + how, what etc.
(see 242) or follow verb •+• object: He wants w to pay (see 243, 244).
E be + infinitive can express commands or instructions (see 114). F The infinitive can
express purpose (see 334).
G The infinitive can be used after certain adjectives:
angry, glad. happy, sorry (see 26) fortunate, likely, lucky (see 27)
The infinitive can connect two clauses (see 249).
The infinitive can sometimes replace relative clauses (see 77, 250).
The infinitive can be used after certain nouns (see 251).
The infinitive can be used with too/enough and certain adjectives/adverbs (see 252).
An infinitive phrase such as to tell the truth, to cut a long story short can be placed at the
beginning or end of a sentence (see 253).
The infinitive as subject
An infinitive or an infinitive phrase can be the subject of the verbs appear, be, seem. The
infinitive can be placed first:
To compromise appears advisable.
To lean out of the window is dangerous.
To save money now seems impossible.
But it is more usual to place the pronoun it first, and move the infinitive or infinitive phrase to
the end of the sentence:
It appears advisable to compromise.
It is dangerous to lean out of the window.
It seemed impossible to save money. it here is known as the introductory it. Note its use with
interrogatives:
Would it be safe to camp here?
Wouldn 't it be better to go on?
The it construction is necessary here. Would 4- to cam? and Wouldn't + to go on would not be
possible.
Usually infinitive constructions of this type consist of it + be +
adjective + infinitive. (See 26-7,)
But sometimes a noun can be used instead of an adjective:
It would be a crime/a mistake/a pity to cut down any more trees.
It is an offence to drop lifter in the street.
cost/take + object can also be used:
It would cost millions/fake years to rebuild the castle.
A Practical English Grammar
155
The gerund can be used instead of the infinitive when the action is being considered in a
general sense, but it is always safe to use an infinitive. When we wish to refer to one
particular action we must use the infinitive:
He said, 'Do come.' It was impossible to refuse. But It is not always easy to refuse invitations
can be replaced by Refusing invitations is not always easy. Here the action is considered in a
general sense, and either gerund or infinitive is possible. (See also 258.)
F An it + infinitive construction may be preceded by believe/consider/ discover/expect/find/think
(that) and wonder (if):
He thought (that) it would be safer to go by train. After find used in this way we can omit that + the
verb be, i.e. we can say:
He found (that) it was easy to earn extra money or
He found it easy to earn extra money.
He will find (that) it is hard to make friends or
He will find it hard to make friends. This is sometimes also possible with think:
He thought it safer to go.
After other verbs, however, the student is advised not to omit the be. (For similar gerund constructions,
see 258.)
G The perfect infinitive can also be used as the subject of a sentence:
To have made the same mistake twice was unforgivable.
Similarly with it first:
It is better to have loved and lost than never to have loved at all.
241 The infinitive as object or complement of the verb
A The roost useful verbs which can be followed directly by the infinitive are:
agree**
be determined** pretend* aim
endeavour
proceed appear*
fail
promise* arrange* *
forget*
prove* ask*'
guarantee*
refuse
attempt
happen*
remember* bother
hesitate
resolve*" care (negative)
long
tend
hope
seem* choose
leam*
swear* claim"1'
condescend
manage
threaten* consent
neglect
trouble (negative)
decide**
offer
try (= attempt) decline
plan
undertake* demand**
prepare
volunteer determine**
be prepared
vow
" See D, ** see F.
Auxiliary verbs
be dare have must ought will can do
may need shall used
(For verbs taking object + infinitive, see 244. For verbs taking infinitive or gerund, see chapter 25.)
The following phrases can also be followed by an infinitive:
be about
make up one's mind* (= decide) be able + afford
occur* + to + object
do one's best/
sef out do what one can
take the trouble make an/every effort
turn out* (= prove to be) * See D.
Examples of A and B
She agreed to pay £50.
Two men failed to return from the expedition.
I managed to put the fire out.
They are preparing (= getting ready) to evacuate the area.
We are not prepared (= willing) to wait any longer.
The tenants refused to lease.
Prices always lend to go up.
She volunteered to help with Meals on Wheels.
fie is just about to leave, (on the point of leaving)
We can't afford to live in the centre.
He didn't bother/trouble to answer personally. Opposite of the above:
He took the trouble to answer personally.
Starred verbs or expressions can also be used with a that-dause (see 346);
/ promise to wait = I promise that I will wait.
He pretended to be angry = He pretended that he was angry. occur (used mainly in negative and
interrogative) requires an introductory it both with an infinitive and a that construction;
It didn't occur to me to ask him for proof of his identity. (I didn't
think of doing this.)
It occurred to me that he was trying to conceal something. (The idea
came to me.)
appear, happen, seem, turn out, when used with a that construction, also require an introductory it:
/(turned out that his 'country cottage' was an enormous bungalow
A Practical English Grammar
156
but
His 'country cottage' turned out to be an enormous bungalow.
(infinitive construction)
But a verb + infinitive does not necessarily have the same meaning as the same verb used with a thatclause- With leam, forget and remember the meaning will be different;
He leamt to look after himself.
He learnt (= was told) that it would cost £100.
He forgot to leave the car keys on the table. (He didn't leave them.)
He forgot that his brother wanted to use the car. remember could be used similarly with the opposite
meaning. agree/decide + infinitive expresses an intention to act.
agree that. . . expresses an opinion. decide that. . . expresses a conclusion or a decision not
necessarily
leading to action.
F Verbs with two stars take an infinitive or a that. . . should
construction, that. . . should is particularly useful in the passive
(see 302).
They decided/agreed to divide the profits equally. They decided that the profits should be divided
equally. I arranged to meet/for Tom to meet them. I arranged that Torn should meet them. I arranged
that they should be met.
G The continuous infinitive is often used after appear, happen,
pretend, seem:
/ happened to be looking out of the window when they arrived.
He seems to be following us.
It is also possible after agree, arrange, decide, determine, hope, manage, plan and the
auxiliary verbs (see 254).
H The perfect infinitive is possible after appear, hope, pretend, seem
and the auxiliary verbs (see 255).
242 Verb + how/what/when/where/which/why + infinitive
A The verbs most frequently used in this way are ask, decide, discover, find out, forget, know,
learn, remember, see (= understand/perceive), show + object, think, understand, want to
know, wonder:
He discovered how to open the safe.
I found out where to buy, fruit cheaply.
I didn 't know when to switch the machine off.
I showed her which button to press.
She couldn't think what to say.
(Note that this construction is not usual after think in the simple present or past, but can be
used after other tenses of think, or after think as a second verb, as in the last example
above.)
B whether + infinitive can be used similarly after want to know,
wonder:
/ wonder/wondered whether to write or phone and after decide, know, remember, think when
these verbs follow a
negative or interrogative verb:
You needn 't decide yet whether to study arts or science. He couldn 't remember whether to turn left or
right.
C ask, decide, forget, learn, remember can also be followed directly by the infinitive (see
241). But the meaning is not necessarily the same-learn how + infinitive = 'acquire a skill':
She learnt how to make lace
though if the skill is a fairly usual one, the how is normally dropped;
She learnt to drive a car. learn + infinitive (without how) can have another meaning:
She learnt to trust nobody =
She found from experience that it was belter to trust wibody.
Note also:
/ decided to do it = I said to myself. Til do it.'
I decided how to do it = I said to myself, 'I'll do it this way.'
I remembered to get a ticket. (I got a ticket.)
/ remembered where to get a ticket. (I remembered that the tickets
could be obtained from the Festival Office.)
The infinitive after verb or verb + object
A Practical English Grammar
157
The most important verbs which can be used in either of these ways are ask, beg, expect,
would hate, help, intend, like (= think wise or right), would like (= enjoy), would love, mean,
prefer, want, wish:
He likes to eat well.
He likes his staff to eat well.
I want to ride. ! want you to ride too.
ask and beg
ask + infinitive has a different meaning from ask + object + infinitive:
/ asked to speak to Mrs Jones =
I said, 'Could I speak to Mrs Jones?' but
/ asked Bill to speak to her •=
I said, 'Bill, would you speak to her?' With beg there is a similar difference, though beg is not
often followed directly by the infinitive:
/ begged (to be allowed) to go = I said, 'Please let me go.'
I begged him to go = I said, 'Please go.' ask and beg can be followed by that. . . should (see
235).
expect + infinitive and expect + object •+• infinitive can have the same meaning:
I expect to arrive tomorrow =
I think it is likely that I will arrive tomorrow.
I expect him to arrive tomorrow =
I think it is likely that he will arrive tomorrow. But very often expect + object + infinitive conveys the
idea of duty;
He expects his wife to bring him breakfast in bed at weekends. (He
thinks it is her duty to do this.)
expect can also be followed by that + subject + verb. Here there is no idea of duty.
For examples of care, hate, like, love and prefer used with infinitives or gerunds, see 294-8. .
intend, mean, want can also be followed by gerunds (see 266).
244
A
B
C
D
The infinitive after verb + object
The most important of these are:
advise
forbid make (b) show how allow
force
oblige
teach/teach how bribe
hear (b) order
tell/tell hovi command implore permit
tempt compel
induce
persuade train enable
instruct remind
urge encourage invite
request warn entitle
let (b) see (b)
watch (b) feel (b)
(b) here means 'bare infinitive'. (See 246.) advise, allow and permit can also be used with
gerunds. (For verbs of knowing and thinking, see 245.)
Examples of verb + object + infinitive:
These glasses will enable you to see in the dark.
She encouraged me to try again.
They forbade her to leave the house or
She was forbidden to leave the house, (more usual)
Nothing would induce me to do business with them.
They persuaded us to go with them.
They are training these dogs to sniff out drugs.
show/teach/tell + how
show used with an infinitive requires how:
He showed me how to change a fuse. tell how 4- infinitive = 'instruct':
He told me how to replace a fuse. (He gave me the necessary
information or instructions.) But tell + object + infinitive = 'order':
He told me to change the fuse = He said, 'Change the fuse.'
teach how:
We can teach someone (how) to swim, dance, type, ride etc.:
He taught me how to light a fire without matches. how is possible, but when the skill is a fairly
usual one the how is normally dropped: He taught me to ride. teach + object + infinitive
(without how) can also mean to teach ur train someone to behave in a certain way:
He taught me to obey all commands without asking questions.
remind, show, teach, tell can also be followed by that:
A Practical English Grammar
158
E
245
A
B
C
D
E
246
A
He reminded me that the road was dangerous. He showed me that it was quite easy. Note
that tell + that does not have the same meaning as tell +
infinitive:
He told (= ordered) me to go. He told (.= informed) me that I was late.
request can also be followed by that +. should. This construction is chiefly used in the
passive:
He requested that the matter should be kept secret.
The infinitive after verbs of knowing and thinking etc.
assume, believe, consider, feel, know, suppose, understand can be followed by object + to
be:
I consider him to be the best candidate.
But it is much more common to use that + an ordinary tense:
I consider that he is the best candidate.
With think, estimate and presume the object + infinitive construction is extremely rare, a thatclause being normally used instead:
I think that he is the best player.
They estimate that this vase is 2.000 years old.
When, however, these verbs are used in the passive they are more often followed by an
infinitive than by the that construction:
He is known to be honest = It is known that he is honest.
He is thought to be the best player = It is thought that he is . ..
This vase is estimated to be 2,000 years old.
Note, however, that suppose when used in the passive often conveys
an idea of duty:
You are supposed to know the laws of your own country = It is your duty to know/You are
expected to know . . .
The continuous infinitive can also be used:
He is thought to be hiding in the woods. (People think he is hiding.)
He is supposed to be washing the car. (He should be washing it.)
When the thought concerns a previous action we use the perfect infinitive:
They are believed to have landed in America. (It is believed that they landed.)
suppose + perfect infinitive may or may not convey an idea of duty.
They are supposed to have discovered America means 'It is thought that they did'.
But You are supposed to have read the instructions would normally mean 'You should have
read them'.
(For infinitive constructions after passive verbs, see also 306.)
The bare infinitive after verbs and expressions
can. do, may, must, shall, will:
They could do it today.
I may as well start at once.
He will probably object.
need and dare, except when they are conjugated with do/did or will/would;
You needn 't say anything but You don 'f/ivon 't need to say anything. I dared not wake him
but I didn't/wouldn't dare (to) wake him. In theory the to is required in the last example but in
practice it is oftfn omitted- The theory is that if dare and used are treated as auxiliaries. they
take the bare infinitive like most auxiliaries. If they are treated as ordinary verbs, with do/did
etc.. they take the full infinitive like ordinary verbs,
C feel, hear, see and watch:
/ heard him lock the door. I saw/watched him drive, off. But see and hear in the passive
take the full infinitive:
He ivas seen to enter the office. He was heard to say that. . . But feel, hear, see and watch
are more often used with present participles;
I heard them shouting. (See 273.)
D let takes the bare infinitive in both active and passive. But let in the passive is often
replaced by another verb; They let me know . . . would be replaced in the passive by / was
A Practical English Grammar
159
told . . . and They let him see the documents by He was allowed to see them. The
infinitive/infinitive phrase after let is sometimes dropped to avoid repetition:
She wants to go out to work but he won't let her (go out to work). let is used without an object
in the expression:
Live and let live. (For let us/let's used for imperatives and suggestions, see 281, 289.)
E make
make in the active takes the bare infinitive:
He made me move my car. But in the passive it takes the full infinitive:
/ was made to move my car.
Sometimes the infinitive after make (active) is dropped to avoid repetition.
Why did you tell him? ~ He made me (tell him)! An infinitive after make (passive) can be
represented by its to:
/ was made to (tell him).
F would rather/sooner, rather/sooner than (see 297-8):
Shall we go today? - I'd rather waif till tomorrow. Rather/Sooner than risk a bad crossing, he postponed
his journey.
G had better (see 120):
'You had better start at once,' he said.
H help may be followed by a fuli or bare infinitive:
He helped us (fo) push if.
I If two infinitives are joined by and, the to of the second infinitive is normally dropped:
I intend to sit in the garden and write letters. I want you tu stand beside me and hold the torch.
but and except take the bare infinitive when they follow do + any thi ng/n othing/e very thing:
He does nothing but complain. My dog does everything but speak. Can't you do anything hut ask
silly questions? There's nothing to do but wait.
The to is optional in sentences such as:
The only thing to do/we can do is (to) write to him or Ail we can do is (to) write to him.
The infinitive represented by its to
An infinitive can be represented by to alone to avoid repetition. This is chiefly done after such
verbs as hate, hope, intend, would like/love, make (passive), mean, plan, try. want, after the
auxiliaries have, need, ought, and with used to, be able to and the be going to form:
Would you like to come with me? ~ Yes, I'd love to.
Did you get a ticket? ~ No, I tried to, but there weren 't any left.
Why did you take a taxi? ~ I had to (take one). I was late.
Do you ride? ~ Not now but I used to.
He wanted to go but he wasn 't able to.
Have you fed the dog? — No, but I'm just going to.
Split infinitives
It used to be considered bad style to split an infinitive (i.e. to put a word between the to and
the verb), but there is now a more relaxed
i attitude to this.
really is often placed after the to in colloquial English:
It would take ages to really master this subject
, instead of... really to master, which sounds rather formal.
: Some other degree adverbs such as completely, entirely, (un)duly can be
„ treated similarly, i.e. we can say:
(a) to completely cover the floor instead of
;
,
(b) to cover the floor completely
(a) to unduly alarm people instead of
(b) to alarm people unduly. But it is safer to keep to the conventional order, as in (b) above.
' The infinitive used as a connective link
. The infinitive is used after only to express a disappointing sequel;
He hurried to the house only to find that it was empty =
He hurried to the house and was disappointed when he found that it
was empty.
He survived the crash only to die in the desert =
He survived the crash but died in the desert.
B The infinitive can also be used as a connective link without only, and without any idea of
misfortune:
He returned home to learn that his daughter had just become
engaged.
A Practical English Grammar
160
But this use is mainly confined to such verbs as find, hear, leam, see, be told etc., as
otherwise there might be confusion between an infinitive used connectively and an infinitive of
purpose,
250 The infinitive used to replace a relative clause
A The infinitive can be used after the first, the second etc., the last, the only and sometimes
after superlatives (see 77):
He loves parties; he is always Ike first to come and the last to leave.
(the first who comes and the last who leaves)
She was the only one to survive the crash, (the only one who
survived)
Infinitives used in this way replace subject pronoun + verb. Compare with infinitive used to
replace object pronoun + verb, as in B below, Note that the infinitive here has an active
meaning. When a passive sense is required a passive infinitive is used;
He is the second man to be killed in this way. (the second man who
was killed)
the best play to be performed that year (the best play that was
performed that year) Compare this with:
the best play to perform (the best play for you to perform/the play
you should perform)
B 1 The infinitive can be placed after nouns/pronouns to show how they can
be used or what is to be done with them, or sometimes to express the
subject's wishes (see 77):
/ have letters to write, (that I must write)
Does he get enough to eat?
Have you anything to say? (that you want to say)
AT THE CL'STOMS: / have nothing to declare, (that I need to declare)
a house to let (a house that the owner wants to let)
Similarly with infinitives + prepositions:
someone to talk to
a case to keep my records in cushions to sit on
a glass So drink out of a tool
to open it with a table to write on
2 Use of passive infinitive
There is plenty to do =
(a) plenty of things we can do, i.e. amusements, or
(b) plenty of work we must do,
In the there + be + noun/pronoun + infinitive construction, when there is an idea of duty, as in
(b) above, a passive infinitive is possible:
There is a lot to be done. But the active infinitive is more usual.
The infinitive after certain nouns
A number of nouns can be followed directly by the infinitive. Some of the most useful are:
ability
demand
failure request ambition desire
offer
scheme anxiety
determination plan
willingness attempt
eagerness
promise wish decision effort
refusal
His ability to get on with people is his chief asset.
He made an attempt/effort to stand up.
Failure to obey the regulations may result in disqualification.
Their offer/plan/promise to rebuild the town was not taken seriously.
She was annoyed by his unwillingness to do his share of the work.
The infinitive after too, enough and so ... as
too + adjective/adverb + infinitive too + adjective 4- infinitive
(a) The infinitive can refer to the subject of the sentence. It then has an active meaning;
You are too young to understand. (You are so young that you cannot
understand,)
He was too drunk to drive home. (He was so drunk that he couldn't
drive home.)
(b) The infinitive can also refer to the object of a verb. It then has a passive meaning:
The plate was so hot that we coutdn 'f touch it could be expressed:
The plate was too hot to touch, (too hot to be touched) Note that it, the object of touch in the
first sentence, disappears in the infinitive construction, because the infinitive, though active in
form, is passive in meaning. Sometimes either an active or a passive infinitive may be used:
A Practical English Grammar
161
This parcel is too heavy to send/to be sent by post. But this is not always possible, so
students are advised to stick to the active infinitive,
for + noun/pronoun can be placed before the infinitive in this construction:
The case was too heavy (for a child) to carry =
The case was too heavy to be carried by a child.
(c) The infinitive can refer similarly to the object of a preposition:
The grass was so wet that we couldn 't sit on it. The grass was too wet (for us) to sit on. The light is so
weak that we can't read by it. The light is too weak to read by.
2 too •+• adjective + a +• noun + infinitive
He ivas too shrewd a businessman to accept the first offer = As a businessman he was too
shrewd to accept the first offer. He is too experienced a conductor to mind what the critics say
= As a conductor he is too experienced to mind what the critics say.
The infinitive here always refers to the subject of the sentence as in 1
above. A passive infinitive is also possible:
He was too experienced a conductor to be worried by what the, critics said.
3 too + adverb + infinitive
it is too soon (for me) to say whether the scheme will succeed or wit. He spoke too quickly/or
me to understand, (for me is necessary here.) She works too slowly to be much use to me.
B Adjective/adverb + enough •+• infinitive
1 Adjective + enough + infinitive
(a) As with the too construction, the infinitive can refer to the subject of the verb:
She is old enough to travel by herself.
He was tall enough to see over the heads of the other people.
(b) Or it can refer to the object of a verb:
The case is light enough for me to carry =
The case is so light that I can carry it.
After a few minutes the coffee was coo! enough (for us) to drink.
(c) It can refer to the object of a preposition:
The ice was thick enough to walk on. The light was strong enough to read by.
2 enough may be used as pronoun or adjective:
He doesn 't earn enough (money) to live on.
We haven't enough time to do it properly.
She had enough sense to turn off the gas. have + enough 4- abstract noun here is sometimes
replaceable by have + the + noun:
She had the sense to turn off the gas.
He had the courage to admit his mistake.
I hadn 't the patience to listen to any more. But the is optional before time here:
We haven't (the) time to do it properly.
3 Adverb + enough + infinitive:
He didn 't jump high enough to win a prize. He spoke slowly enough for everyone to
understand.
C so 4- adjective + as + infinitive:
He was so foolish as to leave his car unlocked. This is an alternative to the enough construction in Bl
above, but no e that He was foolish enough to leave his car unlocked can mean either he did it or that he
was capable of doing it, but He was so foolish as to leave etc. implies that he actually did so.
The so ... as construction is not very often used as shown above, but it is quite common as a request
form:
Would you be so good as to forward my letters? =
Would you be good enough to forward my letters? There is no difference in meaning here between the
two forms. It is important not to forget the as. (For other adjective + infinitive constructions, see 26-7.)
Introductory or final infinitive phrases
Certain infinitive phrases can be placed at the beginning or sometimes at the end of a sentence and are
then similar to sentence adverbs (see 40):
To be perfectly frank, you're a bad driver. To be honest. I just don't like him. To be fair (to
him), he wasn't entirely to blame. To cut a Song story short, we said 'No!' To tell you the truth,
I've never met him or I've never met him. to tell you the truth.
The continuous infinitive
Form to be + present participle: He seems to be following us.
Use The continuous infinitive can be used:
After the auxiliary verbs:
A Practical English Grammar
162
They'll be wondering where you are.
He may/might be watching TV. ~ He can 't/couldn 'I be watching TV. There are no
programmes today because of the strike. (negative deduction)
He must he coming by bus. (deduction)
You shouldn't be readings novel. You should be reading a textbook. After appear, happen,
pretend, seem:
'•' '• He appears/seems to be living in the area =
It appears/seems that he is living in the area. : He appeared/seemed to be living in the area
= It appeared/seemed that he was living in the area. I happened to be standing next to him
when he collapsed = '•• It happened that I was standing next to him when he collapsed. '
He pretended to be looking for a book = He pretended that he was looking for a book.
;After hope and promise and, but less usually, after agree, arrange, ^tecide, determine/be determined,
plan, undertake:
'i.., / hope/hoped to be earning my living in a year's time = t; .' hope I will/I hoped I would be
earning etc.
determine/be determined, plan could replace hope above with slight changes of meaning:
I promised to be waiting at the door when he came out. agree, arrange, decide, determine/be
determined, plan, undertake could be used instead of promise above with slight changes of
meaning. 4 After believe, consider, suppose, think etc. in the passive:
Be is believed to be living in Mexico. (See 3&6.)
255
The perfect infinitive
A
Form
to have + past participle: to have worked, to have spoken
B Use with auxiliary verbs
1 With was/were to express an unfulfilled plan or arrangement
(see 114):
The house was to have been ready today, (but it isn't)
2 With should, would, might and could to form the perfect conditional
(see 223}:
/// had seen her ! should haw invited her.
3 With should or ought to express Unfulfilled obligation; or, in the negative, a wrong or foolish
action (see 143):
He should have helped her. (but he didn't) / shouldn 't/oughtn 't to have lied to him. (but I did)
4 With should/would like to express an unfulfilled wish (see 296 D):
He would like to have seen it. (but it wasn't possible) or
He would have liked to see it.
i.e. we can put either verb into the perfect infinitive without changing the meaning,
5 With could to express past unused ability or past possibility:
/ could have made a lot of money, (but I didn't) He could/might have phoned her. (Perhaps he
(has) phoned.) (See also 134,138.)
6 With might/could to indicate that the speaker feels upset or indignant at the nonperformance of an action:
He might/could have told me! = I am annoyed that he didn't tell me. (See 285 D.)
7 With may/might in speculations about past actions:
He may/might have left =
It is possible that he (has) left. (See 133.)
You might/could have been killed'
8 With can't/couldn't to express negative deduction (see 159):
He can Vcouldn 't have moved the piano himself. We knew he couldn't have paid for it, because he had
no moneyWith must to express affirmative deduction (see 156):
He must have come this way: here are his footprints.
With needn't to express an unnecessary past action (see also 152-3):
You needn't have hurried. Now we are too early. You needn't have cooked it. We could have
eaten it raw.
With certain other verbs With appear, happen, pretend, seem
Note the difference between present and perfect infinitives here:
Present infinitive:
A Practical English Grammar
163
He seems to be a great athlete = It seems that he is . . . He seemed to be a great athlete = It
seemed that he was . . .
Perfect infinitive;
He seems to have been . . . = It seems that he was . . . He seemed to have been . . . = It
seemed that he had been . . .
i.e. the action of the perfect infinitive is an earlier action; it happens
before the time of the main verb. Other examples:
/ happened to have driven that kind of car before = It happened that I had driven that kind of
car before. He pretended to have read the book = He pretended that he had read it.
With the following verbs in the passive voice: acknowledge, believe, consider, find, know, report, say,
suppose, think, understand:
He is understood to have left the country. (See 306.)
The perfect infinitive is possible but less usual with claim, expect, hope, promise:
He expects/hopes to have finished by June = He expects/hopes that he will have finished by
June.
256
The perfect infinitive continuous
Form to have been + present participle:
He seems to have been spying/or both sides.
Use
It is used chiefly after auxiliary verbs and after appear and seem, but , it can also be used after happen,
pretend and the passive of believe, know, report, say, understand:
He says he was talking to Tom. ~ He couldn 't have been talking to
Tom. Tom wasn't there.
I was following Peter closely. ~ You shouldn't have been following
him closely: you should have left a good space between the two cars.
He appears to have been waiting a Sang time =
It appears that he IMS been waiting a long time.
He pretended to have been studying =
He pretended that he had been studying.
24
257
The gerund
Form and use
The gerund has exactly the same form as the present participle:
running, speaking, working etc. It can be used in the following ways:
(a) as subject of a sentence: Dancing bored him. (see 258)
(b) as complement of a verb: Her hobby is painting.
(c) after prepositions: He was accused of smuggling. (259)
(d) after certain verbs (261, 266)
(e) in noun compounds: a 'diving board (a board for diving off). The gerund here carries the
main stress, (See 16.)
258
The gerund as subject
As already seen in 240 E, either infinitive or gerund can be the subject of a sentence when an
action is being considered in a general sense. We can say:
It is easier to read French than to speak it or
Reading French is easier than speaking if. The gerund, like the infinitive (see 240 F), can be
the subject of a clause placed after believe, consider, discover, expect, find, think, wonder
etc. After find we can omit that and the verb be, i.e. we can say:
He found that parking was difficult or
He found parking difficult. But it is safer not to omit be after the other verbs. Note the possible
difference between gerund and infinitive here:
He found parking difficult would mean that he usually/always found it difficult. He found it
difficult to park could refer to one particular occasion. It could also mean that he always found
A Practical English Grammar
164
it difficult, but it is more usual to express this idea by a gerund. The gerund is used in short
prohibitions:
No smoking. No mailing. No fishing. But these cannot be followed by an object, so
prohibitions involving an object are usually expressed by an imperative:
Do not touch these wires. Do not feed the limis. Gerunds are used in the saying Seeing is
believing.
259
Gerunds after prepositions (see also 98)
When a verb is placed immediately after a preposition the gerund form must be used:
What can you do besides typing?
I have no objection to hearing your story again.
Touch your tws without bending your knees'.
He is good at diving. She is fond of climbing.
I'm not keen on gambling. I'm too afraid of losing,
He was fined for being drunk in charge of a car.
I'm against saying anything/I'm for saying nothing.
I'm tired of arguing. I'm fed up waiting, (colloquial)
This is a tool for opening tins. Do you feel like going out?
After swimming I felt cold.
She disapproves of jogging.
What about leaving it here and collecting it later?
He is thinking of emigrating.
I'm sorry for keeping you waiting.
They escaped by sliding down a rope.
We had difficulty in finding a parking place.
You should be ashamed of yourself for behaving so badly.
In spite of starting late he arrived in time.
Aren 't you interested in making money?
There's no point in waiting.
A number of verb + preposition/adverb combinations ('phrasal verbs') take the gerund. The
most common of these are be for/against, care for, give up, keep on, leave off, look forward
to, put off, see about, take to. (For go on, see 363.)
I don't care for standing in queues.
Eventually the dogs left off barking.
I am looking forward to meeting her.
He put off making a decision till he had more information.
He took to ringing us up in the middle of the night.
260
The word to
This word often causes confusion as it can be either (A) a part of an infinitive, or (B) a
preposition.
to placed after the auxiliary verbs be, have, ought, used and after ' going (in expressions such
as'the be going to form') is part of the infinitive of the following verb and is only added to
remind students that the preceding verb takes the full infinitive, i.e. the infinitive with to. to is
often placed after hate, hope, intend, would like/love, mean, plan, try, want and some others
(see 247) to avoid repetition of an infinitive already mentioned:
Did you buy cheese? ~ No, I meant fo (buy some) hut the shop was
shut.
B Otherwise to placed after a verb will probably be a preposition and will be followed by
noun/pronoun or gerund. Note these expressions: look forward to, take to, be accustomed to.
be used to:
I am looking forward to my holidays/to next weekend/to it.
I am looking forward to seeing you.
I am used to heat/hard work/bad food/noise/dust.
! am used to standing in queues/to it. Be careful not to confuse I used to/he used to etc.,
which expresses a past habit or routine (They used to bum coal; now they bum fuel oil only),
with I am used to/he is used to etc., which means '1 am/he is
A Practical English Grammar
165
accustomed to/familiar with':
/ am used to the cold. (It doesn't worry roe.)
He is used to working at night. (He doesn't mind it.) (See 162.) A good way of finding out
whether a to is a preposition or a part of an infinitive is to see if it is possible to put a
noun/pronoun after it. For example a noun/pronoun could be placed after I am accustomed
to:
I am accustomed to it/the dark. This to therefore is a preposition, and verbs used after to must
be gerunds.
261
Verbs followed by the gerund
A
The most important of these are:
admit"
keep(= continue) anticipate*
loathe appreciate
mean* (=
involve) avoid
mind(= object) consider*
miss defer
pardon
delay
postpone deny*
practise detest
prevent dislike
propose* (= suggest) dread
recollect* enjoy
remember* (= recollect)
escape
resent excuse
resist fancy* (= imagine)
risk finish
save (sb the trouble of) forgive
stop(= cease) imagine'
suggest* involve
understand*
*See B.
The gerund is also used after the expressions can't stand (= endure),
can't help (= prevent/avoid), it's no use/good and after the adjective
worth.
Other constructions with the above verbs
Starred verbs can also take that-clauses (see 346).
For suggest and propose {= suggest), see 289.
mean/propose (= intend) take the infinitive (see 269).
For hate, like, love, prefer, see 295.
For other verbs taking gerund or infinitive, see chapter 25.
dread + infinitive is used in 'dread to think':
I dread to think what this will cost.
Examples of verb + gerund sentences:
He admitted taking the money. Avoid over-eating.
Would you consider selling the property?
He detests writing letters.
She dreads getting old. Do you enjoy teaching?
He narrowly escaped being run over.
Fancy meeting you':
Puffing in a new window will involve cutting away part of {he roof.
He kept complaining. He didn't want to risk getting wet.
If we buy plenty of food now it will save shopping later in the week.
I can't understand his/him leaving his wife.
I couldn't help laughing. It's no good/use arguing.
Is there anything here worth buying?
262
Verbs + possessive adjective/pronoun object + gerund
If the verb or verb + preposition is followed directly by the gerund, the gerund refers to the
subject of the verb:
Tom insisted on reading the letter. (Tom read it.)
But if we put a possessive adjective or pronoun before the gerund, the gerund refers to the
person denoted by the possessive adjective/pronoun:
He insisted on my/me reading it. (I had to read it.)
Useful verbs and expressions which can take either construction are:
dislike
propose
understand
dread
recollect
approve/disapprove of
fancy
remember
insist on
involve
resent
it's no good/use
A Practical English Grammar
166
like (negative)
save
object to
mean
stop
there's no point in
mind
suggest
what's the point of
He disliked working late.
He disliked me/my working late.
I object to Raying twice for the same thing.
I object to his/him making private calls on this phone.
He resented being passed aver for promotion.
He resented my/me being promoted before him.
(For mind, see 263; for suggest and propose, see 289.)
C
D
263
excuse, forgive, pardon and prevent are not followed directly by the
gerund but take either possessive adjective/pronoun + gerund or
pronoun + preposition + gerund:
Forgive my/me ringing you up so early.
Forgive me/or ringingyou up so early.
You can't prevent his/him spending his own money.
You can't prevent him/row spending his own money.
appreciate usually requires a possessive adjective or passive gerund:
I appreciate your giving me so much o/your time. I appreciate being given this opportunity.
Possessive adjective and pronoun object compared
In formal English the possessive adjective is used with the gerund. But
in informal English we very often use the pronoun. The student
therefore has a choice of forms, but is recommended to use the
pronoun.
With stop meaning 'prevent' the pronoun is more usual than the
possessive adjective:
I can 'I stop him writing to She papers.
E Nouns with gerunds
In very formal English the possessive case is used:
I do not remember my mother's complaining about it. But it is much more usual to omit the 's:
I don't remember my mother complaining.
The verb mind
A
This verb is used chiefly in the interrogative and negative:
Would you mind waiting a moment? I dm't mind walking.
B
It can be followed directly by a gerund, or by a noun/pronoun or possessive adjective +
gerund;
I don't mind living here. (I live here and don't object to it.)
I don't mind his/him living here. (He lives here and I don't object to this./I don't object to his/him living
here.)
He didn 't mind leaving home. (He left home quite happily.)
He didn't mind Ann leaving home. (Ann left home and he was quite
happy about it. See 262 E for case of noun.)
C would you mind? is one of the most usual ways of making a request:
Would you mind not smoking? (Please don't smoke.)
Would you mind moving your car? (Please move it.) Note the change of meaning when a
possessive adjective precedes the gerund:
Would you mind my moving your car? = Would you object if I moved your car? (This is not a
request but a poiite query.)
Do you mind if I move it? is a possible alternative to Would you mind my moving U? but Do
you mind my moving it? may mean that the action has already started.
mind can never be followed by an infinitive,
The personal pronoun object can be used with gerunds instead of a possessive adjective
(see 262 D),
The perfect gerund (having worked, having spoken etc.)
A Practical English Grammar
167
This can be used instead of the present form of the gerund (working, speaking etc.) when we
are referring to a past action:
He was accused of deserting his ship or
He was accused a/having deserted his ship. The perfect gerund is fairly usual after deny:
He denied having been there. Otherwise the present form is much the more usual.
The passive gerund
Present: being written Past: having been written
He was punished by being sent to bed without any supper.
I remember being taken to Paris as a small child.
The safe showed no signs of having been touched.
A Practical English Grammar
168
25
Infinitive and gerund constructions
266
Verbs which may take either infinitive or gerund
advise (see 267)
need (267)
agree (269)
permit (267)
allow (267)
prefer (295)
begin (267)
propose (269)
can/could bear (267)
recommend (267)
cease (267)
regret (268)
continue (267)
remember (268)
forget (268)
require (267)
hate (295)
start (267)
intend (267)
stop (270 B)
like (295)
try (270 C)
love (295)
used to (270 D)
mean (269)
want (267)
Note also be ashamed (of)/afraid (of)/sorry (for), 271;
care (for), 294, 295; go on, 270.
267
Verbs taking infinitive or gerund without change of meaning
A
B
C
D
E
begin, start, continue, cease
can't bear
intend
advise, allow, permit, recommend
it needs/requires/wants
A
With begin, start, continue, cease either infinitive or gerund may be used without any
difference in meaning, but the infinitive is more usual with verbs of knowing and
understanding and the verb matter:
I began working./I began So work. He continued living/to live above the shop. But:
/ am beginning to understand/see/realize why he acted as he did. It ceased to matter whether
or not he sold his work. She never ceased complaining/to complain about prices.
After can/could bear (chiefly used in the negative) either gerund or infinitive can be used: I
can't bear waiting/to wait; but when the infinitive refers to a deliberate action the expression
implies that the subject's feelings prevent(ed) him from performing the action;
I couldn't bear to tell him. (so I didn't)
After intend, an infinitive:
I intend to sell it
E
is more usual than a gerund:
I intend selling it.
The infinitive is necessary when we have intend + object. This is found only in formal English:
I intend him to take over the department.
With advise, allow, permit, recommend
If the person concerned is mentioned we use the infinitive:
He advised me to apply at once.
She recommends housewives to buy the big tins.
They don't allow us to park here.
But if this person is not mentioned, the gerund is used:
He advised applying at once.
She recommends buying the big tins.
They don't allow parking.
The gerund after allow and permit cannot have an object, so if we want an allow/permit +
verb + object construction, we must use the infinitive and mention the person concerned:
They allowed their tenants to use the garage.
it needs/requires/wants can be followed either by the gerund or by the passive infinitive, the
gerund being the more usual:
A Practical English Grammar
169
The grass wants cutting or The grass needs to be cut.
268
regret, remember, forget
A
regret, remember, forget are used with a gerund when the action expressed by the gerund
is the earlier action:
I regret spending so much money = I'm sorry I spent so much money. (spending is the
first action, regret is the second.)
I remember reading about the earthquake in the papers. (reading is the first action,
remember is the second.)
remember can be followed by possessive adjective/object + gerund:
I remember his/him telling me about if.
I remember my father's) telling me about it.
forget + gerund is possible only when forget is in the negative. It is often used after will
never forget:
I'll never forget waiting/or bombs to/all = I'll always remember waiting for bombs to fall.
B When regret, remember, forget themselves express the earlier action they are followed by
an infinitive;
/ regret to say that you have failed your exam. (regret is the first
action, to say is the second,)
regret here is normally followed by a verb such as say, inform, tell. It is normally used only in
the present tense. remember can be used in any tense:
/';( remember to ring Bill. (remember is the earlier action.) forget is used similarly:
/ often forget to sign my cheifues.
I remembered to lock/I didn't forget to lock the door. (I locked it.) Conversely:
I didn't remember/I forgot to lock it. (I didn't lock it.)
C regret, remember, forget can also be followed by a noun/pronoun or a that-clause.
remember and forget can also be followed by noun clauses beginning how, why, when,
where, who etc.:
/ can 'f remember when I saw him last.
I've forgotten where I Rut it.
269 agree/agree to, mean, propose
A agree and agree to (preposition)
agree takes the infinitive. It is the opposite of refuse + infinitive:
When I asked them to wail, Tom agreed to wait a week but Bill
refused to wait another day.
agree cannot take a noun/pronoun object. The opposite of refuse + object is accept + object:
He refused any reward. She accepted the post. agree to (preposition) can be followed by
possessive adjective + gerund:
He agreed to my leaving early on Friday. (I asked if I could leave
early on Friday and he said that I could- The opposite here would
be He wouldn 't agree to my leaving early etc.) agree to can be followed by noun/pronoun
object;
He agreed to the change of plan/to this/to that.
B mean meaning 'intend' takes the infinitive:
/ mean to get to the top by sunrise.
mean meaning 'involve' (used only with an impersonal subject) takes the gerund:
He is determined to get a seat even if it means standing in a queue
all night.
propose meaning 'intend' usually takes the infinitive:
{propose to start tomorrow. propose meaning 'suggest' takes the gerund:
I propose waiting till the police get here. (For propose + that. . . should, see 289.)
go on, stop, try, used (to)
go on = 'continue' and is normaUy followed by a gerund. But it is used with an infinitive,
usually of a verb like explain, talk, tell, when the speaker continues talking about the same
topic but introduces a new aspect of it:
He began by showing us where the island was and went on to tell us
about its climate.
A Practical English Grammar
170
Compare He went on talking about his accident, which implies that he had been talking about
it before, with He went on to talk about his accident, which implies that he had been speaking
perhaps about himself or his journey but that the accident was being introduced for the first
time.
stop (= cease) is followed by the gerund: Stop talking. It can be followed by object + gerund:
I can't stop him talking to the press.
A possessive adjective would be possible here but is very seldom used. stop (= halt) can be
followed by an infinitive of purpose;
/ stopped to ask the way. (I stopped in order to ask the way.)
try usually means 'attempt' and is followed by the infinitive:
They tried to put wire netting all round the garden. (They attempted
to do this,)
The sentence doesn't tell us whether they succeeded or not. try can also mean 'make the
experiment' and is then followed by the gerund:
They tried putting wire netting all round the garden. This means that they put wire netting
round the garden to see if it would solve their problem (presumably they were trying to keep
out rabbits and foxes). We know that they succeeded in performing the main action; what we
don't know is whether this action had the desired effect, i.e. kept the foxes out.
Subject + used + infinitive expresses a past habit or routine:
/ used to swim all the year round. (At one time I swam all the year
round,) (See 162.)
But subject + be/become/get + used + to (preposition) is followed by noun or pronoun or
gerund and means 'be/become/get accustomed (to)':
/ am used to heat/to living in a hot climate. (1 have lived in a hot
climate for some time so I don't mind it.) (See 163.)
271 be afraid (of), be sorry <for), be ashamed (of)
A be afraid of + gerund or gerund + noun/pronoun
Here the gerund usually expresses an action which the subject fears may happen. It is
normally an involuntary action:
He never swam far out. He was afraid a/getting cramp.
She avoids lonely streets. She is afraid of being mugged.
She didn't tell him because she was afraid of upsetting him. be afraid + infinitive means that
the subject is/was etc. too frightened to perform the action. This is obviously a deliberate
action:
He was afraid to jump. (so he didn't jump)
She was afraid to protest, (so she kept quiet) be afraid can also be followed by a that-clause.
This can express a fear:
I'm afraid (that) he'll blame me/or this. But, especially in the first person, it can express
(usually fairly mild) regret:
I'm afraid (that) we haven't any tickets left. (For I'm afraid so/not, see 347.)
B be sorry for + gerund means 'apologize/regret'. The gerund usually refers to a previous
action but can refer to an immediately following action;
I'm sorry for making such a noise last night.
I'm sony for disturbing you. (now) But I'm sorry to disturb you would be more usual here. be
sorry + infinitive can express regret or sadness:
I'm sorry to hear that you've been ill. (See also 26 F.) When the action expressed by the
infinitive is involuntary, the two actions are almost simultaneous:
/ was sorry to see him looking so ill. (When I saw him ... I was
sorry.)
When the infinitive refers to a deliberate action, be sorry is the earlier of the two actions and
is then very similar to regret (see 268 B):
I'm sorry to inform you that there has been an accident. be sorry that... is also possible. Note
that I'm sony that usually expresses genuine regret, but that with I'm sony to say that or I'm
afraid that the regret may be very faint, even perfunctory.
C be ashamed of+ gerund or be ashamed of yourself etc. for +
gerund The gerund here refers to a previous action:
You should be ashamed of lying to him m
You should be ashamed of yourself for lying to him. In be ashamed + infinitive, the infinitive
usually refers to a subsequent action:
I'm ashamed to tell you what this carpet cost. would be ashamed + infinitive often implies that
the subject's feelings (will) prevent him from performing the action:
A Practical English Grammar
171
I'd be ashamed to ask for help. (so I won't/wouldn't ask)
A Practical English Grammar
172
The participles
The present (or active) participle
Form The infinitive + ing, e.g. working, loving, sifting.
Use
To form the continuous tenses (see 164, 178 etc.):
He is working. You 've been dreaming. As adjectives (see 17):
running water floating wreckage
dripping taps leaking pipes
Here there is equal stress on participle and noun. Compare with gerund + noun combinations
(see 16).
After have + object (see 121):
He had me swimming in a week.
We have people standing on our steps al! day.
I won't have him cleaning his bike in the kitchen.
A present participle can sometimes replace a relative pronoun + verb (see 77):
a map that marks/marked political boundaries =
a map marking political boundaries
people who wish/wished to visit the caves =
people wishing to visit the caves
children who need/needed medical attention =
children needing medical attention
Present participles/participle phrases such as adding/pointing out/ reminding/warning can
introduce statements in indirect speech;
He told me to start early, reminding me that the roads would be
crowded. (See 324 C.)
The above uses have already been dealt with. The present participle can also be used:
After verbs of sensation (see 273).
After catch/find/leave •+• object (see 274).
After go, come, spend, waste, be busy (see 275).
Present participles can sometimes replace subject + verb in other main or subordinate
clauses other than those mentioned above (see 276-7).
273 Present participle after verbs of sensation
A The basic verbs of sensation see, hear, feel, smell, and the verbs listen (to), notice and
watch can be followed by object + present participle:
/ see him passing my house every day.
Didn 't you hear the clock striking?
I felt the car skidding.
She smelt something burning and saw smoke rising.
I watched them rehearsing the play. The action in the present participle may be either
complete or incomplete: / saw him changing the wheel could mean that I watched the whole
action or that I saw only part of it.
B see, hear, feel and sometimes listen (to), notice and watch can
also be followed by object + bare infinitive:
We saw him leave the house.
I heard him make arrangements for his journey. The infinitive implies that the action is
complete. I saw him change the wheel means that I saw the whole action.
C Comparison of the two forms
The participle is the more generally useful as it can express both complete and incomplete
actions. But the infinitive is useful when we want to emphasize that the action is complete- It
is also neater than the participle when there is a succession of actions:
/ saw him enter the roam, unlock a drawer, fake out a document, photograph it and put it
back.
D In the passive the full infinitive is used after verbs of the senses:
He was heard to say that the minister had been bribed.
274 catch, find, leave + object + present participle
A catch/find:
/ caught them stealing my apples. (I found them doing this.)
If she catches you reading her diary, she'll be furious. The action expressed by the participle
is always one which displeases the subject. With find there is no feeling of displeasure:
I found him standing at the door ==
A Practical English Grammar
173
/ saw him standing/He was standing at the door when I arrived. With find the object could be
inanimate:
He found a tree lying across the road.
B leave can be used with a participle:
/ left him talking to Bob = He was talking to Bob when I left.
go, come, spend, waste, be busy
go and come
go and come can be followed by the participles of verbs of physical
activity and the verb shop:
They are going riding/skiing/sailing. Come dancing. I'm going shopping this afternoon.
(For go and come followed by infinitives of purpose, see 335.)
spend/waste + an expression of time or money + present participle:
He spends two hours (a day) travelling. He doesn't spend much time preparing his lessons.
We wasted a whole afternoon trying to repair the car. He spent a lot of money modernizing
the fwuse.
be busy + present participle; She is/was busy packing.
A present participle phrase replacing a main clause
The participle constructions in A and B below are chiefly used in written English.
When two actions by the same subject occur simultaneously it is usually possible to express
one of them by a present participle. The participle can be before or after the finite verb:
He rode away. He whistled as he went. = He rode away whistling. He holds the rope with one
hand and stretches out the other to the boy in the water = Holding the rope with one hand. he
stretches etc.
When one action is immediately followed by another by the same subject the first action can
often be expressed by a present participle-The participle must be placed first:
He opened the drawer and took out a revolver = Opening the drawer he took out a revolver.
She raised the trapdoor and pointed to a/light of steps = Raising the trapdoor she pointed to a
flight of steps. We lake off our shoes and creep cautiously along the passage = Taking off our
shoes we creep cautiously along the passage. It would seem more logical here to use the
perfect participle and say Having opened. Having raised. Having taken off, but this is not
necessary except when the use of the present participle might lead to ambiguity. Eating his
dinner he rushed out of the house would give the impression that he left the house with his
plate in his hand. Here, therefore, it would be better to say Having eaten his dinner . . .
When the second action forms part of the first, or is a result of it, we can express the second
action by a present participle:
She went out, slamming the door.
Hefired, wounding one of the bandits.
!fell. striking my head against the door and cutting it. (Here we
have three actions, the last two expressed by participles.)
The participle need not necessarily have the same subject as the first verb:
The plane crashed, its bombs exploding as it hit the ground.
277 A present participle phrase replacing a subordinate clause
These constructions are chiefly found in written English.
The present participle can replace as/since/because + subject +
verb, i.e. it can help to explain the action which follows:
Knowing that he wouldn't be able to buy food on his journey he took
large supplies with him = As he knew etc.
Fearing that the police would recognize him he never went out in
daylight = As he feared etc.
Note that being at the beginning of a sentence will normally mean 'as he is/as he was':
Being a student he was naturally interested in museums =
Because/As he was a student etc. It could not mean 'while he was a student'. The subject of
the participle need not be the same as the subject of the following verb:
The day being fine, we decided to go swimming. In cases like this the participle must follow its
noun/pronoun. Being fine the day, we decided ... is incorrect, but Being athletic, Tom found
the climb quite easy is all right, as Tom is the sub)ect of both the participle and the following
verb. It is possible to use two or more participles, one after the other:
Realizing that he hadn 't enough money and not wanting to borrow
A Practical English Grammar
174
from his father, he decided to pawn his watch.
Not knowing the language and having no friends in, the town., he
found it hard to get work.
278 The perfect participle (active)
A Form
having + past participle, e.g. having done. having seen.
B Use
The perfect participle can be used instead of the present participle in sentences of the type
shown in 276 B (i.e. where one action is immediately followed by another with the same
subject):
Tying one end of the rope to his bed, he threw the other end out of the
window =
Having tied one end of the rope to his bed, he threw the other end out
of the window.
The perfect participle emphasizes that the first action is complete before the second one
starts, but is not normally necessary in combinations of this kind, except when the use of the
present participle might lead to confusion. Reading the instructions, he snatched up the fire
extinguisher might give the impression that the two actions were simultaneous- Here,
therefore, the perfect; participle would be better:
Having read the instructions, he snatched up the fire extinguisher. The perfect participle is,
however, necessary when there is an interval of time between the two actions:
Having failed twice, he didn't want ta try again. It is also used when the first action covered a
period of time:
Having been his own boss for such a long time, he found it hard to
accept orders from another.
The past participle (passive) and the perfect participle (passive)
Form
The past participle of regular verbs is formed by adding ed or d to the
infinitive, e.g. worked, loved.
For the past participle of irregular verbs, see chapter 39.
Use
As an adjective:
stolen money a written report fallen frees broken glass Hred drivers
blocked roads.
To form the perfect tenses/infinitives and participles and the passive voice:
he has seen to have loved it was broken
The past participle can replace a subject + passive verb just as the present participle can
replace subject + active verb:
She enters. She is accompanied by her mother. =
She enters, accompanied by her mother.
He was aroused by fhe crash and leapt to his feet =
Aroused by the crash, he leapt to his feet.
The bridge had been weakened by successive storms and was no
longer safe =
Weakened by successive storms, the bridge was no longer safe or
Having been weakened etc. (see below).
As he was convinced that they were trying to poison him, he refused to
eat anything =
Convinced that they were frying to poison him, he refused to eat
anything.
The perfect participle passive (having been •+• past participle) is used when it is necessary to
emphasize that the action expressed by the participle happened before the action expressed
by the next verb:
Having been warned about the bandits, he left his valuables at home.
{He had been warned etc,)
Having been bitten twice, the postman refused to deliver our letters
unless we chained our dog up. (He had been bitten etc.)
280
Misrelated participles
A Practical English Grammar
175
A participle is considered to belong to the noun/pronoun which precedes it:
Tom. horrified at what he had done, could at first say nothing. Romeo, believing that Juliet
was dead. decided to kit! himself. A man carrying a large parcel got out of the bus. Note that
the participle may be separated from its noun/pronoun by a main verb:
Jones and Smith came in. followed by their wises. She rushed past the policeman, hoping he
wouldn 't ask what she had in her suitcase.
If there is no noun/pronoun in this position the participle is considered to belong to the subject
of the following main verb:
Stunned by the blow. Peter fell heavily. (Peter had been stunned.) Believing that he is alone,
the villain expresses his thoughts aloud. If this principle is disregarded confusion results.
Waiting for a bus a brick fell on my head makes it appear that the brick was waiting for a bus,
which is nonsense. A participle linked in this way to the wrong noun/pronoun is said to be '
mis related'. The above sentence should be rewritten As I was waiting for a bus a brick fell on
my head.
Other examples of misrelated participles:
When using this machine it must be remembered . . . Correct form:
When using this machine you must remember . . .
Believing that I was the only person who knew about this beach, the sight of someone else on
it annoyed me very much. Correct form:
As / believed I was the only person etc. or
Believing that I was the only person on the beach, I was annoyed by
the sight of someone else.
Commands, requests, invitations, advice, suggestions
Commands expressed by the imperative The second person imperative
This has the same form as the bare infinitive:
Hurry! Wait! Stop! For the negative we put do not (don't) before the verb:
Don't hurry!
The person addressed is very often not mentioned, but can be expressed by a noun placed at
the end of the phrase:
Eat your dinner, boys. Be quiet, Tom. These nouns can be placed before the verb, but this
is much less usual.
The pronoun you is rarely used unless the speaker wishes to be rude, or wishes to make a
distinction, as in:
You go on. I'll wait.
do can be placed before the affirmative imperative:
Do hurry. Do be quiet. This do could be persuasive, but could also express irritation.
The first person imperative
Form
let us (let's) + bare infinitive:
Let us stand together in this emergency. For the negative we normally put not before the
infinitive:
Let us not be alarmed by rumours. But it is possible in colloquial English to put don't before
let's:
Don't let's be alarmed by rumours. By let us (let's) the speaker can urge his hearers to act in
a certain way, or express a decision which they are expected to accept, or express a
suggestion (see 289).
The third person imperative
Form
let him/her/it/them + bare infinitive (see also 322):
Let them go by train.
This is not a very common construction in modern English. It would be more usual to say:
They are logo/must go by train.
The negative imperative, let him/her/them + negative infinitive, is not used in modem English.
Instead, we would use must not or is/are not to:
They must not/are not to go by air.
282
Other ways of expressing commands
A
Subject + shall for third person commands (in written English)
A Practical English Grammar
176
B
C
D
E
shall can be used in very formal written regulations which will normally remain in force for
some time. These are very often in the passive (see also 234):
The Chairman, Secretary, ami Treasurer shall be elected annually.
(club regulations)
A record shall be kept of the number of students attending each class,
(college regulations)
Subject + will, mainly for third person commands:
When the alarm rings passengers and crew will assemble at their boat
stations, (notice on board ship)
This is a formal, impersonal, peremptory type of command, implying that the person giving
the order is quite certain that he will be obeyed. It is used chiefly in written instructions by
people who have some authority, e.g. captains of ships, officers of the services, headmasters
of schools, trainers of sports teams etc.:
The team will report to the gymnasium for weight-lifting training. Note that if we move the will
and place it before the subject, we turn the command into a request. It is possible to use you
will for spoken commands:
You will not mention this meeting to anyone. But it is more usual and more polite to use must:
You must not mention this meeting to anyone.
Commands are often expressed as obligations by must:
You must not smoke in the petrol store. Passengers must cross the line by the footbridge.
Dogs must be kept on leads in this area.
Instructions or orders can be conveyed by the be + infinitive construction:
You are to report for duty immediately. The switchboard is to be manned at all times.
Prohibitions may be expressed in written instructions by may not;
Candidates may not bring textbooks into the examination room.
283
Requests with can/could/may/might I/we
A
can/could/may/might I/we + have + noun/pronoun
can is the most informal:
(a) 'Can I have a sweet?' said the little boy. can I/we, when used by adults, sounds more
confident than could I/we. could I/we is the most generally useful form:
(b) Could I have a cup of tea? Could I have two tickets, please?
may and might are more formal than could, but possible in both spoken and written English:
(c) May/Might I have a copy of the letter? These requests are usually reported by ask (+
indirect object) •+• for + object:
The little boy asked (me) for a sweet.
He asked for a copy of the letter. But (c) above could also be reported;
He asked if he might have a copy of the letter.
B can/could/may/might I/we + verb
For the difference between them, see A above.
These could be requests for permission (see 131), but with certain
verbs, e.g. see. speak (to), talk (to), they can be ordinary requests:
May/Could I see Mr Jones? = I would like to see Mr /ones. This type of request is reported by
ask to see/to speak to etc.:
I asked to see Mr/ones.
Do not put a noun/pronoun after ask, as this would change the meaning (see 243 B).
In colloquial English ask for •+• name etc. would also be possible, especially when reporting a
telephone conversation:
CALLER: Could I speak to the secretary, please? =
She asked/or the secretary/to speak to the secretary.
C could/might I/we requests can be preceded by do you think/
I wonder(ed)/was wondering if. These prefixes make the requests more diffident:
; wonder/was wondering if I could have tomorrow off?
Do you think I could speak to the secretary? Note the change from interrogative to affirmative
verb (see 104).
284
Requests with could/will/would you etc.
A Practical English Grammar
177
A
For starred forms, see K below,
could you* is a very useful request form:
Could you please show me the way?
B
C
D
possibly can be added to show that the speaker is asking for something extra:
Could you possibly lend me £500?
couldn't expresses the speaker's hopes for a more favorable answer than has just been
indicated;
I can't wait. ~ Couldn't you wait five minutes?
you couldn't. . . could you? can be used to express a not very hopeful request;
You couldn't wait five minutes, could you?
You couldn't give me a hand with this, could you?
(The speaker doesn't really expect a favourable answer in either case.)
will/would you* (please):
Will/Would you please count your change? would you (please) has the same meaning as
could you. will you is more authoritative and therefore less polite. will/would you can be
placed at the end of the phrase:
Shut the door, will you?
But this form can only be used in very friendly relaxed situations- Used otherwise, it would
sound very rude. will/would can also be used for third person requests:
Would Mrs Jones, passenger to Leeds, please come to the Enquiry
Desk?
Will anyone who saw the accident please phone this number . . . ?
(police announcement)
you'll. . . won't you? is a persuasive type of request used mainly among friends:
You'll write to me. won't you?
would you mind* + gerund (see 263):
Would you mind moving your car?
E perhaps you would implies confidence that the other person will perform this service. It would
not be used at the beginning of a conversation or letter, but would be possible later on:
Perhaps you would let me know when your new stock arrives = Please let me know when
your new stock arrives.
F if you would is a useful request form. It is used in spoken English for routine-type requests
which the speaker is quite sure wi!l be obeyed:
If you'd fill up this form/take a seat/wait a few minutes, (in an office) If you'd sign the
register/follow the porter, (in a hotel)
just can be added to show that the action required is very easy:
If you'd just put your address on the back of the cheque, (in a shop)
G would you like to . . . ? is also a possible request form:
Would you like to take a seat? = Please take a seat.
H I should/would be very grateful if you would is a formal request form found chiefly in letters
but possible in speech:
I should be very grateful if you would let me know if you have any vacancies.
I Would you be good/kind enough to keep me informed? Would you be so hind as to keep me
informed?
J I wish you would can be a request form. It sometimes implies that the other person should be
helping or have offered to do it (see 301):
I wish you 'd give me a hand.
K Starred would and could forms may be introduced by phrases such as do you think? I
wonder(ed) if, I was wondering if (see 104):
Do you think you could lend me £500?
285
Requests with might
A
you might can express a very casual request;
You might post these/or me.
But it can only be used in friendly relaxed situations, otherwise it wouid sound rude.
A Practical English Grammar
178
B With a certain intonation and a strong stress on the important word might can express a
reproachful request: You might ^help me with stress on help might imply 'Why aren't you
helping me?/You should be helping me'.
C might can also be used with other persons to express this sort of irritation: He might 'pay
us.' with stress on pay could mean 'We are annoyed that he doesn't pay/hasn't paid us'.
D might + perfect infinitive can express irritation at or reproach for the non-performance of an
action in the past: You might have 'told us with stress on told could mean 'You should have
told us',
6 Invitations
A will you have/would you tike + noun:
Will you have a drink? (sometimes shortened to Have a drink.)
Would you like a coffee? Note that do you want is not an invitation. (For want and would like.
see 296.)
In indirect speech we use offer + indirect object (= person addressed) + noun:
She offered me a drink/a coffee.
B will/would/could you? would you like to?
Will you have lunch with me tomorrow?'is informal, but Would/Could you have lunch with me?
or Would you like to have lunch with me? can be used in both informal and formal situations.
These invitations would be reported by invite/ask + direct object + to + noun, or invite/ask 4direct object + infinitive:
He invited me to lunch/to have lunch with him.
C Answers to invitations
Offers of a drink/a cigarette etc. are usually answered:
Yes, please or No, thank you.
Invitations with would you/could you/would you like are usually answered:
I'd like to very much/I'd love to or
I'd like to very much but I'm afraid I can't. wouldn't like, of course, would not be possible. An
invitation and answer might be reported:
He invited us to dinner/to a party/to spend the weekend with him and
we accepted/but we refused/but we had to refuse because . . .
D When the speaker doesn't really expect: his offer/invitation to be accepted he can say:
You wouldn't like another drink, would you? (Perhaps the speaker would like another drink
himself, and wants an excuse. He doesn't really expect that his friend will accept, though.)
You wouldn't like to come with me, would you? (Again he doesn't really expect an
acceptance.)
287
Advice forms
A must, ought to and should can be used for advice:
You must read this book. It's marvellous.
You should grow your own vegetables.
You ought to plant some trees.
In indirect speech must, ought to and should here can remain unchanged or be reported by
advise 4- object:
He advised me to plant trees.
B you had better + bare infinitive (see 120):
You'd better take off your wet shoes. You 'd better not wait any longer. had better can be
used with the third person:
He'd better stop taking those pills.
C if I were you I should/would:
If I were you I 'd buy a car.
This is often shortened to I should/would with a slight stress on the I;
i/'d buy a car.
In indirect speech If I were you I should/would . . . is reported by advise + object:
He advised me to buy a car.
D I advise/would advise you + infinitive:
I (would) advise you to apply at once or I advise/would advise + gerund:
l('d) advise applying at once.
E why don't you . . . ? can be either advice or suggestion:
A Practical English Grammar
179
Why don't you learn to play your guitar? Why don't you take a holiday? When this is advice it
is reported by advise + object:
He advised me to take a holiday.
F it is time you +- past tense:
/; ;s time you bought a new coat. (See 293.) This would be reported:
He said it was time I bought a new coat.
Advice with may/might as well + infinitive
This construction can express very unemphatic advice:
You may/might as veil ask him =
If would do no harm to ask him.
She said I might as well ask him. This form can be used with the third person:
He may as well come with me and the speaker may use it of himself:
As there isn 't anything more to do, I may as well go home early.
Suggestions First person suggestions with let's or shall I/we
let's + infinitive:
Let's paint it ourselves. shall we is sometimes added:
Let's get the paint today, shall we? shall I/we + infinitive:
Shall we invite Bill?
Suggestions with let's ur shall we can be answered affirmatively by yes, let's. let's not could
be used jokingly as a negative answer:
Let's take the tent. ~ Let's not! Or it can introduce a negative suggestion:
Let's not start too early. don't let's could also be used here:
Don't let's start too early.
First and second person suggestions
why don't we/you + infinitive or why not + infinitive/expression of
time or place;
Why don't we meet and discuss it?
Why not meet and discuss it?
Where shall we meet? ~ Why not here?AVhy not at the hotel? In colloquial English what's
wrong with/what's the matter with + noun could also be used:
What's wrong with the hotel? what/how about + gerund/noun:
Where shall we sleep?
What about renting a caravan?
What about a bed and breakfast place? suppose I/we/you + present or past tense:
Suppose you offer/offered to pay him?
C First, second or third person suggestions with suggest or propose
suggest (+ possessive adjective) + gerund, or suggest that •+• subject + present
tense/should.
propose is used in exactly the same way but is slightly more formal than suggest.
In the active, suggest + should + infinitive is more forma] than suggest + a present or past
tense.
/ suggest (your) selling it.
We suggest that you should sell it. (formal)
I propose that the secretary sends in/should send in a report, (formal)
I propose that a report (should) be sent in. (formal) that. . . should is necessary in the passive.
With should be it is possible in formal English to omit the should, leaving the be alone, as
shown above.
D Suggestions in indirect speech
Suggestions can be reported by:
suggest/suggested (+ possessive adjective) + gerund, or suggest that + subject + present
tense/should, or suggested that + subject + past tense/should, or suggest (any tense) +
noun/pronoun:
Tom suggests/suggested (our) having a meeting.
Ann suggests that he sells/should sell his house.
Ann suggested that he sold/should sell it.
Mr Jones suggested a meeting. (For suggestions with let's, see also 322.)
A Practical English Grammar
180
The subjunctive
Form
The present subjunctive has exactly the same form as the infinitive;
therefore the present subjunctive of to be is be for all persons, and the present subjunctive of
all other verbs is the same as their present tense except that s is not added for the third
person singular:
The queen lives here. (simple present tense)
Long live the queen! (subjunctive)
(, The past subjunctive has exactly the same form as the simple past • except that with the
verb be the past subjunctive form is either . I/he/she/it was or I/he/she/it were. In expressions
of doubt or
unreality were is more usual than was:
He behaves as though he were the owner. (But he is not the owner.)
In conversation, however, was is often used instead of were
(see also 225).
Past subjunctives are often known as 'unreal pasts'.
Use of the present subjunctive
The present subjunctive is used in certain exclamations to express a wish or hope, very often
involving supernatural powers:
(God) bless you! God save the queen!
Heaven help us! Curse this fog!
Come what may, we'll standby you! Notice also the phrase if need be, which means 'if it is
necessary':
If need be we can always bring another car.
It is sometimes used in poetry, either to express a wish or in clauses of condition or
concession:
STEVENSON: Fair the day shine as it shone in my childhood. (May
the day shine/I hope it will shine.)
SHAKESPEARE: If this be error, and upon me proved ... (if this is
error)
BYRON: Though the heart be still as loving . . . (though the heart is)
As seen in 235 certain verbs are followed by should + infinitive constructions. When the
infinitive is be, the should is sometimes omitted:
He suggested that a petition {should) be drawn up. The infinitive thus left alone becomes a
subjunctive.
292
as if/as though + past subjunctive
The past subjunctive can be used after as if/as though to indicate unreality or improbability or
doubt in the present (there is no difference between as if and as though):
He behaves as if he owned the place. (But he doesn't own it or probably doesn't own it or we
don't know whether he owns it
or not.)
He talks as though he knew where she was. (But he doesn't know or
he probably doesn't know or we don't know whether he knows
or not.)
He orders me about as if I were his wife. (but I am not) The verb preceding as if/though can
be put into a past tense without changing the tense of the subjunctive:
He talks/talked as though he knew where she was. After as if/as though we use a past perfect
when referring to a real or imaginary action in the past:
He talks about Rome as though he had been there himself. (But he
hasn't or probably hasn't or we don't know whether he has or not.) Again, the verb preceding
as if/though can be put into a past tense without changing the tense of the subjunctive:
He looks/looked as though he hadn't had a decent meal fora month.
293
it is time + past subjunctive (unreal past)
it is time can be followed by the infinitive:
It's time to start or by for + object 4- infinitive:
A Practical English Grammar
181
/('s time for us to go or by subject + a past subjunctive:
/('s time we went. It's time we were leaving. There is a slight difference in meaning between
the forms. it is time + infinitive merely states that the correct time has arrived;
it is time + subject + past subjunctive implies that it is a little late. high can be added to
emphasize this idea:
/t's high time we left. it is time + I/he/she/it cannot be followed by were:
It's time I was going. (For past subjunctives/unreal pasts in conditional sentences, see 222;
after would rather/sooner, see 297; after wish + subject, see 300; in indirect speech, see
310.)
care, like, love, hate, prefer,
wish
care and like care is chiefly used in the negative and interrogative.
care for + noun/gerund is very similar to like + noun/gerund. We can say:
(a) Does/Did Tom care for living in the country? or Does/Did Tom like living in the country?
(b) You don't care for science fiction, do you? or
You don't like science fiction, do you? (b) above could be answered:
/ don't care for it or / dan't like if much or Oh yes, I like it.
(care would not be possible here.) care in the interrogative sometimes carries a hint of doubt:
Does Ann care for horror movies? (The speaker thinks that she
probably doesn't, or is surprised that she apparently does.) The feeling of doubt is more
noticeable with would you care (for). . . ?
would care and would like
would care for + noun and would care + infinitive are similar to would like + noun/infinitive. But
would care (for) is not normally "used in the affirmative, and offers expressed by would you
care (for), . , ? are less confident than would you like . . . ? offers:
(a) TOM: Would you care for a lift, Ann? (Perhaps his car is uncomfortable and she likes
comfort.)
(b) TOM: Would you care to see my photos, Ann? (He isn't sure that
she'll want to see them.) A favourable answer to (b) above would be:
'•/ I'd like to see them very much.
'As in the affirmative, would like replaces would care.
'Similarly in negative statements:
I wouldn't care to live on the 35th floor ~ Oh, I'd rather like it. .would care for/would like can
sometimes be used with gerunds. ,<See 295 B.)
would have cared (for) and would have liked
Both here refer to actions which didn't take place:
ANN: I'd have liked to go with Tom. 0 wanted to go but didn't get my wish. See also 296 Dcare could not be used here.) BILL: But he walked all the way! You wouldn't have cared
for/have liked that, would you? or Would you have cared for/have liked that?
D Do not connise care as used above with care for (= look after) and care (about):
1 care for (= look after) is used chiefly in the passive:
The old people were cared for by their families.
2 care (about) (= feel concerned) is used chiefly in the negative and interrogative.
I don't care (about) appears similar to I don't mind, which can often be used instead:
It will be very expensive. - I don't care/mind or
/ don't care about/mind the expense or
/ don't care/mind what it costs.
But note that I don't care (about) = 'I am indifferent (to)' while I don't mind = 'I don't object (to)',
i.e. 'He/It doesn't worry/upset/ annoy me.'
I don't mind is much more polite than I don't care, which often sounds arrogant and selfish. In
the negative interrogative either can be used:
Don't you care/mind what happens to him?
Didn 'tyou care/mind what happened? But in the ordinary interrogative there is more
difference between the two;
Do you care? •= Are you concerned?'/Do you feel concern? while Do you mind? usually
means Do you object? (See also 263.)
295
care, like, love, hate, prefer
A Practical English Grammar
182
A When used in the conditional, these verbs are usually followed by the infinitive:
Would you care/like to come with me? (Would it please you to come
with me?)
I'd like to (come) very much or I'd love to (come).
I'd hate to spend Christmas alone. Here we are thinking of a particular action in the future.
B But would care for, would like can be followed by gerunds when we are not thinking of a
particular action but are considering the subject's tastes generally. Note also that here would
care for/would like are replaceable by would enjoy:
She would like/would enjoy riding if she could ride better. I wonder if Tom would care
for/would enjoy hang-gliding. hate and prefer can be used similarly but are less common.
C When used in the present or past tenses, care for, like (= enjoy), love, hate and prefer are
usually followed by the gerund:
He doesn't/didn't care for dancing.
They love/loved wind-surfing.
He prefers/preferred walking to cycling.
But the infinitive is not impossible and is particularly common in American English:
They love/loved to run on the sands.
' Note however that like can also mean 'think wise or right', and is then always followed by
the infinitive:
She likes them to play in the garden. (She thinks they are safe
there.)
/ like to go to the dentist twice a year. (I think this wise.) . Compare this with I like going to the
dentist, which implies that I enjoy my visits. Similarly / don't like to go = 'I don't think it right to
go' while I don't like going == 'I don't enjoy going'.
Notice also another difference between these two negative forms-1 don't like toga usually
means 'I don't go' (because 1 don't think it right). / don't like going usually means 'I go.
although I don't enjoy it'. Similarly / didn 't like to open the letter means 'I didn't open it
because I didn't think it right to do so' but / didn't like opening the letter means •I opened it
reluctantly'.
E enjoy and dislike are always followed by noun/pronoun or gerund.
i would like and want
{ Sometimes either would like or want can be used:
1 In requests and questions about requests (but would not like is not used here: see Bl
below):
CUSTOMER: I'd tike some raspberries, please or
/ want some raspberries, please.
GREENGROCER: I'm afraid I haven't any. Would you like some
strawberries?
CUSTOMER: No, I don't want any strawberries, thanks, (wouldn 'I
like is not possible.) I would like is usually more polite than I want.
would you like? is much more polite and helpful than do you want? would you like? can imply
a willingness to satisfy the other person's wishes, do you want? doesn't imply this. Someone
dealing with a customer or client, therefore, will normally use would you like?:
CALLER: I'd like to/I want to speak to Mr X, please. TELEPHONIST: Mr X is out. Would you like
to speak to Mr Y?
2 When we are not making requests, but merely talking about our wishes, we can use either
would like or want in affirmative, interrogative or negative. There is no difference in meaning,
though / want usually sounds more confident than / would like and / want is not normally used
for unrealizable wishes:
/ would like to live on Mars.
B would like and want are not interchangeable in the following uses:
1 In invitations we use would you like? not do you want?
Would you like a cup of coffee? Would you like to come to the theatre? do you want? used
here would be a question only. not an invitation.
2 wouldn't like and don't want are different.
don't want = 'have no wish for', but wouldn't like = 'would dislike'.
wouldn't like cannot therefore be used in answer to invitations or offers, as it would be
impolite. Instead we use don't want or some other form:
Would you like some more coffee? - No. I don't want any more,
A Practical English Grammar
183
thanks or No, thanks.
C In the past the two forms behave differently. In indirect speech want becomes wanted, but
would like remains unchanged:
Tom said, 'I would like/want to see it' =
Tom said he would like/wanted to see it. But if we don't use a reported speech construction
we have to say Turn wanted to see it. (We cannot use would like here, as Tom would like to
see it has a present or future meaning.)
D would like has two past forms: would like + perfect infinitive or would have liked +
infinitive/noun/pronoun. These forms express unrealized wishes only:
I'd like to have gone skiing or
I'd have liked a day's skiing. (But I didn't get my wish.)
297
1
would rather/sooner and prefer/would prefer
There is no difference between would rather and would sooner, but would rather is more
often heard.
A would rather/sooner is followed by the bare infinitive when the subject of would rather/sooner
is the same as the subject of the following action:
Tom would rather read than talk.
would rather/sooner + infinitive can be used instead of prefer + gerund for present actions:
Tom prefers reading to talking.
Note: would rather + infinitive •+• than + infinitive, but prefer + gerund + to + gerund,
prefer can also be followed by a noun, but would rather always requires a verb;
He prefers wine to beer =
He would rather drink wine than beer.
I prefer tennis to golf =
I'd rather play tennis than golf.
Some statements with prefer + noun have no exact would rather equivalent: He prefers dogs
to cats and He would rather have dogs than cats are not exactly the same.
would rather + infinitive cannot express preferences in the past, so the past equivalent of Tom
would rather read than talk would be Tom preferred reading to talking/liked reading better
than talking. But see 4 below.
would rather + infinitive can also be used instead of would prefer + infinitive:
I'd rather fly than go by sea/I'd prefer to fly. Note that with would prefer, only the preferred
action is mentioned;
see above. If, therefore, we want to mention both actions we must used would rather.
Similarly with nouns:
Would you like some gin? — I'd prefer a coffee or
I'd rather have coffee than gin.
Both would rather/sooner and would prefer can be followed by the
perfect infinitive:
We went by sea but I'd rather have gone by air/I'd prefer to have gone by air. (I wanted to go
by air, but didn't get my wish.)
This is somewhat similar to would like + perfect infinitive, which
expresses an unfulfilled wish. (See 296 D.)
Subject + would rather/sooner is followed by subject + past tense (subjunctive) when the two
subjects are different:
Shall I give you a cheque? ~ I'd rather you paid cash. Note the use of would rather + subject
+ didn't for a negative preference:
Would you like him to paint it? - No, I'd rather he didn't (paint it).
Ann wants to tell Tom, but I'd rather she didn't (tell him).
prefer, however, like like, can take object + infinitive:
I'd prefer you to pay cash.
I'd prefer him not to paint it.
I'd prefer her not to tell Tom.
298
More examples of preference
A Practical English Grammar
184
C
D
299
A
B
300
I like hot weather better than cold = I prefer hot weather to cold = I'd rather/sooner have
hot weather than cold.
I like skiing better than skating = I prefer skiing to skating = I'd rather/sooner ski than
skate.
I liked playing in matches better than watching them = I preferred playing matches to
watching them.
(would rather/sooner could not be used here.)
Would you like to start today or would you rather wait/would you prefer to wait till
tomorrow? ~ I'd rather go today (than wait till tomorrow). I'd rather not wait. Or
I'd prefer to start today. I'd prefer not to wait. I'd rather deliver it by hand than post it.
He says he'd rather go to prison than pay the fine.
I'd rather pay his fine for him than let him go to prison.
rather than . . . would + infinitive is possible in formal English:
Rather than let him go to prison I would pay his fine myself.
Do you want Ann to repair it herself ~ I'd prefer her to ring/I'd rather she rang the
electrician or I'd rather she didn't try to repair it herself.
They want to camp in my garden but I'd rather they didn't. I'd rather they camped by the
river.
He usually has a pub lunch, but she 'd prefer him to come home for a meal/she 'd
rather he came home for lunch. She 'd rather he didn't spend money in pubs.
wish, want and would like
wish, want and would like all mean 'desire'.
wish is the most formal. For want and would like, see 296.
wish can be followed directly by an infinitive or by object + infinitive:
Why do/did you wish to see the manager? ~ I wish/wished to make a complaint.
The government does not wish Dr Jekyll Hyde to accept a professorship at a foreign
university.
In less formal language we would use want or would like:
I would like/want to speak to Ann.
I wanted to speak to Ann.
She doesn't/didn't want the children to stay up late. (If we used like here instead of
want, it would mean that she doesn't/didn't approve of the children staying up late.)
want and would like can be followed directly by nouns:
I want/would like a single room.
He wanted a single room.
wish has a more restricted use:
We can wish someone luck/success/a happy Christmas etc.;
He said, 'Good luck!' = He wished me luck.
We can also send someone 'good/best wishes':
With all good wishes, yours, Bill (at the end of a letter)
Best wishes/or the New Year (on a New Year card)
Except in greetings of this kind, wish is not normally followed by a noun object.
wish + for can be followed by a noun/pronoun, but usually implies that
the subject has little hope of obtaining his wish. It is chiefly used in exclamations:
How he wished for a drink! (Presumably he had no hope of getting one.)
What he chiefly wished for was a chance to explain. (It seems unlikely that he was
going to get this chance.)
wish + subject + unreal past
wish (that) + subject + a past tense (subjunctive; see 290 B) expresses regret about a
present situation:
I wish I knew his address = I'm sorry I don't know his address.
I wish you could drive a car = I 'm sorry you can't drive a car.
I wish he was coming with us = I'm sorry he isn't coming with us.
wish can be put into the past without changing the subjunctive:
A Practical English Grammar
185
C
301
B
He wished he knew the address = He was sorry he didn't know the address.
Unreal past tenses do not change in indirect speech:
‘I wish I lived nearer my work,' he said = He said he wished he lived nearer his work.
B
wish (that) + subject + past perfect (subjunctive) expresses regret about a past
situation:
I wish (that) I hadn't spent so much money = I'm sorry I spent so much money.
I wish you had written to him = I'm sorry you didn't write to him.
wished can replace wish without changing the subjunctive:
I wished I hadn't spent so much money = I was sorry I had spent so much money.
These verbs will be reported unchanged:
‘I wished I had taken his advice,' she said = She (said she) wished she had taken his
advice.
if only can be used in exactly the same way. It has the same meaning as wish but is more
dramatic:
If only we knew where to look for him!
If only she had asked someone's advice!
wish (that) + subject + would
A wish + subject + past tense can express regret for a present situation, as shown in 300
above:
I wish that he wrote more regularly = I'm sorry he doesn't write more regularly.
wish + subject + would can be used similarly, but only with actions which the subject can
control, i.e. actions he could change if he wished.
wish + would here can express interest in the subject's willingness/unwillingness to perform
an action in the present. This is usually a habitual action.
/ wish he would write more often =I'm sorry he isn't willing to write more often.
I wish he would wear a coal = I'm sorry he refuses to wear a coat. The subject of wish cannot
be the same as the subject of would, as this would be illogical- We cannot therefore have I
wish +- I would.
C wish + subject + would can also be used to express dissatisfaction with the present and a
wish for change in the future:
/ wish he would answer my Utter. (I have been waiting for an
answer for a long time.)
/ wish they would change the menu. (I'm tired of eating sausages.)
I wish they would stop making bombs. But the speaker is normally not very hopeful that the
change will take place, and often, as in the third example above, has no hope at all. As in B
above, wish + subject + would here is restricted to actions where change is possible, and
wish and would cannot have the same subject.
When there is a personal subject, the action is in the subject's control and the idea of
wiilingness/unwillingness is still present, but wish + subject + would here can sometimes be
used with inanimate subjects:
/ wish it would stop raining. I wish the sun would come out.
I wish prices would come down. I wish the train would came. wish + subject + would here is
rather like would like, but would like is not restricted to actions where change is possible and
does not imply dissatisfaction with the present situation. Also the would like construction does
not imply any lack of hope:
/ would like jack to study art. (i want him to study art/I hope he will
study art.)
/ tvish Peter would study art. (Peter has presumably refused to do
this.)
D I wish you would is a possible request form. Here there is no feeling that the person
addressed will refuse to perform the request, but there is often a feeling that this person is
annoying or disappointing the speaker in some way: I wish you would help me often implies
'You should have offered to help me', and I wish you would stop huwmifig/interrupting/asking
silly questions would imply that the speaker was irritated by the noise/the interruptions/the
A Practical English Grammar
186
silly questions. However, the expression I wish you would can be used in answer to an offer
of help, and does not then imply any dissatisfaction:
Shall I help you check the accounts? ~ I wish you would. (I'd be glad of your help.)
E if only + would can replace wish + would in B and C above. It cannot be used for requests
as in D. if only ia more dramatic than wish: If only he would join our party!
A Practical English Grammar
187
30
The passive voice
302
Form
A The passive of an active tense is formed by putting the verb to be into the same tense as the
active verb and adding the past participle of the active verb. The subject of the active verb
becomes the 'agent' of the passive verb. The agent is very often not mentioned. When it is
mentioned it is preceded by by and placed at the end of the clause:
This free was planted by my grandfather.
B Examples of present, past and perfect passive tenses:
Active We keep the butter here.
Passive The butter is kept here.
Active They broke the window.
Passive The window was broken.
Active People have seen wolves in She streets.
Passive Wolves have been seen in the streets.
C The passive of continuous tenses requires the present continuous forms of to be, which are
not otherwise much used:
Active They are repairing the bridge.
Passive The bridge is being repaired.
Active They were carrying the injured player off the field.
Passive The injured player was being carried off the field.
Other continuous tenses are exceedingly rarely used in the passive, so that sentences such
as:
They have/had been repairing the road and
They will/would be repairing the road are not normally put into the passive,
D Auxiliary + infinitive combinations are made passive by using a passive infinitive:
Active You must/should shut these doors.
Passive These doors must/should be shut.
Active They should/ought fo have told him.
(perfect infinitive active)
Passive He should/ought to have been told.
(perfect infinitive passive)
E
F
Other infinitive combinations
Verbs of liking/loving/wanting/wishing etc. + object + infinitive form their passive with the
passive infinitive:
Active
He wants someone to take photographs.
Passive He wants photographs to be taken.
With verbs of command/request/advice/invitation + indirect object + infinitive we form the
passive by using the passive form of the main verb:
Active
He invited me to go.
Passive I was invited to go.
But with advise/beg/order/recommend/urge + indirect object + infinitive + object we can
form the passive in two ways: by making the main verb passive, as above, or by advise
etc. + that, should + passive infinitive:
Active
He urged the Council to reduce the rates.
Passive The Council was/were urged to reduce the rates or
He urged that the rates should be reduced.
agree/be anxious/arrange/be determined/determine/decide/demand + infinitive + object
are usually expressed in the passive by that. . . should, as above:
Active
He decided to sell the house.
Passive He decided that the house should lie sold.
(See also 235.)
Gerund combinations
advise/insist/propose/recommend/suggest + gerund + object are usually expressed in the
passive by that. . . should, as above:
Active
He recommended using bullet-proof glass.
Passive He recommended that bullet-proof glass should be used.
(See 235.)
A Practical English Grammar
188
it/they + need + gerund can also be expressed by it/they + need + passive infinitive. Both
forms are passive in meaning.
Other gerund combinations are expressed in the passive by the passive gerund:
Active I remember them taking me to the Zoo.
Passive / remember being taken to the Zoo.
303
Active tenses and their passive equivalents
Tense/Verb form
Simple present
Present continuous
Simple past
Past continuous
Present perfect
Past perfect
Future
Conditional
Perfect conditional
Present infinitive
Perfect infinitive
Present participle/gerund
Perfect participle
C
Active voice
keeps
is keeping
kept
was keeping
has kept
had kept
wilt keep
would keep
would have kept
to keep
In have kept
keeping
having kept
Passive voice
is kept
is being kept
was kept
was being kept
has been kept
had been kept
will be kept
would be kept
would have been kept
to be kept
to hare been kept
being kept
having been kept
B In colloquial speech get is sometimes used instead of be:
The eggs got (= were) broken. You 'II get (= be) sacked if you take any more time off.
Note that in theory a sentence containing a direct and an indirect object, such as Someone
gave her a bulldog, could have two passive forms:
She was given a bulldog. A bulldog was given to her.
The first of these is much the more usual, i.e. the indirect object usually becomes the subject
of the passive verb. (See also 302 E,F.)
D Questions about the identity of the subject of an active verb are usually expressed by an
affirmative (see 55);
What delayed you?
Which leant won?
Questions about the subject of a passive verb are also expressed by an affirmative:
Something was done. ~ What was dime?
One of them was sold. ~ Which of them was sold?
Interrogative verbs in active questions may become affirmative verbs in passive questions:
What did they steal? (interrogative)
What was stolen? (affirmative)
Note, however that, when the question refers to the agent, an interrogative verb is necessary:
Who painted it? (affirmative)
Who was it painted by? (interrogative)
304
Uses of the passive
The passive is used:
A When it is not necessary to mention the doer of the action as it is obvious who he is/was/will
be:
The rubbish hasn 't been collected. The streets are swept every day. Your hand will be Xrayed.
B When we don't know, or don't know exactly, or have forgotten who did the action:
The minister was murdered. My cay has been moved! You'll be met at the station. I've
been Sold that. . .
C When the subject of the active verb would be 'people':
He is suspected of receiving stolen goods. (People suspect him of . . ,) They are supposed to
be living in New York. (People suppose that they are living . . .) (See 245, 306 for infinitive
constructions with passive verbs.)
D When the subject of the active sentence would be the indefinite pronoun one: One sees this
sort of advertisement everywhere would usually be expressed:
A Practical English Grammar
189
This sort of advertisement is seen everywhere. In colloquial speech we can use the indefinite
pronoun you (see 68) and an active verb:
You see this sort of advertisement everywhere. But more formal English requires one + active
verb or the more usual passive form.
E When we are more interested in the action than the person who does it:
The house next door has been bought (by a M-r Jones). If, however, we know Mr Jones, we
would use the active;
Your/other's friend, Mr Jones, has bought the house next door. Similarly:
A new public library is being built (by our local council) though in more informal English we
could use the indefinite pronoun they (see 68) and an active verb:
They are building a new public library while a member of the Council will of course say:
We are/The council is building etc.
F The passive may be used to avoid an awkward or ungrammatical sentence. This is usually
done by avoiding a change of subject:
When he arrived home a detective arrested him would be better expressed:
When he arrived home he was arrested (by a detective).
When their mother was ill neighbours looked after the children would be better expressed:
When their mother was ill the children were looked after by
neighbours.
The passive is sometimes preferred for psychological reasons. A speaker may use it to
disclaim responsibility for disagreeable announcements:
EMPLOYER: Overtime rates are being rednced/wili have to be reduced. The active wili. of
course, be used for agreeable announcements:
I/We are going to increase overtime rates. The speaker may know who performed the action
but wish to avoid giving the name. Tom, who suspects Bill of opening his letters, may say
tactfully:
This letter has been opened!, instead of You've opened this letter!
For the have + object + past participle construction, I had the car resprayed, see 119.
305
Prepositions with passive verbs
As already noted, the agent, when mentioned, is preceded by by;
Active Dufy painted this picture. Passive This picture was painted by Dufy. Active What
makes these holes? Passive What are these holes made by?
Note, however, that the passive form of such sentences as:
Smoke filled the room. Paint covered the lock. will be:
The room was filled with smoke. The lock was covered with paint. We are dealing here with
materials used, not with the agents.
, When a verb + preposition 4- object combination is put into the passive, the preposition will
remain immediately after the verb;
Active
We must write to him.
Passive He must be written to.
Active
You can play with these cubs quite safely.
Passive These cubs can be played with quite safely.
Similarly with verb + preposition/adverb combinations:
Active
They threw away the old newspapers.
Passive The old newspapers were thrown away.
Active
He looked after the children well.
Passive The children were well looked after.
306
Infinitive constructions after passive verbs
After acknowledge, assume, believe, claim, consider, estimate, feel, find, know, presume,
report, say, think, understand etc. (see also 245)
Sentences of the type People consider/know/think etc. that he is . . . have two possible
passive forms:
It is considered/known/thought etc. that he is . . .
He is considered/known/thought etc. to be . . . Similarly:
A Practical English Grammar
190
B
2
People said that he was jealous of her =
It was said that he was or He was said to he jealous of her. The infinitive construction is the
neater of the two. It is chiefly used with to be though other infinitives can sometimes be used:
He is thought to have information which will be useful to the police. When the thought
concerns a previous action we use the perfect infinitive so that:
People believed that he was ==
It was believed that he was or He was believed to have been . . .
People know that he was =
It is known that he was or He is known to have been . . . This construction can be used with
the perfect infinitive of any verb.
After suppose
1 suppose in the passive can be followed by the present infinitive of any verb but this
construction usually conveys an idea of duty and is not therefore the normal equivalent of
suppose in the active:
You are supposed to know how to drive = It is your duty to know/Vim should know how to
drive though He is supposed to be in Paris could mean either 'He ought to be there' or
'People suppose he is there'suppose in the passive can similarly be followed by the perfect
infinitive of any verb. This construction may convey an idea of duty but
very often does not:
You are supposed to have finished = You should have finished but He is supposed to have
escaped disguised as a woman = People suppose that he escaped etc.
C Infinitives placed after passive verbs are normally full infinitives:
Active We saw them go out. He made us work. Passive They were seen to go out. We
were made to work.
let, however, is used without to:
Active They let us go. Passive We were let go.
D The continuous infinitive can be used after the passive of believe, know, report, say, suppose,
think, understand:
He is believed/known/said/supposed/thought to be living abroad = People
believe/know/say/suppose/think that he is living abroad. You are supposed to he working =
You should be working. The perfect form of the continuous infinitive is also possible:
He is believed to have been waiting for a message = People believed that he was waiting for
a message. You are supposed to have been working = You should have been working.
31
Indirect speech
307
Direct and indirect (or reported) speech
There are two ways of relating what a person has said: direct and indirect.
In direct speech we repeat the original speaker's exact words:
He said, 'I have lost my umbrella.'
Remarks thus repeated are placed between inverted commas, and a ' comma or colon is
placed immediately before the remark. Direct speech
is found in conversations in books, in plays, and in quotations.
In indirect speech we give the exact meaning of a remark or a speech, without necessarily
using the speaker's exact words:
He said (that) he had lost his umbrella.
There is no comma after say in indirect speech. that can usually be omitted after say and tell
+ object. But it should be kept after other verbs: complain, explain, object, point out,
protest etc. Indirect speech is normally used when conversation is reported verbally, though
direct speech is sometimes employed here to give a more dramatic effect.
When we turn direct speech into indirect, some changes are usually necessary. These are
most easily studied by considering statements, questions, and commands separately.
308
Statements in indirect speech: tense changes necessary
A Practical English Grammar
191
A Indirect speech can be introduced by a verb in a present tense: He says that. . . This is usual
when we are:
(a) reporting a conversation that is still going on
(b) reading a letter and reporting what it says
(c) reading instructions and reporting them
(d) reporting a statement that someone makes very often, e.g. Tom
says that he'll never get married.
When the introductory verb is in a present, present perfect or future
tense we can report the direct speech without any change of tense:
PAUL (phoning from the station): I'm trying to get a taxi.
ANN (to Mary, who is standing beside her): Paul says he is trying to
get a taxi.
B But indirect speech is usually introduced by a verb in the past tense. Verbs in the direct
speech have then to be changed into a corresponding past tense. The changes are shown in
the following table. (The that has been omitted in the last five examples.)
Direct speech
Simple present
‘I never ml meat.' he explained
Present continuous
'I'm waiting/or Ann.' he said
Present perfect
I have found a flat,' he said
Present perfect continuous
Hesaid, 'I've been waiting forages'
Simple past
I took it home with me,' she said
Future
He said, I will/shall be in Paris m
Monday'
Future continuous
'I will/shall be using the car myself
on the 24th,' she said
But note,
Conditional
I said, 7 would/should like to see it'
Indirect speech
Simple past
= He explained that he never ate meat.
Past continuous
= He said (thai) he was waiting for Ann.
Past perfect
= He said (that) he had found a flat.
Past perfect continuous
= He said he had been waiting for ages.
Past perfect
= She said she had taken it home with her.
Conditional
= He said he would be in Paris cm
Monday.
Conditional continuous
= She said she'd be using the car herself
on the 24th.
Conditional
= I said I would/should like to see it.
(No tense change. See also 227.)
C
Note on I/we shall/should
'I/we shall' normally becomes he/she/they would in indirect speech:
I shall be 21 tomorrow,' said Bill = Bill said he would be 21 the following day. But if the
sentence is reported by the original speaker, 'I/we shall' can become either I/we should or
I/we would, would is the more common.
Similarly 'I/we should' usually becomes he/she/they would in indirect speech:
'If I had the instruction manual I should/would know what to do,'
said Bill =
Bill said that if he had the instructions he would know what to do. But if the sentence is
reported by the original speaker 'I/we should' can either remain unchanged or be reported by
would- See last example in B above.
309
Past tenses sometimes remain unchanged
A In theory the past tense changes to the past perfect, but in spoken English it is often left
unchanged, provided this can be done without causing confusion about the relative times of the
actions. For example, He said. 'I loved her' must become He said he had loved her as
otherwise there would be a change of meaning. But He said, 'Ann arrived on Monday' could be
reported He said Ann arrived/had arrived on Monday.
B The past continuous tense in theory changes to the past perfect continuous but in practice
usually remains unchanged except when it refers to a completed action:
She said, 'We were thinking of selling the house but we have decided
A Practical English Grammar
192
not to' =
She said that they had been thinking of selling the house but had
decided not to. But He said, 'When I saw them they were playing tennis' =
He said that when he saw them they were playing tennis.
C In written English past tenses usually do change to past perfect but there are the following
exceptions:
1 Past/Past continuous tenses in time clauses do not normally change:
He said, 'When we were living/lived in Paris . . .' =
He said that when they were living in Paris . . . The main verb of such sentences can either
remain unchanged or become the past perfect:
He said, 'When we were living/lived in Paris we often saw Paul' =
fie said that when they were living/lived in Paris they often saw/had
often seen Paul.
2 A past tense used to describe a state of affairs which still exists when the speech is reported
remains unchanged:
She said, 'I decided not to buy the house because it was on a main road' = She said that she
had decided not to buy the house because it was on a main road.
310
Unreal past tenses (subjunctives) in indirect speech
A
Unreal past tenses after wish, would rather/sooner and it is time
do not change:
'We wish we didn't have to take exams.' said the children = The children said they
wished they didn't have to take exams.
'Bill wants to go alone,' said Ann, 'but I'd rather he went with a group' = Ann said that
Bill wanted to go alone but that she 'd rather he went with a group.
'It's time we began planning our holidays,' he said = He said that it was time they began
planning their holidays.
B
I/he/she/we/they had better remains unchanged, you had better can remain unchanged or
be reported by advise + object + infinitive (see 120):
'The children had better go to bed early,' said Tom = Tom said that the children had
better go to bed early.
'You'd better not drink the water,' she said = She advised/warned us not to drink the water.
C
Conditional sentences types 2 and 3 remain unchanged (see 229):
'If my children were older I would emigrate,' he said = He said that if his children were older he would
emigrate.
311
C
D
E
might, ought to, should, would, used to in indirect statements
A might remains unchanged except when used as a request form:
He said, 'Ann might ring today' = He said that Ann might ring (that day).
But 'You might post these for me' he said = He asked me to post them for him. (See 285 for
requests.)
B ought to/should for obligation or assumption remains unchanged:
'They ought to/should widen this road,' I said = I said that they ought to/should widen the
road. I said,
'I should be back by six' (I assume I will be) = I said I should be back by six.
But you ought to/you should, if used to express advice rather than obligation, can be reported
by advise + object + infinitive, you must can also express advice and be reported similarly.
'You ought to/should/must read the instructions,' said Ann = Ann advised/urged/warned me to
read the instructions.
The advice form 'Ifl were you I should/would . . .' is normally reported by advise + object +
infinitive:
'If I were you I'd wait,'I said = I advised him to waif,
The request form 'I should/would be (very) grateful if you would . . .' is normally reported by
ask + object + infinitive:
'I'd be very grateful if you 'd keep me informed,' he said = He asked me to keep him informed.
A Practical English Grammar
193
F
G
would in statements doesn't change. But see 284 for would in requests etc.
used to doesn't change:
'I know the place well because I used to live here,' he explained = He explained thai he knew
the place well because he used to live there.
(For could, see 312; for must, see 325.)
312
could in indirect statements
(For could interrogative, see 283-4.)
A
B
313
could for ability
1 could for present ability does not change:
'I can't/couldn't stand on my head.' he said = He said he couldn't stand on his head.
2 could for future ability can remain unchanged or be reported by would be able:
He said, 'I could do it tomorrow' = He said he could do it/would be able to do it the next
day.
could in type 2 conditional sentences is reported similarly:
'If I had the tools I could mend it,' he said = He said that if he had the tools he
could/would be able to mend it. would be able here implies that the supposition may be
fulfilled. (Perhaps he'll be able to borrow tools.)
could in type 3 conditional sentences is reported unchanged.
could for past ability can remain unchanged or be reported by had been able:
‘I could read when I was three.' she boasted = She boasted that she could/had been
able to read when she was three.
could for permission
In type 2 conditional sentences could can remain unchanged or be reported by would be
allowed to:
'If I paid my fine I could walk out of prison today,' he said = He said that if he paid his fine he
could/would be allowed to walk etc.
could in the past can remain unchanged or be reported by was/were allowed to or had been
allowed to:
He said, 'When I was a boy I could stay up as long as I liked' = He said that when he was a
boy he could/was allowed to stay up or He said that as a boy he was/had been allowed etc.
Indirect speech: pronoun and adjective
Pronouns and possessive adjectives usually change from first or second to third person
except when the speaker is reporting his own words:
He said, 'I've forgotten the combination of my safe' = He said that he had forgotten the
combination of his safe.
I said, 'I like my new house' = I said that I liked my new house, (speaker reporting his
own words)
Sometimes a noun must be inserted to avoid ambiguity: Tom said. 'He cane in through the
window' would not normally be reported Tom said he had come in through the window as this
might imply that Tom himself had come in this way; but if we use a noun there can be no
confusion:
Tom said that the man/burglar/cat etc, had come in . . .
Pronoun changes may affect the verb:
He says. 'I know her' = He says he knows her.
He says, '! shall be there' = He says that he will be there.
B this and these
this used in time expressions usually becomes that:
He said, 'She is coming this week' =
He said that she was coming that week. Otherwise this and that used as adjectives usually
change to the:
He said, 'I bought this pearl/these pearls for my mother' =
He said that he had bought the peart/pearls for his mother. this, these used as pronouns can
become it, they/them:
He showed me two bullets. 'I found these embedded in the panelling,'
A Practical English Grammar
194
he said =
He said he had found them embedded in the panelling.
He said, 'We will discuss this tomorrow' = He said that they would discuss it/the waiter
the next day. this, these (adjectives or pronouns), used to indicate choice or to
distinguish some things from others, can become the one(s) near him etc., or the
statement can be reworded:
'I'll have this (one),' he said to me = He said he would have the one near him or
He pointed to/touched/showed me the one he wanted.
314
Expressions of time and place in indirect speech
A
Adverbs and adverbial phrases of time change as follows:
Direct
today
yesterday
the day before yesterday
tomorrow
the day after tomorrow
next week/year etc.
last week/year etc.
a year etc. ago
Indirect
that day
the day before
two days before
the next day/the following day
in two days' time
the following week/year etc.
the previous week/year etc.
a year before/the previous year
'I saw her the day before yesterday,' he said = He said he'd seen her two days before.
'I'll do it tomorrow,' he promised = He promised that he would do it the next day.
'I'm starting the day after tomorrow, mother.' he said = He told his mother that he was
starting in two days' time.
She said, 'My father died a year ago' = She said that her father had died a year before/the previous
year.
B
But if the speech is made and reported on the same day these time changes are not
necessary:
At breakfast this morning he said. ‘I’ll be very busy today' = At breakfast this morning he said that he
would be very busy today.
C
Logical adjustments are of course necessary if a speech is reported one/two days after it is
made. On Monday Jack said to Tom:
I'm leaving the day after tomorrow.
If Tom reports this speech on the next day (Tuesday) he will probably say:
Jack said he was leaving tomorrow.
If he reports it on Wednesday, he will probably say:
Jack said he was leaving today.
D
here can become there but only when it is clear what place is meant:
At the station he said, ‘I’ll be here again tomorrow' = He said that he 'd be there again
the next day.
Usually here has to be replaced by some phrase:
She said, 'You can sit here, Tom' = She told Tom that he could sit beside her etc. But
He said, 'Come here, boys' would normally be reported:
He called the boys.
315
Infinitive and gerund constructions in indirect speech
A
agree/refuse/offer/promise/threaten + infinitive can sometimes be used instead of say
(that):
ANN: Would you wait half an hour? TOM: All right = Tom agreed to wait or Tom said he
would wait.
ANN: Would you lend me another £50?
TOM: No. I won't lend you any more money = Tom refused to lend her any more money or
Tom said thai he wouldn't lend etc.
PAUL: I'll help you if you like, Ann = Paul offered to help her or
A Practical English Grammar
195
Paul said that he'd help her. (See also shall I?, 318.)
ANN: I'll pay you back next week. Really I will. = Ann promised to pay him back the following
week or
Ann said that she would pay him back or
Ann assured him that she would pay him back.
KIDNAPPERS: If you don't pay the ransom at once we'll kill your daughter = The kidnappers
threatened to kill his daughter if he didn 't Ray the ransom at once or The kidnappers said
that they would kill etc:
(For object + infinitive constructions, see 320.)
B
accuse . . . of/admit/apologize for/deny/insist on + gerund can sometimes be used instead
of say (that):
TOM took the money!' might be reported
He accused me of taking the money.
'I stole/didn't steal it' might be reported
I admitted/denied stealing it.
'I'm sorry I'm late,' he said might be reported
He apologized for being late or
He said,he was sorry he was tale.
BILL: Let me pay/or myself.
TOM: Certainly not! I'll pay! might be reported
Tom insisted on paying.
316
say, tell and alternative introductory verbs
A
say and tell with direct speech
1 say can introduce a statement or follow it:
Tom said, 'I've just heard the news' or 'I've just heard the news,' Tom said. Inversion of say
and noun subject is possible when say follows the
statement:
'I've just heard the news,' said Tom. say + to + person addressed is possible, but this phrase
must follow the direct statement; it cannot introduce it:
'I'm leaving at once,' Tom said to me. Inversion is not possible here.
2 tell requires the person addressed:
Tell me. He told us. I'll tell Tom. except with tell lies/stories/the truth, when the person
addressed need not be mentioned:
He told (me) lies. I'll tell (you) a story. tell used with direct speech must be placed after the
direct statement:
'I'm leaving at once,' Tom told me.
Inversion is not possible with tell.
B
say and tell with indirect speech
Indirect statements are normally introduced by say, or tell + object. say 4- to + object is
possible but much less usual than tell + object:
He said he'd just heard the news.
He told me that he'd just heard the news.
Note also tell . . . how/about:
He told us how he had crossed the mountains.
He told us about crossing the mountains.
He told us about his journeys.
(For say and tell with indirect commands, see 320-1.)
Other useful verbs are:
add*
admit*
answer*
argue*
assure + object
boast*
A Practical English Grammar
complain*
deny*
explain*
grumble*
object*
observe*
point out
promise*
protest*
remark*
remind + object
reply*
196
These can be used with direct or indirect speech. With direct speech they follow direct
statements;
'It won't cost more,' Tom assured us.
Starred verbs can be inverted, provided the subject is a noun:
'But it will take longer,' Bill objected/objected Bill.
'It'll cost too much,' Jack grumbled/grumbled Jack. They can all introduce indirect statements.
that should be placed after the verb:
Tom assured us that it wauldn 't cost more. But Bill objected/pointed
out that it would take longer.
D
murmur, mutter, shout, stammer, whisper can precede or follow direct statements or
questions. With noun subjects the verb can be inverted as shown above:
'You're late,' whispered Tom/Tom whispered.
They can introduce indirect statements, that is usually necessary:
Tom whispered that we were late.
There are, of course, a lot of other verbs describing the voice or the tone of voice, e.g. bark,
growl, roar, scream, shriek, snarl, sneer, yell. But these are more common with direct than
indirect speech.
317
Questions in indirect speech
Direct question: He said, 'Where is she going?'
Indirect question: He asked where she was going.
When we turn direct questions into indirect speech, the following changes are necessary.
Tenses, pronouns and possessive adjectives, and adverbs of time and place change as in
statements.
The interrogative form of the verb changes to the affirmative form. The question mark (?) is
therefore omitted in indirect questions:
He said, 'Where does she live?' = He asked where she lived.
With affirmative verb questions (see 55) this change is obviously not necessary:
'Who lives next door?' he said = He asked who lived next door.
'What happened?' she said = She asked what had happened.
If the introductory verb is .say, it must be changed to avert of inquiry, e.g. ask, inquire,
wonder, want to know etc.:
He said, 'Where is the station?' = He asked where the station was.
ask, inquire, wonder can also be used in direct speech. They are then usually placed at the
end of the sentence:
'Where is the station?' he inquired.
C ask can be followed by the person addressed (indirect object):
Heasked, 'What have you got in your bag?' =
He asked (me) what I had got in my bag. But inquire, wonder, want to know cannot take an
indirect object, so if we wish to report a question where the person addressed is mentioned,
we must use ask:
He said. 'Mary, when is the next train?' =
He asked Mary when the next train was. If we use inquire, wonder or want to know we must
omit Mary.
D If the direct question begins with a question word (when, where, who, how, why etc.) the
question word is repeated in the indirect question:
Hesaid, 'Why didn't you put on the brake?' =
He asked (her) why she hadn 'f put on the brake.
She said, 'What do you want?' =
She asked (them) what they wanted.
E If there is no question word, if or whether must be used:
7s anyone there?' he asked = He asked if/whether anyone was there.
1 Normally we can use either if and whether, if is the more usual:
'Do you know Bill?' he said =
He asked if/whether I knew Bill.
'Did you see the accident?' the policeman asked =
The policeman asked if/whether I had seen the accident.
2 whether can emphasize that a choice has to be made:
A Practical English Grammar
197
'Do you want to go by air or sea?' the travel agent asked = The travel agent asked whether I
wanted to go by air or by sea. Note whether or not:
'Do you want to insure your luggage or not?' he asked == He asked whether or not I wanted
to insure my luggage or He asked if I wanted to insure my luggage or not.
3 whether + infinitive is possible after wonder, want to know:
'Shall/Should 1wait for them or go on?' he wondered =
He wondered whether to wait for them or go on or
He wondered whether he should wait for them or go on.
inquire + whether + infinitive is possible but less usual.
(For whether + infinitive, see also 242 B.)
4 whether is neater if the question contains a conditional clause as otherwise there would be
two ifs:
'If you get the job will you move to York?' Bill asked = Bill asked whether, if I got the job, I'd
move to York.
Questions beginning shall I/we? in indirect speech Questions beginning shall I/we? can be of
four kinds.
Speculations or requests for information about a future event:
'Shall I ever see them again?' he wondered. 'When shall I know the result of the test?' she
asked.
These follow the ordinary rule about shall/will. Speculations are
usually introduced by wonder:
He wondered if he would ever see them again. She asked when she would know the result of
the test.
Requests for instructions or advice:
'What shall I do with it?' = 'Tell me what to do with it.' These are expressed in indirect speech
by ask, inquire etc., with should or the be + infinitive construction. Requests for advice are
normally reported by should:
'Shall we post it. sir?' he said =
He asked the customer if they were to post/if they should post if.
'What shall I say, mother?' she said =
She asked her mother what she should say. (request for advice) When a choice is required
we normally use whether in indirect speech. whether + infinitive is sometimes possible (see
also 317 E):
'Shall I lock the car or leave it unlocked?' he said =
He asked whether he should/was to lock the car or leave it
unlocked or He asked whether to lock the car etc.
Offers:
'Shall I bring you some tea?' could be reported
He offered to bring me some tea.
Note that 'Wouldyou like me to bring you some tea?' and 'I'll bnngyou some tea if you like'
could also be reported by offer.
Suggestions:
'Shall we meet at the theatre?' could be reported He suggested meeting at the theatre.
Questions beginning will you/would you/could you?
These may be ordinary questions, but may also be requests, invitations, or, very occasionally,
commands (see 284. 286, 320):
He said. 'Will you be there tomorrow?' (ordinary question) =
He asked if she would be there the next day.
'Will you stand still!'he shouted = He shouted at me to standstill''^!
He told/ordered me to stand still.
'Wouldyou like to live in New York?' he asked =
He asked if I would tike to live in New York.
'Wilt/Would you file these letters, please?' he said =
He asked/told me to/lie the Setters.
'Would you like a lift?' said Ann = Ann offered me a lift. 'Would you like to come round/Could
yw come round for a drink?'
he said =
He invited me (to come) round for a drink.
'Could you live on £25 a week?' he asked =
He asked if I could live on £25 a week.
'Could/Would you give me a hand?' she said =
A Practical English Grammar
198
She asked us to give her a hand.
'Could/Would you show me the photos?' she said =
She asked me to show her the photos or She asked to see the photos. (For
can/could/may/might + I/we?, see 283. For requests for permission, see 131.)
320 Commands, requests, advice in indirect speech
Direct command: He said, 'Lie down, Tom.'
Indirect command: He told Tom to He down.
Indirect commands, requests, advice are usually expressed by a verb of
comraand/request/advice + object + infinitive (== the object -i- infinitive
construction).
A The following verbs can be used: advise, ask, beg, command,
encourage, entreat, forbid, implore, invite, order, recommend,
remind, request, tell, urge, warn.
(Note that say is not included in this list. For indirect commands/
requests reported by say, see 321.)
Hesaid. 'Get your coat, Tom!' = He told Tom to get his coat. 'You had better hurry, Bill!' she
said = She advised Bill to hurry.
B Negative commands, requests etc. are usually reported by not •+•
infinitive:
'Don't swim out too far, boys,' I said =
I warned/told the boys not to swim out too far. forbid can also be used for prohibitions, but is
more common in the passive than in the active.
C Verbs in A above require object + infinitive, i.e. they must be followed directly by the
person addressed without preposition (see also 89). The person addressed is often not
mentioned in direct commands, requests
etc.: He said, 'Go away!' When reporting such commands/requests therefore we must add a
noun
or pronoun:
He told me/him/her/us/them/the children to go away. ask diners from the other verbs in A in
that it can also be followed directly by the infinitive of certain verbs, e.g. see, speak to, talk to:
He said. 'Could I see Tom, please?' =
He asked to see Tom. (See also 283.) But this is quite different from the ask + object +
infinitive type of request.
Both ask and beg can be followed by the passive infinitive:
'Do. please, send me to a warm climate,' he asked/begged = He asked/begged us to send
him to a warm climate or He asked/begged to be sent to a warm climate.
Examples of indirect commands, requests, advice Note that direct commands are usually
expressed by the imperative, but that requests and advice can be expressed in a variety of
ways (see 283-7):
'If I were you, I'd slop taking tranquillizers,' I said =
I advised him to stop taking tranquillizers. (See 311 D.)
'Why don't you take off your coat?'he said =
He advised me to take off my coat. (See also 287.)
' Would/Could you show me your passport, please?' he said =
He asked me to show him my passport or
He asked me for/He asked to see my passport.
'You might post some letters for me,' said my boss =
My boss asked me to post some letters for him.
'If you 'd just sign the register,' said the receptionist =
The receptionist asked him to sign the register.
'Do sit down.' said my hostess =My hostess asked/invited me to sit down.
'Please, please don't take any risks,' said his wife =
His wife begged/implored him not to take any risks.
'Forget all about this you »g man,' said her parents: 'don't see him '
again or answer his
letters' =
Her parents ordered her to forget all about the young man and told
her not to see him again or answer his letters or
She was ordered to forget all about the young man and forbidden to ._
see him again or
answer his tetters, (passive construction)
'Don't forget to order the wine.' said Mrs Pitt =
Mrs Pitt reminded her husband to order the wine.
A Practical English Grammar
199
'Try again,' said Ann's friends encouragingly =
Ann's friends encouraged her to fry again.
'Go on, apply for the job,'said Jack =
Jack urged/encouraged me to apply for the job.
' You had better not leave your car unlocked,' said my friends;
'there's been a lot of stealing from cars' = '
My friends warned me not to leave my car
unlocked as there had been a lot of stealing from cars.
will you . . . sentences are normally treated as requests and reported by ask:
'Will all persons not travelling please go ashore,' he said = He asked at! persons not
travelling to go ashore. But if a will you sentence is spoken sharply or irritably, and the '
please is omitted, it might be reported by tell or order;
'Will you be quiet!/Be quiet, will you!' he said = He told/ordered us to be quiet.
321
Other ways of expressing indirect commands
A say/tell + subject + be + infinitive:
He said/told me that I was to wait. This is a possible alternative to the tell + infinitive
construction, so that:
He said, 'Don't open the door' could be reported
He told me not to open the door or
fie said that I wasn 't to open the door. The be + infinitive construction is particularly useful in
the following cases:
1 When the command is introduced by a verb in the present tense:
He says, 'Meet me at the station' = He says that we are to meet him at the station. (He tells
us to meet him would be much less likely.)
2 When the command is preceded by a clause (usually of time or condition):
He said, 'If she leaves the house follow her' could be reported He said that if she left the
house I was to follow her. He told me to follow her if she left the house would be equally
possible here but note that if we use the tell + infinitive construction we must change the
order of the sentence so as to put the command first. Sometimes this would result in a rather
confusing sentence. For example, the request If you see Ann tell her to ring me would
become He told me to tell Ann to ring him if I saw her. Such requests can only be reported by
the be + infinitive construction:
He said that if I saw Ann I was to tell her to ring him.
B say/tell (+ that) + subject + should
1 say or tell with a should construction normally indicates advice rather than command:
He said, 'If your brakes are bad don't drive so fast' =
He said/told me that if my brakes were bad I shouldn 't drive so fast
or
He advised me not to drive so fast if my brakes were bad. (Note
change of order here, as with tell + infinitive above.)
2 Advice can also be expressed by advise, recommend and urge + that. . . should. This is
particularly useful in the passive (see 302 E):
'! advise cancelling the meeting.' he said s He advised that the meeting should be cancelled.
3 command and order can also be used with should or a passive infinitive;
'Evacuate the area!' ordered the superintendent =
The superintendent ordered that everyone should lease the area or
ordered that the area should be evacuated or
ordered the area to be evacuated.
4 Note that when an indirect command is expressed by an object + infinitive construction, as
in 320, there is normally the idea that the
person who is to obey the command is addressed directly. But when the command is
expressed by the be + infinitive construction (A above) or by a should construction (B3 above)
the recipient of the command need not necessarily be addressed directly. The command may
be conveyed to him by a third person.
322
let's, let us, let him/them in indirect speech
let's
let's usually expresses a suggestion and is reported by suggest in
A Practical English Grammar
200
indirect speech:
He said, 'Let's leave the case at the station'
would be reported:
He suggested leaving the case at the station or He suggested that they/we should leave the
case at the station.
(See 289 for constructions with suggest.) He said, 'Let's stop now and finish it later'
would be reported:
He suggested stopping then and finishing it later or He suggested that they/we should stop
then and finish it later.
Similarly in the negative:
He said, 'Let's not say anything about it till we hear the facts' = He suggested not saying
anything/saying nothing about it till they heard the facts or He suggested that they shouldn 't
say anything till they heard the facts.
But let's not used alone in answer to an affirmative suggestion is often
reported by some phrase such as opposed the idea/was against
it/objected. So that we could report:
'Let's sell the house,' said Tom. 'Lei's not,' said Ann by Tom suggested selling the house hut
Ann was against it.
(For other suggestion forms, see 289.) ;. let's/let us sometimes expresses a call to action. It is
then usually
reported by urge/advise + object + infinitive (see also 320):
The strike leader said, 'Let's show the bosses that we are united' = The strike leader urged
the workers to show the bosses that they were united.
323
let him/them
In theory let him/them expresses a command. But very often the speaker has no authority
over the person who is to obey the command;
7('s not my business,' said the postman. 'Let the government do
something about it.'
Here, the speaker is not issuing a command but expressing an obligation. Sentences of this
type are therefore normally reported by ought/should:
He said that if wasn 't his business and that the government ought
to/should do something about it.
2 Sometimes, however, let him/them does express a command. It is then usually reported by
say + be + infinitive (see 321):
'Let the boys clear up this mess,' said the headmaster -= The headmaster said that the boys
were to clear up the mess. 'Let the guards'be armed,' he ordered = He ordered that the
guards should be armed.
3 Sometimes let him/them is more a suggestion than a command. In such cases it is usually
reported by suggest, or say + should (see 289):
She said, 'Let them go to their consul. He 'II be able to help them' = She suggested their/them
going to their consul etc. or She suggested that they should go to their consul or She said
that they should go to their consul.
4 let him/them can also indicate the speaker's indifference:
'The neighbours will complain,' said Ann.
'Let them (complain),' said Tom = Tom expressed indifference or
Tom said he didn't mind (if they complained).
C let there be
Here the speaker could be ordering, advising, urging or begging:
'Let there be no reprisals,' said the widow of the murdered man = The widow urged/begged
that there should be no reprisals.
D let is also an ordinary verb meaning allow/permit:
'Let him come with us, mother; I'll take care of him,' I said =
I asked my mother to let him come with us and promised to take care
of him.
323
Exclamations and yes and no
A Practical English Grammar
201
A Exclamations usually become statements in indirect speech. The exclamation mark
disappears.
1 Exclamations beginning What <a). . . or How ... can be reported
(a) by exclaim/say that:
He said, 'What a dreadful idea!' or 'How dreadful.'' = He exclaimed that it was a dreadful
idea/was dreadful
or (b) by give an exclamation of delight/disgust/horror/relief/
surprise etcAlternatively, if the exclamation is followed by an action we can use the
construction (c) with an exclamation of delight/disgust etc. +
he/she etc. + verb.
2 Other types of exclamation, such as Good! Marvellous! Splendid! Heavens! Oh! Ugh! etc.
can be reported as in (b) or (c) above:
'Good!' he exclaimed =
He gave an exclamation of pleasure/satisfaction.
' Ugh!' she exclaimed, and turned the programme off =
With an exclamation of disgust she turned the programme off.
Note also:
He said, 'Thank you!' = He thanked me. ;' He said. 'Curse this fog.'' = He cursed the fog.
He said. 'Good luck!' = He wished me luck.
He said. 'Happy Christmas'.' = He wished me a happy Christmas.
He said, 'Congratulations9' = He congratulated me.
He said, 'Liar!' = He called me a liar.
He said, 'Damn!'etc. = He swore.
The notice said: WELCOME TO WALES.' = '• The notice welcomed visitors to Wales.
ri
yes and no are expressed in indirect speech by subject + appropriate ' auxiliary verb:
He said, 'Can you swim?'and I said'No' = He asked (me) if I could swim and I said I couldn't.
Hesaid, 'Will you have time to do it?' and I said 'Yes' = He asked if I would have time to do it
and I said that I would.
324
Indirect speech: mixed types
Direct speech may consist of statement + question, question + command, command +
statement, or all three together.
Normally each requires its own introductory verb:
'I don't know the way. Do you?' he asked .= ; He said he didn't know the way and asked
her if she did/if she knew it.
'Someone's coming,' he said. 'Get behind the screen' =
He said that someone was coming and told me to get behind the
screen.
'I'm going shopping. Can I get you anything?' she said = '' She said she was going
shopping and asked if she could get me ; anything.
'I can hardly hear the radio,' he said. 'Could you turn it up?' =
He said he could hardly hear the radio and asked her to turn it up.
But sometimes, when the iast clause is a statement which helps to explain the first, we can
use as instead of a second introductory verb:
'You'd better wear a coat. it's very cold out.'he said =. He advised me to wear a coat as it was
very cold out. 'You'd better not walk across the park alone. People have been
mugged there,' he said =
He warned her not to walk across the park alone as people had been mugged there.
Sometimes the second introductory verb can be a participle:
'Please, please, don't drink too much! Remember thatyou'U have to drive home,' she said =
She begged him not to drink too much, reminding him that he 'd have to drive home.
'Let's shop on Friday. The supermarket will be very crowded on Saturday,' she said =
She suggested shopping on Friday, pointing out that the supermarket would be very crowded
on Saturday. (as could be used in both these examples.)
A Practical English Grammar
202
325 must and needn't
A must used for deductions, permanent commands/prohibitions and to express intention
remains unchanged. (For must, expressing advice, see 287 A.)
1 Deductions:
She said, 'I'm always running into him; he must live near here!' a She said that. . . he must
live in the area.
2 Permanent command:
He said, 'This door must be kept locked' =-He said that the door must be kept locked.
3 must used casually to express intention:
He said, ' We must have a party to celebrate this' = He said that they must have a party to
celebrate it.
B must used for obligation can remain unchanged. Alternatively it can be reported by would
have to or had to.
1 I/we must reported by would have to
would have to is used when the obligation depends on some future action, or when the
fulfilment of the obligation appears remote or uncertain, i.e. when must is clearly replaceable
by will have to:
'If the floods get worse we must (will have to) leave the house,' he
said =
If e said that if the floods got worse they would have to leave the
house.
'When it stops snowing we must start digging ourselves out,'
I said =
I said that when it stopped snowing we would have to start digging
ourselves out.
'We must mend the roof properly next year,' he said =
He said that they would have to mend the roof properly the following
year.
7 have just received a letter,' he said. 'I must go home' =
He said that he had just received a letter and would have to go home(But had to would be more usual here if he went at once, i.e. had
to'would imply that he went at once.)
2 I/we must reported by had to
had to is the usual form for obligations where times for fulfilment have been fixed, or plans
made, or when the obligation is fulfilled fairly promptly, or at least by the time the speech is
reported:
He said, 'I must wash my hands' (and presumably did so) =
He said that he had to wash his hands.
Tom said, 'I must be there by nine tomorrow' = { Tom said that he had to be there by nine
the next day. ^would have to would be possible here also but would imply that the ^obligation
was self-imposed and that no outside authority was involved, ; had to could express either an
outside authority (i.e. that someone had ; told him to be there) or a self-imposed obligation.
HAH difficulties about had to/would have to can of course be avoided ,:jby keeping must
unchanged. In both the above examples must could '''have been used instead of had to/would
have to.
you/he/they must is reported similarly:
He said. 'You must start at once' =
He said that she must/had to/would have to start at once. But note that would have to
removes the idea of the speaker's authority:
Tom said. 'I/you want to stay on here you must work harder' =
Twn said that if she wanted to stay on she must/would have to work
harder.
must implies that Tom himself insists on her working harder, would
have to merely implies that this will be necessary.
must I/you/he? can change similarly but as must in the interrogative
usually concerns the present or immediate future it usually becomes
had to:
'Must you go so soon?' I said = I asked him if he had to go so soon.
gfaust not
must not usually remains unchanged, you/he must not remains
A Practical English Grammar
203
.pichanged or is expressed as a negative command (see 320-1):
He said, 'You mustn't tell anyone' = f:- He said that she mustn 't ell/wasn 't to tell anyone
or
He told her not to tell anyone. ',,
needn't
needn't can remain unchanged and usually does. Alternatively it can i,change to didn't have
to/wouldn't have to just as must changes to
•had to/would have to:
He said. 'You needn't wait' = He said that I needn't wait.
I said, 'If you can lend me the money I needn 't go to the bank = i; / said that if he could lend
me the money I needn 't/wouldn 't have to
go to the bank.
He said, '1 needn't be in the office till ten tomorrow morning' •=
He said that he needn't/didn't have to be in the office till ten the next ! morning.
"need I/you/he? behaves exactly in the same ways as must I/you/he? ; i.e. it normally
becomes had to:
'Need I finish my pudding?' asked the small boy = ^ The small boy asked if he had to
finish his pudding.
A Practical English Grammar
204
32
326
Conjunctions
Co-ordinating conjunctions: and, but, both . . . and, or, either ... or, neither . . . nor, not only . .
. but also
These join pairs of nouns/adjectives/adverbs/verbs/phrases/clauses:
He plays squash and rugby.
I make the payments and keep the accounts.
He works quickly and/but accurately.
He is small but strong. She is intelligent but lazy.
We came in first but (we) didn't win the race.
Both men and women were drafted into the army.
Ring Tom or Bill. She doesn 't smoke or drink.
He can't (either) read or write.
You can (either) walk up or take the cable car.
He can neither read nor write.
Not only men but also women were chosen.
327
besides, however, nevertheless, otherwise, so, therefore, still, yet, though
These adverbs/conjunctions can join clauses or sentences and are then often known as
'conjuncts'. But they can also, with the exception of nevertheless and therefore (conjunctions),
be used in other ways and sometimes as other parts of speech. Their position will vary
according to how they are usedA besides (preposition) means 'in addition to'. It precedes a noun/pronoun/gerund:
Besides doing the cooking I look after the garden. besides (adverb) means 'in addition'. It
usually precedes the clause it introduces, but can follow it:
I can't go now; I'm too busy. Besides, my passport is out of date. moreover could replace
besides here in more formal English. anyway or in any case could be used here in more
informal English:
Anyway, my passport's out of date.
B however (adverb of degree, see 41) precedes its adjective/adverb:
You couldn't earn much, however hard you worked. however (conjunction) usually means
'but'. It can precede or follow its clause or come after the first word or phrase:
I'll offer it to Tom. However, he may not want it or
He may 'not want it however or Tom, however, may not want it or
If, however, he doesn't want it. . .
' But when two contrasting statements are mentioned, however can
t; mean'but/nevertheless/all the same':
They hadn 't trained hard, but/however/nevertheless/all the same they won or they won,
however/nevertheless/all the same, (See also 329.)
.• otherwise (adverb) usually comes after the verb:
It must be used in a well-ventilated room. Used otherwise it could be
harmful. otherwise (conjunction) means 'if not/or else':
We must be early; otherwise we won't get a seat. or could also be used here in colloquial
English;
We must be early or (else) see won't get a seat.
so (adverb of degree) precedes its adjective/adverb:
I was so hot that. . . They ran so fast that. . . so (conjunction) precedes its clause:
Our cases were heavy, so we look a taxi.
therefore (conjunction) can be used instead of so in formal English. It can come at the
beginning of the clause or after the first word or phrase; or before the main verb:
There is fog at Heathrow; the plane, therefore, has been diverted/the plane has therefore
been diverted/therefore the plane has been diverted.
••• still and yet can be adverbs of time (see 37):
The children are still up. They haven't had supper yet. '•' still and yet (conjunctions) come at
the beginning of the clauses they introduce.
A Practical English Grammar
205
still (conjunction) means 'admitting that/nevertheless'. yet (conjunction) means 'in spite of
that/all the same/nevertheless'. You aren 't rich; still, you could do something to help him.
They are ugly and expensive; yet people buy them.
though/although normally introduce clauses of concession (see 340):
Though/Although they're expensive, people buy them. though (but not although) can also be
used to link two main clauses. though used in this way means 'but' or 'yet' and is placed
sometimes at the beginning but more often at the end of its clause:
He says he 'II pay, though I don't think he will or
He says he 'II pay; I don 'f think he will, though.
328
Subordinating conjunctions: if, that, though/although, unless, when etc.
Subordinating conjunctions introduce subordinate adverb or noun clauses and are dealt with
in the chapters on the different types of clause.
See chapter 21 for conditional clauses, chapter 33 for purpose clauses
chapter 34 for adverb clauses of reason, result, concession, comparison
and time, and chapter 35 for noun clauses.
Some conjunctions have more than one meaning and may introduce
more than one type of clause.
Pairs and groups of conjunctions which are sometimes confused with
each other or with other parts of speech are dealt with below.
329 though/although and in spite of (preposition phrase), despite (preposition)
Two opposing or contrasting statements, such as He had no qualifications and He got the job,
could be combined as follows:
A With but, however or nevertheless as shown in 327 above:
He had no qualifications but he got the job.
He had no qualifications; however he got the Job/he got the job,
however.
He had no qualifications; nevertheless he got the job.
B With though/although:
He got the job although he had no qualifications. Although he had no qualifications he got the
job.
C With in spite of/despite + noun/pronoun/gerund:
In spite of'having no qualifications he got the job. He got the job in
spite of having no qualifications.
despite = in spite of. It is chiefly used in newspapers and in formal English:
Despite the severe weather conditions all the cars completed the
course.
D Note that though/although requires subject + verb:
Although it was windy . . .
and that in spite of/despite requires noun/pronoun or gerund:
In spite a/the wind . . .
Some more examples:
Although it smelt horrible . . . = In spite of the horrible smell. . . Although it was dangerous . . .
= In spite of the danger . . . Though he was inexperienced . . . = In spite of his
inexperience/his being inexperienced . . .
330
for and because
These conjunctions have nearly the same meaning and very often either can be used. It is,
however, safer to use because, as a clause introduced by for (which we will call a 'forclause') has a more restricted use than a clause introduced by because:
1 A for-clause cannot precede the verb which it explains:
Because it was wet he took a taxi. (for is not possible.)
2 A for-clause cannot be preceded by not, but or any conjunction:
He stole, not because he wanted the money but because he liked stealing. (for not
possible)
3 A for-clause cannot be used in answer to a question:
Why did you do it? ~ I did it because I was angry. (for not possible)
A Practical English Grammar
206
4 A for-clause cannot be a mere repetition of what has been already stated, but always
includes some new piece of information:
He spoke in French. She was angry because he had spoken in
French, (for is not possible.) But She was angry, for she didn 't know French. (Here for is
correct;
because is also possible.)
The reason for these restrictions is that a for-clause does not tell us why a certain action was
performed, buE merely presents a piece of additional information which helps to explain it.
Some examples of for-clauses:
The days were- short, for it was now December. He took the food eagerly, for he had eaten
nothing since dawn. When I saw her in the river I was frightened- For at that point the
currents were dangerous.
In speech a short pause is usually made before a for-clause and in written English this place
is usually marked by a comma, and sometimes, as in the last example above, by a full stop.
because could be used in the above sentences also, though for is better.
331
when, while, as used to express time
A
1
when is used, with simple tenses:
When one action occurs at the same time as another or in the span of another:
When it is wet the buses are crowded.
When we lived in town we often went to the theatre.
2 When one action follows another:
When she pressed the button the lift stopped.
B
as is used:
When the second action occurs before the first is finished:
As / left the house I remembered the key.
This implies that I remembered the key before I had completed the action of leaving the
house; I was probabiy still in the doorway. While I was leaving would have the same meaning
here, but When I left would give the impression that the act of leaving was complete and the
door shut behind me.
2 For parallel actions: He sang as he worked.
3 For parallel development:
As the sun rose the fog dispersed.
As it grew darker if became colder = The darker it grew, the colder it became.
As she came to know him better she relied on him more.
As he became more competent he was given more interesting work.
If we used when here we would lose all idea of simultaneous progression or development.
4 To mean while (= during the time that):
As he stood there he saw two men enter the bar.
But there is no particular advantage in using as here, and while is safer.
332
B
D
as meaning when/while or because/since
A Restricted use of as (= when/while)
as here is chiefly used with verbs indicating action or development. It is not normally used
with the type of verb listed in 168, except when there is an idea of development, as in B3
above. Nor is it normally used with verbs such as live, stay, remain.
as used with the above verbs/types of verb normally means because/since;
As he was tired . . . = Because he was tired . . .
As he knew her well. . . = Because he knew her well. . .
As it contains alcohol. . . = Since/Because it contains alcohol. . .
As he lives near here . . . = Since/Because he lives . . .
C With most verbs, as can be used with either meaning:
As/While he shaved he thought about the coming interview.
As/Because he shaved with a blunt razor he didn't make a very good job of it.
If in doubt here, students should use while or because.
as + noun can mean either when/while or because/since:
A Practical English Grammar
207
As a student he had known great poverty = When he was a student he had known
great poverty.
As a student he gets/got in for half price = Because he is/was a student he gets/got in . . .
As a married man, he has to think of his family = Because/Since he is a married man . . .
as meaning when/while here is usually followed by a perfect tense.
as meaning because/since can be followed by any tense.
as, when, while used to mean although, but, seeing that
as can mean though/although but only in the combination adjective + as + subject + to
be/to seem/to appear:
Tired as he was he offered to carry her = Though he was tired he offered to carry her.
Strong as he was, he couldn't lift it.
while can mean but and is used to emphasize a contrast:
'At sea' means 'on a ship', while 'at the sea' means 'at the seaside'.
Some people waste food while others haven't enough.
while can also mean although and is then usually placed at the beginning of a sentence:
While I sympathize with your point of view I cannot accept it.
when can mean seeing that/although. It is therefore very similar to while, but is chiefly used
to introduce a statement which makes another action seem unreasonable. It is often, though
not necessarily, used with a question:
How can you expect your children to be truthful when you yourself tell lies?
It's not fair to expect her to do all the cooking when she has had no training or
experience.
Do not confuse when and if
When he comes implies that we are sure he will come. If he comes implies that we don't
know whether he will come or not. (For if in conditional sentences, see chapter 21.)
A Practical English Grammar
208
33
334
Purpose
Purpose is normally expressed by the infinitive
Purpose can be expressed by:
A The infinitive alone:
He went to France to learn French. They stopped to ask the way. When there is a personal
object of the main verb, the infinitive may refer to this and not to the subject:
He sen! Tom to the shop Co buy bread. (Tom was to buy the bread.)
E in order or so as + infinitive
in order + infinitive can imply either that the subject wants to perform
the action or that he wants it to happen.
so as + infinitive implies only that the subject wants the action to
happen, in order is, therefore, the more generally useful,
in order or so as are used:
1 With a negative infinitive to express a negative purpose:
He left his gun outside in order/so as not to frighten us.
2 With to be and to have:
She left work early in order/so as to be at home when he arrived. She gave up work in
order/so as to have more time with the children.
3 When the purpose is less immediate:
He is studying mathematics in order/so as to qualify/or a better job. She learnt typing in order
to help her husband with his work.
4 Sometimes in longer sentences, to emphasize that the infinitive indicates purpose:
He was accused of misrepresenting the facts in order/so as to make
the scheme seem feasible.
He took much more trouble over the figures than he usually did in
order/so as to show his new boss what a careful worker he was. (But in order/so as is not
essential and is often omitted.) When the infinitive of purpose precedes the main verb, in
order/so as may be placed first:
In order/So as to show his boss what a careful worker he was, he
took extra trouble over the figures. (But here also in order/so as may be omitted.)
5 When there is a personal object but we want the infinitive to refer unambiguously to the
subject:
He sent his sons to a boarding school in order/so as to have some peace. (He, not his sons,
was going to have some peace.) Compare with:
He sent his sons to a boarding school to team to live in a community.
(Not he but his sons were to learn to live in a community.) But this in order/so as construction
is not very common. It is more usual to say:
He sent his sons to a boarding school because he wanted to have some
peace.
in order (but not so as), used to emphasize that the subject really had
this purpose in mind:
He bought diamonds when he was in Amsterdam! ~ That wasn't surprising. He went to
Amsterdam in order to buy diamonds, (not for any other purpose)
We could also, however, express^this idea by stressing the first verb
and omitting in order: He 'went to Amsterdam to buy diamonds.
Infinitive + noun + preposition:
/ want a case to keep my records in.
I need a corkscrew to open this bottle with. Note that here we are talking about a particular
purpose. For a general purpose we use for + gerund:
This is a case for keeping records in.
A corkscrew is a tool for opening bottles.
335
Infinitives of purpose after go and come
It is not normal to use an infinitive of purpose after the imperative or infinitive of go and come.
Instead of Go to find Bill we normally say Go and find Bill; and instead of Come to talk to Ann
A Practical English Grammar
209
we say Come and talk to Ann; i.e. instead of an imperative + an infinitive of purpose we use
two imperatives Joined by and. And instead of:
I must go to help my mother and I'll come to check the accounts we normally say:
I must go and help my mother and I'll come and check the accounts. i.e. instead of an
infinitive + an infinitive of purpose we use two infinitives joined by and (see 246 I).
But when go and come are used as gerunds or in any present or past tense they take the
ordinary infinitive of purpose:
I'm thinking of going to look for mushrooms.
I went to help my mother.
I've come to check the accounts.
I didn 't come to talk to Bill; I came to talk to you.
336
Clauses of purpose
Clauses are necessary when the person to whom the purpose refers is different from the
subject of the main clause, or when the original subject is stated again:
Ships carry lifeboats so that the crew can escape if the ship sinks. This knife has a cork
handle so that if will float if it falls overboard.
A Purpose clauses are usually expressed by so that + will/would or can/could + infinitive.
can/could is used here to mean will/would be able to:
They make £10 notes a different size from £5 notes so that blind people can (= wil! be able
to) tell the difference between them. They wrote the notices in several languages so that
foreign tourists could (= would be able to) understand them. can and will are used when the
main verb is in a present, present perfect or future tense; could and would are used when the
main verb is in a past tense. See the examples above and also:
/ light/am lighting/have lit/will light the fire so that the house will be warm when they return.
I have given/will give him a key so that he can get into the house whenever he likes.
I pinned the note to his pillow so that he would be sure to see it. There were telephone points
every kilometre so that drivers whose cars had broken down would be able to/could summon
help. If that is omitted from purpose clauses with can/could, the idea of purpose may
disappear. The sentence He took my shoes so that I couldn't leave the house would normally
mean 'He took my shoes to prevent my leaving etc.' but He took my shoes, so I couldn 't
leave the house would normally mean 'He took my shoes; therefore I wasn't able to leave'.
B Purpose clauses can also be formed by so that/in order that/that + may/might or shall/should
+ infinitive. These are merely more formal constructions than those shown in A above. There is
no difference in meaning.
Note that so that can be followed by will/can/may/shall or their past forms, while in order that
or that are limited to may/shall or their past forms.
that used alone is rarely found except in very dramatic speech or writing, or in poetry.
The rules about sequences of tenses are the same as those shown above. The following are
very formal:
We carved their names on the stone so that/in order that future generations should/might
know what they had done. These men risk their lives so that/in order that we may live more
safely.
may in the present tense is much more comman than shall, which is rarely used. In the past
tense either might or should can be used. The student should know the above forms but
should not normally need to use them, as for all ordinary purposes so that + can/could or
will/would should be quite sufficient.
C Negative purpose clauses are made by putting the auxiliary verb (usually will/would or
should) into the negative:
He wrote his diary in code so that his wife wouldn 't be able to read it-He changed his name
so that his new friends wouldn Vshouidn 't know that he had once been accused of murder.
Criminals usually telephone from public telephone boxes so that the police won't be able to
trace the call.
Negative purpose clauses can, however, usually be replaced bv to prevent + noun/pronoun +
gerund, or to avoid + gerundHe dyed his beard so that we shouldn 't recognize him/to prevent us recognizing him/to avoid
being recognized, (passive gerund) She always shopped in another village so that she
A Practical English Grammar
210
wouldn 'i meet her own neighbours/to avoid meeting her own neighbours. These infinitive
phrases are preferred to negative purpose clauses.
337
in case and lest
A
in case
in case + subject + verb can follow a statement or command:
I don't let him climb trees in case he tears his trousers. This first action is usually a
preparation for, or a precaution against, the action in the if-clause, which is a possible future
action.
in case + present tense normally has the meaning 'because this may happen/because
perhaps this will happen' or 'for fear that this may happen'in case + past tense normally means 'because this might happen/because perhaps this
would happen' or 'for fear that this would happen'.
Both present tense and past tense here can be replaced by should + infinitive. should used
here would express greater improbability, but this construction is not very usual,
B
Tenses with in case
Main verb
Future
present tense or Present
+ in case +
„ .. _( ^
should + infinitive Present perfect J
Conditional
1
( .,
past tense or
Past tense
+ in case +
n. ,
should + infinitive
Past perfect ;
I'll make a cake in case someone drops in at the weekend.
I carry a spare wheel in case I have/should have a puncture.
I always keep candles in the house in case there is a power cut.
I always kept candies in the house in case there was a power cut. (See also 227.)
lest means 'for fear that' and is followed by should:
He doesn't/didn't dare to leave the house lest someone should recognize him.
lest is rarely found except in formal written English.
A Practical English Grammar
211
34 Clauses of reason, result, concession, comparison, time
338 Clauses of reason and result/cause
A
B
C
339
A
B
340
Except for the type shown in A2 and A3 below, both these clauses can be introduced by as or
because. But as is safer for clauses of reason (see A below) and because is safer for clauses
of result/cause (see B).
Clauses of reason
1 Introduced by as/because/since;
We camped there as/because/since it was too dark to go on. As/Because/Since it was too
dark to go on, we camped there.
2 'in view of the fact that' can be expressed by as/since/seeing that, but not because:
As/Since/Seeing that you are here, you may as well give me a hand. As/Since/Seeing that
Tom knows French, he 'd better do the talking.
3 Where as/since/seeing that refers to a statement previously made or understood, it is
replaceable by if:
As/Since/Seeing that/If you don't like Bill, why did you invite him? Note the use of if so:
I hope Bill won't come. ~ Ifso (= If you hope he won't come), why did you invite him? For if +
so/not, see 347.
Clauses of result/cause (see also 339) are introduced by because or as:
The fuse blew because we had overloaded the circuit.
He was angry because we were late.
As it/rose hard that night there was ice everywhere next day.
As the soup was very salty we were thirsty afterwards.
These combinations could also be expressed by two main clauses Joined by so:
It was too dark to go on, so we camped there.
You are here, so you may as well give me a hand.
It froze hard that night, so there was ice everywhere next day.
therefore can also be used. but is normal only in fairly formal
sentences:
The Finnish delegate has not yet arrived. We are therefore postponing/We have therefore
decided to postpone/Therefore we are postponing the meeting. (Notice possible positions of
therefore.)
Clauses of result with such/so . . . that
such is an adjective and is used before an adjective + noun:
They had such a fierce dog that no one dared to go near their house. He spoke for such a
long time that people began to fall asleep.
so is an adverb and is used before adverbs and with adjectives which
are not followed by their nouns:
The snow fell so fast that our footsteps were soon covered up. His speech went on for so long
thai people began to fall asleep. Their dog was so fierce that no one dared come near it.
But such is never used before much and many. so so is used even
when much and many are followed by nouns:
There was so much dust that we couldn't see what was happening. So many people
complained that they took the programme off.
C Note that such + a + adjective + noun is replaceable by so + adjective + a + noun, so that
'such a good man" is replaceable by 'so good a man'. This is only possible when a noun is
preceded by a/an. It is not a very usual form but may be met in literature. Sometimes for
emphasis so is placed at the beginning of the sentence. It is then followed by the inverted form
of the verb (see 45):
So terrible was the storm that whole roofs were ripped off.
Clauses of concession
These are introduced by although, though (see 327, 329), even though, even if, no matter,
however (see 85) and sometimes by whatever, as is also possible, but only in the adjective +
as + be construction.
A Practical English Grammar
212
Although/Though/Even though/Even if you don't like him you can still be polite.
No matter what you do, don't touch this switch.
However rich people are, they always seem anxious to make more money.
However carefully you drive, you will probably have an accident eventually.
Whatever you do, don't tell him that I told you this.
Patient as he was, he had no intention of waiting for three hours.
(though he was patient) may + infinitive can be used in hypothetical cases:
However frightened you may tie yourself, you must remain
outwardly calm. may can also imply 'I accept the fact that':
But he's your brother! ~ He may be my brother but I don't trust him!
But may used in this way is part of another main clause, not a clause of concession.
should + infinitive can be used after even if just as it can after if in conditional sentences, to
express the idea that the action expressed by the infinitive is not very likely to take place;
Even if he should find out he won't do anything about it.
341
Clauses of comparison
A
Comparisons with adjectives and finite verbs (see also 20-2);
It's darker today than it was yesterday.
He doesn'I Ray as much tax as we do/as us.
He spends more than he earns.
Note that + adjective, a colloquial form:
Will it cost £1W? ~ No, it won't cost as much as (ail) that. It won't
be (alt) that expensive. (It won't be as expensive as that.) that + adjective is sometimes used
colloquially to mean very.
B Comparisons with adverbs and finite verbs (see also 31-4):
He didn't play as well as we expected/as well as you (did). He sings more loudly than anyone
I've ever heard/than anyone else (does). You work harder than he does/than him/than I did at
your age.
C
Comparisons with adjectives and infinitives or gerunds
Often either can be used, but the infinitive is more usual for a particular action, and gerunds
are more usual for genera! statements (see also E below):
It's sometimes as cheap to buy a new one as (it is) (to) repair the old one.
Buying a new one is sometimes as cheap as repairing the old one.
He found that lying on She beach was just as boring as sitting in his office or
He found lying on the beach just as boring as sitting etc. (The infinitive would be less
usual here.)
He thinks it (is) safer to drive himself than (to) let me drive.
He thinks that driving himself is safer than letting me drive.
It will soon be more difficult to get a visa than it is now.
Getting a visa will soon be more difficult than it is now.
D In comparisons of the type shown in C above, if we have an infinitive before as/than we will
usually have an infinitive (not a gerund) after it, Similarly, if we have a gerund before as/than we
will normally have a gerund (not an infinitive) after it. See examples above, But if we have a
finite verb + this/that/which before as/than we can have a gerund after it. An infinitive is possible
but would be much less usual:
I’ll deliver it by hand; this will be cheaper than posting it.
He cleaned his shoes, which was better than doing nothing.
E Infinitives are used with would rather/sooner (see 297-8):
Most people would rather work than starve. I would resign rather than accept him as a
partner.
342
Time clauses
A Practical English Grammar
213
A These are introduced by conjunctions of time such as:
after
immediately
till/until
as
no sooner . . . than when
as soon as
since
whenever
before
the sooner
while
hardly . . . when
They can also be introduced by the minute, the moment.
For examples with when, as, while, see 331-3.
For examples with before, see 195 B.
B Remember that we do not use a future form, or a conditional tense, in a time clause.
Each of the following future forms becomes a present tense when we put it in a time clauseFuture simple:
You 'II be back soon. I'll stay till then. = I'll stay till you get back.
be going to:
The parachutist is going to jump. Soon after he jumps his parachute
will open.
The present continuous, used as a future form, and the future continuous:
He's arriving/He 'II be arriving at six but
When he arrives he'll tell us all about the match.
Before he arrives I'll give the children their tea. But the continuous tense can, of course, be
used in time clauses when it indicates a continuous action:
Peter and John will be playing/are playing/are going to play tennis
tonight. While they are playing (during this time) we 'II go to the
beach.
The future perfect changes to the present perfect, and the future perfect continuous changes
to the present perfect continuous:
I'll have finished in the bathroom in a few minutes.
The moment/As soon as I have finished I'll give you a call.
A conditional tense changes to a past tense:
We knew that he would arrive/would be arriving about six. We knew that till he arrived nothing
would be done.
But when when introduces a noun clause it can be followed by a future or conditional tense:
He said. 'When will the train get in?' =
He asked when the train would get in.
C
D
E
Clauses with since (see also 187-8)
In clauses since is usually followed by perfect tenses (but see 188);
They 've moved house twice since they got married or Since they got married, they 've moved
house twice. He said he'd lived in a tent since his house burnt down. It's ages since I
sailed/have sailed a boat. I haven't sailed a boat since I left college.
Clauses with after
In clauses after is often followed by perfect tenses:
After/When he had rung off I remembered. . .
After/When you 've finished with it, hang it up.
hardly/scarcely . . . when, no sooner . . . than (see also 45) The performance had hardly
begun when the lights went out or Hardly had the performance begun when the lights went
out.
scarcely could replace hardly here but is less usual,
He had no sooner drunk the coffee than he began to feel drowsy or No sooner had he drunk
the coffee than he began to feel drowsy. He no sooner earns any money than he spends it or
Immediately he earns any money he spends it. (more colloquial)
Note also the sooner . . . the sooner:
The sooner we start, the sooner we'll be there.
A Practical English Grammar
214
35
Noun clauses
Noun clauses are very often introduced by that and are therefore often called that-clauses.
However, not all noun clauses are that-clauses.
343
Noun clauses (that-clauses) as subject of a sentence
A Sentences with noun clause subjects usually begin with it (see 67 D):
It is disappointing that Tom can't come.
'that Tom can't come' is the subject.
B
The usual construction is it + be/seem + adjective + noun clause (see 26-7):
It’s splendid that you passed your exam.
It's strange that there are no lights on.
Some adjectives require or can take that . . . should (see 236):
It is essential that everybody knows/should know what to do.
An alternative construction is it + be/seem + a + noun + noun clause. Nouns that can be
used here include mercy, miracle, nuisance, pity, shame, relief, wonder, a good thing is
also possible.
It's a great pity (that) they didn't get married.
It's a wonder (that) you weren't killed.
It's a good thing (thai) you were insured.
I that-clauses after certain adjectives/participles
The construction here is subject + be + adjective/past participle + noun clause:
I am delighted that you passed your exam.
This construction can be used with
(a) adjectives expressing emotion: glad, pleased, relieved, sorry (see 26 P)
(b) adjectives/participles expressing anxiety, confidence etc.: afraid, anxious, aware,
certain, confident, conscious, convinced (see 27). anxious requires that . . . should.
I'm afraid that I can't come till next week.
Are you certain that this is the right road?
345
that-clauses after certain nouns
A that-clause can be placed after a large number of abstract nouns. The most useful of these
are: allegation, announcement, belief, discovery, fact, fear, guarantee, hope,
knowledge, promise, proposal, report, rumour, suggestion, suspicion, proposal and
suggestion require that . . . should,
The announcement that a new airport was to be built nearby aroused immediate opposition.
The proposal/suggestion that shops should open on Sundays led to a heated
discussion.
A report that the area was dangerous was ignored by the residents.
346
Noun clauses as objects of verbs
A that-clauses are possible after a large number of verbs. Some of the most useful are given
below.
acknowledge
find (wh)
recommend
admit
forget (wh)
remark
advise
guarantee
remember (wh)
agree
happen
remind
allege
hear (wh)
request
announce
hope
resolve
appear
imagine (wh)
reveal (wh)
arrange (wh)
imply
say (wh)
ask (wh)
indicate (wh)
see (wh)
assume
inform
seem
assure
insist
show (wh)
A Practical English Grammar
215
beg
know (wh)
state (wh)
believe (wh)
leam
stipulate
command
make out (= state) suggest (wh)
confess
mean
suppose
consider (wh)
notice (wh)
teach
declare
observe
tell (wh)
decide (wh)
occur to + object
think (wh)
demand
order
threaten
demonstrate
perceive
turn out
determine
presume
understand (wh)
discover
pretend
urge
doubt
promise
vow
estimate (wh)
propose
warn
expect
prove (wh)
wish
fear
realize (wh)
wonder (wh)
feel
recognize
and other verbs of communication, e.g. complain, deny, explain etc.
(see 316 C).
wh: see E below.
C
347
2
Examples
They alleged/made out that they had been unjustly dismissed. He assumes that we agree
with him. I can prove that she did it.
Most of the above verbs can also take another construction (see chapters 23-6). Note
however that a verb + that-ctause does not necessarily have the same meaning as the same
verb + infinitive/gerund/present participle: He saw her answering the letters means 'He
watched her doing this' but He saw that she answered the letters could mean either 'He
noticed that she did this' or 'He made sure by supervision that she did this'.
appear, happen, occur, seem, turn out require it as subject:
It appears/seems that we have come on the wrong day.
If occurred to me that he might be lying.
It turned out that nobody remembered the address.
D that + subject + should can be used after agree, arrange, be anxious, beg, command, decide,
demand, determine, be determined, order, resolve and urge instead of an infinitive construction,
and after insist and suggest instead of a gerund:
They agreed/decided that a statue should be put up.
He urged that the matter should go to arbitration.
He suggested that a reward should be offered. (See 235, 302 E.)
Verbs in section A marked '(wh)' can also be followed by noun clauses beginning with wh-words:
what, when, where, who, why, or with how:
He asked where he was to go.
They'll believe whatever you tell them.
I forget who told me this.
Have you heard how he is getting on?
I can't think why he left his wife.
I wonder when he will pay me back.
so and not representing a that-clause
A After believe, expect, suppose, think and after it appears/seems:
Will Tom be at the party? -- I expect so/suppose so/think so = I think he will.
For the negative we use:
A negative verb with so:
Will the scheme be a success? ~ I don't believe so/expect so/suppose so/think so.
Are they making good progress? ~ It doesn't seem so.
Or an affirmative verb with not:
It won't take long, will it? ~ No, I suppose not or
I don't suppose so.
The plane didn't land in Calcutta, did it? ~ I believe not or
I don't believe so.
A Practical English Grammar
216
B
so and not can be used similarly after hope and be afraid (= be sorry to say):
Is Peter coming with us? ~ I hope so.
Will you have to Ray duly on this? ~ I'm afraid so.
The negative here is made with an affirmative verb + not:
Have you got a work permit? ~ I'm afraid not.
C
so and not can be used after say and tell + object:
How do you know there is going to be a demonstration? ~ Jack said so/Jack told me so.
I told you so! can mean 'I told you that this was the case/that this would happen'. This usually
annoys the person addressed. For tell the only negative form is negative verb + so:
Tom didn't tell me so.
For say there are two negative forms, but the meaning is not the same:
Tom didn't say so = Tom didn't say that there would be a demonstration.
Tom said not = Tom said there wouldn't be a demonstration.
D
if + so/not
so/not after if can replace a previously mentioned/understood subject + verb:
Will you be staying another night? If so (= If you are), we can give you a better room. If not (= If you
aren't), could you be out of your room by 12:00?
if so/not here usually represents a clause of condition as shown above, but for if so, see also
338 A.
A Practical English Grammar
217
36
348
Numerals, dates, and weights and measures
Cardinal numbers (adjectives and pronouns)
1 one
2 two
3 three
4 four
5 five
6 six
7 sewn
8 eight
9 nine
10 ten
11 eleven
12 twelve
13 thirteen
14 fourteen
15 fifteen
16 sixteen
17 seventeen
18 eighteen
19 nineteen
20 twenty
400 four hundred
5,000 five thousand
21 twenty-one
22 twenty-two
23 twenty-three
24 twenty-four
25 twenty-five
26 twenty-six
27 twenty-seven
28 twenty-eight
29 twenty-nine
30 thirty
31 thirty-one etc.
40 forty
50 fifty
60 sixty
70 seventy
80 eighty
90 ninety
100 a hundred
1,000 a thousand
1,000,000 a million
140 a/one hundred and forty
1,006 a/one thousand and six
260,127 two hundred and sixty thousand, one hundred and twenty-seven
349
Points to notice about cardinal numbers
A
When writing in words, or reading, a number composed of three or more figures we place and
before the word denoting tens or units:
713 seven hundred and thirteen
5,102 five thousand, one hundred and two but
6,100 six thousand, one hundred (no tens or units) and is used similarly with hundreds of
thousands:
320,410 three hundred and twenty thousand, four hundred and ten and hundreds of millions:
303.000,000 three hundred and three million
a is more usual than one before hundred, thousand, million etc, when these numbers stand
alone or begin an expression:
100 a hundred 1,000 a thousand
100,000 a hundred thousand
We can also say a hundred and one, a hundred and two etc. up to a hundred and ninety-nine
and a thousand and one etc. up to a thousand and ninety-nine. Otherwise we use one, not a
(see above). So:
1,040 a/one thousand and forty but
1,140 one thousand, one hundred and forty
B
C The words hundred, thousand, million and dozen. when used of a definite number, are never
made plural:
six hundred men ten thousand pounds two dozen eggs If however, these words are used
loosely, merely to convey the idea of a large number, they must be made plural:
hundreds of people thousands of birds dozens of times Note also that in this case the
preposition of is placed after hundreds, thousands etc.
of is not used with definite numbers except before the/them/ these/those or possessives:
so: of the blue ones ten of these four of Tom's brothers
D Numbers composed of four or more figures are divided into groups of three as shown above.
Decimals are indicated by '•', which is read 'point':
10.92 ten point nine two
A zero after a decimal point is usually read 'nought':
8.04 eight point nought four
But 'o' and 'zero' would also be possible.
350
Ordinal numbers (adjectives and pronouns)
first
second
third
fourth
eleventh
twelfth
thirteenth
fourteenth
A Practical English Grammar
twenty-first
twenty-second
twenty-third
twenty-fourth
thirty-first etc.
fortieth
fiftieth
sixtieth
218
fifth
sixth
seventh
eighth
ninth
tenth
fifteenth
sixteenth
seventeenth
eighteenth
nineteenth
twentieth
twenty-fifth
twenty-sixth
twenty-seventh
twenty-eighth
twenty-ninth
thirtieth
seventieth
eightieth
ninetieth
hundredth
thousandth
millionth
When writing in words or reading fractions other than ½ (a half) and ¼ (a quarter), we use a
combination of cardinal and ordinal numbers:
1/5 a/one fifth 1/10 a/one tenth
(a is more usual than one)
3/5 three fifths 7/10 seven tenths
A whole number + a fraction can be followed directly by a plural noun:
2 ¼ miles == two and a quarter miles
½ (half) can be followed directly by a noun but other fractions require of before a noun:
half a second but a quarter of a second (See also 2 E.)
half + of can also be used, but the of is optional:
Half (of) my earnings go in tax.
351
Points to notice about ordinal numbers
A Notice the irregular spelling of fifth, eighth, ninth and twelfth.
B When ordinal numbers are expressed in figures the last two letters of the written word must
be added (except in dates):
first = 1st
twenty-first = 21st
nd
second = 2
forty-second = 42nd
rd
third = 3
sixty-third = 63rd
fourth = 4th
eightieth = 80th
C In compound ordinal numbers the rule about and is the same as for compound cardinal
numbers: 101st = the hundred and first.
The article the normally precedes ordinal numbers:
the sixtieth day the fortieth visitor
Titles of kings etc. are written in Roman figures:
Charles V James III Elizabeth II
But in spoken English we use the ordinal numbers preceded by the:
Charles the Fifth
James the Third
Elizabeth the Second
352
Dates
The days of the week
Sunday (Sun.)
Monday (Mm.)
Tuesday (Tues.)
Wednesday (Wed.)
Thursday (Thurs.)
Friday (Fri.)
Saturday (Sat.)
B
The months of the year
January (Jan.)
July
February (Feb.) August (Aug.)
March (Mar.)
September (Sept.)
April (Apr.)
October (Oct.)
May
November (Nov.)
June
December (Dec.)
Days and months are always written with capital letters. Dates are expressed by ordinal
numbers, so when speaking we say:
March the tenth, July the fourteenth etc. or the tenth of March etc.
They can, however, be written in a variety of ways; e.g. March the tenth could be written:
March 10 10 March
10th of March
March 10th
10th March
March the 10th
The year
When reading or speaking we use the term hundred but not thousand. The year 1987 would
be read as nineteen hundred and eighty-seven or nineteen eighty-seven.
Years before the Christian era are followed by the letters BC (= Before Christ) and years
dating from the Christian era are occasionally preceded by the letters AD (= Anno Domini, in
A Practical English Grammar
219
the year of the Lord). The former are read in either way: 1500 BC would be read as one
thousand five hundred BC or fifteen hundred BC.
353
Weights, length and liquid measure
A
Weights
The English weights table is as follows:
IS ounces (oz.) = 1 pound (Ib.)
14 Rounds
= 1 stow (st.)
8 stone
= 1 hundredweight (cict.)
20 hundredweight = 1 ton
1 pound
== 0-454 kilogram (kg) 2-2 pounds
= 1 kilogram 2.204-6 tbs
metric tonne
Plurals
ounce, pound and ton can take a in the plural when they are used as
nouns, stone and hundredweight do not take s: e.g. we say six
Round of sugar or six pounds of sugar, but ten hundredweight of coal has
no alternative.
When used in compound adjectives these terms never take a:
a ten-ton lorry kilo or kilogram usually take s in the plural when used as nouns:
two kilos of apples or two kilograms of apples
=1
B
Length
The English table of length is as follows:
12 inches (in.) = 1 foot (ft.)
3 feet
= 1 yard (yd.)
1,760 yards
= 1 mile (m.)
1 inch
= 2.54 centimetres (cm)
1 yard
= 0.914 metre (m)
1 mile
= 1.609 kilometres (km)
Plurals
When there is more than one inch/mite/centimetre we normally use the
plural form of these words:
one inch, ten inches one mile, four miles
one centimetre, five centimetres
When there is more than one foot we can use either foot or feet. feet is the more usual when
measuring heights. We can say;
six foot tall or six feet tall two foot long or two feet long When used in compound adjectives
the above forms never take the plural form: a two-mile walk, a six-inch ruler.
C
Liquid measure
2 pints (Rt.) = 1 quart (qt.)
4 quarts
= 1 gallon (gal.)
1 pint = 0.568 litre (I)
1 gallon = 4.55 litres
D Traditionally British measurements have been made in ounces, inches, pints etc. but there is
now a gradual move towards the metric system.
A Practical English Grammar
220
37
Spelling rules
For noun plurals, see also 12. For verb forms, see also 165, 172, 175.
354
Introduction
Vowels are: a e i o u
Consonants are: b c d f g h j k l m n p q r s t v w x y z
A suffix is a group of letters added to the end of a word:
beauty, beautiful (ful is the suffix.)
355
A
B
D
356
Doubling the consonant
Words of one syllable having one vowel and ending in a single consonant double the
consonant before a suffix beginning with a vowel:
hit + ing = hitting but keep, keeping (two vowels)
knit + ed = knitted
help, helped (two consonants)
run + er = runner
love, lover (ending in a vowel) qu here is considered as one
consonant: quit, quitting. When the final consonant is w, x or y it does not double:
row + ed -= rowed box + ing = boxing
Two- or three-syllable words ending in a single consonant following a single vowel double the
final consonant when the stress falls on the last syllable. (The stressed syllable is in bold
type.)
acquit + ed = acquitted but murmur + ed = murmured begin + er -= beginner
answer +
er = answerer deter + ed == deterred
orbit + ing = orbiting recur + ing = recurring
focus + ed, however, can be spelt focused orfocussed and bias + ed can
be spelt biased or biassed.
C The final consonant of handicap, kidnap, worship is also doubled:
handicap, handicapped worship, worshipped kidnap, kidnapped
Words ending in 1 following a single vowel or two vowels pronounced
separately usually double the 1:
appal, appalled duel, duellist
repel, repellent cruel, cruelly
model, modelling
quarrel, quarrelling dial, dialled
refuel, refuelled
signal, signalled distil, distiller
Omission of a final e
A Words ending in e following a consonant drop the e before a suffix beginning with a vowel:
believe + er = believer
love + ing = losing
move + able = movable
But riye and singe keep their final e before ing to avoid confusion with die and sing:
dye, dyeing singe, singeing age keeps its e before ing except in American English:
age, ageing
likable can also be spelt likeable. Words ending in ce or ge sometimes retain the e. See 357.
B A final e is retained before a suffix beginning with a consonant:
engage, engagement fortunate, fortunately
hope. hopeful immediate, immediately
sincere, sincerely But the e m able/ible is dropped in the adverb form:
comfortable, comfortably incredible, incredibly The final e is also dropped in the following
words:
argue, argument due, duly
judge, judgement or judgment true, truly
whole, wholly (notice the double 1 here)
C Words ending in ee do not drop an e before a suffix:
agree, agreed, agreeing, agreement foresee, foreseeing, foreseeable
357
Words ending in ce and ge
A Practical English Grammar
221
A
358
Words ending in ce or ge retain the e before a suffix beginning with a, o or u:
courage, courageous
peace, peaceful
manage, manageable
replace, replaceable
outrage, outrageous
trace, traceable
This is done to avoid changes in pronunciation, because c and g are generally pronounced
soft before e and i, but hard before a, o or u.
B Words ending in ce change the e to i before ous:
grace, gracious
space, spacious
malice, malicious
vice, vicious
The suffix ful
When full is added to a word the second l is dropped:
beauty + full = beautiful (but note adverb form beautifully)
use + full = useful (but note adverb form usefully)
If the word to which the suffix is added ends in ll the second I is dropped here also: skill + full
= skilful.
Note full + fill = fulfil.
359
Words ending in y
Words ending in y following a consonant change the y to i before any suffix except ing:
carry + ed = earned
but
carry + ing = carrying
happy + !y = happily
hurry + ing = hurrying
sunny + er = sunnier y following a vowel does not change:
obey + ed = obeyed play + er = player For plural forms of nouns, see 12.
360
ie and ei
The normal rule is that i comes before e except after c:
believe, sieve but deceive, receipt There are however the following exceptions:
beige
feint
heir
reign
their
counterfeit foreign inveigh
rein
veil
deign
forfeit
inveigle
seize
vein
eiderdown freight
leisure
skein weigh
eight
heifer
neigh
sleigh weight
either
height
neighbour sleight weir
feign
heinous neither
surfeit weird
361
Hyphens
A Compound words are formed by linking two or more words to make one unit. We can write
the compound:
(a) as one word: bystander, hairdresser, teacup
(b) as two or more words: amusement arcade, post office
(c) with a hyphen: launching-pad, lay-by, tooth-brush
It is impossible in most cases to give a firm rule on when a hyphen should be used. When a
compound has become familiar through constant use, the hyphen can be omitted: layby,
toothbrush. This, however, does not always happen and a native English writer is quite
capable of writing toothbrush, tooth brush or tooth-brush at different times.
B
If the compound is formed of monosyllables, it is more likely to be written as one word. In
cases of doubt it is better to omit hyphens or consult a modem dictionary.
Hyphens are necessary;
(a) when pronunciation or meaning might be unclear without them:
co-operate
re-cover (= cover again)
(b) when words form a compound in a particular sentence:
a do-it-yourself shop
A Practical English Grammar
222
a go-as-you-please railway ticket
(c) in adjective phrases dealing with age, size, weight and duration of time:
a five-year-old child
a ten-ton vehicle
a six-foot wall
a five-minute interval
Note that the compound is not in the plural form: no s. Adverb/participle compounds used as
adjectives are commonly hyphenated, especially when there is a danger of
misunderstanding:
low-flying aircraft
quick-dissolving sugar
C
Hyphens are used in a temporary way to divide a word at the end of a line. The
division must be made at a natural break in the word, i.e. between syllables;
dis-cauraged
look-ing
inter-val
A monosyllable should not be divided.
31
Indirect speech
307
Direct and indirect (or reported) speech
There are two ways of relating what a person has said: direct and indirect.
In direct speech we repeat the original speaker's exact words:
He said, 'I have lost my umbrella.'
Remarks thus repeated are placed between inverted commas, and a ' comma or colon is
placed immediately before the remark. Direct speech
is found in conversations in books, in plays, and in quotations.
In indirect speech we give the exact meaning of a remark or a speech, without necessarily
using the speaker's exact words:
He said (that) he had lost his umbrella.
There is no comma after say in indirect speech. that can usually be omitted after say and tell
+ object. But it should be kept after other verbs: complain, explain, object, point out,
protest etc. Indirect speech is normally used when conversation is reported verbally, though
direct speech is sometimes employed here to give a more dramatic effect.
When we turn direct speech into indirect, some changes are usually necessary. These are
most easily studied by considering statements, questions, and commands separately.
308
Statements in indirect speech: tense changes necessary
A Indirect speech can be introduced by a verb in a present tense: He says that. . . This is usual
when we are:
(a) reporting a conversation that is still going on
(b) reading a letter and reporting what it says
(c) reading instructions and reporting them
(d) reporting a statement that someone makes very often, e.g. Tom
says that he'll never get married.
When the introductory verb is in a present, present perfect or future
tense we can report the direct speech without any change of tense:
PAUL (phoning from the station): I'm trying to get a taxi.
ANN (to Mary, who is standing beside her): Paul says he is trying to
get a taxi.
B But indirect speech is usually introduced by a verb in the past tense. Verbs in the direct
speech have then to be changed into a corresponding past tense. The changes are shown in
the following table. (The that has been omitted in the last five examples.)
Direct speech
Simple present
‘I never ml meat.' he explained
Present continuous
'I'm waiting/or Ann.' he said
Present perfect
A Practical English Grammar
Indirect speech
Simple past
= He explained that he never ate meat.
Past continuous
= He said (thai) he was waiting for Ann.
Past perfect
223
I have found a flat,' he said
Present perfect continuous
Hesaid, 'I've been waiting forages'
Simple past
I took it home with me,' she said
Future
He said, I will/shall be in Paris m
Monday'
Future continuous
'I will/shall be using the car myself
on the 24th,' she said
But note,
Conditional
I said, 7 would/should like to see it'
= He said (that) he had found a flat.
Past perfect continuous
= He said he had been waiting for ages.
Past perfect
= She said she had taken it home with her.
Conditional
= He said he would be in Paris cm
Monday.
Conditional continuous
= She said she'd be using the car herself
on the 24th.
Conditional
= I said I would/should like to see it.
(No tense change. See also 227.)
C
Note on I/we shall/should
'I/we shall' normally becomes he/she/they would in indirect speech:
I shall be 21 tomorrow,' said Bill = Bill said he would be 21 the following day. But if the
sentence is reported by the original speaker, 'I/we shall' can become either I/we should or
I/we would, would is the more common.
Similarly 'I/we should' usually becomes he/she/they would in indirect speech:
'If I had the instruction manual I should/would know what to do,'
said Bill =
Bill said that if he had the instructions he would know what to do. But if the sentence is
reported by the original speaker 'I/we should' can either remain unchanged or be reported by
would- See last example in B above.
309
Past tenses sometimes remain unchanged
A In theory the past tense changes to the past perfect, but in spoken English it is often left
unchanged, provided this can be done without causing confusion about the relative times of the
actions. For example, He said. 'I loved her' must become He said he had loved her as
otherwise there would be a change of meaning. But He said, 'Ann arrived on Monday' could be
reported He said Ann arrived/had arrived on Monday.
B The past continuous tense in theory changes to the past perfect continuous but in practice
usually remains unchanged except when it refers to a completed action:
She said, 'We were thinking of selling the house but we have decided
not to' =
She said that they had been thinking of selling the house but had
decided not to. But He said, 'When I saw them they were playing tennis' =
He said that when he saw them they were playing tennis.
C In written English past tenses usually do change to past perfect but there are the following
exceptions:
1 Past/Past continuous tenses in time clauses do not normally change:
He said, 'When we were living/lived in Paris . . .' =
He said that when they were living in Paris . . . The main verb of such sentences can either
remain unchanged or become the past perfect:
He said, 'When we were living/lived in Paris we often saw Paul' =
fie said that when they were living/lived in Paris they often saw/had
often seen Paul.
2 A past tense used to describe a state of affairs which still exists when the speech is reported
remains unchanged:
She said, 'I decided not to buy the house because it was on a main road' = She said that she
had decided not to buy the house because it was on a main road.
310
Unreal past tenses (subjunctives) in indirect speech
A
Unreal past tenses after wish, would rather/sooner and it is time
A Practical English Grammar
224
do not change:
'We wish we didn't have to take exams.' said the children = The children said they
wished they didn't have to take exams.
'Bill wants to go alone,' said Ann, 'but I'd rather he went with a group' = Ann said that
Bill wanted to go alone but that she 'd rather he went with a group.
'It's time we began planning our holidays,' he said = He said that it was time they began
planning their holidays.
B
I/he/she/we/they had better remains unchanged, you had better can remain unchanged or
be reported by advise + object + infinitive (see 120):
'The children had better go to bed early,' said Tom = Tom said that the children had
better go to bed early.
'You'd better not drink the water,' she said = She advised/warned us not to drink the water.
C
Conditional sentences types 2 and 3 remain unchanged (see 229):
'If my children were older I would emigrate,' he said = He said that if his children were older he would
emigrate.
311
C
D
E
F
G
312
A
might, ought to, should, would, used to in indirect statements
A might remains unchanged except when used as a request form:
He said, 'Ann might ring today' = He said that Ann might ring (that day).
But 'You might post these for me' he said = He asked me to post them for him. (See 285 for
requests.)
B ought to/should for obligation or assumption remains unchanged:
'They ought to/should widen this road,' I said = I said that they ought to/should widen the
road. I said,
'I should be back by six' (I assume I will be) = I said I should be back by six.
But you ought to/you should, if used to express advice rather than obligation, can be reported
by advise + object + infinitive, you must can also express advice and be reported similarly.
'You ought to/should/must read the instructions,' said Ann = Ann advised/urged/warned me to
read the instructions.
The advice form 'Ifl were you I should/would . . .' is normally reported by advise + object +
infinitive:
'If I were you I'd wait,'I said = I advised him to waif,
The request form 'I should/would be (very) grateful if you would . . .' is normally reported by
ask + object + infinitive:
'I'd be very grateful if you 'd keep me informed,' he said = He asked me to keep him informed.
would in statements doesn't change. But see 284 for would in requests etc.
used to doesn't change:
'I know the place well because I used to live here,' he explained = He explained thai he knew
the place well because he used to live there.
(For could, see 312; for must, see 325.)
could in indirect statements
(For could interrogative, see 283-4.)
could for ability
1 could for present ability does not change:
'I can't/couldn't stand on my head.' he said = He said he couldn't stand on his head.
2 could for future ability can remain unchanged or be reported by would be able:
He said, 'I could do it tomorrow' = He said he could do it/would be able to do it the next
day.
could in type 2 conditional sentences is reported similarly:
'If I had the tools I could mend it,' he said = He said that if he had the tools he
could/would be able to mend it. would be able here implies that the supposition may be
fulfilled. (Perhaps he'll be able to borrow tools.)
could in type 3 conditional sentences is reported unchanged.
could for past ability can remain unchanged or be reported by had been able:
A Practical English Grammar
225
B
313
‘I could read when I was three.' she boasted = She boasted that she could/had been
able to read when she was three.
could for permission
In type 2 conditional sentences could can remain unchanged or be reported by would be
allowed to:
'If I paid my fine I could walk out of prison today,' he said = He said that if he paid his fine he
could/would be allowed to walk etc.
could in the past can remain unchanged or be reported by was/were allowed to or had been
allowed to:
He said, 'When I was a boy I could stay up as long as I liked' = He said that when he was a
boy he could/was allowed to stay up or He said that as a boy he was/had been allowed etc.
Indirect speech: pronoun and adjective
Pronouns and possessive adjectives usually change from first or second to third person
except when the speaker is reporting his own words:
He said, 'I've forgotten the combination of my safe' = He said that he had forgotten the
combination of his safe.
I said, 'I like my new house' = I said that I liked my new house, (speaker reporting his
own words)
Sometimes a noun must be inserted to avoid ambiguity: Tom said. 'He cane in through the
window' would not normally be reported Tom said he had come in through the window as this
might imply that Tom himself had come in this way; but if we use a noun there can be no
confusion:
Tom said that the man/burglar/cat etc, had come in . . .
Pronoun changes may affect the verb:
He says. 'I know her' = He says he knows her.
He says, '! shall be there' = He says that he will be there.
B this and these
this used in time expressions usually becomes that:
He said, 'She is coming this week' =
He said that she was coming that week. Otherwise this and that used as adjectives usually
change to the:
He said, 'I bought this pearl/these pearls for my mother' =
He said that he had bought the peart/pearls for his mother. this, these used as pronouns can
become it, they/them:
He showed me two bullets. 'I found these embedded in the panelling,'
he said =
He said he had found them embedded in the panelling.
He said, 'We will discuss this tomorrow' = He said that they would discuss it/the waiter
the next day. this, these (adjectives or pronouns), used to indicate choice or to
distinguish some things from others, can become the one(s) near him etc., or the
statement can be reworded:
'I'll have this (one),' he said to me = He said he would have the one near him or
He pointed to/touched/showed me the one he wanted.
314
Expressions of time and place in indirect speech
A
Adverbs and adverbial phrases of time change as follows:
Direct
today
yesterday
the day before yesterday
tomorrow
the day after tomorrow
next week/year etc.
last week/year etc.
A Practical English Grammar
Indirect
that day
the day before
two days before
the next day/the following day
in two days' time
the following week/year etc.
the previous week/year etc.
226
a year etc. ago
a year before/the previous year
'I saw her the day before yesterday,' he said = He said he'd seen her two days before.
'I'll do it tomorrow,' he promised = He promised that he would do it the next day.
'I'm starting the day after tomorrow, mother.' he said = He told his mother that he was
starting in two days' time.
She said, 'My father died a year ago' = She said that her father had died a year before/the previous
year.
B
But if the speech is made and reported on the same day these time changes are not
necessary:
At breakfast this morning he said. ‘I’ll be very busy today' = At breakfast this morning he said that he
would be very busy today.
C
Logical adjustments are of course necessary if a speech is reported one/two days after it is
made. On Monday Jack said to Tom:
I'm leaving the day after tomorrow.
If Tom reports this speech on the next day (Tuesday) he will probably say:
Jack said he was leaving tomorrow.
If he reports it on Wednesday, he will probably say:
Jack said he was leaving today.
D
here can become there but only when it is clear what place is meant:
At the station he said, ‘I’ll be here again tomorrow' = He said that he 'd be there again
the next day.
Usually here has to be replaced by some phrase:
She said, 'You can sit here, Tom' = She told Tom that he could sit beside her etc. But
He said, 'Come here, boys' would normally be reported:
He called the boys.
315
Infinitive and gerund constructions in indirect speech
A
agree/refuse/offer/promise/threaten + infinitive can sometimes be used instead of say
(that):
ANN: Would you wait half an hour? TOM: All right = Tom agreed to wait or Tom said he
would wait.
ANN: Would you lend me another £50?
TOM: No. I won't lend you any more money = Tom refused to lend her any more money or
Tom said thai he wouldn't lend etc.
PAUL: I'll help you if you like, Ann = Paul offered to help her or
Paul said that he'd help her. (See also shall I?, 318.)
ANN: I'll pay you back next week. Really I will. = Ann promised to pay him back the following
week or
Ann said that she would pay him back or
Ann assured him that she would pay him back.
KIDNAPPERS: If you don't pay the ransom at once we'll kill your daughter = The kidnappers
threatened to kill his daughter if he didn 't Ray the ransom at once or The kidnappers said
that they would kill etc:
(For object + infinitive constructions, see 320.)
B
accuse . . . of/admit/apologize for/deny/insist on + gerund can sometimes be used instead
of say (that):
TOM took the money!' might be reported
He accused me of taking the money.
'I stole/didn't steal it' might be reported
I admitted/denied stealing it.
'I'm sorry I'm late,' he said might be reported
He apologized for being late or
He said,he was sorry he was tale.
BILL: Let me pay/or myself.
TOM: Certainly not! I'll pay! might be reported
Tom insisted on paying.
A Practical English Grammar
227
316
say, tell and alternative introductory verbs
A
say and tell with direct speech
1 say can introduce a statement or follow it:
Tom said, 'I've just heard the news' or 'I've just heard the news,' Tom said. Inversion of say
and noun subject is possible when say follows the
statement:
'I've just heard the news,' said Tom. say + to + person addressed is possible, but this phrase
must follow the direct statement; it cannot introduce it:
'I'm leaving at once,' Tom said to me. Inversion is not possible here.
2 tell requires the person addressed:
Tell me. He told us. I'll tell Tom. except with tell lies/stories/the truth, when the person
addressed need not be mentioned:
He told (me) lies. I'll tell (you) a story. tell used with direct speech must be placed after the
direct statement:
'I'm leaving at once,' Tom told me.
Inversion is not possible with tell.
B
say and tell with indirect speech
Indirect statements are normally introduced by say, or tell + object. say 4- to + object is
possible but much less usual than tell + object:
He said he'd just heard the news.
He told me that he'd just heard the news.
Note also tell . . . how/about:
He told us how he had crossed the mountains.
He told us about crossing the mountains.
He told us about his journeys.
(For say and tell with indirect commands, see 320-1.)
Other useful verbs are:
add*
admit*
answer*
argue*
assure + object
boast*
complain*
deny*
explain*
grumble*
object*
observe*
point out
promise*
protest*
remark*
remind + object
reply*
These can be used with direct or indirect speech. With direct speech they follow direct
statements;
'It won't cost more,' Tom assured us.
Starred verbs can be inverted, provided the subject is a noun:
'But it will take longer,' Bill objected/objected Bill.
'It'll cost too much,' Jack grumbled/grumbled Jack. They can all introduce indirect statements.
that should be placed after the verb:
Tom assured us that it wauldn 't cost more. But Bill objected/pointed
out that it would take longer.
D
murmur, mutter, shout, stammer, whisper can precede or follow direct statements or
questions. With noun subjects the verb can be inverted as shown above:
'You're late,' whispered Tom/Tom whispered.
They can introduce indirect statements, that is usually necessary:
Tom whispered that we were late.
There are, of course, a lot of other verbs describing the voice or the tone of voice, e.g. bark,
growl, roar, scream, shriek, snarl, sneer, yell. But these are more common with direct than
indirect speech.
317
Questions in indirect speech
Direct question: He said, 'Where is she going?'
Indirect question: He asked where she was going.
A Practical English Grammar
228
When we turn direct questions into indirect speech, the following changes are necessary.
Tenses, pronouns and possessive adjectives, and adverbs of time and place change as in
statements.
The interrogative form of the verb changes to the affirmative form. The question mark (?) is
therefore omitted in indirect questions:
He said, 'Where does she live?' = He asked where she lived.
With affirmative verb questions (see 55) this change is obviously not necessary:
'Who lives next door?' he said = He asked who lived next door.
'What happened?' she said = She asked what had happened.
If the introductory verb is .say, it must be changed to avert of inquiry, e.g. ask, inquire,
wonder, want to know etc.:
He said, 'Where is the station?' = He asked where the station was.
ask, inquire, wonder can also be used in direct speech. They are then usually placed at the
end of the sentence:
'Where is the station?' he inquired.
C ask can be followed by the person addressed (indirect object):
Heasked, 'What have you got in your bag?' =
He asked (me) what I had got in my bag. But inquire, wonder, want to know cannot take an
indirect object, so if we wish to report a question where the person addressed is mentioned,
we must use ask:
He said. 'Mary, when is the next train?' =
He asked Mary when the next train was. If we use inquire, wonder or want to know we must
omit Mary.
D If the direct question begins with a question word (when, where, who, how, why etc.) the
question word is repeated in the indirect question:
Hesaid, 'Why didn't you put on the brake?' =
He asked (her) why she hadn 'f put on the brake.
She said, 'What do you want?' =
She asked (them) what they wanted.
E If there is no question word, if or whether must be used:
7s anyone there?' he asked = He asked if/whether anyone was there.
1 Normally we can use either if and whether, if is the more usual:
'Do you know Bill?' he said =
He asked if/whether I knew Bill.
'Did you see the accident?' the policeman asked =
The policeman asked if/whether I had seen the accident.
2 whether can emphasize that a choice has to be made:
'Do you want to go by air or sea?' the travel agent asked = The travel agent asked whether I
wanted to go by air or by sea. Note whether or not:
'Do you want to insure your luggage or not?' he asked == He asked whether or not I wanted
to insure my luggage or He asked if I wanted to insure my luggage or not.
3 whether + infinitive is possible after wonder, want to know:
'Shall/Should 1wait for them or go on?' he wondered =
He wondered whether to wait for them or go on or
He wondered whether he should wait for them or go on.
inquire + whether + infinitive is possible but less usual.
(For whether + infinitive, see also 242 B.)
4 whether is neater if the question contains a conditional clause as otherwise there would be
two ifs:
'If you get the job will you move to York?' Bill asked = Bill asked whether, if I got the job, I'd
move to York.
Questions beginning shall I/we? in indirect speech Questions beginning shall I/we? can be of
four kinds.
Speculations or requests for information about a future event:
'Shall I ever see them again?' he wondered. 'When shall I know the result of the test?' she
asked.
These follow the ordinary rule about shall/will. Speculations are
usually introduced by wonder:
He wondered if he would ever see them again. She asked when she would know the result of
the test.
A Practical English Grammar
229
Requests for instructions or advice:
'What shall I do with it?' = 'Tell me what to do with it.' These are expressed in indirect speech
by ask, inquire etc., with should or the be + infinitive construction. Requests for advice are
normally reported by should:
'Shall we post it. sir?' he said =
He asked the customer if they were to post/if they should post if.
'What shall I say, mother?' she said =
She asked her mother what she should say. (request for advice) When a choice is required
we normally use whether in indirect speech. whether + infinitive is sometimes possible (see
also 317 E):
'Shall I lock the car or leave it unlocked?' he said =
He asked whether he should/was to lock the car or leave it
unlocked or He asked whether to lock the car etc.
Offers:
'Shall I bring you some tea?' could be reported
He offered to bring me some tea.
Note that 'Wouldyou like me to bring you some tea?' and 'I'll bnngyou some tea if you like'
could also be reported by offer.
Suggestions:
'Shall we meet at the theatre?' could be reported He suggested meeting at the theatre.
Questions beginning will you/would you/could you?
These may be ordinary questions, but may also be requests, invitations, or, very occasionally,
commands (see 284. 286, 320):
He said. 'Will you be there tomorrow?' (ordinary question) =
He asked if she would be there the next day.
'Will you stand still!'he shouted = He shouted at me to standstill''^!
He told/ordered me to stand still.
'Wouldyou like to live in New York?' he asked =
He asked if I would tike to live in New York.
'Wilt/Would you file these letters, please?' he said =
He asked/told me to/lie the Setters.
'Would you like a lift?' said Ann = Ann offered me a lift. 'Would you like to come round/Could
yw come round for a drink?'
he said =
He invited me (to come) round for a drink.
'Could you live on £25 a week?' he asked =
He asked if I could live on £25 a week.
'Could/Would you give me a hand?' she said =
She asked us to give her a hand.
'Could/Would you show me the photos?' she said =
She asked me to show her the photos or She asked to see the photos. (For
can/could/may/might + I/we?, see 283. For requests for permission, see 131.)
320 Commands, requests, advice in indirect speech
Direct command: He said, 'Lie down, Tom.'
Indirect command: He told Tom to He down.
Indirect commands, requests, advice are usually expressed by a verb of
comraand/request/advice + object + infinitive (== the object -i- infinitive
construction).
A The following verbs can be used: advise, ask, beg, command,
encourage, entreat, forbid, implore, invite, order, recommend,
remind, request, tell, urge, warn.
(Note that say is not included in this list. For indirect commands/
requests reported by say, see 321.)
Hesaid. 'Get your coat, Tom!' = He told Tom to get his coat. 'You had better hurry, Bill!' she
said = She advised Bill to hurry.
B Negative commands, requests etc. are usually reported by not •+•
infinitive:
'Don't swim out too far, boys,' I said =
I warned/told the boys not to swim out too far. forbid can also be used for prohibitions, but is
more common in the passive than in the active.
A Practical English Grammar
230
C Verbs in A above require object + infinitive, i.e. they must be followed directly by the
person addressed without preposition (see also 89). The person addressed is often not
mentioned in direct commands, requests
etc.: He said, 'Go away!' When reporting such commands/requests therefore we must add a
noun
or pronoun:
He told me/him/her/us/them/the children to go away. ask diners from the other verbs in A in
that it can also be followed directly by the infinitive of certain verbs, e.g. see, speak to, talk to:
He said. 'Could I see Tom, please?' =
He asked to see Tom. (See also 283.) But this is quite different from the ask + object +
infinitive type of request.
Both ask and beg can be followed by the passive infinitive:
'Do. please, send me to a warm climate,' he asked/begged = He asked/begged us to send
him to a warm climate or He asked/begged to be sent to a warm climate.
Examples of indirect commands, requests, advice Note that direct commands are usually
expressed by the imperative, but that requests and advice can be expressed in a variety of
ways (see 283-7):
'If I were you, I'd slop taking tranquillizers,' I said =
I advised him to stop taking tranquillizers. (See 311 D.)
'Why don't you take off your coat?'he said =
He advised me to take off my coat. (See also 287.)
' Would/Could you show me your passport, please?' he said =
He asked me to show him my passport or
He asked me for/He asked to see my passport.
'You might post some letters for me,' said my boss =
My boss asked me to post some letters for him.
'If you 'd just sign the register,' said the receptionist =
The receptionist asked him to sign the register.
'Do sit down.' said my hostess =My hostess asked/invited me to sit down.
'Please, please don't take any risks,' said his wife =
His wife begged/implored him not to take any risks.
'Forget all about this you »g man,' said her parents: 'don't see him '
again or answer his
letters' =
Her parents ordered her to forget all about the young man and told
her not to see him again or answer his letters or
She was ordered to forget all about the young man and forbidden to ._
see him again or
answer his tetters, (passive construction)
'Don't forget to order the wine.' said Mrs Pitt =
Mrs Pitt reminded her husband to order the wine.
'Try again,' said Ann's friends encouragingly =
Ann's friends encouraged her to fry again.
'Go on, apply for the job,'said Jack =
Jack urged/encouraged me to apply for the job.
' You had better not leave your car unlocked,' said my friends;
'there's been a lot of stealing from cars' = '
My friends warned me not to leave my car
unlocked as there had been a lot of stealing from cars.
will you . . . sentences are normally treated as requests and reported by ask:
'Will all persons not travelling please go ashore,' he said = He asked at! persons not
travelling to go ashore. But if a will you sentence is spoken sharply or irritably, and the '
please is omitted, it might be reported by tell or order;
'Will you be quiet!/Be quiet, will you!' he said = He told/ordered us to be quiet.
321
Other ways of expressing indirect commands
A say/tell + subject + be + infinitive:
He said/told me that I was to wait. This is a possible alternative to the tell + infinitive
construction, so that:
He said, 'Don't open the door' could be reported
He told me not to open the door or
A Practical English Grammar
231
fie said that I wasn 't to open the door. The be + infinitive construction is particularly useful in
the following cases:
1 When the command is introduced by a verb in the present tense:
He says, 'Meet me at the station' = He says that we are to meet him at the station. (He tells
us to meet him would be much less likely.)
2 When the command is preceded by a clause (usually of time or condition):
He said, 'If she leaves the house follow her' could be reported He said that if she left the
house I was to follow her. He told me to follow her if she left the house would be equally
possible here but note that if we use the tell + infinitive construction we must change the
order of the sentence so as to put the command first. Sometimes this would result in a rather
confusing sentence. For example, the request If you see Ann tell her to ring me would
become He told me to tell Ann to ring him if I saw her. Such requests can only be reported by
the be + infinitive construction:
He said that if I saw Ann I was to tell her to ring him.
B say/tell (+ that) + subject + should
1 say or tell with a should construction normally indicates advice rather than command:
He said, 'If your brakes are bad don't drive so fast' =
He said/told me that if my brakes were bad I shouldn 't drive so fast
or
He advised me not to drive so fast if my brakes were bad. (Note
change of order here, as with tell + infinitive above.)
2 Advice can also be expressed by advise, recommend and urge + that. . . should. This is
particularly useful in the passive (see 302 E):
'! advise cancelling the meeting.' he said s He advised that the meeting should be cancelled.
3 command and order can also be used with should or a passive infinitive;
'Evacuate the area!' ordered the superintendent =
The superintendent ordered that everyone should lease the area or
ordered that the area should be evacuated or
ordered the area to be evacuated.
4 Note that when an indirect command is expressed by an object + infinitive construction, as
in 320, there is normally the idea that the
person who is to obey the command is addressed directly. But when the command is
expressed by the be + infinitive construction (A above) or by a should construction (B3 above)
the recipient of the command need not necessarily be addressed directly. The command may
be conveyed to him by a third person.
322
let's, let us, let him/them in indirect speech
let's
let's usually expresses a suggestion and is reported by suggest in
indirect speech:
He said, 'Let's leave the case at the station'
would be reported:
He suggested leaving the case at the station or He suggested that they/we should leave the
case at the station.
(See 289 for constructions with suggest.) He said, 'Let's stop now and finish it later'
would be reported:
He suggested stopping then and finishing it later or He suggested that they/we should stop
then and finish it later.
Similarly in the negative:
He said, 'Let's not say anything about it till we hear the facts' = He suggested not saying
anything/saying nothing about it till they heard the facts or He suggested that they shouldn 't
say anything till they heard the facts.
But let's not used alone in answer to an affirmative suggestion is often
reported by some phrase such as opposed the idea/was against
it/objected. So that we could report:
'Let's sell the house,' said Tom. 'Lei's not,' said Ann by Tom suggested selling the house hut
Ann was against it.
(For other suggestion forms, see 289.) ;. let's/let us sometimes expresses a call to action. It is
then usually
A Practical English Grammar
232
reported by urge/advise + object + infinitive (see also 320):
The strike leader said, 'Let's show the bosses that we are united' = The strike leader urged
the workers to show the bosses that they were united.
323
let him/them
In theory let him/them expresses a command. But very often the speaker has no authority
over the person who is to obey the command;
7('s not my business,' said the postman. 'Let the government do
something about it.'
Here, the speaker is not issuing a command but expressing an obligation. Sentences of this
type are therefore normally reported by ought/should:
He said that if wasn 't his business and that the government ought
to/should do something about it.
2 Sometimes, however, let him/them does express a command. It is then usually reported by
say + be + infinitive (see 321):
'Let the boys clear up this mess,' said the headmaster -= The headmaster said that the boys
were to clear up the mess. 'Let the guards'be armed,' he ordered = He ordered that the
guards should be armed.
3 Sometimes let him/them is more a suggestion than a command. In such cases it is usually
reported by suggest, or say + should (see 289):
She said, 'Let them go to their consul. He 'II be able to help them' = She suggested their/them
going to their consul etc. or She suggested that they should go to their consul or She said
that they should go to their consul.
4 let him/them can also indicate the speaker's indifference:
'The neighbours will complain,' said Ann.
'Let them (complain),' said Tom = Tom expressed indifference or
Tom said he didn't mind (if they complained).
C let there be
Here the speaker could be ordering, advising, urging or begging:
'Let there be no reprisals,' said the widow of the murdered man = The widow urged/begged
that there should be no reprisals.
D let is also an ordinary verb meaning allow/permit:
'Let him come with us, mother; I'll take care of him,' I said =
I asked my mother to let him come with us and promised to take care
of him.
323
Exclamations and yes and no
A Exclamations usually become statements in indirect speech. The exclamation mark
disappears.
1 Exclamations beginning What <a). . . or How ... can be reported
(a) by exclaim/say that:
He said, 'What a dreadful idea!' or 'How dreadful.'' = He exclaimed that it was a dreadful
idea/was dreadful
or (b) by give an exclamation of delight/disgust/horror/relief/
surprise etcAlternatively, if the exclamation is followed by an action we can use the
construction (c) with an exclamation of delight/disgust etc. +
he/she etc. + verb.
2 Other types of exclamation, such as Good! Marvellous! Splendid! Heavens! Oh! Ugh! etc.
can be reported as in (b) or (c) above:
'Good!' he exclaimed =
He gave an exclamation of pleasure/satisfaction.
' Ugh!' she exclaimed, and turned the programme off =
With an exclamation of disgust she turned the programme off.
Note also:
A Practical English Grammar
233
He said, 'Thank you!' = He thanked me. ;' He said. 'Curse this fog.'' = He cursed the fog.
He said. 'Good luck!' = He wished me luck.
He said. 'Happy Christmas'.' = He wished me a happy Christmas.
He said, 'Congratulations9' = He congratulated me.
He said, 'Liar!' = He called me a liar.
He said, 'Damn!'etc. = He swore.
The notice said: WELCOME TO WALES.' = '• The notice welcomed visitors to Wales.
ri
yes and no are expressed in indirect speech by subject + appropriate ' auxiliary verb:
He said, 'Can you swim?'and I said'No' = He asked (me) if I could swim and I said I couldn't.
Hesaid, 'Will you have time to do it?' and I said 'Yes' = He asked if I would have time to do it
and I said that I would.
324
Indirect speech: mixed types
Direct speech may consist of statement + question, question + command, command +
statement, or all three together.
Normally each requires its own introductory verb:
'I don't know the way. Do you?' he asked .= ; He said he didn't know the way and asked
her if she did/if she knew it.
'Someone's coming,' he said. 'Get behind the screen' =
He said that someone was coming and told me to get behind the
screen.
'I'm going shopping. Can I get you anything?' she said = '' She said she was going
shopping and asked if she could get me ; anything.
'I can hardly hear the radio,' he said. 'Could you turn it up?' =
He said he could hardly hear the radio and asked her to turn it up.
But sometimes, when the iast clause is a statement which helps to explain the first, we can
use as instead of a second introductory verb:
'You'd better wear a coat. it's very cold out.'he said =. He advised me to wear a coat as it was
very cold out. 'You'd better not walk across the park alone. People have been
mugged there,' he said =
He warned her not to walk across the park alone as people had been mugged there.
Sometimes the second introductory verb can be a participle:
'Please, please, don't drink too much! Remember thatyou'U have to drive home,' she said =
She begged him not to drink too much, reminding him that he 'd have to drive home.
'Let's shop on Friday. The supermarket will be very crowded on Saturday,' she said =
She suggested shopping on Friday, pointing out that the supermarket would be very crowded
on Saturday. (as could be used in both these examples.)
325 must and needn't
A must used for deductions, permanent commands/prohibitions and to express intention
remains unchanged. (For must, expressing advice, see 287 A.)
1 Deductions:
She said, 'I'm always running into him; he must live near here!' a She said that. . . he must
live in the area.
2 Permanent command:
He said, 'This door must be kept locked' =-He said that the door must be kept locked.
3 must used casually to express intention:
He said, ' We must have a party to celebrate this' = He said that they must have a party to
celebrate it.
B must used for obligation can remain unchanged. Alternatively it can be reported by would
have to or had to.
1 I/we must reported by would have to
would have to is used when the obligation depends on some future action, or when the
fulfilment of the obligation appears remote or uncertain, i.e. when must is clearly replaceable
by will have to:
'If the floods get worse we must (will have to) leave the house,' he
said =
If e said that if the floods got worse they would have to leave the
A Practical English Grammar
234
house.
'When it stops snowing we must start digging ourselves out,'
I said =
I said that when it stopped snowing we would have to start digging
ourselves out.
'We must mend the roof properly next year,' he said =
He said that they would have to mend the roof properly the following
year.
7 have just received a letter,' he said. 'I must go home' =
He said that he had just received a letter and would have to go home(But had to would be more usual here if he went at once, i.e. had
to'would imply that he went at once.)
2 I/we must reported by had to
had to is the usual form for obligations where times for fulfilment have been fixed, or plans
made, or when the obligation is fulfilled fairly promptly, or at least by the time the speech is
reported:
He said, 'I must wash my hands' (and presumably did so) =
He said that he had to wash his hands.
Tom said, 'I must be there by nine tomorrow' = { Tom said that he had to be there by nine
the next day. ^would have to would be possible here also but would imply that the ^obligation
was self-imposed and that no outside authority was involved, ; had to could express either an
outside authority (i.e. that someone had ; told him to be there) or a self-imposed obligation.
HAH difficulties about had to/would have to can of course be avoided ,:jby keeping must
unchanged. In both the above examples must could '''have been used instead of had to/would
have to.
you/he/they must is reported similarly:
He said. 'You must start at once' =
He said that she must/had to/would have to start at once. But note that would have to
removes the idea of the speaker's authority:
Tom said. 'I/you want to stay on here you must work harder' =
Twn said that if she wanted to stay on she must/would have to work
harder.
must implies that Tom himself insists on her working harder, would
have to merely implies that this will be necessary.
must I/you/he? can change similarly but as must in the interrogative
usually concerns the present or immediate future it usually becomes
had to:
'Must you go so soon?' I said = I asked him if he had to go so soon.
gfaust not
must not usually remains unchanged, you/he must not remains
.pichanged or is expressed as a negative command (see 320-1):
He said, 'You mustn't tell anyone' = f:- He said that she mustn 't ell/wasn 't to tell anyone
or
He told her not to tell anyone. ',,
needn't
needn't can remain unchanged and usually does. Alternatively it can i,change to didn't have
to/wouldn't have to just as must changes to
•had to/would have to:
He said. 'You needn't wait' = He said that I needn't wait.
I said, 'If you can lend me the money I needn 't go to the bank = i; / said that if he could lend
me the money I needn 't/wouldn 't have to
go to the bank.
He said, '1 needn't be in the office till ten tomorrow morning' •=
He said that he needn't/didn't have to be in the office till ten the next ! morning.
"need I/you/he? behaves exactly in the same ways as must I/you/he? ; i.e. it normally
becomes had to:
'Need I finish my pudding?' asked the small boy = ^ The small boy asked if he had to
finish his pudding.
A Practical English Grammar
235
32
326
Conjunctions
Co-ordinating conjunctions: and, but, both . . . and, or, either ... or, neither . . . nor, not only . .
. but also
These join pairs of nouns/adjectives/adverbs/verbs/phrases/clauses:
He plays squash and rugby.
I make the payments and keep the accounts.
He works quickly and/but accurately.
He is small but strong. She is intelligent but lazy.
We came in first but (we) didn't win the race.
Both men and women were drafted into the army.
Ring Tom or Bill. She doesn 't smoke or drink.
He can't (either) read or write.
You can (either) walk up or take the cable car.
He can neither read nor write.
Not only men but also women were chosen.
327
besides, however, nevertheless, otherwise, so, therefore, still, yet, though
These adverbs/conjunctions can join clauses or sentences and are then often known as
'conjuncts'. But they can also, with the exception of nevertheless and therefore (conjunctions),
be used in other ways and sometimes as other parts of speech. Their position will vary
according to how they are usedA besides (preposition) means 'in addition to'. It precedes a noun/pronoun/gerund:
Besides doing the cooking I look after the garden. besides (adverb) means 'in addition'. It
usually precedes the clause it introduces, but can follow it:
I can't go now; I'm too busy. Besides, my passport is out of date. moreover could replace
besides here in more formal English. anyway or in any case could be used here in more
informal English:
Anyway, my passport's out of date.
B however (adverb of degree, see 41) precedes its adjective/adverb:
You couldn't earn much, however hard you worked. however (conjunction) usually means
'but'. It can precede or follow its clause or come after the first word or phrase:
I'll offer it to Tom. However, he may not want it or
He may 'not want it however or Tom, however, may not want it or
If, however, he doesn't want it. . .
' But when two contrasting statements are mentioned, however can
t; mean'but/nevertheless/all the same':
They hadn 't trained hard, but/however/nevertheless/all the same they won or they won,
however/nevertheless/all the same, (See also 329.)
.• otherwise (adverb) usually comes after the verb:
It must be used in a well-ventilated room. Used otherwise it could be
harmful. otherwise (conjunction) means 'if not/or else':
We must be early; otherwise we won't get a seat. or could also be used here in colloquial
English;
We must be early or (else) see won't get a seat.
so (adverb of degree) precedes its adjective/adverb:
I was so hot that. . . They ran so fast that. . . so (conjunction) precedes its clause:
Our cases were heavy, so we look a taxi.
therefore (conjunction) can be used instead of so in formal English. It can come at the
beginning of the clause or after the first word or phrase; or before the main verb:
There is fog at Heathrow; the plane, therefore, has been diverted/the plane has therefore
been diverted/therefore the plane has been diverted.
••• still and yet can be adverbs of time (see 37):
The children are still up. They haven't had supper yet. '•' still and yet (conjunctions) come at
the beginning of the clauses they introduce.
A Practical English Grammar
236
still (conjunction) means 'admitting that/nevertheless'. yet (conjunction) means 'in spite of
that/all the same/nevertheless'. You aren 't rich; still, you could do something to help him.
They are ugly and expensive; yet people buy them.
though/although normally introduce clauses of concession (see 340):
Though/Although they're expensive, people buy them. though (but not although) can also be
used to link two main clauses. though used in this way means 'but' or 'yet' and is placed
sometimes at the beginning but more often at the end of its clause:
He says he 'II pay, though I don't think he will or
He says he 'II pay; I don 'f think he will, though.
328
Subordinating conjunctions: if, that, though/although, unless, when etc.
Subordinating conjunctions introduce subordinate adverb or noun clauses and are dealt with
in the chapters on the different types of clause.
See chapter 21 for conditional clauses, chapter 33 for purpose clauses
chapter 34 for adverb clauses of reason, result, concession, comparison
and time, and chapter 35 for noun clauses.
Some conjunctions have more than one meaning and may introduce
more than one type of clause.
Pairs and groups of conjunctions which are sometimes confused with
each other or with other parts of speech are dealt with below.
329 though/although and in spite of (preposition phrase), despite (preposition)
Two opposing or contrasting statements, such as He had no qualifications and He got the job,
could be combined as follows:
A With but, however or nevertheless as shown in 327 above:
He had no qualifications but he got the job.
He had no qualifications; however he got the Job/he got the job,
however.
He had no qualifications; nevertheless he got the job.
B With though/although:
He got the job although he had no qualifications. Although he had no qualifications he got the
job.
C With in spite of/despite + noun/pronoun/gerund:
In spite of'having no qualifications he got the job. He got the job in
spite of having no qualifications.
despite = in spite of. It is chiefly used in newspapers and in formal English:
Despite the severe weather conditions all the cars completed the
course.
D Note that though/although requires subject + verb:
Although it was windy . . .
and that in spite of/despite requires noun/pronoun or gerund:
In spite a/the wind . . .
Some more examples:
Although it smelt horrible . . . = In spite of the horrible smell. . . Although it was dangerous . . .
= In spite of the danger . . . Though he was inexperienced . . . = In spite of his
inexperience/his being inexperienced . . .
330
for and because
These conjunctions have nearly the same meaning and very often either can be used. It is,
however, safer to use because, as a clause introduced by for (which we will call a 'forclause') has a more restricted use than a clause introduced by because:
1 A for-clause cannot precede the verb which it explains:
Because it was wet he took a taxi. (for is not possible.)
2 A for-clause cannot be preceded by not, but or any conjunction:
He stole, not because he wanted the money but because he liked stealing. (for not
possible)
3 A for-clause cannot be used in answer to a question:
Why did you do it? ~ I did it because I was angry. (for not possible)
A Practical English Grammar
237
4 A for-clause cannot be a mere repetition of what has been already stated, but always
includes some new piece of information:
He spoke in French. She was angry because he had spoken in
French, (for is not possible.) But She was angry, for she didn 't know French. (Here for is
correct;
because is also possible.)
The reason for these restrictions is that a for-clause does not tell us why a certain action was
performed, buE merely presents a piece of additional information which helps to explain it.
Some examples of for-clauses:
The days were- short, for it was now December. He took the food eagerly, for he had eaten
nothing since dawn. When I saw her in the river I was frightened- For at that point the
currents were dangerous.
In speech a short pause is usually made before a for-clause and in written English this place
is usually marked by a comma, and sometimes, as in the last example above, by a full stop.
because could be used in the above sentences also, though for is better.
331
when, while, as used to express time
A
1
when is used, with simple tenses:
When one action occurs at the same time as another or in the span of another:
When it is wet the buses are crowded.
When we lived in town we often went to the theatre.
2 When one action follows another:
When she pressed the button the lift stopped.
B
as is used:
When the second action occurs before the first is finished:
As / left the house I remembered the key.
This implies that I remembered the key before I had completed the action of leaving the
house; I was probabiy still in the doorway. While I was leaving would have the same meaning
here, but When I left would give the impression that the act of leaving was complete and the
door shut behind me.
2 For parallel actions: He sang as he worked.
3 For parallel development:
As the sun rose the fog dispersed.
As it grew darker if became colder = The darker it grew, the colder it became.
As she came to know him better she relied on him more.
As he became more competent he was given more interesting work.
If we used when here we would lose all idea of simultaneous progression or development.
4 To mean while (= during the time that):
As he stood there he saw two men enter the bar.
But there is no particular advantage in using as here, and while is safer.
332
B
D
as meaning when/while or because/since
A Restricted use of as (= when/while)
as here is chiefly used with verbs indicating action or development. It is not normally used
with the type of verb listed in 168, except when there is an idea of development, as in B3
above. Nor is it normally used with verbs such as live, stay, remain.
as used with the above verbs/types of verb normally means because/since;
As he was tired . . . = Because he was tired . . .
As he knew her well. . . = Because he knew her well. . .
As it contains alcohol. . . = Since/Because it contains alcohol. . .
As he lives near here . . . = Since/Because he lives . . .
C With most verbs, as can be used with either meaning:
As/While he shaved he thought about the coming interview.
As/Because he shaved with a blunt razor he didn't make a very good job of it.
If in doubt here, students should use while or because.
as + noun can mean either when/while or because/since:
A Practical English Grammar
238
As a student he had known great poverty = When he was a student he had known
great poverty.
As a student he gets/got in for half price = Because he is/was a student he gets/got in . . .
As a married man, he has to think of his family = Because/Since he is a married man . . .
as meaning when/while here is usually followed by a perfect tense.
as meaning because/since can be followed by any tense.
as, when, while used to mean although, but, seeing that
as can mean though/although but only in the combination adjective + as + subject + to
be/to seem/to appear:
Tired as he was he offered to carry her = Though he was tired he offered to carry her.
Strong as he was, he couldn't lift it.
while can mean but and is used to emphasize a contrast:
'At sea' means 'on a ship', while 'at the sea' means 'at the seaside'.
Some people waste food while others haven't enough.
while can also mean although and is then usually placed at the beginning of a sentence:
While I sympathize with your point of view I cannot accept it.
when can mean seeing that/although. It is therefore very similar to while, but is chiefly used
to introduce a statement which makes another action seem unreasonable. It is often, though
not necessarily, used with a question:
How can you expect your children to be truthful when you yourself tell lies?
It's not fair to expect her to do all the cooking when she has had no training or
experience.
Do not confuse when and if
When he comes implies that we are sure he will come. If he comes implies that we don't
know whether he will come or not. (For if in conditional sentences, see chapter 21.)
A Practical English Grammar
239
33
334
Purpose
Purpose is normally expressed by the infinitive
Purpose can be expressed by:
A The infinitive alone:
He went to France to learn French. They stopped to ask the way. When there is a personal
object of the main verb, the infinitive may refer to this and not to the subject:
He sen! Tom to the shop Co buy bread. (Tom was to buy the bread.)
E in order or so as + infinitive
in order + infinitive can imply either that the subject wants to perform
the action or that he wants it to happen.
so as + infinitive implies only that the subject wants the action to
happen, in order is, therefore, the more generally useful,
in order or so as are used:
1 With a negative infinitive to express a negative purpose:
He left his gun outside in order/so as not to frighten us.
2 With to be and to have:
She left work early in order/so as to be at home when he arrived. She gave up work in
order/so as to have more time with the children.
3 When the purpose is less immediate:
He is studying mathematics in order/so as to qualify/or a better job. She learnt typing in order
to help her husband with his work.
4 Sometimes in longer sentences, to emphasize that the infinitive indicates purpose:
He was accused of misrepresenting the facts in order/so as to make
the scheme seem feasible.
He took much more trouble over the figures than he usually did in
order/so as to show his new boss what a careful worker he was. (But in order/so as is not
essential and is often omitted.) When the infinitive of purpose precedes the main verb, in
order/so as may be placed first:
In order/So as to show his boss what a careful worker he was, he
took extra trouble over the figures. (But here also in order/so as may be omitted.)
5 When there is a personal object but we want the infinitive to refer unambiguously to the
subject:
He sent his sons to a boarding school in order/so as to have some peace. (He, not his sons,
was going to have some peace.) Compare with:
He sent his sons to a boarding school to team to live in a community.
(Not he but his sons were to learn to live in a community.) But this in order/so as construction
is not very common. It is more usual to say:
He sent his sons to a boarding school because he wanted to have some
peace.
in order (but not so as), used to emphasize that the subject really had
this purpose in mind:
He bought diamonds when he was in Amsterdam! ~ That wasn't surprising. He went to
Amsterdam in order to buy diamonds, (not for any other purpose)
We could also, however, express^this idea by stressing the first verb
and omitting in order: He 'went to Amsterdam to buy diamonds.
Infinitive + noun + preposition:
/ want a case to keep my records in.
I need a corkscrew to open this bottle with. Note that here we are talking about a particular
purpose. For a general purpose we use for + gerund:
This is a case for keeping records in.
A corkscrew is a tool for opening bottles.
335
Infinitives of purpose after go and come
It is not normal to use an infinitive of purpose after the imperative or infinitive of go and come.
Instead of Go to find Bill we normally say Go and find Bill; and instead of Come to talk to Ann
A Practical English Grammar
240
we say Come and talk to Ann; i.e. instead of an imperative + an infinitive of purpose we use
two imperatives Joined by and. And instead of:
I must go to help my mother and I'll come to check the accounts we normally say:
I must go and help my mother and I'll come and check the accounts. i.e. instead of an
infinitive + an infinitive of purpose we use two infinitives joined by and (see 246 I).
But when go and come are used as gerunds or in any present or past tense they take the
ordinary infinitive of purpose:
I'm thinking of going to look for mushrooms.
I went to help my mother.
I've come to check the accounts.
I didn 't come to talk to Bill; I came to talk to you.
336
Clauses of purpose
Clauses are necessary when the person to whom the purpose refers is different from the
subject of the main clause, or when the original subject is stated again:
Ships carry lifeboats so that the crew can escape if the ship sinks. This knife has a cork
handle so that if will float if it falls overboard.
A Purpose clauses are usually expressed by so that + will/would or can/could + infinitive.
can/could is used here to mean will/would be able to:
They make £10 notes a different size from £5 notes so that blind people can (= wil! be able
to) tell the difference between them. They wrote the notices in several languages so that
foreign tourists could (= would be able to) understand them. can and will are used when the
main verb is in a present, present perfect or future tense; could and would are used when the
main verb is in a past tense. See the examples above and also:
/ light/am lighting/have lit/will light the fire so that the house will be warm when they return.
I have given/will give him a key so that he can get into the house whenever he likes.
I pinned the note to his pillow so that he would be sure to see it. There were telephone points
every kilometre so that drivers whose cars had broken down would be able to/could summon
help. If that is omitted from purpose clauses with can/could, the idea of purpose may
disappear. The sentence He took my shoes so that I couldn't leave the house would normally
mean 'He took my shoes to prevent my leaving etc.' but He took my shoes, so I couldn 't
leave the house would normally mean 'He took my shoes; therefore I wasn't able to leave'.
B Purpose clauses can also be formed by so that/in order that/that + may/might or shall/should
+ infinitive. These are merely more formal constructions than those shown in A above. There is
no difference in meaning.
Note that so that can be followed by will/can/may/shall or their past forms, while in order that
or that are limited to may/shall or their past forms.
that used alone is rarely found except in very dramatic speech or writing, or in poetry.
The rules about sequences of tenses are the same as those shown above. The following are
very formal:
We carved their names on the stone so that/in order that future generations should/might
know what they had done. These men risk their lives so that/in order that we may live more
safely.
may in the present tense is much more comman than shall, which is rarely used. In the past
tense either might or should can be used. The student should know the above forms but
should not normally need to use them, as for all ordinary purposes so that + can/could or
will/would should be quite sufficient.
C Negative purpose clauses are made by putting the auxiliary verb (usually will/would or
should) into the negative:
He wrote his diary in code so that his wife wouldn 't be able to read it-He changed his name
so that his new friends wouldn Vshouidn 't know that he had once been accused of murder.
Criminals usually telephone from public telephone boxes so that the police won't be able to
trace the call.
Negative purpose clauses can, however, usually be replaced bv to prevent + noun/pronoun +
gerund, or to avoid + gerundHe dyed his beard so that we shouldn 't recognize him/to prevent us recognizing him/to avoid
being recognized, (passive gerund) She always shopped in another village so that she
A Practical English Grammar
241
wouldn 'i meet her own neighbours/to avoid meeting her own neighbours. These infinitive
phrases are preferred to negative purpose clauses.
337
in case and lest
A
in case
in case + subject + verb can follow a statement or command:
I don't let him climb trees in case he tears his trousers. This first action is usually a
preparation for, or a precaution against, the action in the if-clause, which is a possible future
action.
in case + present tense normally has the meaning 'because this may happen/because
perhaps this will happen' or 'for fear that this may happen'in case + past tense normally means 'because this might happen/because perhaps this
would happen' or 'for fear that this would happen'.
Both present tense and past tense here can be replaced by should + infinitive. should used
here would express greater improbability, but this construction is not very usual,
B
Tenses with in case
Main verb
Future
present tense or Present
+ in case +
„ .. _( ^
should + infinitive Present perfect J
Conditional
1
( .,
past tense or
Past tense
+ in case +
n. ,
should + infinitive
Past perfect ;
I'll make a cake in case someone drops in at the weekend.
I carry a spare wheel in case I have/should have a puncture.
I always keep candles in the house in case there is a power cut.
I always kept candies in the house in case there was a power cut. (See also 227.)
lest means 'for fear that' and is followed by should:
He doesn't/didn't dare to leave the house lest someone should recognize him.
lest is rarely found except in formal written English.
A Practical English Grammar
242
34 Clauses of reason, result, concession, comparison, time
338 Clauses of reason and result/cause
A
B
C
339
A
B
340
Except for the type shown in A2 and A3 below, both these clauses can be introduced by as or
because. But as is safer for clauses of reason (see A below) and because is safer for clauses
of result/cause (see B).
Clauses of reason
1 Introduced by as/because/since;
We camped there as/because/since it was too dark to go on. As/Because/Since it was too
dark to go on, we camped there.
2 'in view of the fact that' can be expressed by as/since/seeing that, but not because:
As/Since/Seeing that you are here, you may as well give me a hand. As/Since/Seeing that
Tom knows French, he 'd better do the talking.
3 Where as/since/seeing that refers to a statement previously made or understood, it is
replaceable by if:
As/Since/Seeing that/If you don't like Bill, why did you invite him? Note the use of if so:
I hope Bill won't come. ~ Ifso (= If you hope he won't come), why did you invite him? For if +
so/not, see 347.
Clauses of result/cause (see also 339) are introduced by because or as:
The fuse blew because we had overloaded the circuit.
He was angry because we were late.
As it/rose hard that night there was ice everywhere next day.
As the soup was very salty we were thirsty afterwards.
These combinations could also be expressed by two main clauses Joined by so:
It was too dark to go on, so we camped there.
You are here, so you may as well give me a hand.
It froze hard that night, so there was ice everywhere next day.
therefore can also be used. but is normal only in fairly formal
sentences:
The Finnish delegate has not yet arrived. We are therefore postponing/We have therefore
decided to postpone/Therefore we are postponing the meeting. (Notice possible positions of
therefore.)
Clauses of result with such/so . . . that
such is an adjective and is used before an adjective + noun:
They had such a fierce dog that no one dared to go near their house. He spoke for such a
long time that people began to fall asleep.
so is an adverb and is used before adverbs and with adjectives which
are not followed by their nouns:
The snow fell so fast that our footsteps were soon covered up. His speech went on for so long
thai people began to fall asleep. Their dog was so fierce that no one dared come near it.
But such is never used before much and many. so so is used even
when much and many are followed by nouns:
There was so much dust that we couldn't see what was happening. So many people
complained that they took the programme off.
C Note that such + a + adjective + noun is replaceable by so + adjective + a + noun, so that
'such a good man" is replaceable by 'so good a man'. This is only possible when a noun is
preceded by a/an. It is not a very usual form but may be met in literature. Sometimes for
emphasis so is placed at the beginning of the sentence. It is then followed by the inverted form
of the verb (see 45):
So terrible was the storm that whole roofs were ripped off.
Clauses of concession
These are introduced by although, though (see 327, 329), even though, even if, no matter,
however (see 85) and sometimes by whatever, as is also possible, but only in the adjective +
as + be construction.
A Practical English Grammar
243
Although/Though/Even though/Even if you don't like him you can still be polite.
No matter what you do, don't touch this switch.
However rich people are, they always seem anxious to make more money.
However carefully you drive, you will probably have an accident eventually.
Whatever you do, don't tell him that I told you this.
Patient as he was, he had no intention of waiting for three hours.
(though he was patient) may + infinitive can be used in hypothetical cases:
However frightened you may tie yourself, you must remain
outwardly calm. may can also imply 'I accept the fact that':
But he's your brother! ~ He may be my brother but I don't trust him!
But may used in this way is part of another main clause, not a clause of concession.
should + infinitive can be used after even if just as it can after if in conditional sentences, to
express the idea that the action expressed by the infinitive is not very likely to take place;
Even if he should find out he won't do anything about it.
341
Clauses of comparison
A
Comparisons with adjectives and finite verbs (see also 20-2);
It's darker today than it was yesterday.
He doesn'I Ray as much tax as we do/as us.
He spends more than he earns.
Note that + adjective, a colloquial form:
Will it cost £1W? ~ No, it won't cost as much as (ail) that. It won't
be (alt) that expensive. (It won't be as expensive as that.) that + adjective is sometimes used
colloquially to mean very.
B Comparisons with adverbs and finite verbs (see also 31-4):
He didn't play as well as we expected/as well as you (did). He sings more loudly than anyone
I've ever heard/than anyone else (does). You work harder than he does/than him/than I did at
your age.
C
Comparisons with adjectives and infinitives or gerunds
Often either can be used, but the infinitive is more usual for a particular action, and gerunds
are more usual for genera! statements (see also E below):
It's sometimes as cheap to buy a new one as (it is) (to) repair the old one.
Buying a new one is sometimes as cheap as repairing the old one.
He found that lying on She beach was just as boring as sitting in his office or
He found lying on the beach just as boring as sitting etc. (The infinitive would be less
usual here.)
He thinks it (is) safer to drive himself than (to) let me drive.
He thinks that driving himself is safer than letting me drive.
It will soon be more difficult to get a visa than it is now.
Getting a visa will soon be more difficult than it is now.
D In comparisons of the type shown in C above, if we have an infinitive before as/than we will
usually have an infinitive (not a gerund) after it, Similarly, if we have a gerund before as/than we
will normally have a gerund (not an infinitive) after it. See examples above, But if we have a
finite verb + this/that/which before as/than we can have a gerund after it. An infinitive is possible
but would be much less usual:
I’ll deliver it by hand; this will be cheaper than posting it.
He cleaned his shoes, which was better than doing nothing.
E Infinitives are used with would rather/sooner (see 297-8):
Most people would rather work than starve. I would resign rather than accept him as a
partner.
342
Time clauses
A Practical English Grammar
244
A These are introduced by conjunctions of time such as:
after
immediately
till/until
as
no sooner . . . than when
as soon as
since
whenever
before
the sooner
while
hardly . . . when
They can also be introduced by the minute, the moment.
For examples with when, as, while, see 331-3.
For examples with before, see 195 B.
B Remember that we do not use a future form, or a conditional tense, in a time clause.
Each of the following future forms becomes a present tense when we put it in a time clauseFuture simple:
You 'II be back soon. I'll stay till then. = I'll stay till you get back.
be going to:
The parachutist is going to jump. Soon after he jumps his parachute
will open.
The present continuous, used as a future form, and the future continuous:
He's arriving/He 'II be arriving at six but
When he arrives he'll tell us all about the match.
Before he arrives I'll give the children their tea. But the continuous tense can, of course, be
used in time clauses when it indicates a continuous action:
Peter and John will be playing/are playing/are going to play tennis
tonight. While they are playing (during this time) we 'II go to the
beach.
The future perfect changes to the present perfect, and the future perfect continuous changes
to the present perfect continuous:
I'll have finished in the bathroom in a few minutes.
The moment/As soon as I have finished I'll give you a call.
A conditional tense changes to a past tense:
We knew that he would arrive/would be arriving about six. We knew that till he arrived nothing
would be done.
But when when introduces a noun clause it can be followed by a future or conditional tense:
He said. 'When will the train get in?' =
He asked when the train would get in.
C
D
E
Clauses with since (see also 187-8)
In clauses since is usually followed by perfect tenses (but see 188);
They 've moved house twice since they got married or Since they got married, they 've moved
house twice. He said he'd lived in a tent since his house burnt down. It's ages since I
sailed/have sailed a boat. I haven't sailed a boat since I left college.
Clauses with after
In clauses after is often followed by perfect tenses:
After/When he had rung off I remembered. . .
After/When you 've finished with it, hang it up.
hardly/scarcely . . . when, no sooner . . . than (see also 45) The performance had hardly
begun when the lights went out or Hardly had the performance begun when the lights went
out.
scarcely could replace hardly here but is less usual,
He had no sooner drunk the coffee than he began to feel drowsy or No sooner had he drunk
the coffee than he began to feel drowsy. He no sooner earns any money than he spends it or
Immediately he earns any money he spends it. (more colloquial)
Note also the sooner . . . the sooner:
The sooner we start, the sooner we'll be there.
A Practical English Grammar
245
35
Noun clauses
Noun clauses are very often introduced by that and are therefore often called that-clauses.
However, not all noun clauses are that-clauses.
343
Noun clauses (that-clauses) as subject of a sentence
A Sentences with noun clause subjects usually begin with it (see 67 D):
It is disappointing that Tom can't come.
'that Tom can't come' is the subject.
B
The usual construction is it + be/seem + adjective + noun clause (see 26-7):
It’s splendid that you passed your exam.
It's strange that there are no lights on.
Some adjectives require or can take that . . . should (see 236):
It is essential that everybody knows/should know what to do.
An alternative construction is it + be/seem + a + noun + noun clause. Nouns that can be
used here include mercy, miracle, nuisance, pity, shame, relief, wonder, a good thing is
also possible.
It's a great pity (that) they didn't get married.
It's a wonder (that) you weren't killed.
It's a good thing (thai) you were insured.
I that-clauses after certain adjectives/participles
The construction here is subject + be + adjective/past participle + noun clause:
I am delighted that you passed your exam.
This construction can be used with
(a) adjectives expressing emotion: glad, pleased, relieved, sorry (see 26 P)
(b) adjectives/participles expressing anxiety, confidence etc.: afraid, anxious, aware,
certain, confident, conscious, convinced (see 27). anxious requires that . . . should.
I'm afraid that I can't come till next week.
Are you certain that this is the right road?
345
that-clauses after certain nouns
A that-clause can be placed after a large number of abstract nouns. The most useful of these
are: allegation, announcement, belief, discovery, fact, fear, guarantee, hope,
knowledge, promise, proposal, report, rumour, suggestion, suspicion, proposal and
suggestion require that . . . should,
The announcement that a new airport was to be built nearby aroused immediate opposition.
The proposal/suggestion that shops should open on Sundays led to a heated
discussion.
A report that the area was dangerous was ignored by the residents.
346
Noun clauses as objects of verbs
A that-clauses are possible after a large number of verbs. Some of the most useful are given
below.
acknowledge
find (wh)
recommend
admit
forget (wh)
remark
advise
guarantee
remember (wh)
agree
happen
remind
allege
hear (wh)
request
announce
hope
resolve
appear
imagine (wh)
reveal (wh)
arrange (wh)
imply
say (wh)
ask (wh)
indicate (wh)
see (wh)
assume
inform
seem
assure
insist
show (wh)
A Practical English Grammar
246
beg
know (wh)
state (wh)
believe (wh)
leam
stipulate
command
make out (= state) suggest (wh)
confess
mean
suppose
consider (wh)
notice (wh)
teach
declare
observe
tell (wh)
decide (wh)
occur to + object
think (wh)
demand
order
threaten
demonstrate
perceive
turn out
determine
presume
understand (wh)
discover
pretend
urge
doubt
promise
vow
estimate (wh)
propose
warn
expect
prove (wh)
wish
fear
realize (wh)
wonder (wh)
feel
recognize
and other verbs of communication, e.g. complain, deny, explain etc.
(see 316 C).
wh: see E below.
C
347
2
Examples
They alleged/made out that they had been unjustly dismissed. He assumes that we agree
with him. I can prove that she did it.
Most of the above verbs can also take another construction (see chapters 23-6). Note
however that a verb + that-ctause does not necessarily have the same meaning as the same
verb + infinitive/gerund/present participle: He saw her answering the letters means 'He
watched her doing this' but He saw that she answered the letters could mean either 'He
noticed that she did this' or 'He made sure by supervision that she did this'.
appear, happen, occur, seem, turn out require it as subject:
It appears/seems that we have come on the wrong day.
If occurred to me that he might be lying.
It turned out that nobody remembered the address.
D that + subject + should can be used after agree, arrange, be anxious, beg, command, decide,
demand, determine, be determined, order, resolve and urge instead of an infinitive construction,
and after insist and suggest instead of a gerund:
They agreed/decided that a statue should be put up.
He urged that the matter should go to arbitration.
He suggested that a reward should be offered. (See 235, 302 E.)
Verbs in section A marked '(wh)' can also be followed by noun clauses beginning with wh-words:
what, when, where, who, why, or with how:
He asked where he was to go.
They'll believe whatever you tell them.
I forget who told me this.
Have you heard how he is getting on?
I can't think why he left his wife.
I wonder when he will pay me back.
so and not representing a that-clause
A After believe, expect, suppose, think and after it appears/seems:
Will Tom be at the party? -- I expect so/suppose so/think so = I think he will.
For the negative we use:
A negative verb with so:
Will the scheme be a success? ~ I don't believe so/expect so/suppose so/think so.
Are they making good progress? ~ It doesn't seem so.
Or an affirmative verb with not:
It won't take long, will it? ~ No, I suppose not or
I don't suppose so.
The plane didn't land in Calcutta, did it? ~ I believe not or
I don't believe so.
A Practical English Grammar
247
B
so and not can be used similarly after hope and be afraid (= be sorry to say):
Is Peter coming with us? ~ I hope so.
Will you have to Ray duly on this? ~ I'm afraid so.
The negative here is made with an affirmative verb + not:
Have you got a work permit? ~ I'm afraid not.
C
so and not can be used after say and tell + object:
How do you know there is going to be a demonstration? ~ Jack said so/Jack told me so.
I told you so! can mean 'I told you that this was the case/that this would happen'. This usually
annoys the person addressed. For tell the only negative form is negative verb + so:
Tom didn't tell me so.
For say there are two negative forms, but the meaning is not the same:
Tom didn't say so = Tom didn't say that there would be a demonstration.
Tom said not = Tom said there wouldn't be a demonstration.
D
if + so/not
so/not after if can replace a previously mentioned/understood subject + verb:
Will you be staying another night? If so (= If you are), we can give you a better room. If not (= If you
aren't), could you be out of your room by 12:00?
if so/not here usually represents a clause of condition as shown above, but for if so, see also
338 A.
A Practical English Grammar
248
36
348
Numerals, dates, and weights and measures
Cardinal numbers (adjectives and pronouns)
1 one
2 two
3 three
4 four
5 five
6 six
7 sewn
8 eight
9 nine
10 ten
11 eleven
12 twelve
13 thirteen
14 fourteen
15 fifteen
16 sixteen
17 seventeen
18 eighteen
19 nineteen
20 twenty
400 four hundred
5,000 five thousand
21 twenty-one
22 twenty-two
23 twenty-three
24 twenty-four
25 twenty-five
26 twenty-six
27 twenty-seven
28 twenty-eight
29 twenty-nine
30 thirty
31 thirty-one etc.
40 forty
50 fifty
60 sixty
70 seventy
80 eighty
90 ninety
100 a hundred
1,000 a thousand
1,000,000 a million
140 a/one hundred and forty
1,006 a/one thousand and six
260,127 two hundred and sixty thousand, one hundred and twenty-seven
349
Points to notice about cardinal numbers
A
When writing in words, or reading, a number composed of three or more figures we place and
before the word denoting tens or units:
713 seven hundred and thirteen
5,102 five thousand, one hundred and two but
6,100 six thousand, one hundred (no tens or units) and is used similarly with hundreds of
thousands:
320,410 three hundred and twenty thousand, four hundred and ten and hundreds of millions:
303.000,000 three hundred and three million
a is more usual than one before hundred, thousand, million etc, when these numbers stand
alone or begin an expression:
100 a hundred 1,000 a thousand
100,000 a hundred thousand
We can also say a hundred and one, a hundred and two etc. up to a hundred and ninety-nine
and a thousand and one etc. up to a thousand and ninety-nine. Otherwise we use one, not a
(see above). So:
1,040 a/one thousand and forty but
1,140 one thousand, one hundred and forty
B
C The words hundred, thousand, million and dozen. when used of a definite number, are never
made plural:
six hundred men ten thousand pounds two dozen eggs If however, these words are used
loosely, merely to convey the idea of a large number, they must be made plural:
hundreds of people thousands of birds dozens of times Note also that in this case the
preposition of is placed after hundreds, thousands etc.
of is not used with definite numbers except before the/them/ these/those or possessives:
so: of the blue ones ten of these four of Tom's brothers
D Numbers composed of four or more figures are divided into groups of three as shown above.
Decimals are indicated by '•', which is read 'point':
10.92 ten point nine two
A zero after a decimal point is usually read 'nought':
8.04 eight point nought four
But 'o' and 'zero' would also be possible.
350
Ordinal numbers (adjectives and pronouns)
first
second
third
fourth
eleventh
twelfth
thirteenth
fourteenth
A Practical English Grammar
twenty-first
twenty-second
twenty-third
twenty-fourth
thirty-first etc.
fortieth
fiftieth
sixtieth
249
fifth
sixth
seventh
eighth
ninth
tenth
fifteenth
sixteenth
seventeenth
eighteenth
nineteenth
twentieth
twenty-fifth
twenty-sixth
twenty-seventh
twenty-eighth
twenty-ninth
thirtieth
seventieth
eightieth
ninetieth
hundredth
thousandth
millionth
When writing in words or reading fractions other than ½ (a half) and ¼ (a quarter), we use a
combination of cardinal and ordinal numbers:
1/5 a/one fifth 1/10 a/one tenth
(a is more usual than one)
3/5 three fifths 7/10 seven tenths
A whole number + a fraction can be followed directly by a plural noun:
2 ¼ miles == two and a quarter miles
½ (half) can be followed directly by a noun but other fractions require of before a noun:
half a second but a quarter of a second (See also 2 E.)
half + of can also be used, but the of is optional:
Half (of) my earnings go in tax.
351
Points to notice about ordinal numbers
A Notice the irregular spelling of fifth, eighth, ninth and twelfth.
B When ordinal numbers are expressed in figures the last two letters of the written word must
be added (except in dates):
first = 1st
twenty-first = 21st
nd
second = 2
forty-second = 42nd
rd
third = 3
sixty-third = 63rd
fourth = 4th
eightieth = 80th
C In compound ordinal numbers the rule about and is the same as for compound cardinal
numbers: 101st = the hundred and first.
The article the normally precedes ordinal numbers:
the sixtieth day the fortieth visitor
Titles of kings etc. are written in Roman figures:
Charles V James III Elizabeth II
But in spoken English we use the ordinal numbers preceded by the:
Charles the Fifth
James the Third
Elizabeth the Second
352
Dates
The days of the week
Sunday (Sun.)
Monday (Mm.)
Tuesday (Tues.)
Wednesday (Wed.)
Thursday (Thurs.)
Friday (Fri.)
Saturday (Sat.)
B
The months of the year
January (Jan.)
July
February (Feb.) August (Aug.)
March (Mar.)
September (Sept.)
April (Apr.)
October (Oct.)
May
November (Nov.)
June
December (Dec.)
Days and months are always written with capital letters. Dates are expressed by ordinal
numbers, so when speaking we say:
March the tenth, July the fourteenth etc. or the tenth of March etc.
They can, however, be written in a variety of ways; e.g. March the tenth could be written:
March 10 10 March
10th of March
March 10th
10th March
March the 10th
The year
When reading or speaking we use the term hundred but not thousand. The year 1987 would
be read as nineteen hundred and eighty-seven or nineteen eighty-seven.
Years before the Christian era are followed by the letters BC (= Before Christ) and years
dating from the Christian era are occasionally preceded by the letters AD (= Anno Domini, in
A Practical English Grammar
250
the year of the Lord). The former are read in either way: 1500 BC would be read as one
thousand five hundred BC or fifteen hundred BC.
353
Weights, length and liquid measure
A
Weights
The English weights table is as follows:
IS ounces (oz.) = 1 pound (Ib.)
14 Rounds
= 1 stow (st.)
8 stone
= 1 hundredweight (cict.)
20 hundredweight = 1 ton
1 pound
== 0-454 kilogram (kg) 2-2 pounds
= 1 kilogram 2.204-6 tbs
metric tonne
Plurals
ounce, pound and ton can take a in the plural when they are used as
nouns, stone and hundredweight do not take s: e.g. we say six
Round of sugar or six pounds of sugar, but ten hundredweight of coal has
no alternative.
When used in compound adjectives these terms never take a:
a ten-ton lorry kilo or kilogram usually take s in the plural when used as nouns:
two kilos of apples or two kilograms of apples
=1
B
Length
The English table of length is as follows:
12 inches (in.) = 1 foot (ft.)
3 feet
= 1 yard (yd.)
1,760 yards
= 1 mile (m.)
1 inch
= 2.54 centimetres (cm)
1 yard
= 0.914 metre (m)
1 mile
= 1.609 kilometres (km)
Plurals
When there is more than one inch/mite/centimetre we normally use the
plural form of these words:
one inch, ten inches one mile, four miles
one centimetre, five centimetres
When there is more than one foot we can use either foot or feet. feet is the more usual when
measuring heights. We can say;
six foot tall or six feet tall two foot long or two feet long When used in compound adjectives
the above forms never take the plural form: a two-mile walk, a six-inch ruler.
C
Liquid measure
2 pints (Rt.) = 1 quart (qt.)
4 quarts
= 1 gallon (gal.)
1 pint = 0.568 litre (I)
1 gallon = 4.55 litres
D Traditionally British measurements have been made in ounces, inches, pints etc. but there is
now a gradual move towards the metric system.
A Practical English Grammar
251
37
Spelling rules
For noun plurals, see also 12. For verb forms, see also 165, 172, 175.
354
Introduction
Vowels are: a e i o u
Consonants are: b c d f g h j k l m n p q r s t v w x y z
A suffix is a group of letters added to the end of a word:
beauty, beautiful (ful is the suffix.)
355
A
B
D
356
Doubling the consonant
Words of one syllable having one vowel and ending in a single consonant double the
consonant before a suffix beginning with a vowel:
hit + ing = hitting but keep, keeping (two vowels)
knit + ed = knitted
help, helped (two consonants)
run + er = runner
love, lover (ending in a vowel) qu here is considered as one
consonant: quit, quitting. When the final consonant is w, x or y it does not double:
row + ed -= rowed box + ing = boxing
Two- or three-syllable words ending in a single consonant following a single vowel double the
final consonant when the stress falls on the last syllable. (The stressed syllable is in bold
type.)
acquit + ed = acquitted but murmur + ed = murmured begin + er -= beginner
answer +
er = answerer deter + ed == deterred
orbit + ing = orbiting recur + ing = recurring
focus + ed, however, can be spelt focused orfocussed and bias + ed can
be spelt biased or biassed.
C The final consonant of handicap, kidnap, worship is also doubled:
handicap, handicapped worship, worshipped kidnap, kidnapped
Words ending in 1 following a single vowel or two vowels pronounced
separately usually double the 1:
appal, appalled duel, duellist
repel, repellent cruel, cruelly
model, modelling
quarrel, quarrelling dial, dialled
refuel, refuelled
signal, signalled distil, distiller
Omission of a final e
A Words ending in e following a consonant drop the e before a suffix beginning with a vowel:
believe + er = believer
love + ing = losing
move + able = movable
But riye and singe keep their final e before ing to avoid confusion with die and sing:
dye, dyeing singe, singeing age keeps its e before ing except in American English:
age, ageing
likable can also be spelt likeable. Words ending in ce or ge sometimes retain the e. See 357.
B A final e is retained before a suffix beginning with a consonant:
engage, engagement fortunate, fortunately
hope. hopeful immediate, immediately
sincere, sincerely But the e m able/ible is dropped in the adverb form:
comfortable, comfortably incredible, incredibly The final e is also dropped in the following
words:
argue, argument due, duly
judge, judgement or judgment true, truly
whole, wholly (notice the double 1 here)
C Words ending in ee do not drop an e before a suffix:
agree, agreed, agreeing, agreement foresee, foreseeing, foreseeable
357
Words ending in ce and ge
A Practical English Grammar
252
A
358
Words ending in ce or ge retain the e before a suffix beginning with a, o or u:
courage, courageous
peace, peaceful
manage, manageable
replace, replaceable
outrage, outrageous
trace, traceable
This is done to avoid changes in pronunciation, because c and g are generally pronounced
soft before e and i, but hard before a, o or u.
B Words ending in ce change the e to i before ous:
grace, gracious
space, spacious
malice, malicious
vice, vicious
The suffix ful
When full is added to a word the second l is dropped:
beauty + full = beautiful (but note adverb form beautifully)
use + full = useful (but note adverb form usefully)
If the word to which the suffix is added ends in ll the second I is dropped here also: skill + full
= skilful.
Note full + fill = fulfil.
359
Words ending in y
Words ending in y following a consonant change the y to i before any suffix except ing:
carry + ed = earned
but
carry + ing = carrying
happy + !y = happily
hurry + ing = hurrying
sunny + er = sunnier y following a vowel does not change:
obey + ed = obeyed play + er = player For plural forms of nouns, see 12.
360
ie and ei
The normal rule is that i comes before e except after c:
believe, sieve but deceive, receipt There are however the following exceptions:
beige
feint
heir
reign
their
counterfeit foreign inveigh
rein
veil
deign
forfeit
inveigle
seize
vein
eiderdown freight
leisure
skein weigh
eight
heifer
neigh
sleigh weight
either
height
neighbour sleight weir
feign
heinous neither
surfeit weird
361
Hyphens
A Compound words are formed by linking two or more words to make one unit. We can write
the compound:
(a) as one word: bystander, hairdresser, teacup
(b) as two or more words: amusement arcade, post office
(c) with a hyphen: launching-pad, lay-by, tooth-brush
It is impossible in most cases to give a firm rule on when a hyphen should be used. When a
compound has become familiar through constant use, the hyphen can be omitted: layby,
toothbrush. This, however, does not always happen and a native English writer is quite
capable of writing toothbrush, tooth brush or tooth-brush at different times.
B
If the compound is formed of monosyllables, it is more likely to be written as one word. In
cases of doubt it is better to omit hyphens or consult a modem dictionary.
Hyphens are necessary;
(a) when pronunciation or meaning might be unclear without them:
co-operate
re-cover (= cover again)
(b) when words form a compound in a particular sentence:
a do-it-yourself shop
A Practical English Grammar
253
a go-as-you-please railway ticket
(c) in adjective phrases dealing with age, size, weight and duration of time:
a five-year-old child
a ten-ton vehicle
a six-foot wall
a five-minute interval
Note that the compound is not in the plural form: no s. Adverb/participle compounds used as
adjectives are commonly hyphenated, especially when there is a danger of
misunderstanding:
low-flying aircraft
quick-dissolving sugar
C
Hyphens are used in a temporary way to divide a word at the end of a line. The
division must be made at a natural break in the word, i.e. between syllables;
dis-cauraged
look-ing
inter-val
A monosyllable should not be divided.
31
Indirect speech
307
Direct and indirect (or reported) speech
There are two ways of relating what a person has said: direct and indirect.
In direct speech we repeat the original speaker's exact words:
He said, 'I have lost my umbrella.'
Remarks thus repeated are placed between inverted commas, and a ' comma or colon is
placed immediately before the remark. Direct speech
is found in conversations in books, in plays, and in quotations.
In indirect speech we give the exact meaning of a remark or a speech, without necessarily
using the speaker's exact words:
He said (that) he had lost his umbrella.
There is no comma after say in indirect speech. that can usually be omitted after say and tell
+ object. But it should be kept after other verbs: complain, explain, object, point out,
protest etc. Indirect speech is normally used when conversation is reported verbally, though
direct speech is sometimes employed here to give a more dramatic effect.
When we turn direct speech into indirect, some changes are usually necessary. These are
most easily studied by considering statements, questions, and commands separately.
308
Statements in indirect speech: tense changes necessary
A Indirect speech can be introduced by a verb in a present tense: He says that. . . This is usual
when we are:
(a) reporting a conversation that is still going on
(b) reading a letter and reporting what it says
(c) reading instructions and reporting them
(d) reporting a statement that someone makes very often, e.g. Tom
says that he'll never get married.
When the introductory verb is in a present, present perfect or future
tense we can report the direct speech without any change of tense:
PAUL (phoning from the station): I'm trying to get a taxi.
ANN (to Mary, who is standing beside her): Paul says he is trying to
get a taxi.
B But indirect speech is usually introduced by a verb in the past tense. Verbs in the direct
speech have then to be changed into a corresponding past tense. The changes are shown in
the following table. (The that has been omitted in the last five examples.)
Direct speech
Simple present
‘I never ml meat.' he explained
Present continuous
'I'm waiting/or Ann.' he said
Present perfect
A Practical English Grammar
Indirect speech
Simple past
= He explained that he never ate meat.
Past continuous
= He said (thai) he was waiting for Ann.
Past perfect
254
I have found a flat,' he said
Present perfect continuous
Hesaid, 'I've been waiting forages'
Simple past
I took it home with me,' she said
Future
He said, I will/shall be in Paris m
Monday'
Future continuous
'I will/shall be using the car myself
on the 24th,' she said
But note,
Conditional
I said, 7 would/should like to see it'
= He said (that) he had found a flat.
Past perfect continuous
= He said he had been waiting for ages.
Past perfect
= She said she had taken it home with her.
Conditional
= He said he would be in Paris cm
Monday.
Conditional continuous
= She said she'd be using the car herself
on the 24th.
Conditional
= I said I would/should like to see it.
(No tense change. See also 227.)
C
Note on I/we shall/should
'I/we shall' normally becomes he/she/they would in indirect speech:
I shall be 21 tomorrow,' said Bill = Bill said he would be 21 the following day. But if the
sentence is reported by the original speaker, 'I/we shall' can become either I/we should or
I/we would, would is the more common.
Similarly 'I/we should' usually becomes he/she/they would in indirect speech:
'If I had the instruction manual I should/would know what to do,'
said Bill =
Bill said that if he had the instructions he would know what to do. But if the sentence is
reported by the original speaker 'I/we should' can either remain unchanged or be reported by
would- See last example in B above.
309
Past tenses sometimes remain unchanged
A In theory the past tense changes to the past perfect, but in spoken English it is often left
unchanged, provided this can be done without causing confusion about the relative times of the
actions. For example, He said. 'I loved her' must become He said he had loved her as
otherwise there would be a change of meaning. But He said, 'Ann arrived on Monday' could be
reported He said Ann arrived/had arrived on Monday.
B The past continuous tense in theory changes to the past perfect continuous but in practice
usually remains unchanged except when it refers to a completed action:
She said, 'We were thinking of selling the house but we have decided
not to' =
She said that they had been thinking of selling the house but had
decided not to. But He said, 'When I saw them they were playing tennis' =
He said that when he saw them they were playing tennis.
C In written English past tenses usually do change to past perfect but there are the following
exceptions:
1 Past/Past continuous tenses in time clauses do not normally change:
He said, 'When we were living/lived in Paris . . .' =
He said that when they were living in Paris . . . The main verb of such sentences can either
remain unchanged or become the past perfect:
He said, 'When we were living/lived in Paris we often saw Paul' =
fie said that when they were living/lived in Paris they often saw/had
often seen Paul.
2 A past tense used to describe a state of affairs which still exists when the speech is reported
remains unchanged:
She said, 'I decided not to buy the house because it was on a main road' = She said that she
had decided not to buy the house because it was on a main road.
310
Unreal past tenses (subjunctives) in indirect speech
A
Unreal past tenses after wish, would rather/sooner and it is time
A Practical English Grammar
255
do not change:
'We wish we didn't have to take exams.' said the children = The children said they
wished they didn't have to take exams.
'Bill wants to go alone,' said Ann, 'but I'd rather he went with a group' = Ann said that
Bill wanted to go alone but that she 'd rather he went with a group.
'It's time we began planning our holidays,' he said = He said that it was time they began
planning their holidays.
B
I/he/she/we/they had better remains unchanged, you had better can remain unchanged or
be reported by advise + object + infinitive (see 120):
'The children had better go to bed early,' said Tom = Tom said that the children had
better go to bed early.
'You'd better not drink the water,' she said = She advised/warned us not to drink the water.
C
Conditional sentences types 2 and 3 remain unchanged (see 229):
'If my children were older I would emigrate,' he said = He said that if his children were older he would
emigrate.
311
C
D
E
F
G
312
A
might, ought to, should, would, used to in indirect statements
A might remains unchanged except when used as a request form:
He said, 'Ann might ring today' = He said that Ann might ring (that day).
But 'You might post these for me' he said = He asked me to post them for him. (See 285 for
requests.)
B ought to/should for obligation or assumption remains unchanged:
'They ought to/should widen this road,' I said = I said that they ought to/should widen the
road. I said,
'I should be back by six' (I assume I will be) = I said I should be back by six.
But you ought to/you should, if used to express advice rather than obligation, can be reported
by advise + object + infinitive, you must can also express advice and be reported similarly.
'You ought to/should/must read the instructions,' said Ann = Ann advised/urged/warned me to
read the instructions.
The advice form 'Ifl were you I should/would . . .' is normally reported by advise + object +
infinitive:
'If I were you I'd wait,'I said = I advised him to waif,
The request form 'I should/would be (very) grateful if you would . . .' is normally reported by
ask + object + infinitive:
'I'd be very grateful if you 'd keep me informed,' he said = He asked me to keep him informed.
would in statements doesn't change. But see 284 for would in requests etc.
used to doesn't change:
'I know the place well because I used to live here,' he explained = He explained thai he knew
the place well because he used to live there.
(For could, see 312; for must, see 325.)
could in indirect statements
(For could interrogative, see 283-4.)
could for ability
1 could for present ability does not change:
'I can't/couldn't stand on my head.' he said = He said he couldn't stand on his head.
2 could for future ability can remain unchanged or be reported by would be able:
He said, 'I could do it tomorrow' = He said he could do it/would be able to do it the next
day.
could in type 2 conditional sentences is reported similarly:
'If I had the tools I could mend it,' he said = He said that if he had the tools he
could/would be able to mend it. would be able here implies that the supposition may be
fulfilled. (Perhaps he'll be able to borrow tools.)
could in type 3 conditional sentences is reported unchanged.
could for past ability can remain unchanged or be reported by had been able:
A Practical English Grammar
256
B
313
‘I could read when I was three.' she boasted = She boasted that she could/had been
able to read when she was three.
could for permission
In type 2 conditional sentences could can remain unchanged or be reported by would be
allowed to:
'If I paid my fine I could walk out of prison today,' he said = He said that if he paid his fine he
could/would be allowed to walk etc.
could in the past can remain unchanged or be reported by was/were allowed to or had been
allowed to:
He said, 'When I was a boy I could stay up as long as I liked' = He said that when he was a
boy he could/was allowed to stay up or He said that as a boy he was/had been allowed etc.
Indirect speech: pronoun and adjective
Pronouns and possessive adjectives usually change from first or second to third person
except when the speaker is reporting his own words:
He said, 'I've forgotten the combination of my safe' = He said that he had forgotten the
combination of his safe.
I said, 'I like my new house' = I said that I liked my new house, (speaker reporting his
own words)
Sometimes a noun must be inserted to avoid ambiguity: Tom said. 'He cane in through the
window' would not normally be reported Tom said he had come in through the window as this
might imply that Tom himself had come in this way; but if we use a noun there can be no
confusion:
Tom said that the man/burglar/cat etc, had come in . . .
Pronoun changes may affect the verb:
He says. 'I know her' = He says he knows her.
He says, '! shall be there' = He says that he will be there.
B this and these
this used in time expressions usually becomes that:
He said, 'She is coming this week' =
He said that she was coming that week. Otherwise this and that used as adjectives usually
change to the:
He said, 'I bought this pearl/these pearls for my mother' =
He said that he had bought the peart/pearls for his mother. this, these used as pronouns can
become it, they/them:
He showed me two bullets. 'I found these embedded in the panelling,'
he said =
He said he had found them embedded in the panelling.
He said, 'We will discuss this tomorrow' = He said that they would discuss it/the waiter
the next day. this, these (adjectives or pronouns), used to indicate choice or to
distinguish some things from others, can become the one(s) near him etc., or the
statement can be reworded:
'I'll have this (one),' he said to me = He said he would have the one near him or
He pointed to/touched/showed me the one he wanted.
314
Expressions of time and place in indirect speech
A
Adverbs and adverbial phrases of time change as follows:
Direct
today
yesterday
the day before yesterday
tomorrow
the day after tomorrow
next week/year etc.
last week/year etc.
A Practical English Grammar
Indirect
that day
the day before
two days before
the next day/the following day
in two days' time
the following week/year etc.
the previous week/year etc.
257
a year etc. ago
a year before/the previous year
'I saw her the day before yesterday,' he said = He said he'd seen her two days before.
'I'll do it tomorrow,' he promised = He promised that he would do it the next day.
'I'm starting the day after tomorrow, mother.' he said = He told his mother that he was
starting in two days' time.
She said, 'My father died a year ago' = She said that her father had died a year before/the previous
year.
B
But if the speech is made and reported on the same day these time changes are not
necessary:
At breakfast this morning he said. ‘I’ll be very busy today' = At breakfast this morning he said that he
would be very busy today.
C
Logical adjustments are of course necessary if a speech is reported one/two days after it is
made. On Monday Jack said to Tom:
I'm leaving the day after tomorrow.
If Tom reports this speech on the next day (Tuesday) he will probably say:
Jack said he was leaving tomorrow.
If he reports it on Wednesday, he will probably say:
Jack said he was leaving today.
D
here can become there but only when it is clear what place is meant:
At the station he said, ‘I’ll be here again tomorrow' = He said that he 'd be there again
the next day.
Usually here has to be replaced by some phrase:
She said, 'You can sit here, Tom' = She told Tom that he could sit beside her etc. But
He said, 'Come here, boys' would normally be reported:
He called the boys.
315
Infinitive and gerund constructions in indirect speech
A
agree/refuse/offer/promise/threaten + infinitive can sometimes be used instead of say
(that):
ANN: Would you wait half an hour? TOM: All right = Tom agreed to wait or Tom said he
would wait.
ANN: Would you lend me another £50?
TOM: No. I won't lend you any more money = Tom refused to lend her any more money or
Tom said thai he wouldn't lend etc.
PAUL: I'll help you if you like, Ann = Paul offered to help her or
Paul said that he'd help her. (See also shall I?, 318.)
ANN: I'll pay you back next week. Really I will. = Ann promised to pay him back the following
week or
Ann said that she would pay him back or
Ann assured him that she would pay him back.
KIDNAPPERS: If you don't pay the ransom at once we'll kill your daughter = The kidnappers
threatened to kill his daughter if he didn 't Ray the ransom at once or The kidnappers said
that they would kill etc:
(For object + infinitive constructions, see 320.)
B
accuse . . . of/admit/apologize for/deny/insist on + gerund can sometimes be used instead
of say (that):
TOM took the money!' might be reported
He accused me of taking the money.
'I stole/didn't steal it' might be reported
I admitted/denied stealing it.
'I'm sorry I'm late,' he said might be reported
He apologized for being late or
He said,he was sorry he was tale.
BILL: Let me pay/or myself.
TOM: Certainly not! I'll pay! might be reported
Tom insisted on paying.
A Practical English Grammar
258
316
say, tell and alternative introductory verbs
A
say and tell with direct speech
1 say can introduce a statement or follow it:
Tom said, 'I've just heard the news' or 'I've just heard the news,' Tom said. Inversion of say
and noun subject is possible when say follows the
statement:
'I've just heard the news,' said Tom. say + to + person addressed is possible, but this phrase
must follow the direct statement; it cannot introduce it:
'I'm leaving at once,' Tom said to me. Inversion is not possible here.
2 tell requires the person addressed:
Tell me. He told us. I'll tell Tom. except with tell lies/stories/the truth, when the person
addressed need not be mentioned:
He told (me) lies. I'll tell (you) a story. tell used with direct speech must be placed after the
direct statement:
'I'm leaving at once,' Tom told me.
Inversion is not possible with tell.
B
say and tell with indirect speech
Indirect statements are normally introduced by say, or tell + object. say 4- to + object is
possible but much less usual than tell + object:
He said he'd just heard the news.
He told me that he'd just heard the news.
Note also tell . . . how/about:
He told us how he had crossed the mountains.
He told us about crossing the mountains.
He told us about his journeys.
(For say and tell with indirect commands, see 320-1.)
Other useful verbs are:
add*
admit*
answer*
argue*
assure + object
boast*
complain*
deny*
explain*
grumble*
object*
observe*
point out
promise*
protest*
remark*
remind + object
reply*
These can be used with direct or indirect speech. With direct speech they follow direct
statements;
'It won't cost more,' Tom assured us.
Starred verbs can be inverted, provided the subject is a noun:
'But it will take longer,' Bill objected/objected Bill.
'It'll cost too much,' Jack grumbled/grumbled Jack. They can all introduce indirect statements.
that should be placed after the verb:
Tom assured us that it wauldn 't cost more. But Bill objected/pointed
out that it would take longer.
D
murmur, mutter, shout, stammer, whisper can precede or follow direct statements or
questions. With noun subjects the verb can be inverted as shown above:
'You're late,' whispered Tom/Tom whispered.
They can introduce indirect statements, that is usually necessary:
Tom whispered that we were late.
There are, of course, a lot of other verbs describing the voice or the tone of voice, e.g. bark,
growl, roar, scream, shriek, snarl, sneer, yell. But these are more common with direct than
indirect speech.
317
Questions in indirect speech
Direct question: He said, 'Where is she going?'
Indirect question: He asked where she was going.
A Practical English Grammar
259
When we turn direct questions into indirect speech, the following changes are necessary.
Tenses, pronouns and possessive adjectives, and adverbs of time and place change as in
statements.
The interrogative form of the verb changes to the affirmative form. The question mark (?) is
therefore omitted in indirect questions:
He said, 'Where does she live?' = He asked where she lived.
With affirmative verb questions (see 55) this change is obviously not necessary:
'Who lives next door?' he said = He asked who lived next door.
'What happened?' she said = She asked what had happened.
If the introductory verb is .say, it must be changed to avert of inquiry, e.g. ask, inquire,
wonder, want to know etc.:
He said, 'Where is the station?' = He asked where the station was.
ask, inquire, wonder can also be used in direct speech. They are then usually placed at the
end of the sentence:
'Where is the station?' he inquired.
C ask can be followed by the person addressed (indirect object):
Heasked, 'What have you got in your bag?' =
He asked (me) what I had got in my bag. But inquire, wonder, want to know cannot take an
indirect object, so if we wish to report a question where the person addressed is mentioned,
we must use ask:
He said. 'Mary, when is the next train?' =
He asked Mary when the next train was. If we use inquire, wonder or want to know we must
omit Mary.
D If the direct question begins with a question word (when, where, who, how, why etc.) the
question word is repeated in the indirect question:
Hesaid, 'Why didn't you put on the brake?' =
He asked (her) why she hadn 'f put on the brake.
She said, 'What do you want?' =
She asked (them) what they wanted.
E If there is no question word, if or whether must be used:
7s anyone there?' he asked = He asked if/whether anyone was there.
1 Normally we can use either if and whether, if is the more usual:
'Do you know Bill?' he said =
He asked if/whether I knew Bill.
'Did you see the accident?' the policeman asked =
The policeman asked if/whether I had seen the accident.
2 whether can emphasize that a choice has to be made:
'Do you want to go by air or sea?' the travel agent asked = The travel agent asked whether I
wanted to go by air or by sea. Note whether or not:
'Do you want to insure your luggage or not?' he asked == He asked whether or not I wanted
to insure my luggage or He asked if I wanted to insure my luggage or not.
3 whether + infinitive is possible after wonder, want to know:
'Shall/Should 1wait for them or go on?' he wondered =
He wondered whether to wait for them or go on or
He wondered whether he should wait for them or go on.
inquire + whether + infinitive is possible but less usual.
(For whether + infinitive, see also 242 B.)
4 whether is neater if the question contains a conditional clause as otherwise there would be
two ifs:
'If you get the job will you move to York?' Bill asked = Bill asked whether, if I got the job, I'd
move to York.
Questions beginning shall I/we? in indirect speech Questions beginning shall I/we? can be of
four kinds.
Speculations or requests for information about a future event:
'Shall I ever see them again?' he wondered. 'When shall I know the result of the test?' she
asked.
These follow the ordinary rule about shall/will. Speculations are
usually introduced by wonder:
He wondered if he would ever see them again. She asked when she would know the result of
the test.
A Practical English Grammar
260
Requests for instructions or advice:
'What shall I do with it?' = 'Tell me what to do with it.' These are expressed in indirect speech
by ask, inquire etc., with should or the be + infinitive construction. Requests for advice are
normally reported by should:
'Shall we post it. sir?' he said =
He asked the customer if they were to post/if they should post if.
'What shall I say, mother?' she said =
She asked her mother what she should say. (request for advice) When a choice is required
we normally use whether in indirect speech. whether + infinitive is sometimes possible (see
also 317 E):
'Shall I lock the car or leave it unlocked?' he said =
He asked whether he should/was to lock the car or leave it
unlocked or He asked whether to lock the car etc.
Offers:
'Shall I bring you some tea?' could be reported
He offered to bring me some tea.
Note that 'Wouldyou like me to bring you some tea?' and 'I'll bnngyou some tea if you like'
could also be reported by offer.
Suggestions:
'Shall we meet at the theatre?' could be reported He suggested meeting at the theatre.
Questions beginning will you/would you/could you?
These may be ordinary questions, but may also be requests, invitations, or, very occasionally,
commands (see 284. 286, 320):
He said. 'Will you be there tomorrow?' (ordinary question) =
He asked if she would be there the next day.
'Will you stand still!'he shouted = He shouted at me to standstill''^!
He told/ordered me to stand still.
'Wouldyou like to live in New York?' he asked =
He asked if I would tike to live in New York.
'Wilt/Would you file these letters, please?' he said =
He asked/told me to/lie the Setters.
'Would you like a lift?' said Ann = Ann offered me a lift. 'Would you like to come round/Could
yw come round for a drink?'
he said =
He invited me (to come) round for a drink.
'Could you live on £25 a week?' he asked =
He asked if I could live on £25 a week.
'Could/Would you give me a hand?' she said =
She asked us to give her a hand.
'Could/Would you show me the photos?' she said =
She asked me to show her the photos or She asked to see the photos. (For
can/could/may/might + I/we?, see 283. For requests for permission, see 131.)
320 Commands, requests, advice in indirect speech
Direct command: He said, 'Lie down, Tom.'
Indirect command: He told Tom to He down.
Indirect commands, requests, advice are usually expressed by a verb of
comraand/request/advice + object + infinitive (== the object -i- infinitive
construction).
A The following verbs can be used: advise, ask, beg, command,
encourage, entreat, forbid, implore, invite, order, recommend,
remind, request, tell, urge, warn.
(Note that say is not included in this list. For indirect commands/
requests reported by say, see 321.)
Hesaid. 'Get your coat, Tom!' = He told Tom to get his coat. 'You had better hurry, Bill!' she
said = She advised Bill to hurry.
B Negative commands, requests etc. are usually reported by not •+•
infinitive:
'Don't swim out too far, boys,' I said =
I warned/told the boys not to swim out too far. forbid can also be used for prohibitions, but is
more common in the passive than in the active.
A Practical English Grammar
261
C Verbs in A above require object + infinitive, i.e. they must be followed directly by the
person addressed without preposition (see also 89). The person addressed is often not
mentioned in direct commands, requests
etc.: He said, 'Go away!' When reporting such commands/requests therefore we must add a
noun
or pronoun:
He told me/him/her/us/them/the children to go away. ask diners from the other verbs in A in
that it can also be followed directly by the infinitive of certain verbs, e.g. see, speak to, talk to:
He said. 'Could I see Tom, please?' =
He asked to see Tom. (See also 283.) But this is quite different from the ask + object +
infinitive type of request.
Both ask and beg can be followed by the passive infinitive:
'Do. please, send me to a warm climate,' he asked/begged = He asked/begged us to send
him to a warm climate or He asked/begged to be sent to a warm climate.
Examples of indirect commands, requests, advice Note that direct commands are usually
expressed by the imperative, but that requests and advice can be expressed in a variety of
ways (see 283-7):
'If I were you, I'd slop taking tranquillizers,' I said =
I advised him to stop taking tranquillizers. (See 311 D.)
'Why don't you take off your coat?'he said =
He advised me to take off my coat. (See also 287.)
' Would/Could you show me your passport, please?' he said =
He asked me to show him my passport or
He asked me for/He asked to see my passport.
'You might post some letters for me,' said my boss =
My boss asked me to post some letters for him.
'If you 'd just sign the register,' said the receptionist =
The receptionist asked him to sign the register.
'Do sit down.' said my hostess =My hostess asked/invited me to sit down.
'Please, please don't take any risks,' said his wife =
His wife begged/implored him not to take any risks.
'Forget all about this you »g man,' said her parents: 'don't see him '
again or answer his
letters' =
Her parents ordered her to forget all about the young man and told
her not to see him again or answer his letters or
She was ordered to forget all about the young man and forbidden to ._
see him again or
answer his tetters, (passive construction)
'Don't forget to order the wine.' said Mrs Pitt =
Mrs Pitt reminded her husband to order the wine.
'Try again,' said Ann's friends encouragingly =
Ann's friends encouraged her to fry again.
'Go on, apply for the job,'said Jack =
Jack urged/encouraged me to apply for the job.
' You had better not leave your car unlocked,' said my friends;
'there's been a lot of stealing from cars' = '
My friends warned me not to leave my car
unlocked as there had been a lot of stealing from cars.
will you . . . sentences are normally treated as requests and reported by ask:
'Will all persons not travelling please go ashore,' he said = He asked at! persons not
travelling to go ashore. But if a will you sentence is spoken sharply or irritably, and the '
please is omitted, it might be reported by tell or order;
'Will you be quiet!/Be quiet, will you!' he said = He told/ordered us to be quiet.
321
Other ways of expressing indirect commands
A say/tell + subject + be + infinitive:
He said/told me that I was to wait. This is a possible alternative to the tell + infinitive
construction, so that:
He said, 'Don't open the door' could be reported
He told me not to open the door or
A Practical English Grammar
262
fie said that I wasn 't to open the door. The be + infinitive construction is particularly useful in
the following cases:
1 When the command is introduced by a verb in the present tense:
He says, 'Meet me at the station' = He says that we are to meet him at the station. (He tells
us to meet him would be much less likely.)
2 When the command is preceded by a clause (usually of time or condition):
He said, 'If she leaves the house follow her' could be reported He said that if she left the
house I was to follow her. He told me to follow her if she left the house would be equally
possible here but note that if we use the tell + infinitive construction we must change the
order of the sentence so as to put the command first. Sometimes this would result in a rather
confusing sentence. For example, the request If you see Ann tell her to ring me would
become He told me to tell Ann to ring him if I saw her. Such requests can only be reported by
the be + infinitive construction:
He said that if I saw Ann I was to tell her to ring him.
B say/tell (+ that) + subject + should
1 say or tell with a should construction normally indicates advice rather than command:
He said, 'If your brakes are bad don't drive so fast' =
He said/told me that if my brakes were bad I shouldn 't drive so fast
or
He advised me not to drive so fast if my brakes were bad. (Note
change of order here, as with tell + infinitive above.)
2 Advice can also be expressed by advise, recommend and urge + that. . . should. This is
particularly useful in the passive (see 302 E):
'! advise cancelling the meeting.' he said s He advised that the meeting should be cancelled.
3 command and order can also be used with should or a passive infinitive;
'Evacuate the area!' ordered the superintendent =
The superintendent ordered that everyone should lease the area or
ordered that the area should be evacuated or
ordered the area to be evacuated.
4 Note that when an indirect command is expressed by an object + infinitive construction, as
in 320, there is normally the idea that the
person who is to obey the command is addressed directly. But when the command is
expressed by the be + infinitive construction (A above) or by a should construction (B3 above)
the recipient of the command need not necessarily be addressed directly. The command may
be conveyed to him by a third person.
322
let's, let us, let him/them in indirect speech
let's
let's usually expresses a suggestion and is reported by suggest in
indirect speech:
He said, 'Let's leave the case at the station'
would be reported:
He suggested leaving the case at the station or He suggested that they/we should leave the
case at the station.
(See 289 for constructions with suggest.) He said, 'Let's stop now and finish it later'
would be reported:
He suggested stopping then and finishing it later or He suggested that they/we should stop
then and finish it later.
Similarly in the negative:
He said, 'Let's not say anything about it till we hear the facts' = He suggested not saying
anything/saying nothing about it till they heard the facts or He suggested that they shouldn 't
say anything till they heard the facts.
But let's not used alone in answer to an affirmative suggestion is often
reported by some phrase such as opposed the idea/was against
it/objected. So that we could report:
'Let's sell the house,' said Tom. 'Lei's not,' said Ann by Tom suggested selling the house hut
Ann was against it.
(For other suggestion forms, see 289.) ;. let's/let us sometimes expresses a call to action. It is
then usually
A Practical English Grammar
263
reported by urge/advise + object + infinitive (see also 320):
The strike leader said, 'Let's show the bosses that we are united' = The strike leader urged
the workers to show the bosses that they were united.
323
let him/them
In theory let him/them expresses a command. But very often the speaker has no authority
over the person who is to obey the command;
7('s not my business,' said the postman. 'Let the government do
something about it.'
Here, the speaker is not issuing a command but expressing an obligation. Sentences of this
type are therefore normally reported by ought/should:
He said that if wasn 't his business and that the government ought
to/should do something about it.
2 Sometimes, however, let him/them does express a command. It is then usually reported by
say + be + infinitive (see 321):
'Let the boys clear up this mess,' said the headmaster -= The headmaster said that the boys
were to clear up the mess. 'Let the guards'be armed,' he ordered = He ordered that the
guards should be armed.
3 Sometimes let him/them is more a suggestion than a command. In such cases it is usually
reported by suggest, or say + should (see 289):
She said, 'Let them go to their consul. He 'II be able to help them' = She suggested their/them
going to their consul etc. or She suggested that they should go to their consul or She said
that they should go to their consul.
4 let him/them can also indicate the speaker's indifference:
'The neighbours will complain,' said Ann.
'Let them (complain),' said Tom = Tom expressed indifference or
Tom said he didn't mind (if they complained).
C let there be
Here the speaker could be ordering, advising, urging or begging:
'Let there be no reprisals,' said the widow of the murdered man = The widow urged/begged
that there should be no reprisals.
D let is also an ordinary verb meaning allow/permit:
'Let him come with us, mother; I'll take care of him,' I said =
I asked my mother to let him come with us and promised to take care
of him.
323
Exclamations and yes and no
A Exclamations usually become statements in indirect speech. The exclamation mark
disappears.
1 Exclamations beginning What <a). . . or How ... can be reported
(a) by exclaim/say that:
He said, 'What a dreadful idea!' or 'How dreadful.'' = He exclaimed that it was a dreadful
idea/was dreadful
or (b) by give an exclamation of delight/disgust/horror/relief/
surprise etcAlternatively, if the exclamation is followed by an action we can use the
construction (c) with an exclamation of delight/disgust etc. +
he/she etc. + verb.
2 Other types of exclamation, such as Good! Marvellous! Splendid! Heavens! Oh! Ugh! etc.
can be reported as in (b) or (c) above:
'Good!' he exclaimed =
He gave an exclamation of pleasure/satisfaction.
' Ugh!' she exclaimed, and turned the programme off =
With an exclamation of disgust she turned the programme off.
Note also:
A Practical English Grammar
264
He said, 'Thank you!' = He thanked me. ;' He said. 'Curse this fog.'' = He cursed the fog.
He said. 'Good luck!' = He wished me luck.
He said. 'Happy Christmas'.' = He wished me a happy Christmas.
He said, 'Congratulations9' = He congratulated me.
He said, 'Liar!' = He called me a liar.
He said, 'Damn!'etc. = He swore.
The notice said: WELCOME TO WALES.' = '• The notice welcomed visitors to Wales.
ri
yes and no are expressed in indirect speech by subject + appropriate ' auxiliary verb:
He said, 'Can you swim?'and I said'No' = He asked (me) if I could swim and I said I couldn't.
Hesaid, 'Will you have time to do it?' and I said 'Yes' = He asked if I would have time to do it
and I said that I would.
324
Indirect speech: mixed types
Direct speech may consist of statement + question, question + command, command +
statement, or all three together.
Normally each requires its own introductory verb:
'I don't know the way. Do you?' he asked .= ; He said he didn't know the way and asked
her if she did/if she knew it.
'Someone's coming,' he said. 'Get behind the screen' =
He said that someone was coming and told me to get behind the
screen.
'I'm going shopping. Can I get you anything?' she said = '' She said she was going
shopping and asked if she could get me ; anything.
'I can hardly hear the radio,' he said. 'Could you turn it up?' =
He said he could hardly hear the radio and asked her to turn it up.
But sometimes, when the iast clause is a statement which helps to explain the first, we can
use as instead of a second introductory verb:
'You'd better wear a coat. it's very cold out.'he said =. He advised me to wear a coat as it was
very cold out. 'You'd better not walk across the park alone. People have been
mugged there,' he said =
He warned her not to walk across the park alone as people had been mugged there.
Sometimes the second introductory verb can be a participle:
'Please, please, don't drink too much! Remember thatyou'U have to drive home,' she said =
She begged him not to drink too much, reminding him that he 'd have to drive home.
'Let's shop on Friday. The supermarket will be very crowded on Saturday,' she said =
She suggested shopping on Friday, pointing out that the supermarket would be very crowded
on Saturday. (as could be used in both these examples.)
325 must and needn't
A must used for deductions, permanent commands/prohibitions and to express intention
remains unchanged. (For must, expressing advice, see 287 A.)
1 Deductions:
She said, 'I'm always running into him; he must live near here!' a She said that. . . he must
live in the area.
2 Permanent command:
He said, 'This door must be kept locked' =-He said that the door must be kept locked.
3 must used casually to express intention:
He said, ' We must have a party to celebrate this' = He said that they must have a party to
celebrate it.
B must used for obligation can remain unchanged. Alternatively it can be reported by would
have to or had to.
1 I/we must reported by would have to
would have to is used when the obligation depends on some future action, or when the
fulfilment of the obligation appears remote or uncertain, i.e. when must is clearly replaceable
by will have to:
'If the floods get worse we must (will have to) leave the house,' he
said =
If e said that if the floods got worse they would have to leave the
A Practical English Grammar
265
house.
'When it stops snowing we must start digging ourselves out,'
I said =
I said that when it stopped snowing we would have to start digging
ourselves out.
'We must mend the roof properly next year,' he said =
He said that they would have to mend the roof properly the following
year.
7 have just received a letter,' he said. 'I must go home' =
He said that he had just received a letter and would have to go home(But had to would be more usual here if he went at once, i.e. had
to'would imply that he went at once.)
2 I/we must reported by had to
had to is the usual form for obligations where times for fulfilment have been fixed, or plans
made, or when the obligation is fulfilled fairly promptly, or at least by the time the speech is
reported:
He said, 'I must wash my hands' (and presumably did so) =
He said that he had to wash his hands.
Tom said, 'I must be there by nine tomorrow' = { Tom said that he had to be there by nine
the next day. ^would have to would be possible here also but would imply that the ^obligation
was self-imposed and that no outside authority was involved, ; had to could express either an
outside authority (i.e. that someone had ; told him to be there) or a self-imposed obligation.
HAH difficulties about had to/would have to can of course be avoided ,:jby keeping must
unchanged. In both the above examples must could '''have been used instead of had to/would
have to.
you/he/they must is reported similarly:
He said. 'You must start at once' =
He said that she must/had to/would have to start at once. But note that would have to
removes the idea of the speaker's authority:
Tom said. 'I/you want to stay on here you must work harder' =
Twn said that if she wanted to stay on she must/would have to work
harder.
must implies that Tom himself insists on her working harder, would
have to merely implies that this will be necessary.
must I/you/he? can change similarly but as must in the interrogative
usually concerns the present or immediate future it usually becomes
had to:
'Must you go so soon?' I said = I asked him if he had to go so soon.
gfaust not
must not usually remains unchanged, you/he must not remains
.pichanged or is expressed as a negative command (see 320-1):
He said, 'You mustn't tell anyone' = f:- He said that she mustn 't ell/wasn 't to tell anyone
or
He told her not to tell anyone. ',,
needn't
needn't can remain unchanged and usually does. Alternatively it can i,change to didn't have
to/wouldn't have to just as must changes to
•had to/would have to:
He said. 'You needn't wait' = He said that I needn't wait.
I said, 'If you can lend me the money I needn 't go to the bank = i; / said that if he could lend
me the money I needn 't/wouldn 't have to
go to the bank.
He said, '1 needn't be in the office till ten tomorrow morning' •=
He said that he needn't/didn't have to be in the office till ten the next ! morning.
"need I/you/he? behaves exactly in the same ways as must I/you/he? ; i.e. it normally
becomes had to:
'Need I finish my pudding?' asked the small boy = ^ The small boy asked if he had to
finish his pudding.
A Practical English Grammar
266
32
326
Conjunctions
Co-ordinating conjunctions: and, but, both . . . and, or, either ... or, neither . . . nor, not only . .
. but also
These join pairs of nouns/adjectives/adverbs/verbs/phrases/clauses:
He plays squash and rugby.
I make the payments and keep the accounts.
He works quickly and/but accurately.
He is small but strong. She is intelligent but lazy.
We came in first but (we) didn't win the race.
Both men and women were drafted into the army.
Ring Tom or Bill. She doesn 't smoke or drink.
He can't (either) read or write.
You can (either) walk up or take the cable car.
He can neither read nor write.
Not only men but also women were chosen.
327
besides, however, nevertheless, otherwise, so, therefore, still, yet, though
These adverbs/conjunctions can join clauses or sentences and are then often known as
'conjuncts'. But they can also, with the exception of nevertheless and therefore (conjunctions),
be used in other ways and sometimes as other parts of speech. Their position will vary
according to how they are usedA besides (preposition) means 'in addition to'. It precedes a noun/pronoun/gerund:
Besides doing the cooking I look after the garden. besides (adverb) means 'in addition'. It
usually precedes the clause it introduces, but can follow it:
I can't go now; I'm too busy. Besides, my passport is out of date. moreover could replace
besides here in more formal English. anyway or in any case could be used here in more
informal English:
Anyway, my passport's out of date.
B however (adverb of degree, see 41) precedes its adjective/adverb:
You couldn't earn much, however hard you worked. however (conjunction) usually means
'but'. It can precede or follow its clause or come after the first word or phrase:
I'll offer it to Tom. However, he may not want it or
He may 'not want it however or Tom, however, may not want it or
If, however, he doesn't want it. . .
' But when two contrasting statements are mentioned, however can
t; mean'but/nevertheless/all the same':
They hadn 't trained hard, but/however/nevertheless/all the same they won or they won,
however/nevertheless/all the same, (See also 329.)
.• otherwise (adverb) usually comes after the verb:
It must be used in a well-ventilated room. Used otherwise it could be
harmful. otherwise (conjunction) means 'if not/or else':
We must be early; otherwise we won't get a seat. or could also be used here in colloquial
English;
We must be early or (else) see won't get a seat.
so (adverb of degree) precedes its adjective/adverb:
I was so hot that. . . They ran so fast that. . . so (conjunction) precedes its clause:
Our cases were heavy, so we look a taxi.
therefore (conjunction) can be used instead of so in formal English. It can come at the
beginning of the clause or after the first word or phrase; or before the main verb:
There is fog at Heathrow; the plane, therefore, has been diverted/the plane has therefore
been diverted/therefore the plane has been diverted.
••• still and yet can be adverbs of time (see 37):
The children are still up. They haven't had supper yet. '•' still and yet (conjunctions) come at
the beginning of the clauses they introduce.
A Practical English Grammar
267
still (conjunction) means 'admitting that/nevertheless'. yet (conjunction) means 'in spite of
that/all the same/nevertheless'. You aren 't rich; still, you could do something to help him.
They are ugly and expensive; yet people buy them.
though/although normally introduce clauses of concession (see 340):
Though/Although they're expensive, people buy them. though (but not although) can also be
used to link two main clauses. though used in this way means 'but' or 'yet' and is placed
sometimes at the beginning but more often at the end of its clause:
He says he 'II pay, though I don't think he will or
He says he 'II pay; I don 'f think he will, though.
328
Subordinating conjunctions: if, that, though/although, unless, when etc.
Subordinating conjunctions introduce subordinate adverb or noun clauses and are dealt with
in the chapters on the different types of clause.
See chapter 21 for conditional clauses, chapter 33 for purpose clauses
chapter 34 for adverb clauses of reason, result, concession, comparison
and time, and chapter 35 for noun clauses.
Some conjunctions have more than one meaning and may introduce
more than one type of clause.
Pairs and groups of conjunctions which are sometimes confused with
each other or with other parts of speech are dealt with below.
329 though/although and in spite of (preposition phrase), despite (preposition)
Two opposing or contrasting statements, such as He had no qualifications and He got the job,
could be combined as follows:
A With but, however or nevertheless as shown in 327 above:
He had no qualifications but he got the job.
He had no qualifications; however he got the Job/he got the job,
however.
He had no qualifications; nevertheless he got the job.
B With though/although:
He got the job although he had no qualifications. Although he had no qualifications he got the
job.
C With in spite of/despite + noun/pronoun/gerund:
In spite of'having no qualifications he got the job. He got the job in
spite of having no qualifications.
despite = in spite of. It is chiefly used in newspapers and in formal English:
Despite the severe weather conditions all the cars completed the
course.
D Note that though/although requires subject + verb:
Although it was windy . . .
and that in spite of/despite requires noun/pronoun or gerund:
In spite a/the wind . . .
Some more examples:
Although it smelt horrible . . . = In spite of the horrible smell. . . Although it was dangerous . . .
= In spite of the danger . . . Though he was inexperienced . . . = In spite of his
inexperience/his being inexperienced . . .
330
for and because
These conjunctions have nearly the same meaning and very often either can be used. It is,
however, safer to use because, as a clause introduced by for (which we will call a 'forclause') has a more restricted use than a clause introduced by because:
1 A for-clause cannot precede the verb which it explains:
Because it was wet he took a taxi. (for is not possible.)
2 A for-clause cannot be preceded by not, but or any conjunction:
He stole, not because he wanted the money but because he liked stealing. (for not
possible)
3 A for-clause cannot be used in answer to a question:
Why did you do it? ~ I did it because I was angry. (for not possible)
A Practical English Grammar
268
4 A for-clause cannot be a mere repetition of what has been already stated, but always
includes some new piece of information:
He spoke in French. She was angry because he had spoken in
French, (for is not possible.) But She was angry, for she didn 't know French. (Here for is
correct;
because is also possible.)
The reason for these restrictions is that a for-clause does not tell us why a certain action was
performed, buE merely presents a piece of additional information which helps to explain it.
Some examples of for-clauses:
The days were- short, for it was now December. He took the food eagerly, for he had eaten
nothing since dawn. When I saw her in the river I was frightened- For at that point the
currents were dangerous.
In speech a short pause is usually made before a for-clause and in written English this place
is usually marked by a comma, and sometimes, as in the last example above, by a full stop.
because could be used in the above sentences also, though for is better.
331
when, while, as used to express time
A
1
when is used, with simple tenses:
When one action occurs at the same time as another or in the span of another:
When it is wet the buses are crowded.
When we lived in town we often went to the theatre.
2 When one action follows another:
When she pressed the button the lift stopped.
B
as is used:
When the second action occurs before the first is finished:
As / left the house I remembered the key.
This implies that I remembered the key before I had completed the action of leaving the
house; I was probabiy still in the doorway. While I was leaving would have the same meaning
here, but When I left would give the impression that the act of leaving was complete and the
door shut behind me.
2 For parallel actions: He sang as he worked.
3 For parallel development:
As the sun rose the fog dispersed.
As it grew darker if became colder = The darker it grew, the colder it became.
As she came to know him better she relied on him more.
As he became more competent he was given more interesting work.
If we used when here we would lose all idea of simultaneous progression or development.
4 To mean while (= during the time that):
As he stood there he saw two men enter the bar.
But there is no particular advantage in using as here, and while is safer.
332
B
D
as meaning when/while or because/since
A Restricted use of as (= when/while)
as here is chiefly used with verbs indicating action or development. It is not normally used
with the type of verb listed in 168, except when there is an idea of development, as in B3
above. Nor is it normally used with verbs such as live, stay, remain.
as used with the above verbs/types of verb normally means because/since;
As he was tired . . . = Because he was tired . . .
As he knew her well. . . = Because he knew her well. . .
As it contains alcohol. . . = Since/Because it contains alcohol. . .
As he lives near here . . . = Since/Because he lives . . .
C With most verbs, as can be used with either meaning:
As/While he shaved he thought about the coming interview.
As/Because he shaved with a blunt razor he didn't make a very good job of it.
If in doubt here, students should use while or because.
as + noun can mean either when/while or because/since:
A Practical English Grammar
269
As a student he had known great poverty = When he was a student he had known
great poverty.
As a student he gets/got in for half price = Because he is/was a student he gets/got in . . .
As a married man, he has to think of his family = Because/Since he is a married man . . .
as meaning when/while here is usually followed by a perfect tense.
as meaning because/since can be followed by any tense.
as, when, while used to mean although, but, seeing that
as can mean though/although but only in the combination adjective + as + subject + to
be/to seem/to appear:
Tired as he was he offered to carry her = Though he was tired he offered to carry her.
Strong as he was, he couldn't lift it.
while can mean but and is used to emphasize a contrast:
'At sea' means 'on a ship', while 'at the sea' means 'at the seaside'.
Some people waste food while others haven't enough.
while can also mean although and is then usually placed at the beginning of a sentence:
While I sympathize with your point of view I cannot accept it.
when can mean seeing that/although. It is therefore very similar to while, but is chiefly used
to introduce a statement which makes another action seem unreasonable. It is often, though
not necessarily, used with a question:
How can you expect your children to be truthful when you yourself tell lies?
It's not fair to expect her to do all the cooking when she has had no training or
experience.
Do not confuse when and if
When he comes implies that we are sure he will come. If he comes implies that we don't
know whether he will come or not. (For if in conditional sentences, see chapter 21.)
A Practical English Grammar
270
33
334
Purpose
Purpose is normally expressed by the infinitive
Purpose can be expressed by:
A The infinitive alone:
He went to France to learn French. They stopped to ask the way. When there is a personal
object of the main verb, the infinitive may refer to this and not to the subject:
He sen! Tom to the shop Co buy bread. (Tom was to buy the bread.)
E in order or so as + infinitive
in order + infinitive can imply either that the subject wants to perform
the action or that he wants it to happen.
so as + infinitive implies only that the subject wants the action to
happen, in order is, therefore, the more generally useful,
in order or so as are used:
1 With a negative infinitive to express a negative purpose:
He left his gun outside in order/so as not to frighten us.
2 With to be and to have:
She left work early in order/so as to be at home when he arrived. She gave up work in
order/so as to have more time with the children.
3 When the purpose is less immediate:
He is studying mathematics in order/so as to qualify/or a better job. She learnt typing in order
to help her husband with his work.
4 Sometimes in longer sentences, to emphasize that the infinitive indicates purpose:
He was accused of misrepresenting the facts in order/so as to make
the scheme seem feasible.
He took much more trouble over the figures than he usually did in
order/so as to show his new boss what a careful worker he was. (But in order/so as is not
essential and is often omitted.) When the infinitive of purpose precedes the main verb, in
order/so as may be placed first:
In order/So as to show his boss what a careful worker he was, he
took extra trouble over the figures. (But here also in order/so as may be omitted.)
5 When there is a personal object but we want the infinitive to refer unambiguously to the
subject:
He sent his sons to a boarding school in order/so as to have some peace. (He, not his sons,
was going to have some peace.) Compare with:
He sent his sons to a boarding school to team to live in a community.
(Not he but his sons were to learn to live in a community.) But this in order/so as construction
is not very common. It is more usual to say:
He sent his sons to a boarding school because he wanted to have some
peace.
in order (but not so as), used to emphasize that the subject really had
this purpose in mind:
He bought diamonds when he was in Amsterdam! ~ That wasn't surprising. He went to
Amsterdam in order to buy diamonds, (not for any other purpose)
We could also, however, express^this idea by stressing the first verb
and omitting in order: He 'went to Amsterdam to buy diamonds.
Infinitive + noun + preposition:
/ want a case to keep my records in.
I need a corkscrew to open this bottle with. Note that here we are talking about a particular
purpose. For a general purpose we use for + gerund:
This is a case for keeping records in.
A corkscrew is a tool for opening bottles.
335
Infinitives of purpose after go and come
It is not normal to use an infinitive of purpose after the imperative or infinitive of go and come.
Instead of Go to find Bill we normally say Go and find Bill; and instead of Come to talk to Ann
A Practical English Grammar
271
we say Come and talk to Ann; i.e. instead of an imperative + an infinitive of purpose we use
two imperatives Joined by and. And instead of:
I must go to help my mother and I'll come to check the accounts we normally say:
I must go and help my mother and I'll come and check the accounts. i.e. instead of an
infinitive + an infinitive of purpose we use two infinitives joined by and (see 246 I).
But when go and come are used as gerunds or in any present or past tense they take the
ordinary infinitive of purpose:
I'm thinking of going to look for mushrooms.
I went to help my mother.
I've come to check the accounts.
I didn 't come to talk to Bill; I came to talk to you.
336
Clauses of purpose
Clauses are necessary when the person to whom the purpose refers is different from the
subject of the main clause, or when the original subject is stated again:
Ships carry lifeboats so that the crew can escape if the ship sinks. This knife has a cork
handle so that if will float if it falls overboard.
A Purpose clauses are usually expressed by so that + will/would or can/could + infinitive.
can/could is used here to mean will/would be able to:
They make £10 notes a different size from £5 notes so that blind people can (= wil! be able
to) tell the difference between them. They wrote the notices in several languages so that
foreign tourists could (= would be able to) understand them. can and will are used when the
main verb is in a present, present perfect or future tense; could and would are used when the
main verb is in a past tense. See the examples above and also:
/ light/am lighting/have lit/will light the fire so that the house will be warm when they return.
I have given/will give him a key so that he can get into the house whenever he likes.
I pinned the note to his pillow so that he would be sure to see it. There were telephone points
every kilometre so that drivers whose cars had broken down would be able to/could summon
help. If that is omitted from purpose clauses with can/could, the idea of purpose may
disappear. The sentence He took my shoes so that I couldn't leave the house would normally
mean 'He took my shoes to prevent my leaving etc.' but He took my shoes, so I couldn 't
leave the house would normally mean 'He took my shoes; therefore I wasn't able to leave'.
B Purpose clauses can also be formed by so that/in order that/that + may/might or shall/should
+ infinitive. These are merely more formal constructions than those shown in A above. There is
no difference in meaning.
Note that so that can be followed by will/can/may/shall or their past forms, while in order that
or that are limited to may/shall or their past forms.
that used alone is rarely found except in very dramatic speech or writing, or in poetry.
The rules about sequences of tenses are the same as those shown above. The following are
very formal:
We carved their names on the stone so that/in order that future generations should/might
know what they had done. These men risk their lives so that/in order that we may live more
safely.
may in the present tense is much more comman than shall, which is rarely used. In the past
tense either might or should can be used. The student should know the above forms but
should not normally need to use them, as for all ordinary purposes so that + can/could or
will/would should be quite sufficient.
C Negative purpose clauses are made by putting the auxiliary verb (usually will/would or
should) into the negative:
He wrote his diary in code so that his wife wouldn 't be able to read it-He changed his name
so that his new friends wouldn Vshouidn 't know that he had once been accused of murder.
Criminals usually telephone from public telephone boxes so that the police won't be able to
trace the call.
Negative purpose clauses can, however, usually be replaced bv to prevent + noun/pronoun +
gerund, or to avoid + gerundHe dyed his beard so that we shouldn 't recognize him/to prevent us recognizing him/to avoid
being recognized, (passive gerund) She always shopped in another village so that she
A Practical English Grammar
272
wouldn 'i meet her own neighbours/to avoid meeting her own neighbours. These infinitive
phrases are preferred to negative purpose clauses.
337
in case and lest
A
in case
in case + subject + verb can follow a statement or command:
I don't let him climb trees in case he tears his trousers. This first action is usually a
preparation for, or a precaution against, the action in the if-clause, which is a possible future
action.
in case + present tense normally has the meaning 'because this may happen/because
perhaps this will happen' or 'for fear that this may happen'in case + past tense normally means 'because this might happen/because perhaps this
would happen' or 'for fear that this would happen'.
Both present tense and past tense here can be replaced by should + infinitive. should used
here would express greater improbability, but this construction is not very usual,
B
Tenses with in case
Main verb
Future
present tense or Present
+ in case +
„ .. _( ^
should + infinitive Present perfect J
Conditional
1
( .,
past tense or
Past tense
+ in case +
n. ,
should + infinitive
Past perfect ;
I'll make a cake in case someone drops in at the weekend.
I carry a spare wheel in case I have/should have a puncture.
I always keep candles in the house in case there is a power cut.
I always kept candies in the house in case there was a power cut. (See also 227.)
lest means 'for fear that' and is followed by should:
He doesn't/didn't dare to leave the house lest someone should recognize him.
lest is rarely found except in formal written English.
A Practical English Grammar
273
34 Clauses of reason, result, concession, comparison, time
338 Clauses of reason and result/cause
A
B
C
339
A
B
340
Except for the type shown in A2 and A3 below, both these clauses can be introduced by as or
because. But as is safer for clauses of reason (see A below) and because is safer for clauses
of result/cause (see B).
Clauses of reason
1 Introduced by as/because/since;
We camped there as/because/since it was too dark to go on. As/Because/Since it was too
dark to go on, we camped there.
2 'in view of the fact that' can be expressed by as/since/seeing that, but not because:
As/Since/Seeing that you are here, you may as well give me a hand. As/Since/Seeing that
Tom knows French, he 'd better do the talking.
3 Where as/since/seeing that refers to a statement previously made or understood, it is
replaceable by if:
As/Since/Seeing that/If you don't like Bill, why did you invite him? Note the use of if so:
I hope Bill won't come. ~ Ifso (= If you hope he won't come), why did you invite him? For if +
so/not, see 347.
Clauses of result/cause (see also 339) are introduced by because or as:
The fuse blew because we had overloaded the circuit.
He was angry because we were late.
As it/rose hard that night there was ice everywhere next day.
As the soup was very salty we were thirsty afterwards.
These combinations could also be expressed by two main clauses Joined by so:
It was too dark to go on, so we camped there.
You are here, so you may as well give me a hand.
It froze hard that night, so there was ice everywhere next day.
therefore can also be used. but is normal only in fairly formal
sentences:
The Finnish delegate has not yet arrived. We are therefore postponing/We have therefore
decided to postpone/Therefore we are postponing the meeting. (Notice possible positions of
therefore.)
Clauses of result with such/so . . . that
such is an adjective and is used before an adjective + noun:
They had such a fierce dog that no one dared to go near their house. He spoke for such a
long time that people began to fall asleep.
so is an adverb and is used before adverbs and with adjectives which
are not followed by their nouns:
The snow fell so fast that our footsteps were soon covered up. His speech went on for so long
thai people began to fall asleep. Their dog was so fierce that no one dared come near it.
But such is never used before much and many. so so is used even
when much and many are followed by nouns:
There was so much dust that we couldn't see what was happening. So many people
complained that they took the programme off.
C Note that such + a + adjective + noun is replaceable by so + adjective + a + noun, so that
'such a good man" is replaceable by 'so good a man'. This is only possible when a noun is
preceded by a/an. It is not a very usual form but may be met in literature. Sometimes for
emphasis so is placed at the beginning of the sentence. It is then followed by the inverted form
of the verb (see 45):
So terrible was the storm that whole roofs were ripped off.
Clauses of concession
These are introduced by although, though (see 327, 329), even though, even if, no matter,
however (see 85) and sometimes by whatever, as is also possible, but only in the adjective +
as + be construction.
A Practical English Grammar
274
Although/Though/Even though/Even if you don't like him you can still be polite.
No matter what you do, don't touch this switch.
However rich people are, they always seem anxious to make more money.
However carefully you drive, you will probably have an accident eventually.
Whatever you do, don't tell him that I told you this.
Patient as he was, he had no intention of waiting for three hours.
(though he was patient) may + infinitive can be used in hypothetical cases:
However frightened you may tie yourself, you must remain
outwardly calm. may can also imply 'I accept the fact that':
But he's your brother! ~ He may be my brother but I don't trust him!
But may used in this way is part of another main clause, not a clause of concession.
should + infinitive can be used after even if just as it can after if in conditional sentences, to
express the idea that the action expressed by the infinitive is not very likely to take place;
Even if he should find out he won't do anything about it.
341
Clauses of comparison
A
Comparisons with adjectives and finite verbs (see also 20-2);
It's darker today than it was yesterday.
He doesn'I Ray as much tax as we do/as us.
He spends more than he earns.
Note that + adjective, a colloquial form:
Will it cost £1W? ~ No, it won't cost as much as (ail) that. It won't
be (alt) that expensive. (It won't be as expensive as that.) that + adjective is sometimes used
colloquially to mean very.
B Comparisons with adverbs and finite verbs (see also 31-4):
He didn't play as well as we expected/as well as you (did). He sings more loudly than anyone
I've ever heard/than anyone else (does). You work harder than he does/than him/than I did at
your age.
C
Comparisons with adjectives and infinitives or gerunds
Often either can be used, but the infinitive is more usual for a particular action, and gerunds
are more usual for genera! statements (see also E below):
It's sometimes as cheap to buy a new one as (it is) (to) repair the old one.
Buying a new one is sometimes as cheap as repairing the old one.
He found that lying on She beach was just as boring as sitting in his office or
He found lying on the beach just as boring as sitting etc. (The infinitive would be less
usual here.)
He thinks it (is) safer to drive himself than (to) let me drive.
He thinks that driving himself is safer than letting me drive.
It will soon be more difficult to get a visa than it is now.
Getting a visa will soon be more difficult than it is now.
D In comparisons of the type shown in C above, if we have an infinitive before as/than we will
usually have an infinitive (not a gerund) after it, Similarly, if we have a gerund before as/than we
will normally have a gerund (not an infinitive) after it. See examples above, But if we have a
finite verb + this/that/which before as/than we can have a gerund after it. An infinitive is possible
but would be much less usual:
I’ll deliver it by hand; this will be cheaper than posting it.
He cleaned his shoes, which was better than doing nothing.
E Infinitives are used with would rather/sooner (see 297-8):
Most people would rather work than starve. I would resign rather than accept him as a
partner.
342
Time clauses
A Practical English Grammar
275
A These are introduced by conjunctions of time such as:
after
immediately
till/until
as
no sooner . . . than when
as soon as
since
whenever
before
the sooner
while
hardly . . . when
They can also be introduced by the minute, the moment.
For examples with when, as, while, see 331-3.
For examples with before, see 195 B.
B Remember that we do not use a future form, or a conditional tense, in a time clause.
Each of the following future forms becomes a present tense when we put it in a time clauseFuture simple:
You 'II be back soon. I'll stay till then. = I'll stay till you get back.
be going to:
The parachutist is going to jump. Soon after he jumps his parachute
will open.
The present continuous, used as a future form, and the future continuous:
He's arriving/He 'II be arriving at six but
When he arrives he'll tell us all about the match.
Before he arrives I'll give the children their tea. But the continuous tense can, of course, be
used in time clauses when it indicates a continuous action:
Peter and John will be playing/are playing/are going to play tennis
tonight. While they are playing (during this time) we 'II go to the
beach.
The future perfect changes to the present perfect, and the future perfect continuous changes
to the present perfect continuous:
I'll have finished in the bathroom in a few minutes.
The moment/As soon as I have finished I'll give you a call.
A conditional tense changes to a past tense:
We knew that he would arrive/would be arriving about six. We knew that till he arrived nothing
would be done.
But when when introduces a noun clause it can be followed by a future or conditional tense:
He said. 'When will the train get in?' =
He asked when the train would get in.
C
D
E
Clauses with since (see also 187-8)
In clauses since is usually followed by perfect tenses (but see 188);
They 've moved house twice since they got married or Since they got married, they 've moved
house twice. He said he'd lived in a tent since his house burnt down. It's ages since I
sailed/have sailed a boat. I haven't sailed a boat since I left college.
Clauses with after
In clauses after is often followed by perfect tenses:
After/When he had rung off I remembered. . .
After/When you 've finished with it, hang it up.
hardly/scarcely . . . when, no sooner . . . than (see also 45) The performance had hardly
begun when the lights went out or Hardly had the performance begun when the lights went
out.
scarcely could replace hardly here but is less usual,
He had no sooner drunk the coffee than he began to feel drowsy or No sooner had he drunk
the coffee than he began to feel drowsy. He no sooner earns any money than he spends it or
Immediately he earns any money he spends it. (more colloquial)
Note also the sooner . . . the sooner:
The sooner we start, the sooner we'll be there.
A Practical English Grammar
276
35
Noun clauses
Noun clauses are very often introduced by that and are therefore often called that-clauses.
However, not all noun clauses are that-clauses.
343
Noun clauses (that-clauses) as subject of a sentence
A Sentences with noun clause subjects usually begin with it (see 67 D):
It is disappointing that Tom can't come.
'that Tom can't come' is the subject.
B
The usual construction is it + be/seem + adjective + noun clause (see 26-7):
It’s splendid that you passed your exam.
It's strange that there are no lights on.
Some adjectives require or can take that . . . should (see 236):
It is essential that everybody knows/should know what to do.
An alternative construction is it + be/seem + a + noun + noun clause. Nouns that can be
used here include mercy, miracle, nuisance, pity, shame, relief, wonder, a good thing is
also possible.
It's a great pity (that) they didn't get married.
It's a wonder (that) you weren't killed.
It's a good thing (thai) you were insured.
I that-clauses after certain adjectives/participles
The construction here is subject + be + adjective/past participle + noun clause:
I am delighted that you passed your exam.
This construction can be used with
(a) adjectives expressing emotion: glad, pleased, relieved, sorry (see 26 P)
(b) adjectives/participles expressing anxiety, confidence etc.: afraid, anxious, aware,
certain, confident, conscious, convinced (see 27). anxious requires that . . . should.
I'm afraid that I can't come till next week.
Are you certain that this is the right road?
345
that-clauses after certain nouns
A that-clause can be placed after a large number of abstract nouns. The most useful of these
are: allegation, announcement, belief, discovery, fact, fear, guarantee, hope,
knowledge, promise, proposal, report, rumour, suggestion, suspicion, proposal and
suggestion require that . . . should,
The announcement that a new airport was to be built nearby aroused immediate opposition.
The proposal/suggestion that shops should open on Sundays led to a heated
discussion.
A report that the area was dangerous was ignored by the residents.
346
Noun clauses as objects of verbs
A that-clauses are possible after a large number of verbs. Some of the most useful are given
below.
acknowledge
find (wh)
recommend
admit
forget (wh)
remark
advise
guarantee
remember (wh)
agree
happen
remind
allege
hear (wh)
request
announce
hope
resolve
appear
imagine (wh)
reveal (wh)
arrange (wh)
imply
say (wh)
ask (wh)
indicate (wh)
see (wh)
assume
inform
seem
assure
insist
show (wh)
A Practical English Grammar
277
beg
know (wh)
state (wh)
believe (wh)
leam
stipulate
command
make out (= state) suggest (wh)
confess
mean
suppose
consider (wh)
notice (wh)
teach
declare
observe
tell (wh)
decide (wh)
occur to + object
think (wh)
demand
order
threaten
demonstrate
perceive
turn out
determine
presume
understand (wh)
discover
pretend
urge
doubt
promise
vow
estimate (wh)
propose
warn
expect
prove (wh)
wish
fear
realize (wh)
wonder (wh)
feel
recognize
and other verbs of communication, e.g. complain, deny, explain etc.
(see 316 C).
wh: see E below.
C
347
2
Examples
They alleged/made out that they had been unjustly dismissed. He assumes that we agree
with him. I can prove that she did it.
Most of the above verbs can also take another construction (see chapters 23-6). Note
however that a verb + that-ctause does not necessarily have the same meaning as the same
verb + infinitive/gerund/present participle: He saw her answering the letters means 'He
watched her doing this' but He saw that she answered the letters could mean either 'He
noticed that she did this' or 'He made sure by supervision that she did this'.
appear, happen, occur, seem, turn out require it as subject:
It appears/seems that we have come on the wrong day.
If occurred to me that he might be lying.
It turned out that nobody remembered the address.
D that + subject + should can be used after agree, arrange, be anxious, beg, command, decide,
demand, determine, be determined, order, resolve and urge instead of an infinitive construction,
and after insist and suggest instead of a gerund:
They agreed/decided that a statue should be put up.
He urged that the matter should go to arbitration.
He suggested that a reward should be offered. (See 235, 302 E.)
Verbs in section A marked '(wh)' can also be followed by noun clauses beginning with wh-words:
what, when, where, who, why, or with how:
He asked where he was to go.
They'll believe whatever you tell them.
I forget who told me this.
Have you heard how he is getting on?
I can't think why he left his wife.
I wonder when he will pay me back.
so and not representing a that-clause
A After believe, expect, suppose, think and after it appears/seems:
Will Tom be at the party? -- I expect so/suppose so/think so = I think he will.
For the negative we use:
A negative verb with so:
Will the scheme be a success? ~ I don't believe so/expect so/suppose so/think so.
Are they making good progress? ~ It doesn't seem so.
Or an affirmative verb with not:
It won't take long, will it? ~ No, I suppose not or
I don't suppose so.
The plane didn't land in Calcutta, did it? ~ I believe not or
I don't believe so.
A Practical English Grammar
278
B
so and not can be used similarly after hope and be afraid (= be sorry to say):
Is Peter coming with us? ~ I hope so.
Will you have to Ray duly on this? ~ I'm afraid so.
The negative here is made with an affirmative verb + not:
Have you got a work permit? ~ I'm afraid not.
C
so and not can be used after say and tell + object:
How do you know there is going to be a demonstration? ~ Jack said so/Jack told me so.
I told you so! can mean 'I told you that this was the case/that this would happen'. This usually
annoys the person addressed. For tell the only negative form is negative verb + so:
Tom didn't tell me so.
For say there are two negative forms, but the meaning is not the same:
Tom didn't say so = Tom didn't say that there would be a demonstration.
Tom said not = Tom said there wouldn't be a demonstration.
D
if + so/not
so/not after if can replace a previously mentioned/understood subject + verb:
Will you be staying another night? If so (= If you are), we can give you a better room. If not (= If you
aren't), could you be out of your room by 12:00?
if so/not here usually represents a clause of condition as shown above, but for if so, see also
338 A.
A Practical English Grammar
279
36
348
Numerals, dates, and weights and measures
Cardinal numbers (adjectives and pronouns)
1 one
2 two
3 three
4 four
5 five
6 six
7 sewn
8 eight
9 nine
10 ten
11 eleven
12 twelve
13 thirteen
14 fourteen
15 fifteen
16 sixteen
17 seventeen
18 eighteen
19 nineteen
20 twenty
400 four hundred
5,000 five thousand
21 twenty-one
22 twenty-two
23 twenty-three
24 twenty-four
25 twenty-five
26 twenty-six
27 twenty-seven
28 twenty-eight
29 twenty-nine
30 thirty
31 thirty-one etc.
40 forty
50 fifty
60 sixty
70 seventy
80 eighty
90 ninety
100 a hundred
1,000 a thousand
1,000,000 a million
140 a/one hundred and forty
1,006 a/one thousand and six
260,127 two hundred and sixty thousand, one hundred and twenty-seven
349
Points to notice about cardinal numbers
A
When writing in words, or reading, a number composed of three or more figures we place and
before the word denoting tens or units:
713 seven hundred and thirteen
5,102 five thousand, one hundred and two but
6,100 six thousand, one hundred (no tens or units) and is used similarly with hundreds of
thousands:
320,410 three hundred and twenty thousand, four hundred and ten and hundreds of millions:
303.000,000 three hundred and three million
a is more usual than one before hundred, thousand, million etc, when these numbers stand
alone or begin an expression:
100 a hundred 1,000 a thousand
100,000 a hundred thousand
We can also say a hundred and one, a hundred and two etc. up to a hundred and ninety-nine
and a thousand and one etc. up to a thousand and ninety-nine. Otherwise we use one, not a
(see above). So:
1,040 a/one thousand and forty but
1,140 one thousand, one hundred and forty
B
C The words hundred, thousand, million and dozen. when used of a definite number, are never
made plural:
six hundred men ten thousand pounds two dozen eggs If however, these words are used
loosely, merely to convey the idea of a large number, they must be made plural:
hundreds of people thousands of birds dozens of times Note also that in this case the
preposition of is placed after hundreds, thousands etc.
of is not used with definite numbers except before the/them/ these/those or possessives:
so: of the blue ones ten of these four of Tom's brothers
D Numbers composed of four or more figures are divided into groups of three as shown above.
Decimals are indicated by '•', which is read 'point':
10.92 ten point nine two
A zero after a decimal point is usually read 'nought':
8.04 eight point nought four
But 'o' and 'zero' would also be possible.
350
Ordinal numbers (adjectives and pronouns)
first
second
third
fourth
eleventh
twelfth
thirteenth
fourteenth
A Practical English Grammar
twenty-first
twenty-second
twenty-third
twenty-fourth
thirty-first etc.
fortieth
fiftieth
sixtieth
280
fifth
sixth
seventh
eighth
ninth
tenth
fifteenth
sixteenth
seventeenth
eighteenth
nineteenth
twentieth
twenty-fifth
twenty-sixth
twenty-seventh
twenty-eighth
twenty-ninth
thirtieth
seventieth
eightieth
ninetieth
hundredth
thousandth
millionth
When writing in words or reading fractions other than ½ (a half) and ¼ (a quarter), we use a
combination of cardinal and ordinal numbers:
1/5 a/one fifth 1/10 a/one tenth
(a is more usual than one)
3/5 three fifths 7/10 seven tenths
A whole number + a fraction can be followed directly by a plural noun:
2 ¼ miles == two and a quarter miles
½ (half) can be followed directly by a noun but other fractions require of before a noun:
half a second but a quarter of a second (See also 2 E.)
half + of can also be used, but the of is optional:
Half (of) my earnings go in tax.
351
Points to notice about ordinal numbers
A Notice the irregular spelling of fifth, eighth, ninth and twelfth.
B When ordinal numbers are expressed in figures the last two letters of the written word must
be added (except in dates):
first = 1st
twenty-first = 21st
nd
second = 2
forty-second = 42nd
rd
third = 3
sixty-third = 63rd
fourth = 4th
eightieth = 80th
C In compound ordinal numbers the rule about and is the same as for compound cardinal
numbers: 101st = the hundred and first.
The article the normally precedes ordinal numbers:
the sixtieth day the fortieth visitor
Titles of kings etc. are written in Roman figures:
Charles V James III Elizabeth II
But in spoken English we use the ordinal numbers preceded by the:
Charles the Fifth
James the Third
Elizabeth the Second
352
Dates
The days of the week
Sunday (Sun.)
Monday (Mm.)
Tuesday (Tues.)
Wednesday (Wed.)
Thursday (Thurs.)
Friday (Fri.)
Saturday (Sat.)
B
The months of the year
January (Jan.)
July
February (Feb.) August (Aug.)
March (Mar.)
September (Sept.)
April (Apr.)
October (Oct.)
May
November (Nov.)
June
December (Dec.)
Days and months are always written with capital letters. Dates are expressed by ordinal
numbers, so when speaking we say:
March the tenth, July the fourteenth etc. or the tenth of March etc.
They can, however, be written in a variety of ways; e.g. March the tenth could be written:
March 10 10 March
10th of March
March 10th
10th March
March the 10th
The year
When reading or speaking we use the term hundred but not thousand. The year 1987 would
be read as nineteen hundred and eighty-seven or nineteen eighty-seven.
Years before the Christian era are followed by the letters BC (= Before Christ) and years
dating from the Christian era are occasionally preceded by the letters AD (= Anno Domini, in
A Practical English Grammar
281
the year of the Lord). The former are read in either way: 1500 BC would be read as one
thousand five hundred BC or fifteen hundred BC.
353
Weights, length and liquid measure
A
Weights
The English weights table is as follows:
IS ounces (oz.) = 1 pound (Ib.)
14 Rounds
= 1 stow (st.)
8 stone
= 1 hundredweight (cict.)
20 hundredweight = 1 ton
1 pound
== 0-454 kilogram (kg) 2-2 pounds
= 1 kilogram 2.204-6 tbs
metric tonne
Plurals
ounce, pound and ton can take a in the plural when they are used as
nouns, stone and hundredweight do not take s: e.g. we say six
Round of sugar or six pounds of sugar, but ten hundredweight of coal has
no alternative.
When used in compound adjectives these terms never take a:
a ten-ton lorry kilo or kilogram usually take s in the plural when used as nouns:
two kilos of apples or two kilograms of apples
=1
B
Length
The English table of length is as follows:
12 inches (in.) = 1 foot (ft.)
3 feet
= 1 yard (yd.)
1,760 yards
= 1 mile (m.)
1 inch
= 2.54 centimetres (cm)
1 yard
= 0.914 metre (m)
1 mile
= 1.609 kilometres (km)
Plurals
When there is more than one inch/mite/centimetre we normally use the
plural form of these words:
one inch, ten inches one mile, four miles
one centimetre, five centimetres
When there is more than one foot we can use either foot or feet. feet is the more usual when
measuring heights. We can say;
six foot tall or six feet tall two foot long or two feet long When used in compound adjectives
the above forms never take the plural form: a two-mile walk, a six-inch ruler.
C
Liquid measure
2 pints (Rt.) = 1 quart (qt.)
4 quarts
= 1 gallon (gal.)
1 pint = 0.568 litre (I)
1 gallon = 4.55 litres
D Traditionally British measurements have been made in ounces, inches, pints etc. but there is
now a gradual move towards the metric system.
A Practical English Grammar
282
37
Spelling rules
For noun plurals, see also 12. For verb forms, see also 165, 172, 175.
354
Introduction
Vowels are: a e i o u
Consonants are: b c d f g h j k l m n p q r s t v w x y z
A suffix is a group of letters added to the end of a word:
beauty, beautiful (ful is the suffix.)
355
A
B
D
356
Doubling the consonant
Words of one syllable having one vowel and ending in a single consonant double the
consonant before a suffix beginning with a vowel:
hit + ing = hitting but keep, keeping (two vowels)
knit + ed = knitted
help, helped (two consonants)
run + er = runner
love, lover (ending in a vowel) qu here is considered as one
consonant: quit, quitting. When the final consonant is w, x or y it does not double:
row + ed -= rowed box + ing = boxing
Two- or three-syllable words ending in a single consonant following a single vowel double the
final consonant when the stress falls on the last syllable. (The stressed syllable is in bold
type.)
acquit + ed = acquitted but murmur + ed = murmured begin + er -= beginner
answer +
er = answerer deter + ed == deterred
orbit + ing = orbiting recur + ing = recurring
focus + ed, however, can be spelt focused orfocussed and bias + ed can
be spelt biased or biassed.
C The final consonant of handicap, kidnap, worship is also doubled:
handicap, handicapped worship, worshipped kidnap, kidnapped
Words ending in 1 following a single vowel or two vowels pronounced
separately usually double the 1:
appal, appalled duel, duellist
repel, repellent cruel, cruelly
model, modelling
quarrel, quarrelling dial, dialled
refuel, refuelled
signal, signalled distil, distiller
Omission of a final e
A Words ending in e following a consonant drop the e before a suffix beginning with a vowel:
believe + er = believer
love + ing = losing
move + able = movable
But riye and singe keep their final e before ing to avoid confusion with die and sing:
dye, dyeing singe, singeing age keeps its e before ing except in American English:
age, ageing
likable can also be spelt likeable. Words ending in ce or ge sometimes retain the e. See 357.
B A final e is retained before a suffix beginning with a consonant:
engage, engagement fortunate, fortunately
hope. hopeful immediate, immediately
sincere, sincerely But the e m able/ible is dropped in the adverb form:
comfortable, comfortably incredible, incredibly The final e is also dropped in the following
words:
argue, argument due, duly
judge, judgement or judgment true, truly
whole, wholly (notice the double 1 here)
C Words ending in ee do not drop an e before a suffix:
agree, agreed, agreeing, agreement foresee, foreseeing, foreseeable
357
Words ending in ce and ge
A Practical English Grammar
283
A
358
Words ending in ce or ge retain the e before a suffix beginning with a, o or u:
courage, courageous
peace, peaceful
manage, manageable
replace, replaceable
outrage, outrageous
trace, traceable
This is done to avoid changes in pronunciation, because c and g are generally pronounced
soft before e and i, but hard before a, o or u.
B Words ending in ce change the e to i before ous:
grace, gracious
space, spacious
malice, malicious
vice, vicious
The suffix ful
When full is added to a word the second l is dropped:
beauty + full = beautiful (but note adverb form beautifully)
use + full = useful (but note adverb form usefully)
If the word to which the suffix is added ends in ll the second I is dropped here also: skill + full
= skilful.
Note full + fill = fulfil.
359
Words ending in y
Words ending in y following a consonant change the y to i before any suffix except ing:
carry + ed = earned
but
carry + ing = carrying
happy + !y = happily
hurry + ing = hurrying
sunny + er = sunnier y following a vowel does not change:
obey + ed = obeyed play + er = player For plural forms of nouns, see 12.
360
ie and ei
The normal rule is that i comes before e except after c:
believe, sieve but deceive, receipt There are however the following exceptions:
beige
feint
heir
reign
their
counterfeit foreign inveigh
rein
veil
deign
forfeit
inveigle
seize
vein
eiderdown freight
leisure
skein weigh
eight
heifer
neigh
sleigh weight
either
height
neighbour sleight weir
feign
heinous neither
surfeit weird
361
Hyphens
A Compound words are formed by linking two or more words to make one unit. We can write
the compound:
(a) as one word: bystander, hairdresser, teacup
(b) as two or more words: amusement arcade, post office
(c) with a hyphen: launching-pad, lay-by, tooth-brush
It is impossible in most cases to give a firm rule on when a hyphen should be used. When a
compound has become familiar through constant use, the hyphen can be omitted: layby,
toothbrush. This, however, does not always happen and a native English writer is quite
capable of writing toothbrush, tooth brush or tooth-brush at different times.
B
If the compound is formed of monosyllables, it is more likely to be written as one word. In
cases of doubt it is better to omit hyphens or consult a modem dictionary.
Hyphens are necessary;
(a) when pronunciation or meaning might be unclear without them:
co-operate
re-cover (= cover again)
(b) when words form a compound in a particular sentence:
a do-it-yourself shop
A Practical English Grammar
284
a go-as-you-please railway ticket
(c) in adjective phrases dealing with age, size, weight and duration of time:
a five-year-old child
a ten-ton vehicle
a six-foot wall
a five-minute interval
Note that the compound is not in the plural form: no s. Adverb/participle compounds used as
adjectives are commonly hyphenated, especially when there is a danger of
misunderstanding:
low-flying aircraft
quick-dissolving sugar
C
Hyphens are used in a temporary way to divide a word at the end of a line. The
division must be made at a natural break in the word, i.e. between syllables;
dis-cauraged
look-ing
inter-val
A monosyllable should not be divided.
38
362
Phrasal verbs
Introduction
In modern English it is very usual to place prepositions or adverbs after certain verbs so as to
obtain a variety of meanings:
give away = give to someone/anyone
give up = abandon (a habit or attempt)
look after = take care of
look for = search for, seek
look out = beware
The student need not try to decide whether the combination is verb + preposition or verb +
adverb, but should consider the expression as a whole.
It is also important to learn whether the combination is transitive (i.e. requires an object) or
intransitive (i.e. cannot have an object):
look for is transitive: l am looking for my passport.
look out is intransitive: Look out! This ice isn't safe!
Each of the combinations given in the following pages wil! be marked 'tr' (= transitive) or 'intr' (=
intransitive), and the examples of the use of each will help to emphasize this distinction.
Note that it is possible for a combination to have two or more different meanings, and to be
transitive in one/some of these and intransitive in others. For example, take off can mean
'remove'- It is then a transitive expression:
He took off his hat.
take off can also mean 'rise from the ground' (used of aircraft). Here it is intransitive:
The plane took off at ten o 'clock.
Transitive expressions: the position of the object Noun objects are usually placed at the end
of these expressions:
I am looking for my glasses.
With some expressions, however, they can be placed either at the end or immediately after
the verb, i.e. before the short word. We can say:
He took off his coat or He took his coat off.
Pronoun objects are sometimes placed at the end of the expression:
l am looking for them.
But they are more often placed immediately after the verb:
He took it off.
This position is usual before the following short words: up, down, in, out, away, off and on
(except when used in the expression call on = visit).
Examples given of the use of each expression will show all possible positions of noun or pronoun
objects in the following way:
I'll give this old coat away. (give away this old coat/give it away)
i.e. with this expression the noun object can come before or after the away; the pronoun
object must come before the away. When only one example is given the student may assume
that the pronoun object has the same position as the noun object,
C
When these expressions are followed by a verb object the gerund form of the verb is used:
He kept on blowing his horn.
Where gerunds are usual this will be shown by examples. Note that some expressions can be
followed by an infinitive:
It is up to you to decide this for yourself.
A Practical English Grammar
285
Some of the younger members called on the minister to resign.
The lecturer set out to show that most illnesses were avoidable.
go on can be followed by either infinitive or gerund but there is a considerable difference in
meaning. See 270 A.
363
Verb + preposition/adverb combinations
account
account for (tr) == give a good reason for, explain satisfactorily (some action or expenditure):
A treasurer must account/or the money he spends.
He has behaved in the most extraordinary way; I can't account for his actions at all/I
can't account for his behaving like that.
allow
allow for (tr) = make provision in advance for, take into account (usually some additional
requirement, expenditure, delay etc.):
It is 800 kilometres and I drive at 100 k.p.h., so I'll be there in eight hours. ~ But you'll
have to allow for delays going through towns and for stops for refuelling.
Allowing for depreciation your car should be worth £2,000 this time next year.
answer
answer back (intr), answer somebody back = answer a reproof impudently:
FATHER: Why were you so late last night? you weren't in till 2a.m.
SON: You should have been asleep.
FATHER: Don't answer me back. Answer my question.
ask
ask after/for somebody = ask for news of:
I met Tom at the party; he asked after you. (asked how you were/how you were getting
on)
ask for
(a) = ask to speak to:
Go to the office and ask for my secretary.
(b) = request, demand:
The men asked/or more pay and shorter hours.
ask someone in (object before in) = invite him to enter the house:
He didn't ask me in: he kept me standing at the door while he read the message.
ask someone out (object before out) = invite someone to an entertainment or to a meal
(usually in a public place):
She had a lot of friends and was usually asked out in the evenings, so she seldom
spent an evening at home.
back
back away (intr) = step or move back slowly (because confronted by some danger or
unpleasantness):
When he took a gun out everyone backed away nervously.
back out (intr) = withdraw (from some joint action previously agreed on), discontinue or
refuse to provide previously promised help or support:
He agreed to help but backed out when he found how difficult it was.
back somebody up = support morally or verbally:
The headmaster never backed up his staff, (backed them up) If a parent complained
about a teacher he assumed that the teacher was in the wrong.
be
be against (tr) = be opposed to (often used with gerund):
I'm for doing nothing till the police arrive./I'm against doing anything till the police arrive.
be away (intr) = be away from home/this place for at least a night.
be back (intr) = have returned after a long or short absence:
I want to see Mrs Pitt. Is she in? ~ No. I'm afraid she's out at the moment or
No, I'm afraid she's away for the weekend. ~ When wilt she be back? ~ She'll be back
in half an hour/next week.
be for (tr) = be in favour of (often used with gerund).
be in (intr) = be at home/in this building.
be in for (tr) = be about to encounter (usually something unpleasant):
Did you listen to the weather forecast? I'm afraid we're in for a bumpy/light.
A Practical English Grammar
286
If you think that the work is going to be easy you're in for a shock.
be over (intr) = be finished:
The storm is over now; we can go on.
be out (intr) = be away from home/from this building for a short time-not overnight.
be up (intr) = be out of bed:
Don't expect her to answer the doorbell at eight o 'clock on Sunday morning. She won't
be up.
be up to (tr) = be physically or intellectually strong enough (to perform a certain action). The
object is usually it. Chough a gerund is possible:
After his illness the Minister continued in office though he was no
longer up to the work/up to doing the work. be up to something/some mischief/some trick/no
good = be occupied or busy with some mischievous act:
Don't trust him; he is up to something/some trick.
The boys are very quiet. I wonder what they are up to. Note that the object of up to here is
aiways some very indefinite expression such as these given above. It is never used with a
particular action.
it is up to someone (often followed by an infinitive) = it is his responsibility or duty;
If is up to the government to take action on violence.
I have- helped you as much as I can. Now if is u? to you. (You must
continue by your own efforts.)
bear
bear out (tr) = confirm: .
This report bears out my theory, (bears my theory out/bears it out)
bear up (intr) = support bad news bravely, hide feelings of grief:
The news of her death was a great shock to him but he bore up bravely and none of us
realized how much he felt it.
blow
blow out (tr) = extinguish (a flame) by blowing:
The mind blew out the candle, (blew the candle out/blew it out) blow up (tr or intr)
(a) = destroy by explosion, explode, be destroyed:
They blew up the bridges so that the enemy couldn't follow them. (blew the bridges up/blew
them up) Just as we got to the bridge it blew up.
(b) = fill with air, inflate, pump up:
The children blew up their balloons and threw them into the air. (blew the balloons up/blew
them up)
boil
boil away (intr) = be boiled until all (the liquid) has evaporated:
I put the kettle on the gas ring and then went away and forgot about
it. When I returned, the water had all boiled away and the flame had
burnt a hole in the kettle.
boil over (intr) = to rise and flow over the sides of the container (used only of hot liquids):
The milk boiled over and there was a horrible smell of burning.
eak
break down figures = take a total and sub-divide it under various
headings so as to give additional information:
You say that lO.OWpeople use this library. Could you break that
down into age-groups? (say how many of these are under 25, over
50 etc.) break down a door etc. = cause to collapse by using force:
The firemen had to break down the door to get into the burning
house, (break the door down/break it down) break down (intr) = collapse, cease to function
properly, owing to some fault or weakness:
(a) Used of people, it normally implies a temporary emotional collapse:
He broke down when telling me about his SOH'S tragic d«ath. (He was overcome by his
sorrow; he wept.)
(b) It can express collapse of mental resistanceAt first he refused to admit his guilt hut when he was shown the evidence he broke down and
confessed.
(c) When used of health it implies a serious physical collapse:
A Practical English Grammar
287
After years of overwork his health broke down and he had to retire.
(d) It is very often used of machines:
The car broke down when we were driving through the desert and it took us two days to
repair it.
(e) It can be used of negotiations:
The negotiations broke down (were discontinued) because neither
side would compromise. break in (intr), break into (tr)
(a) = enter by force:
Thieves broke in and stole the silver. The house was broken into when the owner was on
holiday.
(b) = interrupt someone by some sudden remark:
I was telling them about my travels when he broke in with a story of
his own. break in (a young horse/pony etc.) (tr) = train him for use:
You cannot ride or drive a horse safely before he has been broken in. break off (tr or intr) =
detach or become detached:
He took a bar of chocolate and broke off a bit. (broke a bit off/broke
it off)
A piece of rock broke off and fell into the pool at the foot of the cliff. break off (tr) = terminate
(used of agreements or negotiations):
Ann has broken off her engagement to Tom. (broken her
engagement off/broken it off) break off (intr) = stop talking suddenly, interrupt oneself:
They were in the middle of an argument but broke off when someone
came into the room. break out (intr) (a) = begin (used of evils such as wars, epidemics, fires
etc.):
War broke out on 4 August.
(b) = escape by using force from a prison etc.:
They locked him up in a room but he broke out. (smashed the door
and escaped)
The police are looking/or two men who broke out of prison last night. break up (tr or intr) =
disintegrate, cause to disintegrate:
If that ship stays there she will break up/she will be broken up by the
waves.
The old ship was towed away to be broken up and sold as scrap.
Divorce breaks up a lot a/families, (breaks families up/breaks
them up)
break up (intr) = terminate (used of school terms, meetings, parties etc.):
The school broke up on 30 July and all the boys went home for the
holidays.
The meeting broke up in confusion.
bring
bring someone round (tr; object usually before round)
(a) == persuade someone to accept a previously opposed suggestion:
After a lot of argument I brought him round to my point of view.
(b) = restore to consciousness:
She fainted with the pain but a little brandy soon brought her round. bring a person or thing
round (tr; object usually before round) = bring him/it to my/your/his house:
I have finished that book that you lent me; I'll bring it round (to your
house) tonight. bring up (tr)
(a) = educate and train children:
She brought up her children to be truthful, (brought her children up/brought them up)
(b) = mention:
At the last committee meeting, the treasurer brought u? the question of raising the annual
subscription, (brought the question up/brought it u?)
bum
bum down (tr or intr) = destroy, or be destroyed completely by fire (used of buildings):
The nwb burnt down the embassy, {burnt the embassy
down/burnt it down)
The hotel bumf down before help came.
call
A Practical English Grammar
288
1 call meaning 'visit' (for a short time) call at a place:
I called at the bank and arranged to transfer some money.
call for = visit a place to collect a person or thing:
I am going to a pop concert with Tom. He is calling for me at eight so I must be ready then.
Let's leave our suitcases in the left luggage office and call for them later on when we have the
car.
cal! in is intransitive, and has the same meaning as look in and the colloquial drop in:
Call in/Look in on your way home and tell me how the interview went. call on a person:
He called on all the housewives in the area and asked them to sign the petition.
i Other meanings of call for/in/on
call for (tr) = require, demand (the subject here is often an impersonal word or phrase such
as: the situation/this sort of work/this etc.; the object is then usually some quality, e.g.
courage/patience/a steady hand etc.):
The situation calls for tact.
You 've got the job! This calls for a celebration. But it can also be used with a personal
subject:
The workers are calling/or strike action.
The relations of the dead men are calling for an inquiry. call in a person/call him in = send for
him/ask him to come to the house to perform some service, send for is more authoritative
than call in which is therefore a more polite form:
/; was tw late to call in an electrician, (call an electrician
in/call him in)
There is some mystery about his death; She police have been called in. call on somebody
(usually + infinitive) = ask him to do something/ask him to help. This is a rather formal way of
making a request and is chiefly used on formal occasions or in speeches etc. There is usually
the idea that the person called upon will consider it his duty to comply with the request:
The president called upon his people to make sacrifices for the good of
their country.
The chairman called on the secretary to read the minutes of the last
meeting.
. Other combinations with call
call off (Cr) = cancel something not yet started, or abandon something already in progress:
They had to call off (= cancel) the match as the ground was too
wet to play on. (call the match off/call it off)
When the fog got thicker the search was called off. (abandoned) call out (tr) = summon
someone to leave his house to deal with a situation outside. It is often used of troops when
they are required to leave their barracks to deal with civil disturbances:
The police couldn 't control the mob so troops were called out.
The Fire Brigade was called out several times on the night of 5 November to put out fires
started by fireworks. Doctors don't much like being called out at night. call up (tr)
(a) = summon for military service:
In countries where there is conscription men are called up at the age of eighteen, (call up
men/call men up/call them up)
(b) = telephone:
/ called Tom up and told him the news. (called up Tom/called him up)
care
not to care about (tr) = to be indifferent to:
The professor said that he was interested only in research; he didn 't
really care about students. care for (tr)
(a) = like (seldom used in the affirmative):
He doesn't care for films about war.
(b) = look after (not much used except in the passive):
The house looked well cared/or, (had been well looked after/was in good condition)
carry
carry on (intr) = continue (usually work or duty):
/ can't carry on alone any longer: I'll have to get help. carry on with (tr) is used similarly:
The doctor told her to carry on with the treatment. carry out (tr) = perform (duties), obey
(orders, instructions), fulfil (threats):
A Practical English Grammar
289
You are not meant to think for yourself; you are here to carry out my
orders.
The Water Board carried out their threat to cut off our water supply.
(They threatened to do it and they 'did it.)
He read the instructions but he didn 'f carry them out.
catch
catch up with (tr), catch up (tr or intr) = overtake, but not pass:
I started last in the race but I soon caught up with the others. (caught them up/caught up)
You 've missed a whole term; you 'II have to work hard to catch up with the rest of the class,
(catch them up/catch up)
clean
clean out (tr) a room/cupboard/drawer etc. == clean and tidy it thoroughly:
/ must clean out the spare room. (clean the spare room
out/clean it out) clean up (tr) a mess, e.g. anything spilt:
Clean up any spilt paint, (clean the spilt paint up/clean it up)
clean up (intr) is used similarly:
These painters always clean up when they've finished, (leave the place dean)
clear
clear away (tr) = remove articles, usually in order to make space:
Could you clear away these papers? (clear these papers
away/clear them away) clear away (intr) = disperse:
The clouds soon cleared away and if became quite warm. clear off (intr) from an open space,
clear out (intr) of a room, building = go away (colloquial: as a command it is definitely rude):
'You clear off,' said the farmer angrily. 'You've no right to put your
caravans in my field without even asking my permission.'
Clear out! If I find you in this building again, I'll report you to the
police.
clear out (tr) a room/cupboard/drawer etc. = empty it, usually to make room for something
else:
I'll clear out this drawer and you can put your things in it. (clear
this drawer out/clear it out) clear up (intr) = become fine after clouds or rain:
The sky looks a bit cloudy now but I think if wilt dear up. clear up (tr or intr) = make tidy and
clean:
When you are cooking it's best to clear up as you go, instead of
leaving everything to the end and having a terrible pile of things to
deal with.
Clear up this mess. (clear this mess up/clear it up) clear up (tr)
(a) = finish (some work which stiil remains to be done):
/ have some letters which I must clear up before I leave tonight.
(b) = solve (a mystery):
In a great many detective stories when the police are baffled an amateur detective comes
along and clears up the mystery, (clears it up)
close
close down (tr or intr) = shut permanently (of a shop or business):
Trade was so bad that many small shops closed down and big shops
closed some of their branches down. (closed down some
branches/closed them down)
close in (intr) = come nearer, approach from ail sides (used of mist, darkness, enemies etc.):
As the mist was closing in we decided to stay where we were. close up (intr) = come nearer
together (of people in a line):
I/you children closed up a bit there'd be room for another one on
this seat.
come
come across/upon (tr) = find by chance:
When I was looking/or my passport I came across these old photographs.
come along/on (intr) = come with me, accompany me. 'Come on' is often said to someone
who is hesitating or delaying:
Come on, or we'll be Sate. come away (intr) = leave (with me):
Come away now. It's time to go home. come away/off (intr) = detach itself:
A Practical English Grammar
290
When I picked up the teapot the handle came away in my hand. come in (intr), come into (tr)
= enter:
Someone knocked at my door and I said, 'Come in.'
Come into the garden and I'll show you my rases. come off (intr)
(a) = succeed, of a plan or scheme (used in negative):
I'm afraid that scheme of yours won 'I come off. It needs more capita! than you have
available.
(b) = take place; happen as arranged:
When is the wedding coming off? ~ Next June. If we say The duchess was So have opened
the bazaar we imply that this plan was made but didn't come off. (She arranged to open it but
later had to cancel this arrangement.)
(c) = end its run (of a play, exhibition etc.):
'Lady Windermere's Fan' is coming off next week. You'd better hurry if you want to see it.
come out (intr)
(a) = be revealed, exposed (the subject here is normally the truth/the facts/the whole story
etc. and usually refers to facts which the people concerned were trying to keep hidden, i.e.
scandals etc.):
They deceived everybody till they quarrelled among themselves; then one publicly
denounced the others and the whole truth came out.
(b) = be published (of books):
Her new novel will be coming out in time for the Christmas sales.
(c) =- disappear (of stains):
Tomato stains don't usually come out. come round (intr)
(a) = finally accept a previously opposed suggestion:
Her father at first refused to let her study abroad but he came round (to it) in the- end. (said
she could go)
(b) = come to my (your/his etc.) house;
I'll come round after dinner and tell you the plan.
come round/to (intr; stress on to) = recover consciousness:
When we found him he was unconscious but he came round/to in half an hour and explained
that he had been attacked and robbed.
come up (intr)
(a) = rise to the surface:
A diver with an aqualung doesn 't have to keep coming up for air; he can stay underwater/or
quite a long time. Weeds are coming up everywhere.
(b) = be mentioned:
The question of the caretaker's wages came up at the last meeting-come up (intr), come up to
(tr) = approach, come dose enough to . talk:
A policeman was standing a few yards away. He came up to me and said, 'You can't park
here.'
crop
crop up (intr) = appear, arise unexpectedly or by accident (the subject is normally an abstract
noun such as difficulties/the subject etc. or a pronoun):
At first all sorts of difficulties crop/fed up and delayed us. Later we
learnt how to anticipate these.
cut
cut down a tree = fell it:
If you cut down all the trees you will ruin the land. (cut the trees down/cut them down) ,
cut down (tr) = reduce in size or amount:
We must cut down expenses or we 'II be getting into debt. :
'This article is too long,' said
the editor. 'Could you cut it down to 2,000 words?'
cut in (intr) = slip into traffic lane ahead of another car when there isn't room to do this safely:
Accidents are often caused by drivers cutting in. cut off (tr) = disconnect, discontinue supply
(usually of gas, water. electricity etc.). The object can either be the commodity or the person
who suffers:
The Company has cut off our electricity supply because we haven't paid our bill. (cut our
supply off/cut it off)
They've cut off the water/our water supply temporarily because they are repairing one of the
main pipes.
A Practical English Grammar
291
We were cut off in the middle of our (telephone) conversation. (This might be accidental or a
deliberate action by the switchboard operator.)
cut someone off = form a barrier between him and safety (often used in connexion with the
tide, especially in the passive):
We were cut off by the tide and had to be rescued by boat.
be cut off (intr) = be inconveniently isolated (the subject is usually a place or residents in a
certain place):
You will be completely cut off if you go to live in that village because there is a bus only once
a week.
cut out (tr)
(a) = cut from a piece of cloth/paper etc. a smaller piece of a desired shape:
When I am making a dress I mark the cloth with chalk and then cut
it out. (cut out the dress/cut the dress out)
Young people often cut out photographs of their favourite pop stars
and stick ihem to the walls.
(b) = omit, leave out:
If you want to get thin you must cut out sugar, (cut it out) be cut out for (tr) = be fitted or suited
for (used of people, usually in the negative):
His father got him a job in a bank but it soon became clear that he
was not cut out for that kind of work. (He wasn't happy and was not
good at the work.) cut up (tr) •=• cut into small pieces:
They cut down the tree and cut it up for firewood, (cut the tree
up/cut up the tree)
die
die away (intr) = become gradually fainter till inaudible:
They waited till the sound of the guard's footsteps died away. die down (intr) = become
gradually calmer and finally disappear (of riots, fires, excitement etc.):
When the excitement had died down the shopkeepers took down their
shutters and reopened their shops.
die out (intr) = become extinct (of customs, races, species of animals etc.):
Elephants would die out if men could shoot as many as they wished.
do
do away with (tr) = abolish:
The government should do away with the regulations restricting
drinking hours. do up (tr) = redecorate:
When I do this room up I'll paint the walls cream, (do up this
room/do it up) do without (tr) = manage in the absence of a person or thing:
We had to do without petrol during the fuel crisis. The object is sometimes understood but not
mentioned:
If there isn't any milk we'll have to do without (it).
draw
draw back (intr) =; retire, recoil;
/t's too late to draw back now; the plans are ail made. draw up (tr) = make a written plan or
agreement:
My solicitor drew up the lease and we both signed it. (drew it up) draw up (intr) = stop (of
vehicles):
The car drew up at the kerb and the driver got out.
op
drop in (intr) = pay a short unannounced visit:
He dropped in for a few minutes to ask if he could borrow your power
drill- (drop in is more colloquial than 'call in'.) drop out (intr) = withdraw, retire from a scheme
or plan:
We planned to hire a coach for the excursion but now so many people
have dropped out that it will not be needed.
iter
enter for (tr) = become a competitor/candidate (for a contest, examination, etc,):
Twelve thousand competitors have entered for the next London
Marathon.
A Practical English Grammar
292
de
fade away (intr) = disappear, become gradually fainter (usually of
sounds):
The band moved on and the music faded away.
II
fall back (intr) = withdraw, retreat (this is a deliberate action, quite different from fall behind,
which is involuntary);
As the enemy advanced we fell back. fall back on (tr) = use in the absence of something
better:
We had to fall back on dried milk as fresh milk wasn't available.
He fell back on the old argument that if you educate women they
won't be such good wives and mothers. fall behind (intr) = slip into the rear through inability to
keep up with the others, fail to keep up an agreed rate of payments:
At the beginning the whole party kept together but by the end of the
day those who were less fit had fallen behind.
He fell behind with his rent and the landlord began to become
impatient. fall in with someone's plans = accept them and agree to co-operate:
We'd better fall in with his suggestion for the sake of peace. fall in (intr) of troops etc- = get
into line fall out (intr) of troops etc- = leave the lines:
The troops fell in and were inspected. After the parade they fell out
and went back to their barracks. fall off (intr) = decrease (of numbers, attendance etc.):
Orders have been falling off lately; we need a new advertising
campaign.
If the price of seats goes up much more theatre attendances will begin
to/all off.
fall on (tr) = attack violently (the victim has normally no chance to defend himself as the
attackers are too strong; it is also sometimes used of hungry men who attack their food when
they get it):
The mob fell on the killers and clubbed them to death.
The starving men fell on the food. (devoured it)
fall out (intr) = quarrel:
When thieves fall out honest men gel their own. (proverb; i.e. get
back their property) fall through (intr) = fail to materialize (of plans):
My plans to go to Greece fell through because the journey turned out
to be much more expensive than I had expected.
feed
be fed up (intr), be fed up with (tr) = be completely bored (slang);
I'm fed up with this wet weather. I'm fed up with wailing; I'm going home.
feel
feel up to (tr) = fee! strong enough (to do something):
I don't feel up to tidying the kitchen now. I'll do it in the morning, I don't fee! up to it.
fill
fill in/up forms etc. = complete them:
I had to fill in three forms to get my new passport, (fill three forms in/fill them in)
find
find out (tr) = discover as a result of conscious effort;
In the end I found out what was wrong with my hi-fi. The dog found out the way to open the
door. (found it out) find someone out = find that he has been doing something wrong (this
discovery is usually a surprise because the person has been trusted):
After robbing the till for months the cashier was found out.
fix
fix up (tr) = arrange:
the club has already fixed up several matches for next season. (fixed several matches
up/fixed them up)
get
get about (intr) = circulate; move or travel in a general sense:
The news got about that he had won the first prize in the state lottery
and everybody began asking him for money.
A Practical English Grammar
293
He is a semi-invalid now and can't get about as well as he used to. get away (intr) = escape,
be free to leave:
Don 'I ask him how he is because if he starts talking about his health
you'll never get away from him.
I had a hi to do in the office and didn't get away till eight. get away with (tr) = perform some
illegal or wrong act without being punished, usually without even being caught:
He began forging cheques and at first he got away with it but in the
end he was caught and sent to prison.
get back ftr) = recover possession of:
If you lend him a book he'll lend it to someone else and you'll never
get it back. (get back your book/get your book back) get back (intr) = reach home again:
We spent the whole day in the hills and didn't get back till dark. get off (intr) = be acquitted or
receive no punishment (compare with gel away with it, which implies that the offender is not
even caught):
He was tried for theft but got off because there wasn't sufficient
evidence against him. (was acquitted)
The boy had to appear before a magistrate but he got off as it was his
first offence, (received no punishment) get on (intr), get on with (tr)
(a) = make progress, be successful:
How is he getting on at school? He is getting on very well with his English.
(b) = live, work etc., amicably with someone:
He is a pleasant friendly man who gets on well with nearly everybody.
How are you and Mr Pitt getting on? get out (intr) = escape from, leave (an enclosed space):
Don't wory about the snake. It's in a box. It can't get out.
News of the Budget got out before it was officially announced.
I'm so busy that I don't very often get out. (out of the house) Note that the imperative 'Get out',
except when it means 'descend' (from a vehicle), is very rude. get out of (tr) = free oneself
from an obligation or habit:
I said that I'd help him. Now I don't want to but I can't get out of it.
(free myself from my promise)
He says that he smokes too much but he can't get out of the habit.
Some people live abroad to get out of paying heavy taxes. . get over (tr) = recover from
(illness, distress or mental weakness):
He is just getting over a bad heart attack.
I can't get over her leaving her husband like that. (I haven't
recovered from the surprise; I am astonished,)
He used to be afraid of heights but he has got over that now. get it over (the object is usually
it which normally represents something unpleasant) = deal with it and be finished with it:
If you have logo to the dentist why not go at once and get it over? (Be careful not to confuse
this with get over it, which is quite
different.)
get round a person = coax him into letting you do what you want:
Giris can usually get round their fathers.
get round a difficulty/regulation = find some solution to it/evade it:
If we charge people for admission we will have to pay entertainment tax on our receipts: but
we can get round this regulation by saying that we are charging not for admission but for
refreshments. Money paid/or refreshments is not taxed.
get through (tr or intr) = finish a piece of work, finish successfully:
He got through his exam all right, (passed it)
get through (intr) = get into telephone communication:
/ am frying to call London but I can't get through; I think all the
lines are engaged. get up (tr) = organize, arrange (usually an amateur entertainment or a
charitable enterprise):
They got up a concert in aid of cancer research. (They got it up.)
get up (intr) = rise from bed, rise to one's feet, mount:
I get up at seven o' clock every morning. (For get used to mean enter/leave vehicles, see 93
D.)
give
give something away = give it to someone (who need not be mentioned):
A Practical English Grammar
294
I'll give this old coat away. (give away this old coat away/give it
away) give someone away (object before away) - betray him:
He said that he was not an American but his accent gape him away.
(told us that he was an American) give back (tr) = restore (a thing) to its owner:
/ must call at She library to give back this book. (to give this book
back/to give it back) give in (intr) = yield, cease to resist:
At first he wouldn't let her drive the car but she was so persuasive
that eventually he gave in. give out (tr)
(a) = announce verbally:
They gave out the names of the winners, (gave the names out/gave them out)
(b) = distribute, issue:
The teacher gave out the books, (gave one/some to each pupil) give out (intr) = become
exhausted (of supplies etc.):
The champagne gave out long before the end of the reception.
His patience gave out and he slapped the child hard. give up (tr or intr) = abandon an
attempt, cease trying to do something:
I tried to climb the wall but after I had failed three times I gave up.
(gave up the attempt/gave the attempt up/gave it up)
A really determined person never gives up/never gives up trying. give up (tr) = abandon or
discontinue a habit, sport, study, occupation:
Have you given up drinking whisky before breakfast?
He gave up cigarettes, (gave them up)
He tried to leam Greek but soon got tired of it and gave it up. give oneself up (object before
up) = surrender:
He gave himself up to despair.
He was cold and hungry after a week on the run so he gave himself
up to the police.
go ahead (intr) = proceed, continue, lead the way:
While she was away he went ahead with the work and got a tot done.
You go ahead and I"It follow; I'm not quite ready. go away (intr) = leave, leave me, leave this
place:
Are you going away for your holiday? ~ No, I'm staying at home.
Please go away; I can't work unless I am alone. go back (intr) = return, retire, retreat;
I'm never going back to that hotel. It is most uncomfortable. go back on (tr) = withdraw or
break (a promise):
He went back on his promise to tell nobody about this. (He told
people about it. contrary to his promise.) go down fintr)
(a) = be received with approval (usually of an idea):
I suggested that she should look for a job but this suggestion did not go down at all well.
(b) = become less, be reduced (of wind, sea, weight, prices etc.):
During her illness her weight went down from 50 kilos to 40. The wind went down and the sea
became quite calm.
go for (tr) = attack:
The cat went for the dog and chased him out of the hall. go in for (tr) = be especially
interested in. practise; enter for (a competition):
This restaurant goes in for vegetarian dishes, (specializes in them)
She plays a lot of golf and goes in for all the competitions. go into (tr) = investigate
thoroughly:
'We shall have to go into this very carefully,' said the detective. go off (intr)
(a) = explode (of ammunition or fireworks), be fired (of guns, usually accidentally):
As he was cleaning his gun if went off and killed him.
(b) = be successful (of social occasions):
The party went off very well. (everyone enjoyed it)
(c) = start a journey, leave:
He went off in a great hurry. go on (intr) = continue a journey:
Go on till you come to the crossroads. go on (intr), go on with (tr), go on + gerund = continue
any action:
Please go on playing; I like it.
Go on with the treatment. It is doing you good.
go on + infinitive:
A Practical English Grammar
295
He began by describing the route and went on to tell us what the trip would probably cost.
(He continued his speech and told us etc.)
go out (intr)
(a) = leave the house:
She is always indoors; she doesn't go out enough.
(b) = Join in social life, leave one's house for entertainments etc. She is very pretty and goes
out a lot.
(c) = disappear, be discontinued (of fashions):
Crinolines went out about the middle of the last century.
(d) = be extinguished (of lights, fires etc.):
The light went out and we were left in the dark. go over (tr) = examine, study or repeat
carefully:
He went over the plans again and discovered two very serious
mistakes. go round (intr)
(a) = suffice (for a number of people):
Will there be enough wine to go round?
(b) = go to his/her/your etc. house:
/ said that I 'd go round and see her during the weekend, (go to her
house)
go through (tr) = examine carefully (usually a number of things; go through is like look through
but more thorough):
There is a mistake somewhere; we'll have to go through the accounts
and see where it is.
The police went through their files to see if they could find any
fingerprints to match those that they had found on the handle of the
weapon. go through (tr) = suffer, endure:
No one knows what I went through while I was waiting for the
verdict, (how much I suffered)
go through with (tr) = finish, bring to a conclusion (usually in the face of some opposition or
difficulty):
He went through with his plan although all his friends advised him to
abandon it. go up (intr)
(a) = rise (of prices):
The price of strawberries went up towards the end of the season.
(b) = burst into flames (and be destroyed), explode (used of whole buildings, ships etc.):
When the fire reached the cargo of chemicals the whole ship went up.
(blew up)
Someone dropped a cigarette end into a can of petrol and the whole
garage went up inflames.
go without (tr) = do without. (But it only applies to things. 'Go without a person' has only a
literal meaning: i.e. it means 'start or make a journey without him'.)
grow
grow out of (tr) = abandon, on becoming older, a childish (and often bad) habit:
He used to tell a lot of lies as a young boy but he grew out of that
later on. grow up (intr) = become adult:
'I'm going to be a pop star when I grow up,' said the boy.
hand
hand down (tr) = bequeath or pass on (traditions /information/ possessions):
This legend has been handed down from father to son. hand in (tr) = give by hand (to
someone who need not be mentioned because the person spoken to knows already):
/ handed in my resignation, (gave it to my employer)
Someone handed this parcel in yesterday, (handed it in) hand out (tr) = distribute:
He was standing at the door of the theatre handing out leaflets.
(handing leaflets out/handing them out) hand over (tr or intr) = surrender authority or
responsibility to another:
The outgoing Minister handed over his department to his
successor, (handed his department over/handed it over) hand round (tr) = give or show to
each person present:
The hostess handed round coffee and cakes, (handed them
A Practical English Grammar
296
round)
hang
hang about/around (tr or intr) = loiter or wait (near):
He hung about/around the entrance all day, hoping/or a chance to
speak to the director. hang back (intr) = show unwillingness to act:
Everyone approved of the scheme hut when we asked for volunteers
they all hung back. hang on to (tr) = retain, keep in one's possession (colloquial):
I'd hang on to that old coat if I were you. It might be useful.
hold
hold off (intr) = keep at a distance, stay away (used of rain):
The rain fortunately held off till after the school sports day. hold on (intr) = wait (especially on
the telephone):
Yes. Mr Pitt is in. If you hold on for a moment I'll get him for you. { hold on/out (intr) = persist
in spite of, endure hardship or danger:
The survivors on the rock signalled that they were short of water but could hold out for
another day.
'
The strikers held out for six weeks before agreeing to arbitration. hold up (tr)
(a) = stop by threats or violence (often in order to rob):
The terrorists held up the train and kept the passengers as hostages. Masked men held up
the cashier and robbed the bank. (held him up)
(b) = stop, delay (especially used in the passive):
The bus was held up because a tree had fallen across the road.
join
join up (intr) = enlist in one of the armed services:
When war was declared he joined up at once.
jump
jump at (tr) -= accept with enthusiasm (an offer or opportunity):
He was offered a place in the Himalayan expedition and jumped at the chance.
keep
keep somebody back (object before back) = restrain, hinder, prevent from advancing:
Frequent illnesses kept him back. (prevented him from making
normal progress) keep down (tr) = repress, control:
IVJia; is the best way to keep down rats? (keep them down)
Try to remember to Sum off the light when you leave the room. I am
trying to keep down expenses, (keep expenses down) keep off (tr or intr) = refrain from
walking on, or from coming too close:
'Keep off the grass'. (park notice) keep on = continue:
/ wanted to explain but he kept on talking and didn 't give me a
chance to say anything. keep out (tr) = prevent from entering:
My shoes are very old and don't keep out the wafer, (keep the
water out/keep it out) keep out (intr) = stay outside:
'Private. Keep out.' (notice on door) keep up (tr) = maintain (an effort);
He began walking at four miles an hour but he couldn't keep up that
speed and soon began to walk more slowly, (he couidn 't keep it up)
It is difficult to keep up a conversation with someone who only says
'Yes' and 'No'.
keep up (intr), keep up with (tr) = remain abreast of someone who is advancing; advance at
the same pace as:
A runner can't keep up with a cyclist.
The work that the class is doing is too difficult for me. I won't be able
to keep up (with them).
It is impossible to keep up with the news unless you read the
newspapers.
knock
knock off (tr or intr) = stop work for the day (colloquial):
English workmen usually knock offat 5.30 or 6.00 p.m. We knock off work in time for tea.
knock out (tr) = hit someone so hard that he falls unconscious:
A Practical English Grammar
297
In the finals of the boxing championship he knocked out his opponent, who was carried out of
the ring. (knocked his opponent out/knocked him out)
lay
lay in (tr) == provide oneself with a sufficient quantity (of stores etc.) to last for some time:
She expected a shortage of dried fruit so she laid in a large supply. lay out (tr) = plan
gardens, building sites etc.:
Le Noire laid out the gardens at Versailles, (laid the gardens
out/laid them out) lay up (tr) = store carefully till needed again (used of ships, cars etc.):
Before he went to Brazil for a year, he laid up his car, as he didn'!
want to sell it. (laid it up) be laid up (of a person) = be confined to bed through illness:
She was laid up/or weeks with a slipped disk.
lead
lead up to (tr) = prepare the way for, introduce (figuratively):
He wanted to borrow my binoculars, but he didn't say so at once. He led up to it by talking
about birdwatching.
leave
leave off (usually intr) = stop (doing something):
He was playing his 'trumpet but I told him to leave off because the
neighbours were complaining about the noise. leave out (tr) = omit:
We 'II sing our school sang leaving out the last ten verses.
They gave each competitor a number; but they left out No, 13 as no
one wanted to have it. (leftNo. 13 out/left it out)
let
let down (tr) = lower;
When she lets her hair down it reaches her waist, (lets down her
hair/lets it down)
You can let a coat down (lengthen it) by using the hem. . let someone down (object before
down) = disappoint him by failing to act as well as expected, or failing to fulfil an agreement:
I promised him thai you would do the work. Why did you let me down
by doing so little?
He said he'd come to help me; but he let me down. He never
turned up. let in (tr) = allow to enter, admit:
They let in the ticket-holders, (let the ticket-holders in/
let them in)
I/you mention my name to the door-keeper he will let you in.
let someone off (object before off) = refrain from punishing:
/ thought that the magistrate was going to fine me but he let me off.
(Compare with get off,) let out (tr)
(a) = make wider (of clothes):
That boy is getting fatter. You'll have to let out his clothes, (lethis clothes out/let them out)
(b) = allow to leave, release:
He opened the door and let out the dog. (let the dog out/let it out)
live
live down a bad reputation = live in such a manner that people will forget it:
He has never quite been able to live down a reputation for drinking
too much which he got when he was a young man. (live it down) live in (intr) = live in one's
place of work (chiefly used of domestic servants):
ADVERTISEMENT: Cook wanted. £140 a week. Live in. live on (tr) = use as staple food:
It is said that/or a certain period of his life Byron lived on vinegar
and potatoes in order to keep thin. live up to (tr) = maintain a certain standard -moral,
economic or behavioural;
He had high ideals and tried to live up to them. (he tried to act in
accordance with his ideals)
lock
lock up a house (tr or intr; usually intr) = lock all doors:
People usually lock up before they go to bed at night. lock up a person or thing = put in a
locked place, i.e. box, safe, prison:
She locked up the papers in her desk. (locked the papers
up/locked them up)
A Practical English Grammar
298
look
look after (tr) = take care of:
Will you look after my parrot when I am away? look ahead (htr) = consider the future so as to
make provision for it:
It's lime you looked ahead and made plans for your retirement. look at (tr) = regard:
He looked at the clock and said, 'It is midnight.' look back fintr). look back on (tr) = consider
the past:
Looking back, I don't suppose we are any worse now than people
were a hundred years ago.
Perhaps some day it will be pleasant to look back on these things.
look back/round (intr) = look behind (literally):
Don't look round now but the woman behind us is wearing the most extraordinary clothes.
look for (tr) = search for, seek:
/ have lost my watch. Will you help me to look for it? look forward to (tr) = expect with
pleasure (often used with gerund)/ am looking forward to her arrival/to seeing her. look in (intr) = pay a short (often
unannounced) visit (= call in):
I'll look in this evening to see how she is. look into (tr) = investigate:
There is a mystery about his death and the police are looking into it. look on ... as (tr) =
consider:
Most people look on a television set as an essential piece of furniture.
These children seem to look on their teachers as their enemies. took on (intr) = be a
spectator only, not a participator:
Two men were fighting. The rest were looking on. look on (tr), look out on (tr) (used of
windows and houses) = be facing:
His house looks (out) on to the sea. (from his house you can see
the sea.) look out (intr) = be watchful, beware:
(to someone just about to cross the road) 'Look out! There's a lorry
coming!'
look out for (tr) = keep one's eyes open so as to see something (usually fairly conspicuous) if
it presents itself:
/ am going to the party too, so look out for me. look over (tr) = inspect critically, read again,
revise quickly (look over is similar to go over but less thorough):
Look over what you've written before handing it to the examiner.
I'm going to look over a house that I'm thinking of buying. look through (tr) = examine a
number of things, often in order to select some of them; turn over the pages of a book or
newspaper, looking for information:
Look through your old clothes and see if you have anything to give
away.
I'd like you So look through these photographs and try to pick out the
man you saw.
He looked through the books and decided that he wouldn't like them. look through someone =
look at him without appearing to see him, as a deliberate act of rudeness:
She has to be polite to me in the office but when we meet outside she
always looks through me.
look up an address/a name/word/train time/telephone number etc. = look for it in the
appropriate book or paper, i.e. address book/ dictionary/timetable/directory etc.:
If you don't know the meaningofthe word look it up. (look up the
word/look the word up)
I must look up the time of your train, (look for it in the timetable) look somebody up can mean
'visit'. The person visited usually lives at some distance and is not seen very often, look up is
therefore different from look in, which implies that the person visited lives quite close:
Any lime you come to London do look me up. (come and see me)
I haven't seen Tom forages. I must find out where he lives and look
him up. (look Tom up/look up Tom) look up (intr) == improve (the subject is usually
things/business/world affairs/the weather, i.e. nothing very definite):
Business has been very bad lately but things are beginning to look up
now.
look someone up and down •= look at him contemptuously, letting your eyes wander from his
A Practical English Grammar
299
head to his feet and back again:
The policeman looked the drunk man u? and down very deliberately
before replying to his question. look up to (tr) = respect:
Schoolboys usually look up to great athletes. look down on (tr) = despise:
Small boys often look down on little girls and re/use to play with
them.
She thinks her neighbours look down on her a bit because she's never
been abroad.
make
make for (tr) = travel towards:
The escaped prisoner was making/or the coast. make off (intr) = run away (used of thieves
etc.):
The boys made off when they saw the policemen. make out (tr)
(a) = discover the meaning of, understand, see. hear etc. clearly:
/ can't make out the address, he has written it so badly, (make the
address out/make it out)
Can you hear what the man with the loud-hailer is saying? I can't
make it out at all.
I can't make out why he isn 't here yet.
(b) = state (probably falsely or with exaggeration):
He made out that he was a student looking/or a job. We later learn!
that ihis wasn 't true at all.
The English climate isn 'I so bad as some people like to make out.
(c) = write a cheque:
CUSTOMER: Who shall I make it out to? SHOPKEEPER: Make it out to Jones and Company.
make up one's mind = come to a decision:
In the end he made up his mind to go by train.
make up a quarrel/make it up = end it:
Isn't it time you and Ann made up your quarrel, (mode it up)
make up a story/excuse/explanation = invent it:
/ don't believe your story at all. I think you are just making it up.
make up (tr or intr) = use cosmetics:
Most women make up/make up their faces, (make their faces
up/make them up)
Actors have So be made up before they appear on stage.
make up (tr) = put together, compound, compose:
Take this prescription to the chemist's. They will make it up for you there, (make up the
presciption/make the prescription up) NOTICE (in tailor's window): Customers' own materials
made up. The audience was made up of very young children.
make up for (tr) = compensate for (the object is very often ;'():
You'll have to work very hard today to make u? for the time you wasted yesterday/to make up
for being late yesterday. We aren 't allowed to drink when we are in training but we intend to
make up for it after the race is over. (to drink more than usual then)
miss
miss out (tr) = leave out ('leave out' is more usual; see page 3351.
mix
mix up (tr) = confuse:
He mixed up the addresses so that no one got the right letters.
(mixed them up)
be/get mixed up with = be involved (usually with some rather disreputable person or
business):
/ don't want to get mixed up with any illegal organization.
move
move in (intr) = move self and possessions into new house, flat, rooms etc.
move out (intr) = leave house/flat etc,, with one's possessions, vacate accommodation:
/ have found a new flat. The present tenant is moving out this
weekend and I am moving in on Wednesday. move on or up (intr) = advance, go higher:
Normally in schools pupils move up every year.
order
order somebody about (object before about) = give him a lot of orders (often regardless of his
A Practical English Grammar
300
convenience or feeiings):
He is a retired admiral and still has the habit of ordering
people about.
pay
pay back (tr), pay someone back (tr or intr) = repay:
/ must pay back the money that I borrowed, (pay the money
back/pay it back)
I must pay back Mr Pitt. (pay Mr Pitt back/pay him back)
I must Ray Mr Pitt back the money he lent me. (pay him back the
money/pay it back to him) pay someone back/out = revenge oneself:
I'll pay you back for this. (for the harm you have done me.) pay up (intr) = pay money owed in
full (there is often a feeling that the payer is reluctant):
Unless you pay up I shall tell my solicitor to write to you.
pick
pick out (tr) = choose, select, distinguish from a group:
Here are six rings. Pick out the one you like best. (pick it out)
In an identity parade the witness has to try to pick out the criminal
from a group of about eight men. (pick the criminal out/pick him
out)
I know that you are in this photograph but I can't pick you out.
pick up (tr)
(a) = raise or lift a person or thing, usually from the ground or from a table or chair:
He picked up the child and carried him into the house, (picked the
cbi!d up)
She scatters toys all aver the floor and I have to pick them up.
(b) = call for, take with one (in a vehicle):
/ won't have time to come to your house but I could pick you up at the end of your road.
The coach stops at the principal hotels to pick up tourists, but only if they arrange this in
advance, (pick tourists up/Rick them up) The crew of the wrecked yacht were picked up by
helicopter.
(c) = receive (by chance) wireless signals:
Their SOS was picked up by another ship. which informed the lifeboat headquarters.
(d) = acquire cheaply, learn without effort:
Sometimes you pick up wonderful bargains in these markets. Children usually pick up foreign
languages very quickly.
point
point out (tr) = indicate, show:
As we drove through the city the guide pointed out the most important buildings, (pointed the
buildings out/pointed them out)
pull
pull down (tr) = demolish (used of buildings):
Everywhere elegant old buildings are being pulled down and
mediocre modem erections are being put up. (pull down houses/pull
them down) pull off (tr) = succeed (the object is normally it):
Much to our surprise he pulled off the deal. (sold the goods/got the
contract) (pulled it off)
pull through (tr or intr) = recover from illness/cause someone to recover:
We thought she was going to die but her own will-power pulled her
through, (tr)
He is very ill but he'll pull through if we look after him carefully.
(intr) pull up (intr) = stop (of vehicles):
A lay-by is a space at the side of a main road, where drivers can pull
up if they want a rest.
put
put aside/by (tr) = save for future use (usually money), put aside often implies that the money
is being saved for a certain purpose:
He puts aside £50 a month to pay for his summer holiday, (puts it
aside)
Don't spend all your salary. Try to put something by each month. put away (tr) = put tidily out
A Practical English Grammar
301
of sight (usually in drawers, cupboards etc.):
Put your toys away, children; it's bedtime, (put away the toys/put
them away) put something back = replace it where you found it/where it belongs:
When you 've finished with the book put it back an the shelf. put back a clock/watch = retard
the hands: put the clock back is sometimes used figuratively to mean return to the customs of
the past:
MOTHER: Your father and I will arrange a marriage for you when the
time comes.
DAUGHTER; You're trying to put the clock back, mother. Parents
don't arrange marriages these days! (put hack the clock/put it back) put down ftr)
(a) = the opposite of pick up:
He picked up the saucepan and put it down at once because the handle was almost red-hot,
(put the saucepan down/put it down)
(b) = crush rebellions, movements:
Troops were used to put down the rebellion, (put the rebellion down/put it down)
(c) = write:
Put down his phone number before you forget it. (put the number down/put it down)
CUSTOMER (to shop assistant): I’ll take that one. Please put it down
to me/to my account. (enter it in my account)
put something down to (tr) = attribute it to:
The children wouldn't answer him, but he wasn't annoyed as he put it down to shyness.
She hasn't been well since she came to this country; I put H down to the climate. put
forward a suggestion/proposal etc. = offer it for consideration;
The older members a/the committee are inclined to veto any suggestions put forward by the younger
ones. (put a suggestion
forward/put it forward)
put forward/on clocks and watches = advance the hands, put forward is the opposite of put
back:
In March people in England put their clocks forward/on an hour.
When summer time ends they put them back an hour. put in a claim = make a claim:
He Rut in a claim for compensation because he had lost his luggage
in the train, crash. put in for a job/a post == apply for it:
They are looking/or a lecturer in geography. Why don 't you put in
for it? put off an action = postpone it:
Some people Rut of f making their wills till it is too late.
I'll put off my visit to Scotland till the weather is warmer, (put my
visit off/put it off) put a person off
(a) = tell him to postpone his visit to you:
I had invited some guests to dinner but I had to put them off because a Rower cut prevented
me from cooking anything.
(b) = repel, deter him:
I wanted to see the exhibition but the queue put me off.
Many people who want to come to England are put off by the stories
they hear about English weather.
put on clothes/glasses/jewellery = dress oneself etc. The opposite is take off:
He put on a black coat so that he would be inconspicuous, (put a
coat on/put it on)
She put on her glasses and took the letter from my hand. put on an expression = assume it:
He Rut on anair of indifference, which didn't deceive anybody for a
moment. put on a play = produce/perform it:
The students usually put on a play at the end of the year. put on a light/gas or electric
fire/radio = switch it on:
Put on the light, (put the light on/put it on) put out any kind of light or fire = extinguish it;
Put out that light, (put the light out/put it out) put someone out (inconvenience him):
He is very selfish. He wouldn't put himself out for anyone. be put out = be annoyed:
She was very put out when I said that her new summer dress did» 'f
suit her.
put up (tr)
(a) = erect (a building, monument, statue etc.):
A Practical English Grammar
302
He put up a shed in the garden, (put a shed up/put it up)
(b) = raise (prices):
When She importation of foreign tomatoes was forbidden, home
growers put up their prices, (put their prices up/put them up) put someone up (object usually
before up) = give him temporary hospitality:
If you come to Paris I will put you up. You needn 't look for an hotel. put someone up to
something (usually some trick) = give him the idea of doing it/tell him how to do it:
He couldn't have thought of thai trick by himself. Someone must have
put him up to it. put up with (tr) = bear patiently:
We had to Rut up with a lot of noise when the children were at home.
ring
ring up (tr or intr) = telephone:
! rang up the theatre to book seats for tonight, (rang the theatre
up/rang them up)
If you can't come ring up and let me know. ring off (intr) = end a telephone call by putting
down the receiver:
He rang off before I could ask his name.
round
round up (tr) = drive or bring together (people or animals):
The sheepdog rounded up the sheep (= collected them into a group) and drove them through
the gate.
On the day after the riots the police rounded up all suspects/ rounded them up. (arrested
them)
rub
rub out (tr) =s erase pencil or ink marks with an india-rubber:
The child wrote down the wrong word and then rubbed it out.
(rubbed the word out/rubbed out the word) rub up (tr) = revise one's knowledge of a subject:
I am going to France; ! must rub up my French, (rub it up)
run
run after (tr) = pursue (see example below).
run away (intr) = flee, desert (one's home/school etc.), elope:
The thief ran away and the policeman ran after him. He ran away from home and got a job in
a garage.
run away with (tr) = become uncontrollable (of emotions), gailop off
out of rider's control (of horses):
Don't let your emotions runaway with you. His horse ran away with him and he had a bad fall.
run away with the idea = accept an idea too hastily:
Don't run away with the idea that lam unsociable; I Just haven't time to go out much.
run down (tr) = disparage, speak ill of:
He is always running down his neighbours, (running his
neighbours down/running them down) run down (intr) == become unwound/discharged (of
clocks/batteries etc.):
This torch is useless; the battery has run down. be run down (intr) •= be in poor health after
illness, overwork etc.:
He is still run down after his illness and unfit/or work. run into (tr) = collide with (of vehicles):
The car skidded and ran into a lamp-post, (struck the lamp-post) run into/across someone =
meet him accidentally:
I ran into my cousin in Harrods recently. (I met him.) run out of (tr) = have none left, having
consumed all the supply:
I have run out of milk. Put some lemon in your tea instead. run over (tr) = drive over
accidentally (in a vehicle):
The drunk man stepped into the road right in front of the oncoming
car. The driver couldn 't stop in time and ran over him. run over (tr or intr) = overflow:
He turned on both taps full and left the bathroom. When he came
back he found that the water was running over. /running over the
edge of the bath. run over/through (tr) = rehearse, check or revise quickly:
We 've got a few minutes before the train goes, so I'll just run through
your instructions again.
run through (tr) •=- consume extravagantly, waste (used of supplies or money):
A Practical English Grammar
303
He inherited a fortune and ran through it in a year. run up bills = incur them and increase
them by continuing to buy things and put them down to one's account:
Her husband said that she must pay for things at once and not run
up bills. run up against difficulties/opposition = encounter them/it:
If he tries to change the rules of the club he will run up against a lot
of opposition.
see
aee about (tr) = make inquiries or arrangements:
Imust see about getting a room ready forhim. see somebody off = accompany an intending
traveller to his train/boat/plane etc.:
The station was crowded with boys going back to school and parents
who were seeing them off.
see somebody out = accompany a departing guest to the door of the house:
When guests leave the host usually sees them out.
Don't bother to come So the door with me. I can see myself out.
see over a house/a building = go into every room, examine it often with a view to buying or
renting:
I'm definitely interested in the house. I'd like to see over it. see through (tr) = discover a
hidden attempt to deceive:
She pretended that she loved him but he saw through her, and
realized thai she was only after his money. (He wasn't taken in by
her/by her pretence. See take in.) see to (tr) = make arrangements, put right, repair:
I/you can provide the wine I'll see to the food.
That electric fire isn't safe. You should have it seen to.
Please see to if that the door is locked.
sell
sell off (tr) = sell cheaply (what is left of a stock):
ASSISTANT: This line is being discontinued so we are selling off the remainder of our stock:
that's why they are so cheap, (selling the rest off/selling it off)
sell out (intr) == sell all that you have of a certain type of article:
When all the seats for a certain performance have been booked, theatres put a notice saying
'Sold out' outside the booking office.
send
be sent down (intr) = be expelled from a university for misconduct:
He behaved so badly in college that he was sent down and never got
his degree. send for (tr) = summon:
One of our water pipes has burst. We must send for the plumber.
The director sent for me and asked for an explanation. send in (tr) = send to someone (who
need not be mentioned beCause the person spoken to knows already):
You must send in your application before Friday, (send it to the
authority concerned) (send your application in/send it in) send on (tr) = forward, send after a
person:
If any letters come for you after you have gone I will send them on.
(send on yow letters/send your letters on)
set
set in (intr) = begin (a period, usually unpleasant):
Winter has set in early this year. set off (tr) = start (a series of events):
That strike set off a series of strikes throughout the country, (set
them off) set off/out (intr) = start a journey:
They set out/off at six and hoped to arrive before dark. 'for' is used when the destination is
mentioned:
They set out/off for Rome.
set out + infinitive (often show/prove/explain or some similar verb) = begin this undertaking,
aim:
In this book the author sets out to prove that the inhabitants a/the
islands came from South America. set up (tr) = achieve, establish (a record):
He net up a new record/or the 1.000 metres, (set a new record
up/set it up) set up (intr) = start a new business:
A Practical English Grammar
304
When he married he left his father's shop and set upon his own.
(opened his own shop)
settle
settle down (intr) = become accustomed to. and contented in, a new place, job etc.:
He soon settled down in his new school. settle up (intr) = pay money owed:
Tell me what 1 owe you and I'll settle up.
shout
shout down (tr) = make a loud noise to prevent a speaker from being heard:
Tom tried to make a speech defending himself but the crowd wouldn't
listen to his explanation and shouted him down.
The moderate speakers were shouted down.
show
show off (tr or intr) = display (skill, knowledge etc.) purely in order to win notice or applause:
Although Jules speaks English perfectly, my cousin spoke French to
him all the time just to show off. (to impress us with her knowledge
of French)
He is always picking up very heavy things just to show off his
strength, (show it off)
shut
shut down ftr or intr) = close down (see page 323).
sit
sit back (intr) = relax, take no action, do no more work;
I have worked hard all my life and now I'm going to sit back and
watch other people working.
sit up (intr) == stay out of bed till later than usual (usually reading, working, or waiting for
someone):
I was very worried when he didn't come in and ! sat up till 3 a.m.
waiting for him.
She sat up all night with the sick child.
stand
stand by someone (tr) = continue to support and help him:
No matter what happens I'll stand by you, so don't be afraid.
stand for (tr) = represent:
The symbol 'x' usually stands/or the unknown quantity in
mathematics.
stand for Parliament = be a candidate for Parliament, offer yourself for election:
Mr Pitt stood for Parliament five years ago but he wasn't elected. stand up for (tr) = defend
verbally:
His father blamed him, but his mother stood up for him and said that
he had acted sensibly.
Why don't you stand up for yourself? stand up to (tr) = resist, defend oneself against (a
person or force):
This type of building stands up to the gales very well.
Your boss is a bully. If you don't stand up to him he'll lead you a
dog's life. stand out (intr) = be conspicuous, be easily seen:
She stood out from the crowd because of her height and her/laming
red hair.
stay
stay up (intr) = remain out of bed till later than usual, usually for pleasure:
Children never want to go to bed at the proper time; they always want
to stay up late.
step
step up (tr) = increase rate of, increase speed of (this usually refers to industrial production):
This new machine will step up production, (step it up)
take
be taken aback (intr) = be surprised and disconcerted:
/ was taken aback when I saw the bill. take after (tr) = resemble (one's parents/grandparents
etc.):
He takes after his grandmother; she had red hair too.
A Practical English Grammar
305
My father was forgetful and I take after him; I forget everything. take back (tr) = withdraw
(remarks, accusations etc.):
/ blamed him bitterly at first but later, when I heard the whole story,
I realized that he had been right and I went to him and took back my
remarks, (took them back) take down (tr) = write, usually from dictation:
He read out the names and his secretary took them down. (took
down the names/took the names down) take for (tr) = attribute wrong identity or qualities to
someone:
I look him for his brother. They are extremely alike.
Do you take me for a fool? take in (tr) (a) = deceive:
At first he took us in by his stories and we tried to help him; but later
we learnt that his stories were all lies.
(b) = receive as guests/lodgers:
When our car broke down I knocked on the door of the nearest house. The owner very kindly
took us in and gave us a bed/or the night.
People who live by the sea often take in paying guests during the summer, (take paying
guests in/take them in)
(c) = understand, receive into the mind:
/ was thinking a/something else while she was speaking and I didn 'I really take in what she
was sayingI couldn't lake in the lecture stall. It was too difficult for me. (couldn 't take it in)
(d) = make less wide (of clothes):
I'm getting much thinner; I'll have to lake in my clothes, (fake my
clothes in/take them in)
take off (tr) = remove (when used of clothing 'take off' is the opposite of 'put on'):
He look off his coat when he entered the house and put it on again
when he went out. (look his coat off/took it off) take off (intr) = leave the ground (of
aeroplanes):
There is often a spectators' balcony at airports, where people can
watch the planes taking of/and landing. take on (tr)
(a) = undertake work:
She wants someone to look after her children. I shouldn 't care to take onthejob. They are
very spoilt, (take the job on/fake it on)
(b) = engage staff:
They're taking on fifty new workers at the factory.
(c) = accept as an opponent:
/'/; take you on at table tennis. (I'll play against you.)
/ took on Mr Pitt at draughts, (took Mr Pitt on/took him on) take out (tr) = remove, extract:
Petrol will take out that stain, (take the stain out/take it out)
The dentist took out two of her teeth. take somebody out = entertain them (usually at some
public place):
Her small boy is at boarding school quite near here. I take him out
every month, (and give him a meal in a restaurant) take over (tr or intr) = assume
responsibility for, or control of. in succession to somebody else:
We stop work at ten o 'clock and the night shift takes over until the
following morning.
Miss Smith is leaving to get married and Miss Jones will be taking
over the class/Miss Jones will be taking over from Miss Smith, (see
hand over) take to (tr)
(a) •= begin a habit. There is usually the impression that the speaker thinks this habit bad or
foolish, though this is not necessarily always the case. It is often used with the gerund:
He took to drink, (began drinking too much) He took to borrowing money from the petty cash.
(b) = find likeable or agreeable, particularly at first meeting:
/ was introduced to the new headmistress yesterday. I can't say I took
to her.
He went to sea (= became a sailor) and took to the life like a duck to
water.
(c) = seek refuge/safety in:
A Practical English Grammar
306
When they saw that the ship was sinking the crew took to the boats. After the failure of the
coup many of the rebels took to the hills and became guerillas.
take up (tr)
(a) = begin a hobby, sport or kind of study (there is no feeling of criticism here):
He took up golf and became very keen on it. (took it up)
(b) = occupy (a position in time or space):
He has a very smalt room and most of the space is taken up by a
grand piano.
A lota/an MP's time is taken up with answering letters from his
constituents.
talk
talk over (tr) = discuss:
Talk it over with your wife and give me your answer tomorrow, (talk over my suggestion/talk
my suggestion over)
think
^
think over (tr) = consider:
/ can't decide straight away but I 'II think over your idea and let you know what I decide, (think
your idea over/think it over)
throw
throw away/out (tr) = jettison (rubbish etc.):
Throw away those old shoes. Nobody could wear them now. (throw the shoes away/throw
them away) throw up (tr) = abandon suddenly (some work or plan):
He suddenly got tired of the job and threw it up. (he threw up the job/threw the job up)
tie
tie someone up = bind his hands and feet so that he cannot move:
The thieves tied up the night watchman before opening the safe. (tied the man up/tied him
up)
try
try on (tr) == put on (an article of clothing) to see if it fits:
CUSTOMER IN DRESS SHOP: / like this dress. Could I try it on? (try this dress on/try on this
dress)
try out (tr) = test:
We won't know how the plan works till we have tried it out. They are trying out new ways of
preventing noise in hospitals, (trying them out)
turn
turn away (tr) = refuse admittance to:
The man at the door turned away anybody who hadn't an
invitation card. (turned them away) turn down (tr) = refuse, reject an offer, application,
applicant:
/ applied/or the job but they turned me down/turned down my
application because I dian 't know German.
He was offered £500 for the picture but he turned it down. (turned
down the offer/turned the offer down) turn into (tr) = convert into:
/ am going to turn my garage into a playroom for the children.
She turned the silver candlestick into a reading lamp. turn in (intr) = go to bed (used chiefly by
sailors/campers etc.):
The captain turned in, not realizing that the icebergs were so close. turn on (tr) (stress on
turn) = attack suddenly (the attacker is normally a friend or a hitherto friendly animal):
The tigress turned on the trainer and struck him to the ground. turn on/off (tr) = switch on/off
(lights, gas. fires, radios, taps etc.) turn up/down (tr) = increase/decrease the pressure, force,
volume (of gas or oil, lights, fires, or of radios):
Turn up the gas; it is much too low.
I wish the people in the next flat would turn down their radio. You
can hear every word. (turn the sound down/turn it down) turn out (tr)
(a) = produce:
The creamery turns out two hundred tons of butter a week. (turns it out)
(b) = evict, empty:
1 turn a person out == evict him from his house/flat/room:
At one time, if tenants didn't Ray their rent the landlord could turn them out.
A Practical English Grammar
307
2 turn out one's pockets/handbags/drawers etc. = empty them, usually looking for something:
'Turn out your Rockets,' said the detective.
3 turn out a room = (usually) clean it thoroughly, first putting the furniture outside:
I try to turn out one room every month if I have time. turn out (intr)
(a) = assemble, come out into the street (usually in order to welcome somebody):
The whole town turned out to welcome the winning football team
when they came back with the Cup.
(b) = develop:
I've never made Yorkshire pudding before so I am not quite sure how it is going to turn out.
Marriages arranged by marriage bureaux frequently turn out well.
(c) = be revealed. Notice the two possible constructions, i( turned out
that. . . and he turned out to be . . .:
He told her that he was a bachelor but it turned out that he was married with six children.
(She learnt this later.) Our car broke down half way through the journey but the hiker we had
picked up turned out to be an expert mechanic and was able to put things right.
Note the difference between turn out and come out. With turn out
the fact revealed is always mentioned and there is no implication that
the facts are discreditable. With come out we are told only that certain
facts (usually discreditable) are revealed; we are not told what these
facts are.
turn over (tr) s= turn something so that the side previously
underneath is exposed:
He turned over the stone, (turned the stone over/fumed it over The initials 'PTO' at the bottom
of a page mean 'Please turn over'. 'Turn over a new leaf.' (begin again, meaning to do better)
turn over (intr)
(a) = turn upside down, upset, capsize (used of vehicles or boats):
The car struck the wall and fumed over. The canoe turned over. throwing the boys info the
water.
(b) = (of people) change position so as to lie on the other side:
It is difficult to turn over in a hammock.
When his alarm went off he just turned over and went to sleep again. turn up (intr) = arrive,
appear (usually from the point of view of someone waiting or searching):
We arranged to meet at the station but she didn 't turn up.
Don't bother to look for my umbrella; it will turn up some day.
walk
walk out (intr) = march out in disgust or indignation:
Some people were so disgusted with the play that they walked out in the middle of the first
act.
wait
wait on (tr) = attend, serve fat home or in a restaurant):
He expected his wife to wait on him hand and foot.
The man who was waiting on us seemed very inexperienced, he got
all our orders mixed up.
wash
wash up (tr or intr) = wash the plates etc. after a meal:
When we have dinner very late we don't wash up till the next morning, (wash up the
dishes/wash them up)
watch
watch out (intr) = look out. watch out for (tr) = look out for (see page 357).
wear
wear away (intr) = gradually reduce; make smooth or flat: hollow out (used mostly of wood or
stone. The subject is usually the weather, or people who walk on or touch the stone etc.):
It is almost impossible to read the inscription on the monument as
most of the Setters have been worn away. (by the weather) wear off (intr) = disappear
gradually (can be used literally but is chiefly used for mental or physical feelings):
These glasses may seem uncomfortable at first but that feeling will
soon wear off.
When her first feeling ofShyness had worn off she started to enjoy
A Practical English Grammar
308
herself.
He began to try to sit up, which showed us that the effects of the drug
were wearing off. wear out (tr or intr)
(a) (tr) = use till no longer serviceable; (intr) become unserviceable as a result of long use
(chiefly of clothes):
Children wear out their shoes very quickly, (wear their shoes
out/wear them out)
Cheap clothes wear out quickly.
(b) (tr) = exhaust (used of people; very often in the passive):
He worked all night and wanted to go on working the next day, but we saw that he was
completely worn out and persuaded him to stop.
wind
wind up (tr or intr) = bring or come to an end (used of speeches or business proceedings):
The headmaster wound up (the meeting) by thanking the parents.
(wound the meeting up/wound it up)
wipe
wipe out (tr) = destroy completely;
The epidemic wiped out whole families, (wiped whole families out/wiped them out)
work
work out (tr) = find. by calculation or study, the solution to some problem or a method of
dealing with it; study and decide on the details of a scheme:
He used his calculator to work out the cost. (work the cost out) Tell me where you want to go
and I'll work out a route. This is the outline of the plan. We want the committee to work out the
details, (work them out)
39
List of irregular verbs
364
Irregular verbs
The verbs in roman type are verbs which are not very common in modem English but may be
found in literature. When a verb has two possible forms and one is less usual than the other,
the less usual one will be printed in roman.
Compounds of irregular verbs form their past tenses and past participles in the same way as
the original verb:
come
came
come overcome overcame overcome
set
set
set upset
upset
upset
Present and infinitive Simple past
Past participle
abide
abode
abode arise
arose
arisen awake
awoke/awaked
awoken/awaked,
be
was
been bear
bore
borne/born* heat
heat
beaten become
became
become befall
befell
befallen beget
begot
begotten begin
began
begun
behold
beheld
beheld bend
bent
bent bereave
bereaved
bereaved/bereft* beseech
besought
besought bet
betted/bet
betted/bet bid (= command}
bade
bidden bid (= offer)
bid
bid bind
bound
bound bite
bit
bitten
*These past participles are not optional but carry different meanings and should be checked
by the student in a reliable dictionary.
Present and infinitive Simple past
bleed
bled
blow
Mew
break
broke
breed
bred
bring
brought
broadcast broadcast
build
built
burn
burned/burnt
burst
burst
buy
bought
A Practical English Grammar
Past participle
bled
blown
broken
bred
brought
broadcast
built
burned/burnt
burst
bought
309
can~[
could
be able
cast
cast
cast
catch
caught
caught
chide
chid
chidden
choose
chose
chosen
cleave
clove/cleft
cloven/cleft*
cling
clung
clung
clothe
clothed/clad
clothed/clad
come
came
come
cost
cost
cost
creep
crept
crept
crow
crowed/crew
crowed
cut
cut
cut
dare
dared/dwst
dared/durst
deal/di-.V dealt /delt/
dealt /delt/
dig
dug
dug
do
did
done
draw
drew
drawn
dream
dreamed/dreamt dreamed/dreamt
/dri:m/
/dri:md, dremt/ /dri:md, dremt/
drink
drank
drunk
drive
drove
driven
dwelt
dwelled/dit^
^viewed/dwelt
eat
ate
eaten
fall
felt
fallen
feed
fed
fed
feel
felt
felt
fight
fought
fought
find
found
found
flee
fled
fled
*See footnote on page 353. +Present only.
Present and infinitive Simple past past participle
fling
flung
flung
fly
flew
flown
forbear
forbore
forborne
forbid
forbade /fa'basd/ forbidden
forget
forgot
forgotten
forgive
forgave
forgiven
forsake
forsook
forsaken
freeze
froze
frozen
get
got
got
gild
gilded/gilt
gilded/gilt
gird
girded/girt
girded/girt
give
gave
given
go
went
gone
grind
ground
ground
grow
grew
grown
hang
hanged/hung
hanged/hung*
have
had
had
hear /hi3(r)/ heard /hard/
heard /ha:d/
hew
hewed
hewed/hewn
hide
hid
hidden
hit
hit
hit
hold
held
held
hurt
hurt
hurt
keep
kept
kept
kneel
knelt
knelt
knit*'
knit
knit
know
knew
known
lay
laid
laid
lead
led
led
A Practical English Grammar
310
lean
leaned/leant
leaned/leant
/H:n/
/li:nd, lent/
/li:nd, lent/
leap
leaped/leapt
leaped/leapt
/li:p/
/li:pt, lept/
/li:pt, lept/
leam
learned/leamt
learned/leamt
leave
left
left
lend
lent
lent
let
let
let
lie
lay
lain
'See footnote on page 353.
** = unite/draw together, knit (= make garments from wool) is a
regular verb.
fPresent only.
Present and infinitive Simple past Past participle
light
lighted/lit
lighted/lit
lose
lost
lost
make
made
made
may\
might
—
mean /mi:n/ meant /ment/ meant /ment/
meet
met
met
mow
mowed
mowed/mown
must\
had to
—
fiught\
—
—
pay
paid
paid
put
put
put
read /ri:d/ read /red/
read /red/
rend
rent
rent
rid
rid
rid
ride
rode
ridden
ring
rang
rung
rise
rose
risen /'nzn/
run
ran
run
saw
sawed
sawed/sawn
say /sei/
said /sed/
said /sed/
see
saw
seen
seek
sought
sought
sell
sold
sold
send
sent
sent
set
set
set
sew
sewed
sewed/sewn
shake
shook
shaken
sliall'{
should
—
shear
sheared/shore
sheared/shorn
shed
shed
shed
shine /Jain/ shone /Jun/
shone /Inn/
shoe
shoed/shod
shwd/shod
shoot
shot
shot
show
showed
showed/shown
shrink
shrank
shrunk
shut
shut
shut
sing
sang
sung
sink
sank
sunk
sit
sat
sat
slay
slew
slain
sleep
slept
slept
fPresent on!y.
Present and infinitive Simple past Past participle
slide
slid
slid
A Practical English Grammar
311
sling
slink
slit
smell
smite
sow
speak
speed
spell
spend
spill
spin
spit
split
spread
spring
stand
steal
stick
sting
stink
strew
stride
strike
siring
strive
swear
sweep
swell
swim
swing
take
teach
tear
tell
think
thrive
throw
thrust
tread
slung
slunk
slit
smelled/smelt
smote
sowed
spoke
speeded/sped
spelled/spelt
spent
spilled/spilt
spun
spat
split
spread
sprang
stood
stole
stuck
stung
stank/stunk
strewed
strode
struck
strung
strove
sicore
swept
swelled
swam
swung
took
taught
tore
told
thought
thrived/throve
threw
thrust
trod
Present and infinitive Simple past
understand understood
undertake undertook
wake
waked/woke
wear
more
weave
wove
weep
wept
wet
wetted/wet
wiil't
would
win
won
wind
wound
wring
wrung
write
wrote
fPresent only.
A Practical English Grammar
slung
slunk
slit
smelted/smelt
smitten
sowed/sown
spoken
speeded/sped
spelled/spelt
spent
spilled/spilt
spun
spat
split
spread
sprung
stood
stolen
stuck
stung
stunk
strewed/strewn
stridden
struck
strung
striven
sworn
swept
swelled/swollen
swum
swung
taken
taught
torn
told
thought
thrived/thriven
thrown
thrust
trodden/trod
Past participle
understood
undertaken
waked/woken
worn
woven
wept
wetted/wet
—
won
wound
wrung
written
312
Index
a/an (the indefinite article) 1-4 + ones/ones 24 A
form 1
order 19
with abstract nouns 13 D-E, participle 17 B
240 C, 345
position 18
omission 3
possessive: see possessive
and one 2 E, 4, 349 B, 350 adjectives
use 2
predicative 18 B-D
ability 136-8
+ prepositions 96
see also can/could for ability
used as pronouns 23, 24 B
about 99
of quality 19
anxious about 27 C, 96
quantitative: see all (of), any, both
be about + infinitive 114 C (of), enough, few/a few, little/a
sorry about 27 B, 96
little, many/much etc., no, one,
tell about 316 B
some
what/how about... ? 289 B + that-clauses 26-7
above 95 A, 99
after the 23
abstract nouns 10 A, 13
admit: + gerund 261, 315 B
it + be + noun + infinitive 240 C + that 346 A
it + be + noun + that-clause adverb clauses 336-42
343 C
see also clauses
+ that-clauses 345
adverbs 28-45
omission of the 7 A, 7 C
formed from adjective + ly 29
absurd: + infinitive 26 B
and adjectives with same form
+ that-clause 236 B
30 A
accuse + object + of 97, 315 B comparative and superlative 31
across 99
comparisons 22 C, 34. 341
actually 40 A
comparisons with like/as 21 H-I
additions to remarks 112
of degree 41
adjectives 17-27
of frequency 38
agreement 17 C
interrogative 60
attributive 18 A, 18 D-E
followed by inversion 36, 45
comparative and superlative 20 kinds 28
comparisons 21-2, 341
of manner 35
demonstrative 9
order 39
distributive 46, 49 A
of place 36
+ infinitives 26-7
position 35-41, 45, 327
interrogative 54-9
relative 75 E
it + be + adjective + infinitive
sentence 40
26B-E.27D-E
of time 37
kinds 17
adverbs/conjunctions (conjuncts)
to invitations 286 C
337
short answers with auxiliaries 108
advice: expressions of 287-8
anxious 27 C, 235
in indirect speech 320, 321 B any 50 A, 50 C
advise: +• gerund/infinitive 267 D
anybody 51, 52 A-B
+ object + infinitive 244 A, anyone 51, 52 A-B
287 C-D, 320 A
anything 51 A, 51 C, 52 A
+ that 235
anyway 327 A
afraid: + infinitive 27 B, 271 A anywhere 36 B, 52 A
+ of 27 B, 271 A
apologize for 97, 315 B
+ so/not 347 B
apostrophe in contractions
+ that 27 B, 271 A
see contractions of auxiliary verbs
after: conjunction 92 B, 342
apostrophe for possessive/genitive;
preposition 92 B
with nouns 14, 15 A
afterwards 37 A, 92 B
with in definite'pronoun one 62,
agent of passive verbs 302 A, 68 A
303 D. 305 A
with someone/anyone etc. 51 B
ago: examples of use 183,188 with someone etc. else 52 B
agree
not used with yours, hers, its etc.
not used in continuous 168 C 62
A Practical English Grammar
313
+ infinitive 241 A, 269 A, 315 A appear: + adjective 18 B, 340 A-B
+ that (... should) 241 E-F. 235, used/not used in continuous 168 F
346 A
+ continuous infinitive 254 B
+ to + possessive adjective +
+ infinitive 240 A-B, 241 A,
gerund 269 A
241 D
alike 21 G
it appears + that 346 A, 346 C
all (of) 46 A. 46 C. 48 A-C + perfect infinitive 255 C, 256 B
compared to every 46 A aren't I? (= am I not?) 113
allow: + infinitive/gerund 267 D arrange
and may (permission) 127, 130, + (for + object +) continuous
131 D
infinitive 254 B3
almost 41 C
+ (for + object +) present
along 93 F, 99
infinitive 241 A
although; see though/although + that 235, 241 F
always: position 38 A-B
arrive at/in 93 B
with present continuous 167 B articles 1-8
with present perfect 185 D definite, see the
with simple present 173 indefinitive, see a/an
among 95 F
as
an: see a/an
adjective + as + subject + be
and 326
333 A, 340
with adjectives 18 E
as... as. not as/so... as 21 A,
both ... and 326
22, 34 A, 341 A-C
come/go + and 335
meaning because/since 332,
in pairs of infinitives 246 I 338 A-B
another: one another 53 C and like 21 H-I
one . . . another 53 B
+ pronoun + auxiliary 22,
answers
341 A-B
to requests with can/may 131 C so + adjective + as + infinitive
to questions with must/need 151 252 C
so as + infinitive 334 B bare infinitive 238 B 244 A 246
and when/while 331 B, 332
barely 41 C, 44, HOB
as if/though 292
be (auxiliary verb) 113-14
ask
form 107 A, 113
+(indirect object+) for 283 A
in continuous forms 113 B, 302 C
+ how/wh- + infinitive 242 A,
+ infinitive in indirect speech
242 C
321,229 B
+ if/whether + clause 317 E,
+ infinitive for orders plans
318 B
114 A
+ (object +) infinitive 243 B,
in passive tenses 302-3
283 B. 320
in short answers, question tags
= invite 286 B
etc, 108-12
+ passive infinitive 320 C subjunctive 290
+ that 243 B
was/were + infinitive for destiny
assume: + infinitive 245 A-B, 306 114 B
+ that 346
was/were + perfect infinitive
assumption 160
114 A2
at
were with singular subject 225,
after adjectives 96
228 B, 290 B, 292
arrive at a destination 93 B
be (ordinary verb) 115-17
be at a place 94 A
form 113 A
in directions 93 F
for age, condition, size, weight,
shout at 89 B
prices 115 B-E
for time 90 A
in continuous forms 115 B
for time/place 90 E
to denote existence 115 A
attempt (noun) 251
there is/are 116 A
attempt (verb) 241
there is/it is 117
auxiliary verbs 106-12
be able for ability
form 106-7
form 136
in additions to remarks 112
can/be able, could/was able 137
in agreements/disagreements 109
be about + infinitive 114 C, 241 B
in comment tags 111
be determined: + infinitive 241 A
A Practical English Grammar
314
in comparisons 22
+ that 235
modals 106, 107 B
be for/against + gerund 259
in question tags 110
be going to; for intention 203-5
semi-modals 106, 107 C for prediction 206
in short answers 108
be on the point of 114 C
see also be, can/could etc., dare,
because
do, have, may, must etc., need. and as/since 332 B-D, 338
ought, shall, used. will and
and for 330
contractions of auxiliary verbs become 18 B
avoid + gerund 261
before: adverb/preposition 90 B, 99
replacing negative purpose clause conjunction 90 B, 195 B, 342 A-B
336 C
beg
away 36 A, 36 E, 39
+ (object +) infinitive 243 A-B,
320 A, 320 C
back 30 A, 39
+ passive infinitive 320 C
bad 18 D, 20 E
+ that 235, 346
bad at/for 96
begin + infinitive/gerund 267 A
badly 35 F, 39
behind 95 D, 99
believe
and may 129
(active) + object + infinitive 245 requests for permission 131, 283
(passive) + infinitive 245, 254-6, can/could for possibility 135
306
could instead of may/might 134
so/not 347 A
can't/couldn't for negative
+ that 240 F, 245 A, 258, 346 A deduction 159
+ what + subject + verb 346 E can't/couldn't bear +
below 95 B, 99
gerund/infinitive 267 B
beneath 95 C
can't/couldn't help + gerund 261
beside 95 D-E
can't/couldn't stand + gerund 261
besides 95 E, 99, 327 A cardinal numbers 348-9
best
care (about) (= feel concerned)
adjective 20 E, 21 B-C, 24 B,
294 D
26 C
care for (= look after) 294 D
adverb 31, 34 C
care (for) and like 294, 295 A-C
better (adjective) 20 E, 21 C-D, catch 274 A
26 C
cease + gerund/infinitive 267 A
better (adverb) 31, 34 B certain 27 A
had better 120
certainly 40 A
between 95 D. 95 F
claim 241 A, 306 A
both (of) 47, 48 A-C
clauses: comparison 341
both ... and 326
concession 329, 340
bound + infinitive 27 A
condition 221-9
busy + present participle 275 C noun 343-7
but (conjunction) 98 B, 326 purpose 336-7
but (preposition)
reason 330, 338 A
+ bare infinitive 98 B
relative 72-85
but for in conditional sentences result/cause 338 B, 339
226 D
result (with so/such , ,. that) 339
and except 95 H
time 331, 342
wh- + should... but... ? 237 B
cleft sentences 67 D, 76, 117 D
by (adverb) 99
come: + infinitives of purpose 335
by (preposition) 99
+ participles 275 A
with agent of passive verb 302 A,
command (verb)
303 D, 305 A
+ object + infinitive 244 A
by air/sea etc. 93 D
+ that... should 235
by myself etc. 70 C, 71
commands: direct 281-2
+ time expression 90 B, 216
indirect 320-1
+ vehicle 93 D
commas
with connective relative clauses
can/could for ability 136-8 82
form 136
not used with defining relative
can/be able, could/was able 137 clauses 72, 84
in conditional sentences 221 Bl, with non-defining relative clauses
A Practical English Grammar
315
222 C, 223 Bl
70 A 84
could + perfect infinitive 138,154not used after say, tell etc. in
in purpose clauses 336 A indirect speech 307
can/could for permission 128-31 comment tags 111
form 128
comparative forms
could/was allowed to 130 adjectives 20
adverbs 31
conditional sentences 221-9
the + comparative adjective/
in indirect speech 229
pronoun 24 B
type 1 221
see also comparison constructions
type 2 222
comparison constructions type 3 223
alike and like 21 G
types 2 and 3 combined 223 B4
as and like 21 H-I
conditional tenses 219-20
as... as, not so/as... as 21 A
perfect 220
as/than + gerund/infinitive present 219
341 C-D
congratulations 323 A3
as/than + pronoun (+ auxiliary) conjunctions 326-33
22
adverbs/conjunctions (conjuncts)
comparative + than 21 B, 34 B 327
the + comparative ... the + co-ordinating 326
comparative 21 D, 34 B subordinating 328
the + comparative/superlative conjuncts 327
(pronouns) 24 B
connective relative clauses 82
the + superlative + in/of 21 C
consider
the + superlative + that... ever + object + infinitive 24S A
21 C
(passive) + infinitive/perfect
see also rather
infinitive 245 B, 306 A
complain 307, 316 C, 346 A
+ that 240 F, 245 A, 258, 346
compound nouns 12 M, 14 E, 16
consonants 354
conditional clauses
continue + gerund/infinitive 267 A
but for meaning if it were not for contractions of auxiliary verbs
226 D
102 B, 103 B, 104 B, 105 A-B
even if 226 A
aren't 1113
if meaning as/since 221 Bl,
can't 128
222 Cl
shan't 207
if and in case 227
won't 207
with if omitted 223 B5, 225 B
see also he'd, he's, it's, it's and its
if + should 224 E
coolly 29 C
if + were + infinitive 222 B2,
co-ordinating conjunctions 326
225 A
copulas (link verbs) 18 B-C, 169
if + will for obstinate insistence countable nouns 2, 13 C-E
224 C
if + will/would for requests dare (auxiliary verb) 107 C, 161
224 A, 284 F, 284 H
I daresay 161 C
if + won't 224 B
dare (ordinary verb) 161 E
if •+• would like/care 224 D
dates 352
if I were you for advice 225 A2, day: one day 4 A2
287 C
days of the week 352 A
if only 228
deal, a great/good 25 B
inversion of subject and auxiliary,
decide: + infinitive 241 A, 241 F
otherwise/or 226 E
+ how/wh- + infinitive 242
provided (that) 226 G
+ that... (should) 235, 241 E,
suppose/supposing meaning what
346 A-B, 346 E
if 226 H
decision + infinitive 251
whether... or 226 B
deduction 156-9
deep (adjective/adverb) 30 A
deeply 30 B
elder/eldest 20 H, 24 B
defining relative clauses 72-7. 84 else('B> after someone etc. 52
see also relative clauses emphasizing pronouns 71
definite article: see the
enable + object + infinitive
delighted + infinitive 26 F 244 A-B
A Practical English Grammar
316
demand 235. 346 A, 346 D
encourage + object + infinitive
demonstrative adjectives/ 244 A-B, 320 A, 320 C-D
pronouns 9
enjoy + gerund 261 A, 261 C,
deny: + gerund 261, 264 295 B, 295 E
in indirect speech 316 C enough 30 A
+ that 346 A-B
adjective/adverb + enough +
despite 329 C-D
infinitive 252 B
determine/be determined adverb of degree 41 A, 41 C
+ infinitive 241 A, 241 G essential
+ that 235, 346
+ (for + object +) infinitive 26 C
determiners: a/an 1-4
+ that 236 A
either/neither 49
estimate: in active, + that 245 A
my/your/his/her etc. 62-3 in passive, + infinitive or that
the 6-8
245 B, 306 A
this/that/these/those 9
even if/though 226 A, 340
direct (adjective/adverb) 30 A eventually 37 A
direct and indirect speech 307 ever: with affirmative verb 38 D
see aiso indirect speech with present perfect 185 D
direct object: see object with superlatives 21 C, 185 D
directly 30 B
after who, what, where etc. 61
dislike
every 46 A-B
not used in continuous 168 B
every day etc. with simple present
+ gerund 261 A, 262
tense 173 B
distributive adjectives/pronouns everybody 46 C, 52 A, 110 C
each 46 B, 48 D
everyone 46 C, 52 A, 69, 110 C
either/neither 49
everything 46 C, 52 A
every 46 B
everywhere 36 A, 52 A
do: form 124
or wherever 85 B
auxiliary verb 125
evidently 40 A
ordinary verb 126
except; + bare infinitive 98 B
down 36 E-F, 39, 99
and but 95 H
dread: + gerund 261, 262 B
exclamations in indirect speech
dread to think 261
323 A
due 27 A
excuse 261 A, 262 C
due to 27 A
expect
during 91 B
used/not used in continuous
168 C, 171 C
each 46 B
+ (object +) infinitive 243 A,
each of 48 D
243 C, 255 C3
each other 53 C, 70 B
should/would have expected 231 C
early 18 D, 30 A
+ so/not 347 A
either (adjective/pronoun) 49 A, 69 + that 346 A
either (conjunction)
experience 13 A-C
in additions to remarks 112 D explain 89 B, 307, 316 C
either ... or 49 B, 326
failure + infinitive 251
+ period of time 91 A3, 187 A
fair
after verbs 97
with negative/interrogative verb what ever for? 61
+ infinitive 26 B
what. . . for? 58 B
only fair + infinitive 26 C forbid 244 A-B, 320 A-B
only fair that 236 A
foreign plurals 12 B, 12 L
fairly 41 A
forget 268
and rather 42 A-C
+ how/wh- + infinitive 242 A,
fancy (= imagine) 261, 262 B
242 C
far: adjective 20 E-G
+ how/wh- + subject + verb
adverb 32, 41 B
268 C, 346 E
farther/farthest: see far
+ infinitive 241 A, 241 D-E
fast (adjective/adverb) 30 A
+ that 241 E, 268 C, 346 A
feel: + adjective 18 B
forgive 262 C
used/not used in continuous tenses fortunate + infinitive/that 27 D
168 A. 168 C, 169 A
fortunately 40 B
feel like 97
forward 39
A Practical English Grammar
317
+ object + bare infinitive 244 A, frankly 40 B
245 A, 246 C, 273
frequency adverbs 38
+ object + present participle 273 friendly (adjective, not adverb)
passive forms + infinitive 306 A 29 B
+ that-clause 346
from 91 A, 93 A
feminine forms of nouns 11 B-C funny f = strange) + infinitive/that
few/a few 5 A-C
26 B
find
further/furthest: see far
(only) to find as connective link future continuous tense 211-15
249
form 211
+ object + present participle
as ordinary continuous 212
274 A
for future without intention 213
passive forms + infinitive 255 C, compared to will + infinitive 214
306 A
future forms 198-216
+ (that) + gerund + (be) + be going to form 203
adjective 258
be going to for intention 204-5
+ that +• subject + verb 346
be going to for prediction 206
+ (that) it (be) + adjective +
examples of various forms 215
infinitive 67 D, 240 F
future continuous 211-15
fine (and) + adjective 19 C future perfect 216 A
first 350-1
future perfect continuous 216 B
at first 90 E
future simple (will/shall) 207-10
the first + infinitive 77 A
present continuous 202, 215
foolishly 35 E
simple present 199
for (conjunction) 330
not used in time clauses 342 B
for (preposition)
will + infinitive tor intention 201,
after adjectives/participles 96 205
ask for 283 A
future for intention
care for 294, 295 B-C
be going to for premeditated
and during 91 B
intention 204-5
+ gerund 334 D
be going to and will 205
omission before indirect objects note on meaning 200
88
questions about intentions 215 B
shall for determination 208 B, verbs + gerund or infinitive
234 A
266-71
will for unpremeditated intention get
201, 205. 214
replacing be in passive 303 B
will and want 210 A
(= become) + adjective 18 B
won't for negative intention 209 F
get/have + object + past
future perfect, simple and participle 119
continuous 216
have got (obligation) 144 B-C,
future simple 207-9
149-51
form 207
have got (possession) 122
for announcements of plans 209 E
+ in/into, on/onto, ofi, out/out of
for assumptions about future
93 D-F
209 A
+ in/to (= arrive at/in) 93 B
used in conditional sentences, but
give up + noun/gerund 259 B
not in if-clauses 221 A
go: + infinitives of purpose 335
in purpose clauses 336
+ participles 275 A
used with, but not in time clauses
go on + gerund/infinitive 270 A
342 B
going to, be 203-6
with verbs not used in continuous
good
209 D
attributive/predicative 18 D
will/shall 208
comparative and superlative 20 E
see also shall and will
good at + noun/gerund 96
future tenses: see future forms good for + object + infinitive
26 E
gender
good of + object + infinitive 26 B
agreement of adjectives 17 C + infinitive 26 C, 26 E
nouns 11
great deal (of)/great many 25 B,
personal pronouns 65
33 B
possessive adjectives 63 A
grow (= become) + adjective 18 B
A Practical English Grammar
318
possessive pronouns 64 guarantee: + infinitive 241 A
reflexive/emphasizing pronouns + that 346
70-71
generous + of + object + infinitive
habit expressed by:
26 B
simple past 177 C
generously 35 E
simple present 173
gerund 257-65
used 162 B
form and use 257
will/would 230
after mind 263
had better 120, 287 B. 310 B
after no in short prohibitions 258 hair 13 A, 13 C
with nouns to form compound happen
nouns 16
+ continuous infinitive 241 G,
passive 265
254 B
perfect 264
+ infinitive 241 A
after phrasal verbs 259 B it happens/happened that 346 C
after possessive adjective/pronoun
+ perfect infinitive 255 C
object 262
+ that 241 D
after prepositions 98, 259 A, 271
hard 26 D, 30 A
as subject of sentence 258
hardly 44, 110 B
after to (preposition) 260 B
and barely/scarcely 44
after verbs and expressions 261 hardly any/at all 44
hardly ever 38 A, 38 C, 44-5.
his 62-3
HOB
home 8 A, 39, 93 C
hardly . . . when 45, 342 E honestly 40 B
hate
hope
not used in continuous 168 B
+ continuous infinitive 254 B3
+ gerund 295 C
hoping replacing who 77 B3
would hate + (object +) infinitive + infinitive 241 A
243 A, 295 A
+ infinitive represented by to 247
have (auxiliary verb) 118-21
+ perfect infinitive 255 C3
form 118 A
+ that 346 A
had better + bare infinitive 120, hospital, with/without the 8 B
287 B, 310 B
hotly 29 C
have to be for deduction 158
how: in exclamations 323 Al
+ object + bare infinitive 119 A + infinitive 242 A, 242 C, 244 C
+ object + past participle 119
introducing noun clause 346 E
+ object + present participle 121 how (interrogative)
used to form perfect tenses 118 B
+ adjective/adverb 60 D
have to: see obligation
how are you? 60 D3
have (ordinary verb) 122-3how do you do? 60 D3, 126
form 122 B
how much? 25 C, 33 B, 60 D
have difficulty in + gerund 98
for measurements 58 E, 115 C-E
have got 122 B, 122 D. 123 B in suggestions 389 B
meaning 'possess' 122
however 85 C
meaning 'take', 'give' etc. 123
he 22 C, 65
I 22 B, 65
he'd = he had/he would 102 B, if: ask if/whether 317 E
110 C
if you would 224 A, 284 F, 284 H
he's = he is/he has 102 B, 110 C
what if? 226 H
hear
wonder if 318 A
not used in continuous 168 A, sec also conditional clauses
170 B
imagine: + gerund 261 A
•+• object + bare infinitive 244 A,
+ that 346 A
246 C, 273 B-C
imperative 281
+ object + present participle 273 indirect commands 320-2
(only) to hear as connective link implore: + object + infinitive 244
249
in indirect requests 320
in passive + full infinitive 273 D important
+ that 346 A-B, 346 E
+ (for + object +) infinitive 26 C
help
+ that 236 A
+ full or bare infinitive 246 H
in (adverb) 94 B
+ (object +) infinitive 243 A
get in 93 B, 93 D-E
A Practical English Grammar
319
her: possessive adjective 62-3 before adverbs of manner 39
object pronoun 22 C, 65-6 + verb + noun subject 36 E
here 36 C-D
in (preposition) 94 A-B
hers 62, 64 B
after adjectives/participles 96
herself 70-1
in adverb phrases 36 F
high 30 A
arrive in 93 B
highly 30 B
in (good) time 90 C
him 22 C. 65-6
in the beginning/end 90 E
himself 70-1
after verbs 97
in case: and if 227
exclamations 323 A
and lest 237 C2, 337 A
infinitive and gerund
in front of 95 D
constructions 315
in order: + clause of purpose 336 B
'might,' 'ought to,' 'should,'
in order/so as + infinitive
'would,' 'used to' 311
334 B-C
'must' and needn't' 325
in spite of 329 C
past tenses unchanged 309
indefinite article: see a/an pronouns and possessive
indefinite pronouns 68
adjectives 313 A
indirect object: see object say, tell and other introductory
indirect speech 307-25
verbs 316
direct to indirect speech 307
'I/we shall/should' 308 C
mixed types 324
tense changes necessary 308
present participle as connective 'this/these' 313 B
272 B5, 324 C
expressions of time and place 314
see also next six entries
unreal past tenses 310
indirect speech (advice) 320
'yes' and 'no' 323 B
advise + object + infinitive indirect speech (suggestions)
287 A, 287 E, 320
289 D, 322 A, 322 B3
•had better' 120, 310 B
infinitive 238-56
'(if I were you) I should/would' form 238
225 A2. 287 C
after adjectives 26-7
say/tell (+ that) + subject + ask/beg + (object +) infinitive
should 321 Bl-2
243 B
indirect speech (commands) 320-2
bare infinitive 246
'let him/them' 322 B
after be 114
order/tell etc. + object +
after be about 114 C
infinitive 320
as a connective link 249
say/tell etc. + subject + be + continuous 254, 306 D
infinitive 321 A
and gerund constructions 266-71
indirect speech (questions) 317-19
in indirect commands/requests
affirmative verb used 317 A 320-1
ask with/without indirect object introductory/final 253
317 C
with introductory it 240 B
ask/wonder etc. + how/wh- 317 D
after know/think etc. 245
ask if/whether 317 E
after nouns 250-1
'shall I/we?' 318
after only 249 A
'will/would/could you?' 319 passive 250 B2, 302 D-E
indirect speech (requests) 320 after passive verbs 245 B-E, 306
ask + (object +) infinitive 243 B perfect continuous 256
'can/could/may/might I have?' perfect infinitive with auxiliaries
283 A
and other verbs 255, 306
'can/could I see/speak to?' 283 -B
to express purpose 334-5
'could/would you?' 319, 320 D replacing relative clause 250
requests with if-clauses 229 B split infinitives 248
requests with 'shall I?' 318 B
as subject 240
indirect speech (statements)
after suppose/be supposed 306 B
308-16
represented by to 238 D, 247
conditional sentences 229, 308 C
without to (= bare infinitive) 246
'could' 312
after too/enough/so ... as 252
summary of uses 239
after verb + how 244 C
A Practical English Grammar
with so/neither/nor in additions to
remarks 112
320
after verb + how/wh- 242 inversion using interrogative form
after verb + object 244
of verb 45
after verb or verb + object 243 invitations 286, 296 B
after verbs and phrases 241
answers to invitations 286 C
after verbs of the senses 273 B-D
in indirect speech 286 B
verb + that or infinitive 241 D-F invite + object + infinitive 244 A.
after verb + whether 242 B
286 B
after was/were 114 B
irregular comparisons
insist
adjectives 20 E
+ on + (possessive adjective or adverbs 31 B
object pronoun +) gemnd 262 A irregular plurals of nouns 12
+ that 346 A
irregular verbs 364
intention: note on meaning 200 it (impersonal pronoun)
see also future for intention
representing clause/phrase 67 E
intelligent + (of + object +) in cleft sentences 67 Dl, 76
infinitive 26 B
in expressions of distance,
intend + gerund or (object +)
temperature, time etc. 67 C
infinitive 243 A, 267 C
for identity 117 C
interested in 96 A
subject of impersonal verbs
interesting + infinitive or that
(appear/happen/look/seem) 67 F
26 E
introductory it 67 D, 240 B
interrogative of verbs
it is + period of time + since 188
form and contractions 104 A-B it is/there is 117
after certain adverbs 45 it is time + subject + unreal past
in comment tags 111
287 F, 293
not used in indirect questions 317
subject of occur/turn out 241 D.
in invitations 286
346 C
not used after certain phrases it (personal pronoun) 62, 65 A, 66,
104 C3, 104 D, 283 C
67 A-B
in question tags 110
it'd = it had/it would 102 B, 110 C
in questions 56-61. 104 C it's = it is/it has 102 B, HOC
not used in questions without
it's and its 62
identity of subject 55, 303 D
it's no use/good + gerund 261 A,
in requests 104 D, 131, 283-4 261 C
in suggestions 289 A-B its 62, 63 A
see also auxiliary verbs and tenses
itself 70, 71
interrogatives
adjectives/pronouns 54-9 just (adjective) = fair/right
adverbs 60
+ negative/interrogative verb +
into 93 D-F, 94 B
infinitive 26 B
intransitive verbs 362
only just + infinitive 26 C
inversion of subject and verb
only just + that 236 A
after certain adverbs/adverb
Just (adverb) 41 C, 41 E
phrases 36 C, 36 E-F
have/had + just + past participle
with had/should/were in 183, 194 B
conditional sentences 224 E, 225
if you would just 284 F
with say/reply etc. after direct just about + infinitive 114 C
speech 316
justly = fairly/rightly 30 B
keep; + adjective 18 B
likely; no adverb form 29 B
meaning continue, not used in + infinitive or that 27 E
continuous 168 F
replacing may? 132 E
+ (on +) gerund 259 B, 261
link verbs (copulas) 18 B-C. 169
kind + of + object + infinitive
liquid measure 353 C
26 B
listen 168 A
kindly: adjective/adverb 29 B, 30 A little = small (adjective) 19 A-B
adverb 35 E
little/a little
know
adjectives/pronouns 5 A-C
not used in continuous tenses adverbs 5 D, 41 C
168 C
little, less, least
+ how/wh- + infinitive 242 A
adjectives/pronouns 20 E
in passive + infinitive 245, 256, adverbs 31 B
306 A, 306 D
long (adjective/adverb) 30 A, 30 C
A Practical English Grammar
321
+ that 346
knowledge 13 A, 13 D
long (verb)
+ for + noun/pronoun 97
+ infinitive 241 A
late: adjective 18 D
look 18 B-C
adjective/adverb 30 A
used/not used in continuous
adverb 37 B
168 A,169 B
lately 30 B, 37 A, 185 C look forward to 259 B
learn
lots (oil/a lot (of| 25 B, 33 B
+ how/wh- + infinitive 242 A,
love (verb)
242 C
not used in continuous 168 B
+ infinitive 241 A, 241 E + gerund 295 C
(only) to learn as connective 249 B would love + (object +) infinitive
+ that 346 A
243 A
least: see little, less, least would love + to 247
length, measures of 353 B lovely (adjective)
less: see little, less, least + (and +) adjective 19 C
lest 237 C, 337 B
+ infinitive 26 E
let: + bare infinitive 246 D lucky + infinitive or that 27 D
in indirect speech 322
luckily 40 B
let him/her/it/them 281 C
let us for commands 281 Bmake: + object + adjective 18 B
let us for suggestions 289 A, 322
+ object + bare infinitive 244 A,
+ object + bare infinitive 244 A 246 E
light (adjective) 18 D
(passive) + full infinitive 246 E,
like (adjective/preposition) 306 C
in comparisons 21 G-I
manage + infinitive 241 A, 241 C
feel like 97
many/much, more, most
rather like 42 B
(adjectives/pronouns) 20 E
like (verb)
many and a lot of 25
and care (for) 294 A, 295 C
masculine forms of nouns 11 B-C
not used in continuous 168 B
mass nouns 13
+ gerund 262 B, 295 C
may/might + infinitive
+ infinitive 295 C-D
form 127, 132 A, 132 E
and prefer 297 A3, 298 A-B
in concession clauses 340
= think wise/right 295 D in conditional sentences 221 Bl,
see also would like
222 Cl
may/might as well
naturally 40 B
may/might I? requests 131, 283 near: adjective 20 G
may/might well 35 F
adverb 30 C
for permission 127, 129-31, 283 preposition 30 C2
for possibility 132-4. 157 nearly 30 B, 41
in purpose clauses 336 B necessary
you might requests 285 A-B
+ (for + object +) infinitive
may/might + perfect infinitive
26 C
might in type 3 conditionals 223 B + that... (should) 236 A
might in reproaches 255 B6
need: see obligation
in speculations about past 133, need (= require) 155
134 B
negative interrogative: form 105
me 22 B-C, 65
in question tags 110 A
me/my with gerund 262
in requests 105 B, 131 B
mean (= intend)
negatives of tenses 103
+ (object +) infinitive 243 A,
neglect + infinitive 241 A
269 B
neither (adjective/pronoun) 49 A,
mean (= involve)
69
+ gerund 261-2, 269 B
with question tag 110 B
measures 348-53
neither (conjunction)
might: see may/might
in additions to remarks 112 D
mind (= object) 283
neither ... nor 49 B, 326
not used in continuous 168 B
neither/nor + inversion 45
do you mind? requests 263 C never: with comparatives 21 C
don't mind and don't care 294 D and ever 38 D
+ gerund 261 A, 262 B 263 with inversion 45
A Practical English Grammar
322
mine (possessive pronoun) 62, 64
position in sentence 38 A, 38 C
misrelated participles 280 with present perfect 185 D, 186
miss 4- gerund 2fil
nevertheless 327 F, 329 A
modal verbs 106, 107 B-C nice: + (and +) adjective 19 C
months 352 A
(= kind) + of + object +
more: see many etc,, much etc. infinitive 26 B
moreover 327 A
<= pleasant) + (for + object •+-)
most: see many etc., much etc. infinitive 26 E
mostly 30 B
no: adjective 50 B, 110 B
much, more, most (adverbs) 31, and yes in indirect speech 323 B
33, 41 C
no one 51, 52 A-B, 110 B
more, most in comparisons 20 A, nobody 51, 52 A-B, 110 B
31
non-defining relative clauses
most + adjective, to mean very 78-81, 84
21 C, 33 E
none 50 B, HOB
much/a lot/a great deal 33 B
nor: see neither (conjunction)
must for advice
not: contracted to n't 103
and ought in indirect speech
not only/till + inversion 45
287 A
not/so representing noun clauses
compared to ought/should 141 231, 347
must for deduction: form 156
not as/so ... as 21 A, 22 B, 34 A,
compared to may/might 157
341
. must/have to: see obligation not only . . . but also 326
my 62-4
nothing 51 A, 51 C, 52 A
notice (verb) 273
needn't + perfect infinitive
noun clauses 343-7
152-4
after abstract nouns 345 needn't/could + perfect infinitive
after adjectives/participles 344 154 A
as subject 343
needn't/shouldn't + perfect
after verbs 346
infinitive 154 B
beginning with wh-words 346 E needn't have done/didn't have to
nouns 10-16
do 153
collective 12 H
ought: form 139
compound 12 M, 14 E, 16 ought/should compared to
countable nouns 2, 13 C~E must/have to 141
function 10 B
ought/should + continuous
gender 11
infinitive 142
kinds 10 A
ought/should + perfect infinitive
with of for possession 15 143, 154 B
plural forms 12
should; form 140
possessive/genitive case 14-15 oblige + object + infinitive 244 A
proper nouns 6 E-G
obviously 40 A
uncountable/mass 13
occasionally 38 A-B
see also abstract nouns
occur to: + infinitive 241 B, 241 D
now 37 A
+ that 346 A, 346 C
nowhere 36 B, 45, 52 A
odd (= strange)
numerals 348-51
+ infinitive 26 B2
+ that 236 B
of: after adjectives/participles 96
object
all/both/each + of 48
direct/indirect becoming subject all/both/few etc. + oi +
of passive verb 302, 303 C whom/which 80, 82
omission of relative pronoun
both of 47
object 74 B-C, 75 B-C
a few/little of 5 A-B
order of direct/indirect objects good/kind etc, of sb + infinitive
66, 88
26 B
order of object and adverb in
neither/either of 49 B
phrasal verbs 362-3
+ noun (possessive/genitive) 15 B
verb + object + infinitive 89 A, of all 34 C
243-4
after words of quantity 16 Bl
verb + to + object 89 B
some/any/none of 50
object to 262 B
after verbs 97
A Practical English Grammar
323
obligation 139-55
which of 56 B, 59 B
have to compared to must 145 off (adverb) 93 D, 99
have to/have got to 144 C before adverbs of manner 39
have to/must: forms 144 + verb + noun subject 36 E
have to?/must?/need? 151 off (preposition) 93 D, 99
have to/need: negative forms 149
offer (verb)
must/needn't in indirect speech + direct/indirect object 88 A
325
in indirect speech 286 A, 318 C
must not/need not 146-7 + infinitive 241 A
need: forms 148
officially 40 B
need not compared to other
often 38 A-B
forms 150
old 19 B
on (adverb) 94 C, 99
in indirect speech 311 B
in directions 93 F
compared to must/have to 141
before adverbs of manner 39
for obligation 141-3
transport 93 D
with perfect infinitive 143
on (preposition) 94 C. 99 our 62, 64 A
in adverb phrases 36 F
ours 62, 64 A
with day/date 90 A
ourselves 70-1
in directions 93 F
out 36 E, 39, 93 D-E
on arrival/arriving 90 D
out of 93 D-E
on time 90 C
over 95 A, 99
transport 93 D
owing to 27 A
after verbs 97
own (adjective/pronoun) 63 C
once 38 A-B
one (adjective/pronoun) pardon (verb) 262 C
and a/an 2 E, 4. 349 B, 350
participles: misrelated 280
after adjectives 24
see past participle, perfect
one another 53 C
participle, present participle
one ..., another/otherfs)... passive 302-6
53 B
form of tenses 302
this/that one 9 C
active and passive equivalents
one (indefinite pronoun) 62, 68 A
303
one's (possessive adjective) 62, get replacing be 303 B
68 A
infinitives after passive verbs
one's own 63 C
245 B-F, 306
oneself 70-1
prepositions with passive verbs
only: adverb 41 D
305
+ hy/when etc, with inversion
questions in the passive 303 D
45, 104 F
that... should + passive
if only 228, 301 E
infinitive 235, 302 E-F
+ infinitive as connective 249 A uses 304
not only ... but also 326
past continuous tense: form 178
the only + noun/one + infinitive alternative to simple past 181
250 A
combined with simple past
onto 94 C
179 D-E
opposite 95 D
past equivalent of present
or 326
continuous 180 A-B
either ... or 49 B
usually unchanged in indirect
or (else)/otherwise 226 E-F
speech 309 B-C
whether ... or 226 B
past participle: form 182 A, 279 A
order
use as adjective 17 B, 26 F,
+ object + infinitive 244 A, 320 279 Bl
+ that 235, 321 B3
with have + object 119
ordinal numbers 350-1
in passive tenses 302
ordinary verbs 101-5
replacing subject + passive verb
other/others 53 A-B
279 B3
Otherwise 226 E-F, 327 C past perfect continuous tense 197
ought: form 106, 107 B, 139
past perfect tense: form 194 A
for advice 141 B2, 287 A, 311 C in conditional sentences 223
for assumption 160 D, 311 B
in indirect speech 196, 308 B,
with continuous infinitive 142
309
A Practical English Grammar
324
for actions viewed in retrospect with someone, anyone etc. 69
194 B
or the 7 A6
in time clauses 195
possessive case of nouns 14-15
see also subjunctive
possessive pronouns 62, 64
past simple tense
possibility 132-5
see simple past tense
possible
past subjunctive: form 290 B
+ (for + object +) infinitive
after as if/though 292
26 D
after if 222-9
+ that 27 E
after if only 228 B
possibly 40 A
after it is time + subject 293
postpone + gerund 261 A
unreal pasts in indirect speech prefer/would prefer 295 A-C,
310
297-8
after wish + subject 300 prefer + gerund + to + gerund
after would rather/sooner +
295 C, 297 Al
subject 297 B, 298 D
prefer + noun + to + noun
perfect infinitive 255, 306 A-B 297 Al
perfect infinitive continuous 256, would prefer + infinitive 295 A,
306 D
298 C
perfect participle: active 278
would prefer + object +
passive 279 C
infinitive 297 B, 298 D
perhaps 40 A
preference 295, 297-8
permission 127-31
prepared/be prepared: + for 97
see also can/could for permission
+ infinitive 241 A, 241 C
permit (verb) 244 A, 267 D prepositions 86-99
personal pronouns 65-9 after adjectives/participles 96
form and use 65
or adverbs 99
indefinite pronouns (you, one, in end position 87
they) 68
+ gerund 86, 98, 259
uses of it 67 A-B
before nouns/pronouns 86-7
position of pronoun objects 66.88 omission/use before indirect
pronoun objects of phrasal verbs objects 88, 89 B
66 B,. 362
of position 93 F, 94-5
they used with someone etc. 69 of time and date 90-2
persuade + object + infinitive
of travel and movement 93
244 A-B
after verbs 97, 362-3
phrasal verbs 362-3
present continuous tense 164-71
plan (verb)
form and spelling 164-5
+ continuous infinitive 254 B3 with always 167 B
+ infinitive 241 A
for future plans 166 C
plurals of nouns 12
for present actions 166 A-B
point
verbs used/not used in 168-71
there's no point in/what's the
present participle 272-7
point of? 98 A
form and spelling 165, 272 A
poor: the poor 23 A
as adjective 17 B, 26 E
various meanings 18 D
after catch/find/have + object
possessive adjectives: form 62 274
agreement 63 A
after come, go, be busy 275
for clothes and parts of body 63 B to form continuous infinitives
with gerund 262
254, 256
with have + object 121, 272 B3 negative imperative 258, 281
in indirect speech 272 Bo, 324 C
no + gerund 258
replacing main clause 276 promise
replacing clause of reason 277 + continuous infinitive 254 B3
replacing relative clause 77 B, + infinitive 241 A, 241 D
272 B4
+ indirect object 88 C
after spend/waste + object 275 B
+ that 346 A
summary of uses 272 B pronouns: see interrogatives,
after verbs of sensation 273
personal pronouns, possessive
present perfect continuous tense
pronouns, relative pronouns etc.
190-3
propose (= intend) + infinitive
A Practical English Grammar
325
present perfect tense 182-9
269 C
form 182 A
propose (= suggest)
with ever 185 D
+ gerund 261 A-B, 262 B,
with for and since 187
269 C, 289 C
with it is ... since 188
+ that 289 C, 346 A
with just 183
prove: + infinitive 241 A
and simple past 184-9
+ that 346 A
with (that). .. ever in
provided (that) 226 G
comparisons 21 C
purpose 334-7
present simple tense
avoid/prevent + gerund 336 C
see simple present tense clauses of purpose 336
present subjunctive: form 290 A for + gerund 334 D
I/he/she/it were 222 B, 225, 287 C
go/come + infinitive/imperative
use 291
335
presently (= soon) 29 C in case/lest 337
presume: in active, + that 245 A in order/so as + infinitive
in passive, + infinitive or that
334 B-C
245 B, 306 A
in order that/so that/that 336
presumably 40 A
infinitive + noun + preposition
pretend
334 D
+ continuous infinitive 241 G,
infinitive of purpose 334 A
254 B2
negative purpose clauses 336 C
+ infinitive 241 A, 241 D put off + gerund 259 B
+ perfect infinitive 241 H,
255 Cl, 256 B
+ that 346 A
quantifiers
pretty: + adjective 19 D
a lot (oft/lots (of)/a great deal (of)
adjective/adverb 30 A
25 B. 33 B
prettily 30 B
all (of) 46 A. 46 C, 48 A-C
prevent + gerund 261 A both (of) 47, 48 A-C
probable + that 27 E
enough 252 B
probably
(a) few/(a> little 5
adverb equivalent of likely 29 B many/much 25
sentence adverb 40 A
cardinal numbers 348-9
progressive tenses
some/any/no/none 50
see past/present etc. continuousquestion tags 110
tenses
questions
prohibition: forbid 244 A-B, 320 B
with affirmative verb 65 B2,
must not 146
303 D
with affirmative verb after phrasal verbs in 81 D
introductory phrases 104 C3
preposition in end position 74 C,
beginning with auxiliaries 108 75 C
comment tags 111
preposition + whom/which 74 C,
with how/wh- 54-61
81 C
in indirect speech 317-19 what and which 83
interrogative verb forms 104-5, whoever, whichever etc. 85
107 A-B
relative pronouns 72-85
question tags 110
forms 73, 78
short answers to questions 108 remember
see also invitations, obligation, not used in continuous 168 C
permission, requests
with how/wh- + clause 268 C
quite 41 C, 43
with how/wh- + infinitive 242
with infinitive or gerund
268 A-B
rarely 38 A. 38 C
with possessive adjective/pronoun
rather 41 C, 42
+ gerund 262 B
and fairly 42 A-C
remind
rather than ... I would 298 C
+ object + infinitive 244 A
would rather 297-8 C
+ object + that 244 D
really 41 C
remind somebody of something
reason, clauses of 338 A 97
as/because 332 B-C
reminding + clause in indirect
A Practical English Grammar
326
because and for 330
speech 324 C
replaced by participle phrase 277 reply with direct/indirect speech
recently 37 A
316 C
with present perfect 185 C report (passive): + infinitive 306 A
reciprocal pronouns 53 C, 70 B + perfect infinitive 255 C2,
recommend
256 B
+ gerund or object + infinitive
reported speech
267 D, 320 A
see indirect speech
with that 235
request
reflexive pronouns 70
+ object + infinitive 244 A
refuse: and agree/accept 269 A + that 244 E
in indirect speech 315 A requests 283-5
+ infinitive 241 A, 241 C can/could/may/might I 131, 283
regret
could/couldn't you 284 A
+ gerund/infinitive 268 A-B I should/would be grateful if you
+ noun/pronoun or that 268 C would 224 A, 284 H
relative adverbs 75 E
I wish you would 284 J, 301 D
relative clauses 72-85
I wonder(ed)/was wondering if
all, both etc. + of +
284 K
whom/which 80
if you would 224 A, 284 F
cleft sentences 67 D, 76, 117 perhaps you would 284 E
commas in 84
would you be good enough/so
connective 82
good as 252 C, 284 I
defining 72-7, 84
would you like to 284 G
non-defining 78-81, 84
would you mind 263 C, 284 D
object pronoun omitted in you might 285
74 B-C, 75 B-C
you will... won't you 284 C
require
senses, verbs of
it requires + gerund/passive
not used in continuous 168 A
infinitive 267 E
169-70
resent + gerund 261 A
with present participle or bare
resolve: + infinitive 241 A, 241 F infinitive 273
+ that 241 F, 346 A, 346 D sentence adverbs 40
result, clauses of 338 B, 339
sequence of tenses 217-18
right: (adjective) 26 B-C, 30 A shall: in commands 234 B, 282 A
(adverb) 30 A
for determination 208 li
rightly 30 B
in future forms 207-8, 211 A
risk + gerund 261 A
in indirect speech 308 C, 318
round: (adverb) position 39
for intention 234 A
adverb/preposition 99
let's ..., shall we? 110 A
followed by verb + subject shall I/we? 233, 318
36 E-F
shall you? 234 C
and will 208
's (contraction of is/has) 102 B she 22 C, 65
's/s' (possessive case) 14 short (adjective/adverb) 30 A
say
shortly 30 B
without comma in indirect speech should
307
after command/order 237 F,
in indirect commands/advice 321
321 B3
in passive + infinitive 306 A
after if 224 E, 237 E
and tell 316 A-B
after in case/lest 237 C. 337
scarcely 44, 110 B
in purpose clauses (formal)
scarcely ever/scarcely ... when 237 C-D, 336 B-C
45
+ subject 224 E, 225 B
sea: at sea/at the sea 8 C that... should after adjectives
see
236
used/not used in continuous
that... should for indirect
168 A, 170 A
commands 237 F, 321 B3
+ how/wh- + infinitive 242 A
that... should after verbs 235.
+ object + bare infinitive 246 C, 302 E-F
273 B
who/what/where etc. + should
+ object + present participle
... but 237 B
A Practical English Grammar
327
273 A
after why, querying justice of
(only) to see as connective 249 assumption 237 A
in passive + full infinitive 246 C should for advice, assumption.
+ that 346 A-B
obligation
seeing that: (= as) 338 A form 106, 107 B, 140
(= when) 333 C
for. advice 141 B2, 287 A, 287 C
seem: + adjective 18 B
for advice in indirect speech
not used in continuous 168 F
311 C-D, 318 B, 321 B
+ continuous infinitive 241 G,
for assumption 160 B-C
254
for obligation 141-2
+ infinitive 240 A-B, 241 for obligation in indirect speech
+ perfect infinitive 255 Cl, 311 B-C, 322 B
256 B
for unfulfilled obligation 143
+ that 346 A-C
shouldn't/needn't have done
seldom 38 A-C, 45, 110 B 154 B
should/would for first person:
+ adjective/adverb with inversion
in conditional 219-20, 222-3
45, 339 C
conditional forms in indirect
+ adjective/adverb + that
speech 308 C
339 B-C
if I were you I should/would
+ as + infinitive of purpose
225 A2. 287 C
334 B
+ think 231
+ auxiliary + subject 112 A
show
conjunction meaning therefore
+ indirect object 88 C
327 D-E
+ object + how/wh- + infinitive not so/as + adjective/adverb +
242 A, 244 C
as 21 A, 34 A
+ that 244 D
pronoun + auxiliary 109 A
simple past tense 175-7 + that to introduce clause of
form and spelling 175
purpose 336
in indirect speech 196, 308-9
after think etc, to represent thatirregular verbs 176, 364 clause 231 A, 347
and past continuous 179 D-E, some
181
= a certain amount/number of
for past events and habits 177 50 A, 50 C
and past perfect 194-6
some day 4 A2
and present perfect 184-9 some or other 50 C
unreal pasts: see subjunctive some ... other/others 53 B
simple present tense 172-4
somebody 51-2, 110 C
form and spelling 172
somehow 35 G
in conditional clauses 221 someone 51-2, 110 C
for dramatic narrative 174 C
something 51 A, 51 C, 52 A
for planned future actions 174 D, sometimes 38 A-B, 173 B
199
somewhere 36 A-B, 52 A
for habitual actions 173
soon 37 A
in newspaper headlines 174 B sooner
to introduce quotations etc. 174 A no sooner . .. than 45, 342 E
in time clauses 174 G, 342 Bl the sooner ... the sooner 342 E
with verbs not used in continuous would sooner 297, 298 A
174 E
sorry about/for 27 B, 271 B
since (adverb) 37 A, 37 C, 91 A sound (verb): + adjective 18 B
since (conjunction) 91 A, 188, not used in continuous 168 F
342 C
spelling rules 354-61
= as/because 332. 338 A adding s/es/ies 12 A-C, 172 C
since (preposition) 91 A, 185 D, doubling final consonant 168 B,
187B
175 B, 355
small 18 D
dropping final e 165 A, 356
and little 19 B
endings in ce and ge 357
smell (verb): + adjective 18 B endings in y 165 C, 175 B. 359
not used in continuous 168 A, hyphens 361
169 C
ie and ei 360
+ object + present participle
the suffix ful 358
273 A
spend + object + present
A Practical English Grammar
328
so
participle 275 B
+ adjective + as + infinitive start + gerund/infinitive 267 A
252 C
still: adjective/adverb 30 A
(only) to be told as connective
adverb of time 37 D
link 249 B
conjunction 327 F
and say 316 A-B
stop (= cease/halt) 270 B + that 244 D, 346 A
stupid 26 B
tenses? continuous
stupidly 35 E
verbs not used in 168-71
subject: gerund 258
see future forms, past continuous
infinitive 240
tense, present continuous tense
introductory it 67 D
etc.
that-clause 343
tenses, sequence of 217-18
subjunctive 290-3
than
see also past subjunctive am! with comparatives 21 B, 22,
present subjunctive
34 B, 341
subordinate clauses 217 + gerund or infinitive 341 D
see also clauses
+ pronoun (+ auxiliary) 22
such 339
that (relative pronoun) 72-6
suggest
as object, often omitted 74 B-C,
+ gerund 261 A, 262 B, 289 C-D 75 B-C
in indirect speech 289 D, 322 or which 75 A-C
suggestions 289
or who/whom 74 A-C
in indirect speech 289 D, 318 D, that + adjective 341 A
322 A
that/those 9
superlative forms
that- and that... should clauses:
adjectives 20
introduced by it 67 D, 346 C
adverbs 31
with it + be + adjective 26-7,
the + superlative adjective/
236, 343 A
pronoun 24 B
after nouns 343 C
see also comparison constructions so that/in order that/that 336 B
suppose
so/such ... that 339
in passive, + infinitive 245 C-E, with statements in indirect
306 B
speech 307
suppose I/we? for suggestions with subject + be + adjective
289 B
27 B-F, 344
suppose/supposing? = what if? after verbs 302 E, 346
226 H
the (the definite article) 6-8
+ that 346 A
+ adjective, to represent class
sure 27 A
6 D, 23
surely 40 A
+ adjective + one/ones 24 D
+ comparative 24 B
take the trouble 241 B-C + comparative (the .. . the ...)
take to 259 B
21 D, 34 B
taste: + adjective 18 B-C + first/second/only 6 B5
used/not used in continuous
+ noun, to represent class 6 C
168 A, 169 D
omission 7-8
teach 244 A, 244 C-D
with proper nouns 6 E-G
tell: + direct/indirect object 88 + superlative 6 B5, 24 B
+ how/wh- 346 E
+ superlative etc. + infinitive
+ object + how + infinitive 77 A
244 C
their (possessive adjective) 62
+ object + infinitive 244 A theirs (possessive pronoun) 62
them 22 C, 65-6
themselves
emphasizing pronoun 71
reflexive pronoun 70
then 37 A
there (adverb) 36 C
there (pronoun)
there is/are 116
A Practical English Grammar
expressions with possessive case
15 A3
prepositions of time 90-2
time clauses 195, 309 C, 342
conjunctions with 331
future forms not used in 342 B
in indirect speech 309 C
to (infinitive particle) 238
329
there is/it is 117
bare infinitive (without to) 246
therefore 327 E
particle or preposition? 260
they
representing its infinitive 247
with either/neither etc. 69 to (preposition)
as indefinite pronoun 68 B with adjectives/participles 96,
subject pronoun 22 C, 65 260 B
thine 62
omitted with indirect + direct
think
object 88
use with continuous tenses 168 C, and till/until for time 92 A
171 A
for travel and movement 93 A-C
+ it + adjective + infinitive after verbs 97, 260 B
240 F
with verbs of communication 89
in passive + infinitive 245, too (adverb) 41 A-B, 252 A
306 A, 306 D
too = also 112 A
should/would think 231 A-B
town; with/without the 8 E
+ so/not 231 A, 347 A
transitive verbs 362
+ that 346 A
turn + adjective/adverb 18 B-C
+ wh'/how + clause 346 E
+ wh-/how + infinitive 242 A
uncountable nouns 13
this/these 9
under 95 B-C, 99
this week etc. with present understand
perfect or simple past tense
not used in continuous 168 C
185 B
+ gerund 261
thou, thee 65 A
+ his/him etc. + gerund 262 B
though meaning 'but/yet' 327 G + how/wh- + infinitive 242 A
though/although 327 G, 329 B, + how/wh- + noun clause 346 A,
329 D, 333 A-C, 340
346 E
compared to in spite of 329
in passive + infinitive 245,
through (adverb/preposition) 99 255 C, 306 A
thy 62
undertake
till 92 A, 342 A-B
+ continuous infinitive 254 B3
time
+ infinitive/that 241 A, 241 D
in (good) time, on time 90 C
unless 226 C
it's time 293
unreal pasts: see past subjunctive
time
until 92 A, 342 A-B
adverbs of frequency 38 up 36 E-F, 39, 99
adverbs of time 37
upset (adjective) 18 D
as, when, while 331
urge
expressions in indirect speech in indirect speech 320 A, 320 C,
314
322 A2, 322 C
expressions followed by inversion + object + infinitive 244 A
45. 342 E
+ that... should 235, 302 E
us 22 B-C, 65
were instead of was 225, 228 B,
used (adjective) 163
290 B, 292
used (auxiliary verb) 107 C, 162 after as if/though 292
usually 38 A-B, 173 B
in conditional constructions 225
if I were you 287 C
verbs
after U only 228 B
active to passive 302
what! in exclamations 26 B2,
active tenses, table of 102 A
323 Al
auxiliaries and modal auxiliaries what (interrogative) 54-9, 61
106-12
and how for measurements 58 E
classes of verbs 100
+ noun clause 346 E
not used in continuous tenses object of preposition 57 B
168-71
subject/object of verb 56 C
imperative 281
for things 54, 56 C, 58
interrogative 104-5
what about? for suggestions
interrogative not used after
289 B
certain phrases 104 C
what ever (for)? 61
introduction 100
what... for? 58 B
irregular 364
what is he? 58 D
negative forms 103
what... like? 58 C
A Practical English Grammar
330
negative interrogative forms 105 compared with which 59 A, 59 C
only one negative per sentence what (relative pronoun) 83
103 C
+ infinitive 242 A
ordinary verbs 101-5
whatever 85 B-D
passive forms 302-6
when
phrasal verbs 362-3
and as/while 331, 333 C,
principal parts of active verb 101342 A-B
of the senses 168-70, 273 + infinitive 242 A
subjunctive 290-3
interrogative adverb 60 B
see also auxiliary verbs, + noun clause 346 E
conditional tenses, future forms, relative adverb 75 E
present perfect tense, simple past
when ever? 61
tense etc.
whenever 85 B-C, 173 B
very 41
where
vowels 354
+ infinitive 242 A, 242 C
interrogative adverb 60 C
warmly 29 C
+ noun clause 346 E
warn + object + infinitive in
relative adverb 75 E
indirect speech 320
where ever? 61
was: see be
wherever 85 B-D
watch
whether
+ object + bare infinitive 244 A in indirect questions 317 E
+ object + present participle
+ infinitive 242 B
273 A-C
+ noun clause 346 E
we 22 B-C, 65
which (adjective/pronoun) +
weights 353 A
infinitive 242 A
well (adverb) 31 B, 35, 39 which (interrogative) 54-7, 59
may as well 288
object of preposition 57 B
may well 35 F
subject/object of verb 56 B
position 35 F
compared with who/what 59
which (relative) 73, 77-8, 80-4 for requests 284 B-C
all, both etc. + of which 80 and shall 208
in connective clauses 82-3 and want/wish/would like 210
in defining clauses 73, 75 A-C, wish
75 E
not used in continuous 168 B
+ infinitive 242 A
+ for + noun/pronoun 299 B
in non-defining clauses 78, 80-1 in greetings 299 B
and what 83
+ (object +) infinitive 299 A
whichever 85 A, 85 C
+ subject + unreal past 300,
while 331 B, 333 B
310 A
who (interrogative) 54-7, 59, 61 + (that +) subject + would
object of preposition 57 A 284 J, 301
subject/object of verb 56 A and want/would like 299
subject of affirmative verb 55
who wish(ed) replaced by wishing
compared with which 59 B 77 B3
who ever 61, 85 D
with 75 D. 95 G
who (relative) 73, 78 B, 82 wonder
in cleft sentences 76
+ how/wh- + clause 346 E
object of verb 74 B, 79 B + how/wh- + infinitive 242 A-B
subject of verb 74 A, 79 A + if/whether in indirect questions
who ever? 61, 85 D
317 B-C, 318 A
whoever 85 A, 85 C
+ that + clause 346 A
whom (interrogative pronoun) 54
work(a) (noun) 8 D, 13 A, 13 C
object of preposition 57 A worse/worst 20 E
object of verb 56 A
worth + gerund 261 A, 261 C
whom (relative pronoun) 73
would
all/both etc. of whom 80, 82
for advice 287 C-D
object of preposition 74 C. 79 C for characteristic action 230 C
object of verb 74 B, 79 B, 82
in conditional sentences 219-20,
whose.
222-6,228-9
interrogative adjective/pronoun in indirect speech 308 B-C
54-5, 56 A
for obstinate insistence 230 B
A Practical English Grammar
331
relative pronoun 73, 74 D, 75 D, for invitations 286
79 D
for past intention 232
why: interrogative 60 A
for past routine 230 A
relative 75 E
in purpose clauses 336
why don't you/why not? 287 E, for requests 284
289 B
would/should think 231
why ever/why ever not? 61see also would like, would
will
rather/sooner
for assumption 160 A, 160 C
would like
and be going to 205
+ gerund 295 B
for commands 282 B
+ (object +) infinitive 243 A
for future 207-9
if you (would) like 224 D
and future continuous 214 and want 296, 299
for habits 230 A
and wish 299, 301 C
for obstinate insistence 224 C, and would care 294 B-C
330 B
would you like? invitations 286
for intention 201, 205, 214 would you like? requests 284 G
for invitations 210 B, 286 A-B would rather/sooner 297-8
wrong: adjective/adverb 30 A
yet 37 D, 327
+ (of + object +) infinitive
you: indefinite pronoun 68 A
26 Bl
personal pronoun 65
wrongly 30 B
, young: position 19 B
your/yours 62-4
yes and no in indirect speechyourself: emphasizing pronoun 71
323 B
reflexive pronoun 70
A Practical English Grammar
332
